manualshive.com logo in svg

Canon imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5535i III, User Manual

The Canon imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5535i III is a high-performance multifunction printer. Equipped with advanced features, this device offers exceptional image quality and seamless productivity. To make the most of its capabilities, users can easily access the free User Manual, available for download on 88.208.23.73:8080. Streamline your printing experience today!

Share
Download
background image

Using TPM

4XR3-0H4

If the TPM setting is activated and backed up on to the USB memory, you can safely store in the TPM chip the

encryption key (TPM key) that encrypts confidential information such as the password, public key pair for SSL

communication, and user certificate that are stored in the machine. Doing so, you can prevent important information

for the machine from leaking. Also, you can recover the system if the TPM chip fails by restoring the TPM key.

Setting TPM(P. 895) 
Backing Up the TPM Key(P. 896) 
Restoring the TPM Key(P. 897) 

●

Before activating the TPM setting, an administrator must confirm that the Administrator password has been
changed from its default setting. If the password has not been changed from its default setting, third parties
other than an administrator can make backups, which may result in the TPM backup key from being taken
away. Since the TPM key can only be backed up once, this will make the TPM key unable to be restored.

●

Backup the TPM key immediately on to the USB memory after the TPM setting is activated.

●

For security reasons, you can only backup the TPM key once. Manage the password set during the backup so
that it is not forgotten.

●

The security provided by TPM does not guarantee complete protection of the data and hardware. Note that
Canon will not be liable for any failure or damages resulting from the use of this mode.

●

You cannot access the machine while backing up or restoring data in the USB memory.

●

Do not remove the USB memory while backing up or restoring data. Doing so may cause damage to the USB
memory, USB port, or the data inside of the USB memory. Also if the USB memory is removed when
restoring, the machine may be damaged.

●

To use USB memory, press 

   <Preferences>   <External Interface>   <USB Settings>   set <Use MEAP

Driver for USB Storage Device> to <Off>.

Setting TPM

This section explains how to activate the TPM setting.

1

Press  .

2

Press <Management Settings>   <Data Management>   <TPM Settings>.

3

Press <Yes>.

●

Setting changes are reflected after the machine restarts.

●

If the TPM setting is activated, it may take longer to start the machine.

Managing the Machine

895

Summary of Contents for imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5535i III

Page 1: ...imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5560i III C5550i III C5540i III C5535i III User s Guide USRMA 3778 03 2019 09 en Copyright CANON INC 2019 ...

Page 2: ...he SSID and Network Key 35 Setting an IP Address 36 Setting an IPv4 Address 37 Setting an IPv6 Address 39 Setting the IPv4 Address of the Sub Line 42 Adapting to the Network Environment 43 Making Ethernet Settings 44 Setting the Wait Time When Connecting to a Network 46 Making DNS Settings 47 Making SMB Settings 52 Making WINS Settings 55 Making WebDAV Settings 56 Registering the LDAP Server 57 Mo...

Page 3: ...Used Paper Size and Type for the Multi purpose Tray 175 Fixing the Paper Size and Type to Use with the Multi Purpose Tray 178 Registering Free Size Paper Custom Size Paper 181 Automatically Selecting the Appropriate Paper Source for a Specific Function 182 Specifying the Output Tray for Preprinted Paper 184 Customizing the Touch Panel Display 186 Customizing the Home Screen 189 Creating a Shortcut...

Page 4: ...Sheet N on 1 276 Copying a Facing Page Original as Two Separate Pages 278 Copying Different Size Originals Together Different Size Originals 281 Copying Separately Scanned Originals Together Job Build 283 Checking the Copy Results 285 Copying Immediately by Interrupting Other Jobs 288 Functions Useful for Making and Managing Material 289 Finishing by Collating Grouping 290 Finishing with the Stapl...

Page 5: ...384 Fax Basic Features Screen 386 Basic Operations for Sending Faxes 389 Canceling Sending Faxes 405 Receiving Faxes 407 Sending Faxes Successfully 409 Checking Scanned Images Before Sending Preview 410 Stamping Scanned Originals for Sending 412 Checking the Connection to the Recipient Before Sending Direct Send 413 Sending Faxes Manually Manual Sending 415 Notifying You by E Mail of the Completio...

Page 6: ...al Printer 490 Printing From Memory Media Media Print 493 Scanning 495 Scan Basic Features Screen 497 Basic Operations for Scanning Originals 500 Checking Status and Log for Scanned Documents 517 Scanning Clearly 519 Adjusting Image Quality 520 Adjusting Density 521 Adjusting Sharpness When Scanning Sharpness 522 Erasing Dark Borders When Scanning Erase Frame 523 Scanning Efficiently 525 Sending S...

Page 7: ...evices 586 Saving Documents in Other Devices 587 Working with Files and Folders in Other Devices 588 Printing Files in Other Devices 589 Making Simple Edits to Files 591 Saving Documents in the Mail Box 592 Editing Files in the Mail Box 596 Printing Files in the Mail Box 601 Sending Files in the Mail Box 603 Specifying the Mail Box Settings 604 Working with Data in Memory Media 606 Saving Document...

Page 8: ...guring the Department ID Management Settings 715 Using Department IDs to Manage Printing or Remote Scanning via Computer 718 Configuring Personal Folders 719 Using ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 723 Deleting User Setting Information 724 Configuring the Network Security Settings 726 Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls 728 Specifying IP Addresses in Firewall Settings 729 Specifying MAC Addresses ...

Page 9: ...xporting the Settings Individually 835 Address Book Items 842 Backing Up Restoring Data 847 Updating the Firmware 852 Setting Scheduled Updates 853 Displaying Messages from the Administrator 855 Configuring the Visual Message Function 857 Sending E Mail Notification When an Error Occurs 860 Installing System Options 862 Synchronizing Settings for Multiple Canon Multifunction Printers 864 Starting ...

Page 10: ...ommon 958 Copy 969 Printer 971 Output Report 973 Custom Settings 974 UFR II 980 PCL 981 PS 984 Imaging 986 PDF 988 XPS 990 Utility 992 Send 993 Receive Forward 1004 Store Access Files 1007 Print 1011 Hold 1013 Web Access 1014 Set Destination 1017 Management Settings 1020 User Management 1021 Device Management 1026 License Other 1034 Data Management 1036 Security Settings 1038 Preferences 1040 Pape...

Page 11: ...159 Cleaning the Dust Proof Glass 1163 Replacing the Toner Cartridge 1165 Replacing the Waste Toner Container 1170 Replacing the Stamp Cartridge 1173 Loading Staples Optional 1176 Loading Staples of the Staple Finisher 1177 Loading Staples of the Booklet Finisher 1179 Loading Staples of the Inner Finisher 1184 Emptying the Punch Waste Optional 1186 Emptying the Punch Waste in the Staple Finisher 1...

Page 12: ...roblems with Scanning 1249 Problems with the Network 1251 Problems with Security 1255 Problems with MEAP 1256 Other Problems 1258 A Message or a Number Starting with an Error Code Is Displayed 1261 A Message Saying to Contact a Local Authorized Canon Dealer Is Displayed 1262 Countermeasures for Each Message 1264 Countermeasures for Each Error Code 1308 Clearing Paper Jams 1337 Paper Jams in the Fe...

Page 13: ...x Inbox 1435 Print 1437 MEAP 1438 Installing MEAP Applications 1440 Managing MEAP Applications 1443 Managing MEAP Application Licenses 1448 Changing Login Services 1450 Basic Windows Operations 1455 System Specifications 1458 Fax Function 1459 Send Functions 1460 Printer Functions 1463 Storage Space Functions 1466 Management Functions 1468 System Environment 1475 Network Environment 1477 Restricti...

Page 14: ...le Finisher Y Booklet Finisher Y Buffer Pass Unit L 2 4 Hole Puncher Unit A 2 3 Hole Puncher Unit A 4 Hole Puncher Unit A 1531 Inner Finisher H Inner 2 4 Hole Puncher B Inner 2 3 Hole Puncher B 1544 Copy Tray J 1556 Inner 2way Tray J 1557 Platen Cover Type W 1558 Copy Card Reader 1559 ADF Access Handle A 1561 Removable HDD Kit 1562 Optional Equipment Supporting Specific Functions 1567 Manuals and ...

Page 15: ...etting Up a Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings 33 Checking the SSID and Network Key 35 Setting an IP Address 36 Setting an IPv4 Address 37 Setting an IPv6 Address 39 Setting the IPv4 Address of the Sub Line 42 Adapting to the Network Environment 43 Making Ethernet Settings 44 Setting the Wait Time When Connecting to a Network 46 Making DNS Settings 47 Making SMB Settings 52 Making WINS Set...

Page 16: ...Setting Advanced Box to Public 79 Connecting to the Other Devices 84 Setting Up 2 ...

Page 17: ...s appointed as an administrator and general users operate the machine under the management of an administrator Administrators decide the rules for using the machine and operate important setups such as networks and security Administrators set the access for each user when necessary TIPS Carrying out the initial setup of the machine Setup Guide You can easily set up to start using the machine such ...

Page 18: ... 2 Setting up the Network Environment P 21 Set up the network environment not included on the Setup Guide If you do not start the Setup Guide start setting up from this procedure Step 3 Installing Drivers P 71 Step 4 Setting E mail I Fax Communication P 74 Step 5 Setting the Advanced Box of the Machine P 78 TIPS Setting from the Remote UI When you complete setup for the network environment you can...

Page 19: ... other Canon multifunction printer and save export its registered setup data to a computer beforehand setup contents such as address book and paper type setting can be immediately used by importing them to the machine Importing Exporting the Setting Data P 827 Setting Up 5 ...

Page 20: ...global IP address is used for Internet connections A private IP address is used for local area networks such as an office LAN If your IP address is a global IP address unauthorized users on the Internet can attempt to access your local network and risks such as information leakage become larger If your address is a private address only users on a local area network such as the office LAN have acce...

Page 21: ...eceives unauthorized access from a malicious third party risk of information leakage can be greatly reduced when various information resources in the machine are protected by passwords Password for each function PIN code setting Personal authentication management using User Authentication Configuring the Personal Authentication Management Settings P 678 PIN code setting for system management conte...

Page 22: ...nter characters Select the language and press OK To change the keyboard layout press Set select the keyboard layout and press OK Displaying the button for switching languages will be convenient for frequent language switching Switching the Displayed Language P 205 Step 2 Check the paper settings Check that the paper loaded in the drawers is correctly specified If the paper sizes are correct press ...

Page 23: ...e security of the machine use the machine under a system that uses user authentication This machine is set to use the user authentication as the login service For more information see Configuring the Personal Authentication Management Settings P 678 Press On for Use User Authentication press On for the login method to use and press Next If you do not use user authentication press Off for Use User ...

Page 24: ...play the login screen for and press OK Also select the setting items on the Settings Registration screen to display the login screen for If you select Off for Picture Login and Keyboard Authentication press OK Proceed to step 5 If you select On for Picture Login or Keyboard Authentication press Next To use authentication via numeric key entry only on the login screen press On If you select Off for...

Page 25: ... Forced Hold Printing Settings P 761 User Registration Method P 1132 and Change Default Display for Picture Login Screen P 1132 Select the number of preset buttons on the Picture Login screen and press OK Step 5 Set the date and time Specify the date and time of the machine Enter the date and time and press OK Set Time Zone and Daylight Saving Time as necessary For more information see Setting the...

Page 26: ...t the IP address manually clear the selection for DHCP or Auto IP press IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway Address to enter each value and press Next or OK For information on the IPV4 address settings see Setting an IPv4 Address P 37 If you press On for Use IPv6 specify the following settings Press On to use the stateless address or Off to not use the stateless address and press Next For informati...

Page 27: ...he manual address specify the following settings Press On to use DHCPv6 or Off to not use DHCPv6 and press OK Step 7 Specify the DNS settings Specify the DNS server address DNS host name and DNS domain name Press Primary DNS Server and Secondary DNS Server enter IPV4 IPv6 address for the DNS server and press Next For information on the settings of the DNS server address see Making DNS Settings P 4...

Page 28: ...ically Step 8 Specify the Proxy settings Specify the necessary settings to use the Proxy To use the Proxy press On press Server Address and Port Number to enter each value and press OK If you set Use Proxy within Same Domain to On press Set Authentication to specify the Proxy authentication settings For information on the Proxy settings see Setting a Proxy P 737 Step 9 Specify the fax settings Spe...

Page 29: ...10 Perform the automatic gradation adjustment Adjust the gradation to print clearly Depending on the machine the procedure differs For information on the automatic gradation adjustment see Adjusting Gradation P 1200 Step 11 Print a report You can print the network user list fax user data list and adjusted value list Press Start Printing for the report you want to print Setting Up 15 ...

Page 30: ...vidually specify settings configured during the Setup Guide at a later time Starting the Setup Guide later The Setup Guide cannot be started in the following cases If the user authentication or department ID authentication is set If the DepartmentID Authentication is set If the authentication with a card is performed Management Settings License Other Start Setup Guide Start If you start the Setup ...

Page 31: ...ialize Admin Password enter the license key press Start OK If Administrator is disabled it is enabled when initializing the password Registering User Information in the Local Device P 681 You can prohibit initialization of the administrator password Prohibit Initialization of Administrator Password P 1139 1 Press 2 Press Log In 3 Log in with the procedure Picture login Select a user with administr...

Page 32: ...re registered as the personal settings for the users who log into the machine If you set to Device Settings settings are registered as the machine s settings Personal Settings and Device Settings are only displayed on the Settings Registration screen if you log in with administrator privileges LINKS Logging into the Machine P 160 Starting the Remote UI P 784 Setting Up 18 ...

Page 33: ...me zone setting is essential Daylight Saving Time To set daylight saving time press On and set the date time for Start Date and End Date To set the date specify the day of the week and the week of the month If daylight saving time is set the time can be put forward an hour compared to the time zone or time during a specified period in the summer Date and time Enter 4 digits for the year 4 digits f...

Page 34: ...d to restart the machine by turning the power OFF Press the power switch to turn OFF the machine Turning OFF the Machine P 107 When 10 or more seconds have elapsed after the main power indicator turned off turn ON the machine again Turning ON the Machine P 106 Setting Up 20 ...

Page 35: ...ng the Network Security Settings P 726 You can connect the machine to a computer using a USB cable Parts and Their Functions P 91 However if you only connect the machine to a computer using a USB cable without connecting to a network operations such using as a scanner or sending transferring data from the machine to a computer are not possible You can establish a wireless direct connection between...

Page 36: ...ically allocated by DHCP so this setting is not necessary If you want to use a specific IP address or change the protocol of the automatic setting of an IP address from DHCP initial setting to another this setting is necessary Setting an IP Address P 36 Confirm that proper connection is completed Start the Remote UI from a computer Starting the Remote UI P 784 If the Remote UI screen is displayed ...

Page 37: ...LINKS Adapting to the Network Environment P 43 Setting Up 23 ...

Page 38: ... settings in order to prevent unintended changes Unlock the security lock to change them Preferences Network Confirm Network Connection Setting Changes On OK If Off is selected you cannot view or change the network settings Also error messages related to the network are not displayed Setting Up 24 ...

Page 39: ...er wired LAN the line connected from the LAN port of the machine is called the main line and the line connected from wireless LAN or another wired LAN is called the sub line Preferences Network Select Interface select the interface OK When using a sub line see Cautions When Using the Sub Line P 1406 If you selected Wireless LAN or Wired LAN Wireless LAN When you set Sleep Mode Energy Use to Low en...

Page 40: ... Low The settings of Wireless LAN Settings are cleared You cannot set wireless LAN as the main line and wired LAN as the sub line Cautions When Using Wired LAN Sub Line Set Sleep Mode Energy Use to High Sleep Mode Energy Use P 1049 LINK Connecting to a Wired LAN P 27 Connecting to a Wireless LAN P 28 Setting Up 26 ...

Page 41: ...evice such as a switching hub supporting all of the Ethernet types you use is necessary For more information contact a person in charge of service 1 Connect the machine to a router using a LAN cable Push the connector in until it clicks into place Connecting to a Wired LAN for the Sub Line When Wired LAN Wired LAN is selected in Select Interface connect the wired LAN for the sub line Select Interf...

Page 42: ...AN connection Regardless of the method make sure that you have the required setup information including the SSID and network key Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router P 32 Setting Up a Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings P 33 Checking the SSID and Network Key P 35 Use wireless LAN connection at your own discretion and at your own risk If the machine is connected to an unsecur...

Page 43: ...nstruction manuals for your networking devices or contact your manufacturer Check the settings and information of the wireless LAN Check the information you set Preferences Network Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Information TIPS Connecting directly You can establish a direct wireless connection between a mobile device and the machine without using a wireless LAN router Connecting Directly P 631 Reducin...

Page 44: ...ush Button Mode press and hold the WPS button on the wireless router When the wireless LAN router is detected and the configuration is complete the screen Connected will be displayed Depending on the networking device you may need to press and hold the WPS button for 2 seconds or longer See the instruction manuals for your networking device for help If the wireless router is set to use WEP authent...

Page 45: ...Registering the PIN code to the wireless router Register the PIN code within two minutes after the PIN code is generated For details see the instruction manual for your networking device 1 Access a wireless router from a computer 2 Display the screen for entering a WPS PIN code 3 Register the generated PIN code to the wireless router When the wireless LAN router is detected and the configuration i...

Page 46: ...tion by Specifying Detailed Settings P 33 If the security standard for your wireless LAN router is WPA WPA2 EAP the encryption method is set to AES CCMP Also specify the IEEE 802 1X authentication settings for the machine before connecting to the wireless LAN Configuring the IEEE 802 1X Authentication Settings P 749 1 Press 2 Press Preferences Network Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Settings Other Set M...

Page 47: ...ecked 5 Specify the security settings in Security Settings Using WEP 1 Press WEP 2 Select an authentication method To use the WEP key as a password press Shared Key If you press Open System the machine experiences an authentication is set on the wireless router If this happens the machine automatically changes the setting to Shared Key and retries the connection 3 Select the WEP key that you want ...

Page 48: ...Using WPA EAP or WPA2 EAP 1 Press WPA WPA2 EAP 2 Press OK 6 Press OK When the wireless LAN router is detected and the configuration is complete the screen Connected will be displayed Setting Up 34 ...

Page 49: ...e information see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or contact your manufacturer SSID A name given for identifying a specific wireless LAN Some other terms used for SSID include access point name and network name Network Key A keyword or password used for encrypting data or authenticating a network Some other terms used for network key include encryption key WEP key WPA WPA2 pass...

Page 50: ... IP addresses IPv4 and IPv6 Set and use them according to your environment You can use either IPv4 or IPv6 You can also use both of them at the same time When a connection method with a main line and sub line is selected in Select Interface specify the IP address of the sub line in IP Address Settings in Sub Line Settings Setting an IPv4 Address P 37 Setting an IPv6 Address P 39 Setting the IPv4 A...

Page 51: ...l fails Automatic allocation using DHCP Press DHCP or Auto IP Select one of them according to your network environment If you select both DHCP and Auto IP automatic allocation using DHCP takes priority If you press Auto IP the available IP address is automatically searched in the network LAN and the value for each item is allocated This function allocates the IP address without using a DHCP server...

Page 52: ...PING Command Enter the address of any other in use device Start When the machine is connected correctly the Response from the host message is displayed Even though IP addresses are properly set if the machine is connected to a switching hub the machine might not be connected to the network In this case delay the timing of the machine s communication start and try to connect again Setting the Wait ...

Page 53: ...environment without a DHCP server Manual address Addresses that are manually entered Prefix length and a default router address are specified Stateful address Addresses that are acquired from the DHCP server Setting an IPv6 Address P 39 Conducting a Connection Test for an IPv6 Address P 40 Setting an IPv6 Address 1 Press 2 Press Preferences Network TCP IP Settings IPv6 Settings 3 Press Use IPv6 On...

Page 54: ...Default Router Address and enter an address The following addresses cannot be used Addresses that begin with ff multicast address Addresses that consist only of 0 If you don t specify an address leave the column blank Setting a stateful address 1 Press Use DHCPv6 2 Press On OK Press On for Only Retrieve Stateful Address Prefix to only retrieve the first half of the stateful address from the DHCP s...

Page 55: ...se from the host message is displayed Even though IP addresses are properly set if the machine is connected to a switching hub the machine might not be connected to the network In this case delay the timing of the machine s communication start and try to make a connection again Setting the Wait Time When Connecting to a Network P 46 LINKS Setting an IPv4 Address P 37 Setting Up 41 ...

Page 56: ...fails Automatically Assigning the IP Address with DHCP Press DHCP Select this item according to the network environment of your wireless LAN If DHCP is selected communication is performed to check whether network services are being provided regardless of whether the environment can use DHCP It is recommended that you deselect this item if you are not using DHCP Manually Entering the IP Address 1 C...

Page 57: ...r and carry out necessary settings according to your environment Making Ethernet Settings P 44 Setting the Wait Time When Connecting to a Network P 46 Making DNS Settings P 47 Making SMB Settings P 52 Making WINS Settings P 55 Making WebDAV Settings P 56 Registering the LDAP Server P 57 Monitoring and Controlling via SNMP P 61 Setting Static Routing P 65 Other Network Settings P 67 Configuring Sys...

Page 58: ...ettings as necessary 1 Press 2 Press Preferences Network Ethernet Driver Settings To specify the Ethernet settings for the sub line press Preferences Network Sub Line Settings Ethernet Driver Settings 3 Make Ethernet settings Normally press On in Auto Detect The communication system and Ethernet type are detected and automatically configured Making Ethernet settings manually 1 Press Off in Auto De...

Page 59: ...s at the same time Select this as a general rule 3 Select the Ethernet type Select 10BASE T 100BASE TX or 1000BASE T in Ethernet Type 4 Press OK 5 Press Yes LINKS Setting the Wait Time When Connecting to a Network P 46 Setting Up 45 ...

Page 60: ...ive to determine the roles of the switching ports but communication may not be properly transmitted in cases just after changes such as adding a new device to the network To connect the machine to such a network set the waiting time which is the time until the communication starts Preferences Network Waiting Time for Connection at Startup Set the waiting time OK Yes LINKS Making Ethernet Settings ...

Page 61: ...e used Setting an IPv6 Address P 39 In addition you can make correspondence with an IP address by acquiring the host name through a DHCP server without manually entering the host name of the machine Making DNS Settings P 47 Using a DHCP Server P 50 Making DNS Settings 1 Press 2 Press Preferences Network TCP IP Settings DNS Settings 3 Specify a DNS server address 1 Press DNS Server Address Settings...

Page 62: ...me as IPv4 press On in Use Same Host Name Domain Name as IPv4 To set to be different from those of IPv4 press Off To set the host name to be different from IPv4 press Host Name and enter the host name of the machine to register on the DNS server using alphanumeric characters To set the domain name to be different from IPv4 press Domain Name and enter the domain name that the machine belongs to usi...

Page 63: ... set to Off 3 Press OK 6 Specify the mDNS settings 1 Press mDNS Settings 2 Carry out the necessary settings Use IPv4 mDNS To enable the DNS function in an environment without a DNS server press On Press mDNS Name and enter an mDNS name of your choice using alphanumeric characters Use IPv6 mDNS To enable the DNS function in an environment without a DNS server press On To set the same settings as IP...

Page 64: ...DNS Dynamic Update To make the DHCP server automatically update information regarding correspondence between the IP addresses and the host names without using the machine press On Acquire DNS Server Address To acquire the DHCP server IP address press On Acquire Domain Name To acquire a domain name through the DHCP server press On Acquire WINS Server Address To acquire a domain name through the WIN...

Page 65: ...4 Press OK 5 Press Yes Setting Up 51 ...

Page 66: ...e SMB Authentication User authentication is conducted by using user information in the Advanced Box To conduct user authentication press On Authentication Type Select the version of the authentication protocol Select NTLMv1 or NTLMv2 according to your operating system You can also select both Require SMB Signature for Connection To set so that an SMB packet signature is requested when connecting t...

Page 67: ...a network as an SMB client 1 Press 2 Press Preferences Network TCP IP Settings SMB Client Settings 3 Specify the required settings Authentication Type Select the authentication protocol version Select either NTLMv1 or NTLMv2 according to the destination SMB server You can also select both Require SMB Signature for Connection To request an SMB packet signature when connecting to an SMB server press...

Page 68: ...ryption for Connection is set to On the machine can only connect to SMB servers that support SMB v3 0 encrypted communication When 1 0 and 2 0 are set to On for Specify SMB Client Version but 3 0 is not set to On the machine cannot connect to SMB servers that do not support SMB v3 0 encrypted communication Use the same version of SMB with the SMB server and SMB client SMB cannot be used if the ver...

Page 69: ...orkgroup Name Settings P 1053 If you set Use NetBIOS to Off in Computer Name Workgroup Name Settings the WINS setting is disabled Make sure to set Use NetBIOS to On when using WINS 1 Press 2 Press Preferences Network TCP IP Settings WINS Settings 3 Press On in WINS Resolution and enter the IP address of the WINS server in WINS Server Address If the WINS server IP address is acquired from the DHCP ...

Page 70: ...rs on a web server Because WebDAV also supports TLS encryption you can construct a file sharing system which is highly secure through user management Enabling the WebDAV server functions makes it possible for the Advanced Box to be used as a WebDAV file server Preferences Network TCP IP Settings Use WebDAV Server On OK Yes LINKS Setting the Advanced Box of the Machine P 78 Setting Up 56 ...

Page 71: ...Enter the IP address or host name of the LDAP server using alphanumeric characters Example ldap example com Server Address and DNS To prevent errors pay attention to the following when a destination search is carried out from the machine to the LDAP server When entering the IP address check if the usable DNS server supports only forward lookup When the DNS server supports forward lookup only press...

Page 72: ...ify in seconds how long the search can continue Max Addresses to Search Specify how many destinations can be searched Port Number Enter the port number used when communicating to from the LDAP server 3 Press Next 4 Set authentication information Specify authentication methods according to the settings of the LDAP server You can check the connection by pressing Check Connection after specifying the...

Page 73: ...thenticating using encoded data Authentication can be done more safely by encoding the data exchange When this measure is employed the LDAP version and character code information are set to ver 3 UTF 8 The time of the machine and LDAP server need to be synchronized 1 Press Use Security Auth in Authentication Information 2 Enter the user name and the password and carry out the necessary settings Us...

Page 74: ...tication Information 2 Select the combination of the LDAP version and the character code of the server 3 Press OK LINKS Performing User Authentication when Distributing Device Information P 884 Registering Server Information P 695 Set Destination P 1127 Making SNTP Settings P 67 Setting Up 60 ...

Page 75: ...able to security issues To ensure safety invalidate SNMPv1 and use SNMPv3 SNMPv3 SNMPv3 enables you to implement network device management with strong security functions When SNMP management software is usable you can set monitor and control the machine through a computer For details see your software s instruction manuals Setting SNMPv1 SNMPv3 1 Press 2 Press Preferences Network SNMP Settings 3 S...

Page 76: ...munity name 4 Press OK 4 Set SNMPv3 1 Press On in Use SNMPv3 If you don t use SNMPv3 press Off 2 Press Administrator Settings 3 Specify the necessary settings and press OK Use Administrator If you use Administrator set to On Encryption Password If you use a password which is different from the authentication deselect Use Same Password as for Authentication press Encryption Password and enter the p...

Page 77: ...om four hash lengths 224 bit 256 bit 384 bit or 512 bit Authentication Password Enter a password to use for authentication When the password is entered Confirm is displayed for confirmation Enter the password again Encryption Algorithm Select DES or AES according to your environment Encryption Password Enter a password to use for encoding When the password is entered Confirm is displayed for confi...

Page 78: ... 9 Press Yes When using SNMPv1 and SNMPv3 in combination it is recommended to set MIB access privileges for SNMPv1 to Read Only If you set Read Write almost all of the machine s operations become practicable and the strong security functions of SNMPv3 will not be effective Access privileges to MIB can be set in either SNMPv1 or SNMPv3 In SNMPv3 you can set them for each user Setting Up 64 ...

Page 79: ...Main line gateway 2 Sub line gateway 3 Static routing settings When connecting to another network via a router enter the gateway address in IP Address Settings in advance Setting an IPv4 Address P 37 Setting the IPv4 Address of the Sub Line P 42 1 Press 2 Press Preferences Network Static Routing Settings 3 Press On for Static Routing Settings 4 Select the line to register the static routing inform...

Page 80: ...ister up to 16 devices that can be connected The success failure of the static routing settings is displayed in Routing Regist An error message is also displayed on the bottom of the screen When failure is indicated in Routing Regist select the static routing settings that failed and set the address and gateway address again Setting Up 66 ...

Page 81: ... protocol to adjust time using a time server on the network SNTP is used when time needs to be adjusted between the machine and the server in cases when security authentication is done at the time of accessing an LDAP server Set the time difference time zone beforehand because actions are based on Coordinated Universal Time UTC Setting the Date Time P 19 1 Press 2 Press Preferences Network TCP IP ...

Page 82: ... SNTP server to synchronize the clock when certain services are used 4 Press OK 5 Press Yes Monitoring the Machine From Device Management Systems When device management software such as iW Management Console is employed you can collect manage various information such as setting information address information and device failure information on the network through the server 1 Press 2 Press Preferen...

Page 83: ... internet connection When using a DNS server or proxy server for the sub line for applications other than system data communication register the addresses and port numbers to use with the sub line in the settings of the main line Setting the DNS of the Sub Line P 69 Proxy Settings of the Sub Line P 69 Setting the DNS of the Sub Line 1 Press 2 Press Preferences Network Sub Line Settings Settings fo...

Page 84: ...address and host name according to your environment Port Number Enter the port number of the proxy server Set Authentication Press this to set the authentication information when using the authentication function of a proxy server Press On on the displayed screen enter the user name and password for proxy authentication and press OK 4 Press Yes LINKS Selecting the Network Connection Method P 25 Ma...

Page 85: ...ome functions of drivers and software may not be available depending on the model of the machine or operating environment Some drivers may not be fully compatible with the operating system you are using Check the driver compatibility with latest versions of operating systems on the Canon website 2 Carry out installation of the drivers For details on the installation see the manuals for the drivers...

Page 86: ...you can show or print the sender s name Basic Operations for Sending Faxes P 389 6 Select a line type in Select Line Type press OK If you are not sure what kind of line type you are using please contact your dealer or the sales office of your telephone company Configure the setting according to the fax option You can edit the line name that is displayed in the line selection screen using Edit Line...

Page 87: ...LINKS Faxing P 384 Options P 1513 Setting Up 73 ...

Page 88: ...2 Press Function Settings Send E Mail I Fax Settings Communication Settings 3 Set communication SMTP RX Press On when you want to make the machine an SMTP server to receive e mails and I faxes Be aware that you cannot receive via SMTP if you don t register the host name of the machine on the DNS server SMTP Server Enter an SMTP server name or an IP address E Mail Address Enter the machine s e mail...

Page 89: ... during authentication select APOP To authenticate users when receiving mail POP select POP AUTH POP Authentication Before Sending To perform authentication using the POP3 server press On Allow TLS POP To encode the communication to from the POP3 server using TLS press On When On is set you can confirm the TLS server certificate during communication with the server and add CN to the verification i...

Page 90: ...press On When On is set you can confirm the TLS server certificate during communication with the server and add CN to the verification items E Mail I Fax Settings Confirm TLS Certificate for SMTP TX P 1101 When setting SMTP authentication Specify the authentication method using one of the following three methods Fixed Device Authentication Entering the authentication information when sending Regis...

Page 91: ...Info for Each User is used and the authentication screen Log in to SMTP Server is not displayed when sending SMTP authentication is performed using the user name and password registered in the local device Specify the settings as follows SMTP Authentication SMTP AUTH On Display Auth Screen When Sending Off Information Used for SMTP Server Authentication P 1089 Register Info for Each User 3 Press O...

Page 92: ...aring with computers and other Canon multifunction printers without introducing a server In addition you can increase the storage capacity by connecting the machine to the Advanced Box of other multifunction printers To utilize such functions adjust settings for sharing files beforehand Here the procedures are described as follows Available only for imageRUNNER ADVANCE series machines connected to...

Page 93: ...the method to make the Advanced Box available to the network and press Next If you want to make the Advanced Box available to the outside as a WebDAV server press By WebDAV If you want to make the Advanced Box available to the outside as an SMB server press By SMB If you set to WebDAV the Use WebDAV Server is set to On If you set to By SMB the Use WebDAV Server setting in SMB Server Settings is se...

Page 94: ...On the setting of Authentication Type in WebDAV Server Settings is set to Basic Advanced Box Settings WebDAV Server Settings P 1120 If you set to By SMB and set the Authentication Management setting to On 1 Select the authentication type Require SMB Signature for Connection To request an SMB packet signature when connecting to an SMB server press On Require Encryption for Connection To request a c...

Page 95: ...g Is Complete You can notify a user via e mail that a file has been saved in the Advanced Box of the machine The notification e mail contains the path URI Uniform Resource Identifier to the folder that includes the file 1 Start the Remote UI Starting the Remote UI P 784 2 Click Settings Registration on the portal page Remote UI Screen P 785 3 Click Store Access Files Advanced Box Settings 4 Click ...

Page 96: ...enabled https 192 168 1 21 users suzuki Notice Timing Select the timing for sending the URI TX When specified as a store location in Scan and Store Notification is sent each time a file is saved in the specified folder inside the Advanced Box from Scan and Store on the touch panel display However notification is not sent when a file is saved in or a folder is added to a subfolder When a loopback a...

Page 97: ... folders inside subfolders are not counted You can save a maximum of 1 000 files or sub folders inside the specified folder Notice Destination Specify the destination e mail address in Select Destination You can set a single e mail address registered in the address book or a single e mail address group as the destination to notify Subject Enter the subject for the e mail up to 40 characters Messag...

Page 98: ...ther multifunction printers to connect to 1 Press Network Place Settings Register 2 Enter the necessary information and press OK Name Enter the name of the Advanced Box to connect to As a name entered here is displayed on the list at the time of access enter a name that is easy to read Protocol Select SMB or WebDAV depending on whether the Windows server or Advanced Box of destination is made avai...

Page 99: ...on via WebDAV is not used set the WebDAV setting to Off Verifying the certificate when connecting When the Windows server or Advanced Box to connect to is set to use TLS you can verify the TLS server certificate sent from the connected device when connecting Because a connection will be canceled if an error occurs attacks such as identity theft by third parties can be prevented 1 Press Confirm TLS...

Page 100: ...lay Specifications 146 Items Displayed in the Timeline 148 Basic Operation of the Touch Panel Display 153 Entering Characters 158 Logging into the Machine 160 List of Items That Can Be Personalized 163 Specifying Paper Size and Type 166 Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer 167 Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi purpose Tray 171 Registering Frequently Used Paper Size and Type...

Page 101: ...gistering Shortcuts for Frequently Used Settings Registered Items 207 Customizing the Screen Display Appearance and the Operational Conditions 209 Canceling Send Print Jobs 212 Setting Sounds 213 Entering Sleep Mode 216 Registering Destinations 218 About the Address Books of the Machine 220 Registering Destinations in the Address Book 223 Registering Multiple Destinations as a Group 233 Editing th...

Page 102: ...l Parts and Their Functions P 91 Turning ON the Machine This section describes how to turn the machine ON or OFF Turning ON the Machine P 106 Using the Touch Panel Display This section describes how to use the buttons on the touch panel display to perform various operations such as adjusting and checking the settings This section also describes how to enter text and numbers which are necessary for...

Page 103: ...en glass and in the feeder Placing Originals P 109 Loading Paper This section describes how to load the paper into the paper drawer and multi purpose tray Loading Paper P 116 Customizing the Touch Panel Display This section describes how to arrange buttons and customize menus making it easier to use the screens displayed on the touch panel Customizing the Touch Panel Display P 186 Basic Operations...

Page 104: ...e or when an error occurs Setting Sounds P 213 Entering Sleep Mode This section describes how to set sleep mode Entering Sleep Mode P 216 Registering Destinations This section describes how to register destinations in the Address Book or one touch buttons for sending faxes or scanned documents Registering Destinations P 218 Basic Operations 90 ...

Page 105: ... This section also describes how to place originals and how to load paper as well as the names and usage of the keys on the control panel Read this section for tips on how to use the machine properly Front Side P 92 Back Side P 96 Interior P 97 Feeder P 98 Multi Purpose Tray P 100 Paper Drawer P 101 Control Panel P 103 Basic Operations 91 ...

Page 106: ...hine the machine exits sleep mode automatically Entering Sleep Mode P 216 Control panel The control panel consists of the numeric keys indicators touch panel display etc You can perform all the operations and specify settings from the control panel Control Panel P 103 Basic Operations 92 ...

Page 107: ...d disk to the machine Backing Up Restoring Data P 847 When you select Wired LAN Wired LAN for Select Interface connect a USB LAN adapter here Connecting to a Wired LAN for the Sub Line P 27 The USB port rear right side of the machine supports USB 3 0 USB connector Connect a USB cable when connecting the machine and a computer The USB connector supports USB 2 0 LAN port Connect a LAN cable when con...

Page 108: ...icates the type of genuine toner that can be used with the machine Use toner with a code that includes the same letters as the code on the front cover of the machine Power switch Press the power switch when turning ON or OFF the machine Turning ON the Machine P 106 Turning OFF the Machine P 107 Glass cleaning cloth storage box Use this box to store the cloth for cleaning the platen glass Output tr...

Page 109: ... oriented properly when connecting it to the machine If it is not connected properly it may cause the USB memory device or machine to malfunction Make sure to follow the proper procedure when removing the USB memory device Removing the memory media P 607 Failure to do so may cause the USB memory device or machine to malfunction The machine only supports FAT32 exFAT format USB memory device Unsuppo...

Page 110: ... connect the Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board to the machine and use LINE 3 and LINE 4 to connect the Super G3 3rd 4th Line Fax Board to the machine System Options P 1481 Telephone line jack LINE 1 Connect a telephone cable when connecting the machine to a telephone line Basic Operations 96 ...

Page 111: ...the dust proof glass Toner cartridge Replace the toner cartridge when the toner runs out Replacing the Toner Cartridge P 1165 Waste toner container Replace the waste toner container when it is full of waste toner Replacing the Waste Toner Container P 1170 Basic Operations 97 ...

Page 112: ...are loaded originals can be scanned continuously Placing Originals P 109 Original supply tray extension Pull out this tray when loading a large sized original Document feed scanning area Originals placed in the feeder are scanned in this area Document feed scanning area cover Open this cover when replacing a stamp cartridge or cleaning the document feed scanning area Maintenance P 1153 Platen glas...

Page 113: ...you place originals in the feeder while originals for another job remain in the original output tray the indicator blinks to notify the user that originals remain If a thick original such as a book or magazine is placed on the platen glass do not press down hard on the feeder Do not place any objects in the original output area Doing so may cause damage to the originals Regularly clean the feeder ...

Page 114: ...r guides Adjust the paper guides to exactly the width of the loaded paper to ensure that paper is fed straight into the machine Paper tray Open the paper tray when loading paper Tray extension Pull out the tray extension when loading large sized paper LINKS Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray P 120 Loading Envelopes in the Multi Purpose Tray P 130 Basic Operations 100 ...

Page 115: ... part of the left guide and slide it Paper guide Front guide Press the top part of the front guide and slide it Attaching the appropriate paper size label Attach the paper size label at the same height as the cassette number indicator and approximately 5 mm to the left Basic Operations 101 ...

Page 116: ...hat the paper size label may include paper sizes which are unavailable on the machine LINKS Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer P 117 Loading Envelopes in the Multi Purpose Tray P 130 Optional Equipment P 1516 Basic Operations 102 ...

Page 117: ... put the machine into sleep mode The key lights up when the machine is in sleep mode Entering Sleep Mode P 216 Counter Device Information key Press to display the total number of pages used for operations such as copying or printing on the touch panel display You can also check the serial number and IP address of the machine and the device information of optional products Further you can check the...

Page 118: ...at appear on the touch panel display Clearing Paper Jams P 1337 Clearing Staple Jams Optional P 1367 If the Error indicator maintains a steady red light contact your local authorized Canon dealer Processing Data indicator Blinks while operations such as sending or printing are being performed Lights up green when there are originals waiting to be processed Reset key Press to cancel the settings an...

Page 119: ...Basic Operations 105 ...

Page 120: ...lect the screen displayed immediately after the machine is turned ON Use Default Screen After Startup Restoration P 1138 The response of the touch panel display and keys on the control panel may not be optimal immediately after the machine is turned ON If the machine is connected to a powered off Mac computer by USB cable the computer may turn on automatically when this machine does In this case d...

Page 121: ...displayed on the touch panel display Doing so may cause the machine to fail to back up the stored data Data stored in the machine may be damaged if the Advanced Box shared storage of the machine is accessed by another Canon multifunction printer or a computer immediately before the machine is turned OFF If the machine is turned OFF during scanning or printing a paper jam may occur Only for the ima...

Page 122: ...Power indicator is turned off and then turn the machine back ON When Quick Startup Settings for Main Power is enabled wait for at least 20 seconds to restart the machine Quick Startup Settings for Main Power P 1047 LINKS Turning ON the Machine P 106 Basic Operations 108 ...

Page 123: ...not place the following types of originals in the feeder as this may cause paper jams Wrinkled or creased paper Carbon paper or carbon backed paper Curled or rolled paper Coated paper Torn originals Originals with large holes Onion skin or thin paper Stapled or clipped originals Paper printed by a thermal transfer printer Transparencies Originals with notes attached Originals pasted together Origi...

Page 124: ...e may be either reduced in size or divided into smaller parts before it is sent Placing Originals on the Platen Glass P 110 Placing Originals in the Feeder P 111 Placing Originals on the Platen Glass 1 Open the feeder If you place an original for which the opening of the feeder is insufficient the size of the original may not be properly detected 2 Place the original face down on the platen glass ...

Page 125: ...aten glass do not press down hard on the feeder Placing Originals in the Feeder Do not place items in the original output tray as doing so may cause damage to your originals 1 Spread the slide guides apart Move the slide guides outward until they are slightly farther apart than the actual width of the original When placing large sized originals pull out the original supply tray extension and origi...

Page 126: ...ack in small batches and align the edges by lightly tapping the stack on a flat surface a few times 3 Place the originals face up and as far into the feeder as they will go When insertion depth is sufficient the Original Set Indicator lights up Basic Operations 112 ...

Page 127: ...riginal place the original so that the top and the bottom are properly positioned as shown in the illustration below You can place different sized originals and scan them all at once Copying Different Size Originals Together Different Size Originals P 281 Sending Different Size Originals Together Different Size Originals P 420 Sending Saving Different Size Originals Together Different Size Origina...

Page 128: ...anning long strip originals If you scan long originals which have a length of up to 630 mm support the originals by hand when scanning and outputting paper When placing thin paper originals It may be difficult to place thin paper originals In this case lightly bend the paper while placing it Make sure that you do not push too hard when placing the original The original may not be fed correctly or ...

Page 129: ...send Color original scan range When a color original is scanned with a setting made for automatic color discrimination it may be identified as a black and white document if it contains color portions only in the gray areas as shown in the following figure 1 sided originals 2 sided originals Front side Back side Paper feed direction 10 mm 17 mm To scan originals as color document set the machine to...

Page 130: ...7 Loading Envelopes P 123 Loading Preprinted Paper P 132 Before using any paper confirm the precautions regarding paper and the correct way to store it Available Paper P 1490 Loading paper while stock remains may cause a multiple sheet feed or a paper jam If there is paper remaining it is recommended that you wait until all of it has been used before loading more paper Do not load different sizes ...

Page 131: ...per to load follow those instructions Paper may overlap when it is fed or a paper jam may occur depending on the cut surface of the paper Changing the paper orientation and loading it again may reduce the effect of the cut surface If paper runs out and printing is stopped load a new paper stack Printing restarts after the new paper stack is loaded Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer You can load tab...

Page 132: ... the inside of the machine dirty Paper size indicators The abbreviations on the paper size indicators in the paper drawer indicate paper sizes as follows LGL Legal LTR Letter EXEC Executive STMT Statement Note that the paper size indicators may include paper sizes which are unavailable on the machine For information on available paper sizes see Available Paper P 1490 3 Prepare paper Fan the paper ...

Page 133: ...aper excluding envelopes Envelopes If you use paper with a logo mark pay attention to the orientation when loading it in the paper source Loading Preprinted Paper P 132 When placing envelopes pay attention to the orientation and the preparations before placing envelopes Loading Envelopes P 123 For information on paper that can be loaded see Available Paper P 1490 5 Gently insert the paper drawer i...

Page 134: ...y include paper sizes which are unavailable on the machine Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray 1 Open the multi purpose tray Pull out the tray extension when loading large sized paper 2 Adjust the paper guides to match the size of the paper 3 Prepare paper Fan the paper stack well and tap it on a flat surface to align the edges Basic Operations 120 ...

Page 135: ...line when loading paper Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit line Loading too much paper can cause paper jams If you use envelopes or paper with a logo mark pay attention to the orientation when loading them in the paper source Loading Envelopes P 123 Loading Preprinted Paper P 132 The number of sheets that can be loaded at a time depends on the paper type For details see ...

Page 136: ...y printed side face up Then press 2nd Side of 2 Sided Page on the screen for selecting the paper type Use only the paper printed with this machine Loading Transparencies If a multiple sheet feed or paper jam occurs load each sheet separately If you leave transparencies loaded in the paper drawers or in the multi purpose tray the sheets may stick together and cause a multiple sheet feed or a paper ...

Page 137: ...dures that you need to complete before loading envelopes For a description of the general procedure for loading envelopes in the paper drawer or multi purpose tray see Basic Paper Loading Method P 117 Before Loading Envelopes Follow the procedure below to prepare the envelopes before loading Do not use envelopes that have glue attached to their flaps as the glue may melt due to the heat and pressu...

Page 138: ...es Repeat this step five times for each set of five envelopes 3 Press down on the four sides Press down firmly on all four sides In particular carefully press down on the side facing the direction in which the envelopes will be fed Press down firmly so that the flap stays flat Failure to firmly press down on the flap may result in a paper jam If this happens press down firmly on all four sides of ...

Page 139: ...nvelopes in the Paper Drawer 1 Attach the Envelope Feeder Attachment to the paper drawer Attaching to paper drawer 1 Prepare the Envelope Feeder Attachment A Remove the Envelope Feeder Attachment A stored in paper drawer 2 Adjust the left guide of paper drawer 1 and attach the Envelope Feeder Attachment B to the left guide Basic Operations 125 ...

Page 140: ...lope Feeder Attachment A in the storage area of paper drawer 2 Attaching to paper drawer 2 Prepare the Envelope Feeder Attachment A Remove the Envelope Feeder Attachment A stored in paper drawer 2 Attach the Envelope Feeder Attachment A by aligning the protruding areas of the Envelope Feeder Attachment A with the holes on paper receptor located on the bottom of the paper drawer When loading Kakuga...

Page 141: ...aper drawer 1 Load the envelopes as indicated below with the front side of the envelopes the side without the glued areas face up Load 25 envelopes at a time Yougatanaga 3 COM10 No 10 DL ISO C5 Close the flaps and load the envelopes so that their flaps are on the right side Basic Operations 127 ...

Page 142: ...Paper drawer 2 Load the envelopes as indicated below with the front side of the envelopes the side without the glued areas face up Load 50 envelopes at a time Yougatanaga 3 Close the flaps and load the envelopes so that their flaps are on the far side Basic Operations 128 ...

Page 143: ...the near side Nagagata 3 Kakugata 2 Load the envelopes so that their flaps are on the left side IMPORTANT Envelopes may not be able to be fed properly if they are loaded at an angle 4 Register the type of envelope 5 Change the paper size label of the paper drawer as necessary Basic Operations 129 ...

Page 144: ...o that their flaps are on the far side Nagagata 3 Kakugata 2 Load the envelopes so that their flaps are on the right side Monarch COM10 No 10 DL ISO C5 Close the flaps and load the envelopes so that their flaps are on the left side To change the orientation of the envelopes load them as shown in the figures below Yougatanaga 3 Close the flaps and load the envelopes so that their flaps are on the l...

Page 145: ... they have been prepared according to the procedures load the envelopes individually in the multi purpose tray instead of loading several sheets together Do not print on the reverse side of the envelopes the side with the glued areas When you print on envelopes remove them from the output tray 10 at a time When using Kakugata 2 place it horizontally If envelopes become wrinkled load the envelopes ...

Page 146: ...ion P 134 Orientation of the original when copying When performing a copy operation pay attention to the orientation of the original to be placed Place the original in the feeder with the side to copy face up or on the platen glass with the side to copy face down as shown in the figure below For A4 B5 or A5 portrait layout originals Feeder Platen glass For A3 or B4 portrait layout originals Feeder...

Page 147: ...Preprinted Paper set to On in Paper Type Management Settings specify that paper type and then perform the printing By specifying the paper source each time to print load paper in the paper source for which Switch Feed Method is set to Print Side Priority specify that paper source and then perform the printing Proper manner of loading preprinted paper when Preprinted Paper is set to On in Paper Typ...

Page 148: ...Multi purpose tray Loading Paper with Logos in Landscape Orientation The loading method varies depending on the size of the paper with the logo and the paper source that is used When Loading A4 B5 A5 size Paper with Logos Load the paper so that the logo faces up in the paper drawer and faces down in the multi purpose tray as shown in the illustrations below A5 size paper can be loaded in the paper...

Page 149: ...he paper so that the logo faces up in the paper drawer 2 and faces down in the multi purpose tray as shown in the illustrations below A3 and B4 size paper cannot be loaded in the paper drawer 1 Paper drawer 2 Multi purpose tray Basic Operations 135 ...

Page 150: ...b paper in paper drawer 2 Optional Equipment P 1516 Tab Paper Type P 136 Loading Tab Paper in the Paper Drawer 2 P 136 Tab Paper Type There are two kinds of tab paper right order tab paper and reverse order tab paper Right order tab paper Reverse order tab paper When you load tab paper into the paper drawer 2 load right order tab paper face up with the tabs on the left side For the reverse order t...

Page 151: ...tion of the paper guides While pressing the top part of the left guide slide it to the left edge 3 Prepare the Tab Feeding Attachment F 4 Attach the Tab Feeding Attachment F aligning the mark for A4 Basic Operations 137 ...

Page 152: ...to secure the Tab Feeding Attachment F 5 Load the tab paper Load the tab paper with the tabs on the left side Do not exceed the load limit line when loading paper Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit line Loading too much paper can cause paper jams Basic Operations 138 ...

Page 153: ...the machine 8 Specify the paper size and type For details about how to specify the paper size and type see Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer P 167 If you do not change the settings the machine cannot print properly LINKS Available Paper P 1490 Inserting Sheets and Chapter Pages Insert Sheets P 317 Basic Operations 139 ...

Page 154: ...display too hard Doing so may break the touch panel display Do not use an object with a sharp end such as a mechanical pencil or ballpoint pen Doing so may scratch the surface of the touch panel display or break it Peel off the protective film from the touch panel display before use You can customize menus and rearrange frequently used buttons for easier access You can also combine multiple settin...

Page 155: ...ough the display and setting items on the Basic Features screen differ depending on functions you can change the settings to suit your needs Customizing the Basic Features Screen P 196 Example Copy Basic Features screen Items displayed differ depending on functions Copy Basic Features Screen P 248 Fax Basic Features Screen P 386 Scan Basic Features Screen P 497 Settings Registration Screen Press t...

Page 156: ... as well as the remaining amount of toner and memory level Status and logs of copy print transmission saved documents The current status or log of the selected item is displayed You can cancel copying printing and fax transmission on this screen Cancelling Copying P 261 Canceling Sending Faxes P 405 Scan Basic Features Screen P 497 Canceling Printing P 467 Checking the Printing Status and History ...

Page 157: ...ng buttons or creating a shortcut key Customizing the Touch Panel Display P 186 You can change settings regarding the screen display such as which screen appears immediately after turning ON the machine and whether the message appears for remaining paper and toner Display Settings P 1043 You can set the screen to be displayed when a certain amount of time has passed without operation Function Afte...

Page 158: ...e the Home screen You can also display the menu by pressing and holding the background Customizing the Home screen enables you to change the background and button size Management settings enable you to display hide the timeline etc Customizing the Home Screen P 189 You can also display Menu by pressing and holding the background of the Home screen Log In Log Out You can log in log out by pressing ...

Page 159: ...emory media removal confirmation screen Button to the procedure for recovery replacement supply Paper jam recovery procedure screen Staple jam recovery procedure screen or staple cartridge replacement procedure screen Toner cartridge replacement procedure screen Waste toner container replacement procedure screen Staple waste punch waste trim waste removal procedure screen Replacement part replacem...

Page 160: ...ttings for Main Power P 1047 set to Off or quick startup could not be performed the timeline for users that do not use authentication such as unauthenticated users and guest users is deleted The timeline cannot be imported exported Importing Exporting the Setting Data P 827 Setting History The timeline is convenient for users who repeatedly use the same settings and destinations for a function suc...

Page 161: ...d P 1146 However the password in Password for the fax function is retained in the timeline regardless of the Prohibit Caching of Authentication Password P 1146 setting The password is not retained in the timeline for unauthenticated users or guest users regardless of the Prohibit Caching of Authentication Password P 1146 setting However if the password in Password for the fax function is set it is...

Page 162: ...y P 148 Fax P 149 Scan and Send P 150 Scan and Store Mail Box P 150 Scan and Store Advanced Box Network P 151 Print P 152 Copy Zoom ratio Paper source Number of copies Staple blank if not set N on 1 blank if not set Two sided booklet setting Color mode The icons for the two sided booklet setting indicate the following Not set One sided to two sided Basic Operations 148 ...

Page 163: ...let Booklet Scan Do Not Booklet Scan and two sided original set Fax Destination Number of broadcast destinations Different size originals blank if not set Two sided blank if not set Resolution Scan size Destination type The icons for the two sided setting indicate the following Book type Calendar type Basic Operations 149 ...

Page 164: ... First destination File format Two sided blank if not set Resolution Scan size Destination type of the first destination The icons for the two sided setting indicate the following Book type Calendar type Scan and Store Mail Box Basic Operations 150 ...

Page 165: ...N on 1 setting Two sided blank if not set Zoom ratio Scan size Mail Box icon fixed The icons for the two sided setting indicate the following Book type Calendar type Scan and Store Advanced Box Network Basic Operations 151 ...

Page 166: ...il Box icon The icons for the two sided setting indicate the following Book type Calendar type Print Number of jobs waiting to be printed Job name Among the jobs waiting to be printed the name of the job that is received last is displayed as the job name Basic Operations 152 ...

Page 167: ...e List P 155 Selecting a Button When you press a button the button color may change or a check mark may be added to indicate that it has been selected Press the function setting button to display the setting status in the upper section of a button and the color of the lower section is changed Press a button in which is located in the lower right to display the setting screen When the setting is ma...

Page 168: ...es to increase or decrease the numerical value By holding down the button you can change the value quickly Applying Canceling Settings Press OK to apply settings and press Cancel Settings to discard the changes and restore the previous settings In addition buttons such as Cancel which cancels the setting and returns to the previous screen Next which applies the setting to proceed to the next scree...

Page 169: ...layed items are displayed in descending order Sorting conditions differ depending on the function you are using If you log in with personal authentication management the sorting condition that was last used is retained List of Items That Can Be Personalized P 163 TIPS Tutorial View the function guide Press Tutorial to display a screen that introduces what you can do with the functions of the machi...

Page 170: ... Press End to return to the previous screen Operate in the same manner as with a smartphone flick pinch drag and drop On some screens you can switch the page or scroll by flicking your finger up down or left right on the screen as you would with a smartphone You can also zoom in or out on the screen by using two fingers to pinch out or pinch in You can drag the enlarged screen with your finger Cus...

Page 171: ... image is zoomed in out Preview screen Preview screenPreview screen If Enable Screen Magnification is set to On or If Enable Screen Magnification is set to Off You can also disable flick and pinch operations Use Flick Pinch Function P 1068 On screens with movable buttons the buttons can be dragged and dropped to move them LINKS Control Panel P 103 Entering Characters P 158 Basic Operations 157 ...

Page 172: ... of the cursor one by one If a character you want to delete is not to the left of the cursor press or to move the cursor Press on the control panel if you want to delete all the characters you entered Entry mode button Select the entry mode from the drop down list Alphanum Char Alphanumeric character entry mode Symbol Symbol entry mode You may not be able to select the entry mode because the type ...

Page 173: ...umbers Enter characters from the USB keyboard To enter characters you can also use a USB keyboard by connecting it to the USB port Front Side P 92 Note the following points when entering from a USB keyboard Set Use MEAP Driver for USB Input Device in USB Settings to Off Use MEAP Driver for USB Input Device P 1066 You can only enter ASCII characters from a USB keyboard Keys that are not displayed o...

Page 174: ...se of Personal Settings Enable Use of Personal Settings P 1138 to Off If Auto Reset Time is set the user is automatically logged out when no operations are performed for a specified period Auto Reset Time P 1048 When the User List Is Displayed Press your user name If a PIN code has been set enter your PIN code and press OK Log In The drop down lists on the top left of the screen enable you to chan...

Page 175: ...tions become available When you finish using the machine press Log Out or to log out You can log into the machine using the copy card For details about the copy card see Copy Card Reader P 1559 You can specify whether to save passwords entered during login in the cache Prohibit Caching of Authentication Password P 1146 If you set Display Button to Change Password on Settings Menu to On the passwor...

Page 176: ...Starting the Remote UI P 784 Basic Operations 162 ...

Page 177: ...e Items Displayed on the Home Screen P 144 Home settings Customizing the Home Screen P 189 Network SSID Network key Automatically Enable Disable Direct Connection at Login Logout Personal SSID and Network Key Settings P 1063 Access Point Mode Settings P 1062 Default job settings 1 2 3 Copy Change Default Settings P 1091 Fax Change Default Settings P 1105 Scan and Send 4 Change Default Settings P 1...

Page 178: ... Their Contents P 1569 1 Deleted when Delete Oldest User Settings is specified Action When Maximum Number of Users Exceeded P 1138 2 When a client machine synchronizes custom settings for the first time the synchronization of this item may not finish before the machine starts up 3 When synchronizing custom settings this item can be specified for individual machines within the scope of data sharing...

Page 179: ...e for the first time when no client machines are connected to the server machine The data may be initialized if the scope of data sharing is changed after the service is started For information on the keychain see Managing Users P 675 When the Switch Language Keyboard Accessibility and Personal SSID and Network Key Settings settings could not be reflected immediately after logging in they can be r...

Page 180: ...er P 167 Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi purpose Tray P 171 Registering Frequently Used Paper Size and Type for the Multi purpose Tray P 175 Fixing the Paper Size and Type to Use with the Multi Purpose Tray P 178 Registering Free Size Paper Custom Size Paper P 181 Automatically Selecting the Appropriate Paper Source for a Specific Function P 182 If the setting does not match the size a...

Page 181: ...er again Even when paper is loaded correctly some small standard sizes may not be detected correctly In this case press Unrecognized Standard Size and select the paper size Automatically Detectable Paper Sizes P 1498 If Custom is displayed even though the standard size paper is loaded press Custom Size Cancel Settings The correct size will be displayed When loading custom size paper 0UUY 023 0UW1 ...

Page 182: ...m Size Paper P 181 3 Press OK When loading envelopes Specify the type of envelopes loaded in the paper drawer 1 Select the paper drawer in which envelopes are loaded and press Envelope 2 Select the type of envelopes loaded in the paper drawer 3 Press OK When loading other size paper 1 Select the paper source in which paper is loaded and press Other Size 2 Select the paper size 3 Press OK Basic Ope...

Page 183: ... the paper drawer 3 Press OK 5 Select the paper source in which paper is loaded and press Set 6 Select the paper type and press OK If the paper type loaded is not displayed press Detailed Settings to select from a list If the paper type of the paper that you have loaded is not listed on the detailed setting screen you can register it in the paper type list Paper Type Management Settings P 1217 7 P...

Page 184: ...LINKS Hardware Specifications P 1485 Basic Operations 170 ...

Page 185: ...er size When loading standard size paper the paper size is automatically detected The paper sizes for automatic detection can be fixed to A B size inch size or A K size Paper Size Group for Auto Recognition in Drawer P 1041 If the displayed paper size is different from the loaded paper size the paper may not be loaded properly Load the paper again Even when paper is loaded correctly some small sta...

Page 186: ...ize is already registered in the printer driver 2 Specify the length of the X side and Y side Press X or Y to enter the length of each side using the numeric keys If you register the paper size you use frequently on buttons S1 to S5 you can call them up with a simple press Registering Free Size Paper Custom Size Paper P 181 3 Press OK When loading envelopes 1 Press Envelope The envelope paper type...

Page 187: ... paper type and press OK If the paper type loaded is not displayed press Detailed Settings to select from a list If the paper type of the paper that you have loaded is not listed on the detailed setting screen you can register it in the paper type list Paper Type Management Settings P 1217 The envelope paper type cannot be selected from the details screen of Paper Type To select the envelope paper...

Page 188: ...size and type is displayed If a message prompting you to adjust the paper guide is displayed adjust the width of the paper guide again and press OK LINKS Hardware Specifications P 1485 Paper Feed Mode for Printer Driver Jobs with MP Tray P 1093 Basic Operations 174 ...

Page 189: ... you load the paper in the multi purpose tray so that you can save the time and labor to make size and type settings each time you use the specific paper 1 Press 2 Press Preferences Paper Settings Register Favorite Paper Multi Purpose Tray 3 Select a button to register and press Register Edit You can change the registered name by pressing Rename 4 Select the paper size When registering standard si...

Page 190: ...ering Free Size Paper Custom Size Paper P 181 3 Press OK Next When registering envelopes 1 Press Envelope 2 Select the orientation and type of envelopes If you changed the placement of the envelopes press Short Edge Feed or Long Edge Feed and select the envelope type If you selected vertical placement for Nagagata 3 press Next and specify the flap length To register a custom size envelope press Cu...

Page 191: ...6 Press Close TIPS If Always Specify under Multi Purpose Tray Defaults is set to Favorite Paper a screen is displayed to allow you to select your Favorite Paper when you load the paper in the multi purpose tray Multi Purpose Tray Defaults P 1042 LINKS Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray P 120 Hardware Specifications P 1485 Basic Operations 177 ...

Page 192: ...1 Press 2 Press Preferences Paper Settings Multi Purpose Tray Defaults 3 Press Use Preset Register 4 Select the paper size When registering standard size paper 1 Select the standard size paper 2 Press Next When registering custom size paper 1 Press Custom Size You can specify the paper size as Free Size which eliminates the need to enter the paper size setting Specify Free Size when you load paper...

Page 193: ...nvelopes If you changed the placement of the envelopes press Short Edge Feed or Long Edge Feed and select the envelope type If you selected vertical placement for Nagagata 3 press Next and specify the flap length To register a custom size envelope press Custom Next and press X or Y to specify the side then use the numeric keys to enter the length of the specified side When using Kakugata 2 place i...

Page 194: ...vailable Paper P 1490 3 Press OK 5 Select the paper type and press OK 6 Press OK 7 Press Close LINKS Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray P 120 Hardware Specifications P 1485 Registering Frequently Used Paper Size and Type for the Multi purpose Tray P 175 Basic Operations 180 ...

Page 195: ...rawer P 167 or Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi purpose Tray P 171 1 Press 2 Press Preferences Paper Settings Register Custom Size 3 Select a button from S1 to S5 and press Register Edit You can assign an easy to remember name to the button by pressing Rename 4 Set the paper size and press OK Specify the length of the X side and Y side Press X or Y to enter the length of each side using...

Page 196: ... Color 1 in white 1 Only paper that can be printed on both sides are available For more information see Paper Available for Two Sided Copying Two Sided Printing P 1497 When the copy ratio is set to Auto a paper source will not be selected automatically When one of the following modes is set a paper source will not be selected automatically Booklet N on 1 Poster Copy ID Card Repeat Images Print on ...

Page 197: ... and copying is continued if another paper source is loaded with paper of the same size regardless of the paper type If you selected Printer in step 3 Set whether to put multiple paper sources in a group If paper source grouping is specified paper source selection is automatically performed within a group when you print by specifying any paper source belonging to that group To specify paper source...

Page 198: ...er 1 Receive 1 Other 1 IP Fax 1 Fax Copy Tray J Tray A 1 Copy 1 Access Stored Files 1 Printer 2 Receive 2 Other 2 IP Fax 2 Fax Tray B 2 Copy 2 Access Stored Files 2 Printer 1 Receive 1 Other 1 IP Fax 1 Fax Inner 2way Tray J and Copy Tray J Tray A 1 Copy 1 Access Stored Files 1 Printer Receive Other IP Fax Fax Tray B 2 Copy 2 Access Stored Files 2 Printer Receive Other IP Fax Fax Tray C Copy Access...

Page 199: ... selected output trays The priority is displayed as 1 2 and 3 Select Other when printing reports The IP fax function is displayed when the option is enabled The fax function is displayed for device configurations with a fax board installed A number is displayed at the end of the IP fax and fax functions to indicate the number of lines that are enabled Paper may not be output to the output tray spe...

Page 200: ...n the Home screen can be changed and the background image can be changed Home Management Settings enables you to configure the timeline display settings and display hide the function buttons Customizing the Home Screen P 189 Creating a Shortcut Function shortcut buttons can be displayed on each function screen Registering frequently used functions is convenient because it enables functions to be c...

Page 201: ... logged in user Customizing the Basic Features Screen P 196 Creating the Personal Shared Button It is possible to freely register frequently used functions and setting procedures on the Home screen Registering Frequently Used Settings and Destinations as Personal Buttons Shared Buttons on the Home Screen P 199 Changing the Language Displayed You can change the language displayed on the touch panel...

Page 202: ...n conveniently use the shortcut for that item to quickly switch the display Registering Shortcuts for Frequently Used Settings Registered Items P 207 Settings for Each User Personal Settings The displays and operation environment can be changed for each user Customizing the Screen Display Appearance and the Operational Conditions P 209 LINKS Using the Touch Panel Display P 140 Basic Operations 188...

Page 203: ...ize for Personal Use If the settings in Customize for Common Use are changed the changes are also reflected to Customize for Personal Use until the authenticated user configures Customize for Personal Use Home screen settings can be imported exported between machines that support the Home screen Importing Exporting the Setting Data P 827 Home screen settings are not imported to machines that suppo...

Page 204: ...obs using Shared buttons Personal buttons or Timeline History is not retained in the timeline when a user is not logged in and Allow Non Authentication Users to Use Timeline is set to Off or when a user is logged in and Allow Each Login User to Use Timeline is set to Off When Enable Use of Personal Settings is disabled Home Management Settings for Personal Use is grayed out and personal settings c...

Page 205: ...fferent function without returning to the Home screen To create a shortcut log in with administrator privileges Logging into the Machine P 160 Shortcuts that can be registered 4 1 Press Home Screen P 141 2 Press Shortcut Button Settings 3 Select a number for the shortcut to be created 4 Select the function you want to create a shortcut for Basic Operations 191 ...

Page 206: ...he list You can check the position of the shortcut selected and the function assigned to it in the preview screen on the left of the list If you do not use shortcuts select Unassigned from the list 5 Press OK Basic Operations 192 ...

Page 207: ... as favorite settings which can then be conveniently recalled Registering Settings P 193 Recalling Registered Settings P 194 The settings stored in memory are not deleted even if the main power is turned OFF Registering Settings Example Copy Function 1 Press Copy and specify the settings you want to register Home Screen P 141 Basic Copy Operations P 250 2 Press Register Edit Favorite Settings 3 Se...

Page 208: ... new file destination specified may include a password Do you want to include the password when registering Press No to register the destination without the password If the above messages is displayed when registering Favorite Settings for Scan and Send perform the following operations If you want to recall favorite settings without entering a password press Yes to retain the password information ...

Page 209: ...an and Send Display Confirmation for Favorite Settings P 1095 5 Press Copying starts The limit to the number of Favorite Settings you can register is as follows Copy 9 Fax 18 Scan and Send 18 Scan and Store Mail Box 9 Scan and Store Advanced Box Network Memory Media 9 Access Stored Files Mail Box 9 JPEG TIFF files in Access Stored Files Advanced Box Network Memory Media 9 PDF XPS files in Access S...

Page 210: ...ns on the Basic Features screen you can use functions more efficiently In addition by logging in with personal authentication management you can display a different Basic Features screen customized for each user Copy Basic Features screen Fax Basic Features screen Scan Basic Features screen Buttons that can be replaced Example Copy Basic Features screen 1 Press Copy and press Home Screen P 141 2 P...

Page 211: ... with the button selected in step 3 the new button selected in step 4 is displayed on the Basic Features screen The number of setting items located on the Basic Features screen and the location to be displayed differ depending on functions A shortcut button is not displayed if Unassigned is set as a shortcut The limit to the number of shortcuts for Options you can register is as follows Copy Basic...

Page 212: ...ng the default setting on the Basic Features screen After changing the settings for each function you can register the current settings as a default on the Basic Features screen by pressing followed by Change Default Settings If you log into the machine with personal authentication management Logging into the Machine P 160 before performing this setting it is registered as your own personal defaul...

Page 213: ...XR3 033 Frequently used settings and destinations can be registered to the Home screen as Personal buttons Shared buttons to recall those settings with a single button Shared buttons can be used by all users Personal buttons can only be used by login users Registering Personal Buttons Shared Buttons P 200 Basic Operations 199 ...

Page 214: ... buttons are indicated below Settings that can be registered in Favorite Settings for the Copy function Reducing Copying Operations P 357 Fax function settings of the machine Basic Operations for Sending Faxes P 389 Settings that can be registered in Favorite Settings for the Scan and Send function Useful Scanning Functions P 534 Settings that can be registered in Favorite Settings for the Scan an...

Page 215: ...ormation see Executing Personal Buttons Shared Buttons P 202 If you select On for Display Confirmation Screen When Recalling the confirmation screen below is displayed when you press the registered button Select Off if you do not want to display the confirmation screen If you select On for Start Operation for Recall Operation starts when button is pressed copying starts when you press the register...

Page 216: ...page is set for Home Screen Layout Settings Comment is not displayed for Personal buttons Shared buttons Customizing the Home Screen P 189 6 Press Close Executing Personal Buttons Shared Buttons This section describes how to execute Personal buttons Shared buttons The procedure for executing the function differs according to the settings specified when registering the Personal button Shared button...

Page 217: ...bles you to change the settings before pressing to start When Display Confirmation Screen When Recalling is set to Off If Start Operation for Recall Operation starts when button is pressed is set to On operations registered in the button start immediately If Start Operation for Recall Operation starts when button is pressed is set to Off the setting screen is displayed This enables you to change t...

Page 218: ...oceed with the operation that you want to perform Printing Documents in the Memory RX Inbox P 433 Keeping Received Documents Private P 436 LINKS Customizing the Home Screen P 189 Creating a Shortcut for a Frequently Used Function P 191 Customizing the Basic Features Screen P 196 Basic Operations 204 ...

Page 219: ...ng the Switch Language Keyboard Button on the Touch Panel Display P 205 Switching the Displayed Language and Keyboard Layout 1 Press 2 Press Preferences Display Settings Switch Language Keyboard 3 Select a language from the list and press OK For some languages the keyboard layout can be changed After selecting the language press Set select the layout type and press OK Showing the Switch Language K...

Page 220: ... displayed language to another by pressing the Switch Language Keyboard button selecting the desired language from the list and then press OK You can change the displayed language for each login user Customizing the Screen Display Appearance and the Operational Conditions P 209 Basic Operations 206 ...

Page 221: ...menu hierarchy If Settings Regist Shortcut is not displayed on the Home screen press Home Management Settings Restrict Function Display Set set Settings Regist Shortcut to be displayed Shortcuts that can be registered 10 1 Press Settings Regist Shortcut Home Screen P 141 2 Press Register 3 Select the button in which you want to register settings You can select the assigned button to change the reg...

Page 222: ... If you do not want to register settings select Unassigned Basic Operations 208 ...

Page 223: ...fect the settings of other users To use personal settings you need to log in with personal authentication management Managing Users P 675 Available settings The settings listed below can be configured The language used on the touch panel display Accessibility functions for users who have difficulty seeing or performing input operations on the touch panel display Personal access point personal SSID...

Page 224: ...ress OK When Automatically Enable Disable Direct Connection at Login Logout is set to On direction connections are possible when logging in without the need to press Enable for Direct Connection in Mobile Portal This setting can be used when Use Personal SSID and Network Key is set to On in Access Point Mode Settings Access Point Mode Settings P 1062 Only one mobile device may connect at a time wh...

Page 225: ...he machine starts If the machine is configured so that users are required to log in when it starts up Specifying When to Display the Login Screen P 707 Default Screen after Startup Restoration is displayed as an item in Personal Settings The screen that is displayed after the machine starts up can be set for each user LINKS List of Items That Can Be Personalized P 163 Switching the Displayed Langu...

Page 226: ...ers Visual Message Settings screen If you press on the control panel while a send fax job is being processed and the Fax Scan and Send screen is being displayed a pop up screen that directly cancels the ongoing job appears When multiple jobs are in process you can set which job to cancel the job that was last made or the job that is in the process of sending Job to Cancel When Stop is Pressed P 11...

Page 227: ...s produced for the Fax Memory Lock sending receiving result 1 Press the Volume Settings key Control Panel P 103 2 Adjust the volume or specify the setting and press OK Alarm Volume Adjust the volume of sound that is produced when fax transmission is canceled or when a received fax is finished printing If you do not want a sound to be produced press all the way to the left Monitor Volume Adjust the...

Page 228: ... display is pressed Invalid Entry Tone Sound produced when an invalid key button operation is performed or when you enter a number outside the valid setting range Restock Supplies Tone Sound produced when the amount of toner is low Forgot Original Tone Sound produced if original is remained on the platen glass after operation is finished Error Tone Sound produced when a malfunction such as paper j...

Page 229: ...4 Press OK Basic Operations 215 ...

Page 230: ...ode is canceled by the motion sensor and no operation is performed within 60 seconds the machine enters the sleep mode again even though the Auto Sleep time has not elapsed If Use Motion Sensor is set to Off the machine exits the sleep mode when one of the following operations is performed When the Energy Saver key is pressed on the control panel 1 When originals are placed in the feeder When the ...

Page 231: ... mode Follow the procedure below to set the amount of energy consumed in sleep mode Preferences Timer Energy Settings set Sleep Mode Energy Use to Low or High When using a wireless LAN or Bluetooth also while in sleep mode If you set Sleep Mode Energy Use to Low enable Compensate for Network Comm If Compensate for Network Comm is not enabled neither wireless LAN nor Bluetooth can be used during sl...

Page 232: ...e name or by selecting a function such as fax or e mail You can register destinations for all users destinations for your own use and destinations that only an administrator can edit Registering Destinations in the Address Book P 223 Function type button Select the button to filter destinations by function such as fax or e mail Address list drop down list Select an address list for a department or...

Page 233: ...ween supported machines For more information see Backing Up Restoring Data P 847 The Address Book can be personalized for each logged in user List of Items That Can Be Personalized P 163 Furthermore the Synchronize Custom Settings facility can be used to enable the Address Book to be shared by a number of Canon multifunction printers Synchronizing Settings for Multiple Canon Multifunction Printers...

Page 234: ...t is opened externally However if the server machine is performing other network communication during this time the number of machines that can connect may be reduced If the machine cannot connect a network error notice is sent The server machine destinations registered in Favorite Settings and the Personal Shared button of the client machine are not updated when the destinations are updated on th...

Page 235: ...Address List for Administrator Personal Address List User Group Address List 01 to 50 Move Copy from Address List 01 to 10 Address List for Administrator Move Copy Copy Personal Address List Copy Move User Group Address List 01 to 50 Copy Move Move Destination addresses cannot be moved copied in the following situations Situations when destination addresses cannot be copied to Address List 1 to Ad...

Page 236: ... Notice Yes Yes Yes No No Can be set as Reply to Yes Yes Yes No No Registering a Mail Box to a group address Yes Yes Yes No No Creating Group in an address list Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 1 Only the user groups that the user logged in on the control panel belongs to can be accessed All User Group Address Lists can be accessed when a user with Administrator privileges logs in from the Remote UI For inform...

Page 237: ... the imageRUNNER ADVANCE series To register a destination for your own use you need to log in with personal authentication management Managing Users P 675 Registering editing deleting of destinations can also be performed from the following screens Address Book on the Fax Basic Features screen Basic Operations for Sending Faxes P 389 Address Book on the Scan Basic Features screen Basic Operations ...

Page 238: ...h a registered user group select a registered User Group Address List Address List 1 to Address List 10 can be regarded as 10 separate address books Classifying an address list by departments or by business partners makes them easier to find when specifying a destination It is also easier to manage an address list if you change their names to department name or business partner name Rename Address...

Page 239: ... is connected to a PBX Private Branch Exchange press this button before entering the destination If this button is not available you need to register the R key settings R Key Setting P 1108 Space Enter a blank space between numbers to make them easier to read Pause If you press this button the character P pause is inserted When sending a fax overseas insert pauses after the international access co...

Page 240: ...n Set Auto Adjust Communication Speed When Using VoIP P 1109 to On to send and receive faxes more accurately when the line or other party is prone to errors If you set this to On the communication speed is limited to 14 400 bps or slower which reduces errors E mail 1 E Mail Address enter the e mail address and press OK 2 Select On or Off in Divide Data If the size of the data being sent exceeds th...

Page 241: ...n in Send P 1095 Use Send via Server in advance If this setting is Off the setting in Send via Server cannot be changed It is recommended to set Send P 1095 Allow MDN Not via Server to On Even if you set Send via Server to Off delivery confirmation of documents sent using the Full mode is carried out via the server Register Standard Fields This setting is required for using an Internet fax service...

Page 242: ...of the data to send matches the specifications of the recipient s device A4 LTR Sends with the A4 LTR size A4 LTR B4 Sends with the A4 LTR size or B4 size A4 LTR A3 11x17 Sends with the A4 LTR size or A3 11 x 17 size A4 LTR B4 A3 11x17 Sends with the A4 LTR size B4 size or A3 11 x 17 size If the paper size of the scanned data is smaller than the sizes set in Paper Size the data is sent with the sm...

Page 243: ...ur Network administrator about the information on the file server Advanced Box Protocol Select a protocol for the file server from Windows SMB FTP and WebDAV When sending a document to the Advanced Box select Windows SMB or WebDAV If you select Windows SMB the Search Host and Browse buttons are displayed You can easily specify a file server Advanced Box by searching or viewing the network You can ...

Page 244: ...33 clear the check box in If the check box is selected you cannot send data If you specify the destination for which you activate Confirm Before Sending as the forwarding destination the screen to enter the password does not appear The registered password is used and forwarding is performed If you set Protocol to Windows SMB or FTP specifying a folder that does not exist in Folder Path will result...

Page 245: ... When TLS is disabled Using the IPv4 format http 127 0 0 1 share Using an IP address IPv6 format http 1 share Using a host name http localhost share Using the IPv4 format http 127 0 0 1 users Using an IP address IPv6 format http 1 users Using a host name http localhost users When TLS is enabled Using the IPv4 format https 127 0 0 1 share Using an IP address IPv6 format https 1 share Using a host n...

Page 246: ...Edit as necessary You cannot search for destinations on an LDAP server from both the control panel and the Remote UI at the same time When searching for destinations on an LDAP server from the control panel of the machine you can specify four search conditions On the other hand when searching for destinations on an LDAP server from the Remote UI you can only specify one search condition You may ne...

Page 247: ...register a Mail Box in a group and send a scanned document attached to an e mail the document can be saved in the machine and checked later To register a group that contains destinations for your own use you need to log into the machine Logging into the Machine P 160 You cannot register new destinations in a group address Register destinations in the Address Book in advance Only destinations in th...

Page 248: ...ress List If you want to register destinations in a group which only an administrator can edit select Address List for Admin If you select Personal Address List you cannot select Store in Mail Box 7 Select the destinations you want to include in the group If you want to select destinations from the Address Book press Add from Address Book If you want to select a Mail Box machine s temporary storag...

Page 249: ...urn to the previous screen Search by Name Enter the destination name Press Search by Name again to return to the previous screen First letter button Select the alphanumeric button for the first character of the destination name Press All to display all registered destinations When you select Store in Mail Box 1 Select a Mail Box machine s temporary storage space that you want to register in a grou...

Page 250: ...t to register a file server in a group address set Confirm Before Sending to Off You cannot send to a group address including a file server in which Confirm Before Sending is set to On Basic Operations 236 ...

Page 251: ...Dest Fwd Settings Home Screen P 141 2 Press Register Destinations 3 Select the destination you want to edit Destination type button Select e mail fax I fax file or group to filter the destinations displayed in the address list Press All to display all registered destinations Address list drop down list Select Personal Address List Address List 1 to Address List 10 or Address List for Admin to filt...

Page 252: ...to Destinations Registered in the Address Book P 755 after pressing Access No Destinations in Personal Address List are only displayed for the login user that registered them Even if you have administrator privileges you cannot view or edit the destinations in Personal Address List for other users 4 Press Details Edit If you want to delete a destination select the destination and press Delete Yes ...

Page 253: ... you can also register a file server folder location IP address and path to use when storing scanned data 1 Press Dest Fwd Settings Home Screen P 141 2 Press Register One Touch 3 Select the one touch number to register the destination in and press Register Edit A three digit number 001 to 200 is assigned to each one touch button You can also specify a one touch button by pressing and entering the ...

Page 254: ...earch for destinations using Search by Conditions or Search by Name After confirming the settings of the destination press One Touch Name enter the one touch name to be displayed press OK When the user name and password are correct but the search result is empty check the time setting both on the LDAP server and the machine If the time setting between the LDAP server and the machine differs by fiv...

Page 255: ...Box machine s temporary storage space in a group Making Simple Edits to Files P 591 1 Press Dest Fwd Settings Home Screen P 141 2 Press Register One Touch 3 Select the one touch button you want to register and press Register Edit 4 Press Group 5 Press Name enter the group name and press OK 6 Press One Touch Name enter the one touch button name to be displayed and press OK Basic Operations 241 ...

Page 256: ...want to select a destination from a one touch button press Add from One Touch select the destination press OK If you want to select a Mail Box machine s temporary storage space press Store in Mail Box select the Mail Box press OK 8 Press OK Close Basic Operations 242 ...

Page 257: ...ter registering destinations you can change or delete their settings 1 Press Dest Fwd Settings Home Screen P 141 2 Press Register One Touch 3 Select the one touch button you want to edit or delete If you want to edit the settings of the one touch button press Register Edit For details about how to edit the settings see step 7 in Registering Destinations in the Address Book P 223 Press OK after you...

Page 258: ...ze Originals 281 Copying Separately Scanned Originals Together Job Build 283 Checking the Copy Results 285 Copying Immediately by Interrupting Other Jobs 288 Functions Useful for Making and Managing Material 289 Finishing by Collating Grouping 290 Finishing with the Stapler 292 Other Finishing Functions 294 Attaching Numbers and Symbols to Copies 295 Making Booklets 298 Making Booklets Booklet Cop...

Page 259: ... Confidential Documents 348 Embedding the TOP SECRET Text Secure Watermark 349 Disabling Copying of Documents Document Scan Lock 352 Restricting Copying Using a TL Code 353 Restricting Copying Using a QR Code 355 Reducing Copying Operations 357 Recalling Previously Used Copy Settings Previous Settings 358 Changing the Settings Quickly Express Copy Screen 360 Restrictions Regarding the Combination ...

Page 260: ...ctions useful for enhancing copy quality and operational efficiency such as adjusting sharpness to obtain clearer print results and combining multiple originals to efficiently copy them at once Enhancing and Adjusting Copy Quality P 263 Copying Efficiently P 275 Making Booklets and Handouts This section describes copy functions that enable you to create booklets with covers or create documents sui...

Page 261: ...y functions from document editing functions such as layout change and label making to security functions for preventing information leakage Useful Copy Functions P 309 Restricting Copying of Confidential Documents P 348 Reducing Copying Operations P 357 Copying 247 ...

Page 262: ...s You can check the settings in the list You can also make changes to the settings Basic Copy Operations P 250 Press this icon to register the current settings in Favorite Settings of or to change the buttons displayed in Registering a Combination of Frequently Used Functions P 193 Customizing the Basic Features Screen P 196 Previous Settings Press to recall the previously specified settings Recal...

Page 263: ...ediately by Interrupting Other Jobs P 288 Some functions cannot be used in combination with each other Buttons that cannot be selected are displayed in light gray The number of pages remaining is displayed if a page limit is set with Department ID Management For information on setting Department ID Management and page limits see Configuring the Department ID Management Settings P 715 TIPS Change t...

Page 264: ...pecify the copy settings as necessary Select ColorSelect Color Selecting Color Copying or Black and White Copying Copy RatioCopy Ratio Enlarging or Reducing Copies Select Paper Selecting Copy Paper 2 Sided 2 Sided Copying DensityDensity Adjusting Image Quality of Copies Selecting Color Copying or Black and White Copying You can select the color mode for copying For example this enables you to save...

Page 265: ...ecified color or approximate color with black or the specified color Conversion Color by Specific Color for Two Colors Print P 1079 Single Color Copies with the color you specify only Select Red Green Blue Yellow Magenta or Cyan Example If you copy with red 3 Press OK Depending on the state of the color original it may be detected as black and white when scanned even if you set Auto Color B W To a...

Page 266: ...can enlarge or reduce copies from standard paper sizes to other standard paper sizes Enlarging or Reducing Copies with Standard Paper Sizes You can enlarge or reduce by specifying the copy ratio You can specify the vertical and horizontal ratios individually Enlarging or Reducing Copies by Specifying the Copy Ratio You can enlarge or reduce by specifying the finished dimension and the output image...

Page 267: ...longer side sideways A4 A3 B5 B4 A5 A3 Enlarging or Reducing Copies by Specifying the Copy Ratio 1 Press Copy Ratio 2 Specify the copy ratio and press OK To specify vertical and horizontal ratios individually press XY Ratio and then specify the ratios for each Depending on the ratio the image on the printout may be rotated by 90 degrees If you specified Auto XY Ratio select paper in Select Paper I...

Page 268: ...s well To specify the vertical dimension and horizontal dimension individually press XY Independent and specify the dimension for each The machine automatically calculates the correct copy zoom ratio based on the values you entered However the original image may be cut off slightly depending on the paper size The machine converts the specified sizes into a copy zoom ratio using the following formu...

Page 269: ...ing settings in Scan and Store You cannot specify Fit to Page when storing documents in the Mail Box Selecting Copy Paper If you want to copy free size originals or highly transparent originals or if you want to copy with paper set in the multi purpose tray you need to select paper manually 1 Press Select Paper 2 Select paper and press OK Pressing enables you to confirm detailed information of the...

Page 270: ...ing an original with an image that extends all the way to the edges If you copy on the same size paper the periphery of the original image may be cut off slightly on the copy For more information on how much may be cut off see Hardware Specifications P 1485 2 Sided Copying You can copy 1 sided originals on both sides of the paper You can also copy a 2 sided original on both sides of the paper or o...

Page 271: ...bottom orientation Select Calendar Type to make the front and back sides of the printout have opposite top bottom orientations Copying 2 Sided to 2 Sided 1 Press Options 2 Sided 2 Press 2 Sided 2 Sided 3 Set Original Type and Finishing Copy Format and press OK To specify orientation of the original and change the print orientation press Set Details Select Book Type when the front and back sides of...

Page 272: ...d back sides of the original have opposite top bottom orientations Adjusting Image Quality of Copies You can adjust density of the entire document For example increasing copy density enables you to easily read faint characters written in pencil Adjusting the Density of Copies You can adjust density of the background This enables you to make clear copies of originals such as newspapers or originals...

Page 273: ...ty of the entire background Press to increase the density of the entire background Depending on the colors of originals sections other than the background may be affected If you press Adjust Adjust Each Color you can adjust the background density by color 4 Press OK If you set BleedReduce to On you can help prevent the reverse side of the page or the next page from showing when scanning Check Sett...

Page 274: ...resume scanning To set the machine in advance to not notify you of multiple sheet feeding perform one of the following operations Each time you copy press Options on the Copy Basic Features screen select Detect Feeder Multi Sheet Fd to disable the setting Set Set Detection of Feeder Multi Sheet Feed as Default to Off Set Detection of Feeder Multi Sheet Feed as Default P 1084 TIPS Reserving a copy ...

Page 275: ...Copy job you want to cancel and the list of copy jobs are displayed You can select the copy job from the list and cancel the job by pressing Cancel If you log in with personal authentication management and log out after pressing on the control panel to display the message Stop Select the Copy job you want to cancel and the list of copy jobs the last job that the logged out user executed is cancele...

Page 276: ...pying stops 6 Press Close If you press on the control panel when copy jobs are waiting all the copy jobs are paused and then the message Stop Select the Copy job you want to cancel and the list of the copy jobs are displayed You can select a copy job from the list and cancel the copy job by pressing Cancel If you want to resume copying press Resume Copying Copying 262 ...

Page 277: ...ecessary dark borders In addition you can change the visual image of the copy result by inverting colors Selecting the Type of Original for Copying P 264 Adjusting Sharpness for Copying Sharpness P 266 Erasing Dark Borders When Copying Erase Frame P 267 Inverting Colors Nega Posi P 269 Adjusting the Color P 270 One Touch Color Mode P 273 Copying 263 ...

Page 278: ...of the page or the next page from showing when scanning If you select Printed Image you can copy printed photographs photographs made with halftone dots with optimal print quality If you select Photo Printout you can copy photographs printed on photographic paper with optimal print quality For thin black and white originals such as newspapers it is recommended that you specify Options Density Back...

Page 279: ...7 Press Copying starts Copying 265 ...

Page 280: ...ped wavy pattern to smooth the finished image 1 Place the original Placing Originals P 109 2 Press Copy Home Screen P 141 3 Press Options on the Copy Basic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P 248 4 Press Sharpness 5 Adjust sharpness and press OK To sharpen blurred text adjust the control in Text to High To reduce moire when copying originals that contain printed photos such as magazines o...

Page 281: ...feeder may result in damage 1 Place the original Placing Originals P 109 2 Press Copy Home Screen P 141 3 Press Options on the Copy Basic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P 248 4 Press Erase Frame 5 Specify erasing type and width Erasing the frames in copies of documents 1 Press Erase Original Frame and set Original Size If the size displayed in Original Size is different from the size o...

Page 282: ...er or Sides and enter each erasing width Erasing punch holes in copies of documents 1 Press Erase Binding and select punch hole location 2 Enter erasing width If you want to adjust the width for each border independently press Erase Original Frame or Erase Book Frame and then press Adjust Independently to enter the erasing widths 6 Press OK Close 7 Press Copying starts Copying 268 ...

Page 283: ...the original appear black on the copy and black portions appear white The printed image will look like a film negative 1 Place the original Placing Originals P 109 2 Press Copy Home Screen P 141 3 Press Options on the Copy Basic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P 248 4 Press Nega Posi 5 Press Close 6 Press Copying starts Copying 269 ...

Page 284: ...ls P 109 2 Press Copy Home Screen P 141 3 Press Options on the Copy Basic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P 248 4 Press Color Balance 5 Press or for each color to adjust the color balance 6 Perform other adjustment Adjust Saturation To set the saturation for all colors use the Low or High button for All Colors To set each color separately use the Low or High button for each color When a...

Page 285: ...ine Adjust Density Select a color and adjust its density level by its density area using the or button When adjustment is complete press OK Adjust Black Hue Adjust towards the side of Lighter to prevent the image from becoming over darkened Adjust towards the side of Darker if text and images are too light When adjustment is complete press OK 7 Press OK Close 8 Press Copying starts Copying 271 ...

Page 286: ...ect a button from C1 to C4 press Register Yes OK To recall registered settings press Recall Register select a button and press OK You can change the button names of C1 to C4 Select the button to change press Rename and enter a new name To delete registered settings select the button press Delete Yes Copying 272 ...

Page 287: ...tton such as having subtle colors or having a retro finish like an old photograph 1 Place the original Placing Originals P 109 2 Press Copy Home Screen P 141 3 Press Options on the Copy Basic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P 248 4 Press Adjust One Touch Color 5 Select the desired image quality Example adjustment Copying 273 ...

Page 288: ...nnot be selected at the same time and Lighten Image Darken Image and Highlight Reproduction cannot be selected at the same time 6 Press OK Close 7 Press Copying starts The settings in Options Color Balance automatically change according to the image quality you select If you select Sepia Tone Single Color Sepia Tone is displayed in Select Color on the Basic Features screen If you are printing a do...

Page 289: ...ether or combining originals scanned with different settings to copy them together Copying Multiple Originals onto One Sheet N on 1 P 276 Copying a Facing Page Original as Two Separate Pages P 278 Copying Different Size Originals Together Different Size Originals P 281 Copying Separately Scanned Originals Together Job Build P 283 Checking the Copy Results P 285 Copying Immediately by Interrupting ...

Page 290: ... on 1 5 Select the way to arrange pages and select the original size and paper size for copying Select how many pages to be arranged onto a single sheet of paper You can change the arrangement order as well To make 2 sided copies or to scan 2 sided originals to make 1 sided copies press 2 Sided Settings For more information on the setting see 2 Sided Copying in step 4 of Basic Copy Operations P 25...

Page 291: ...Originals must all be the same size If you set N on 1 Shift is automatically set to Center Copying 277 ...

Page 292: ...riginal on the platen glass Place it face down with its corner aligned with the top left corner of the platen glass as shown below Copying a Facing Page Original onto Two Sheets of Paper P 278 Copying a Facing Page Original onto Both Sides of One Sheet of Paper P 279 Book 2 PagesBook 2 Pages Copying a Facing Page Original onto Two Sheets of Paper 1 Place the original Placing Originals P 109 2 Pres...

Page 293: ...f you want to change the setting press Set Details Book 2 Sided Type If you select Left Right 2 Sided the left and right pages of the facing page original are copied separately onto both sides of one sheet of paper If you select Front Back 2 Sided the front side and back side of one page of the facing page original are copied onto both sides of one sheet of paper 6 Press OK Close 7 Press Scanning ...

Page 294: ...8 Press Start Copying Copying starts Copying 280 ...

Page 295: ... as this may cause damage to the originals or paper jams You cannot combine all of the following modes at the same time Different Size Originals Shift Select Paper Auto 1 Place the originals in the feeder Placing Originals P 109 To place the originals with the same width align the top and bottom edges of the originals with the edges of the feeder as shown in the figure below To place the originals...

Page 296: ...of the smaller size originals may be slanted because the originals cannot be fixed with the slide guides If Different Size Originals is set for copying each original is output with the optimal size of paper If you want to copy all originals with the same size of paper or copy 1 sided originals of different sizes to both sides specify the paper with Select Paper If you do not specify Select Paper t...

Page 297: ...ose 5 Press to scan the originals When scanning is complete the screen appears prompting you to scan the next original 6 Place the next original and press to scan the original Repeat this step until you finish scanning all of the originals To change the scan settings press Change Settings The following functions can be used in Change Settings You need to set the necessary scan settings in advance ...

Page 298: ... Copying starts Copying 284 ...

Page 299: ...Collate Page Order Offset Rotate 90 Degrees Staple Collate Booklet Front Cover Insert Sheets Transparency Cover Sheets Copy Sample Checking the Copy Result by Making a Copy Copy Sample When you specified multiple numbers of copies you can first make a copy of your whole original to check the result and then start making the rest of the copies You can also copy only specific pages of your original ...

Page 300: ...riginals onto One Sheet N on 1 P 276 the number of finished pages becomes 5 If you want to copy the seventh to tenth pages of the original specify the fourth page for Start Page and the fifth page for End Page 6 Press to scan the originals and press Start Copying The copy sample is printed Check the result If there is no problem with the copy result Press Start Printing to print the number of copi...

Page 301: ...48 5 Press Print Check Close 6 Press The check print is output Check the result If there is no problem with the copy result To scan the next original place the original and press After scanning all of the pages press Start Copying to start copying If you want to scan the original again To delete the scanned document and scan again select the Re Scan check box and press If you want to change settin...

Page 302: ...nterrupt again before pressing When interrupt copying finishes the previous job restarts automatically During interrupt copying you cannot perform another interrupt copying After the current interrupt copying finishes perform the next interrupt copying Even when the number of reserved copy jobs has reached its limit interrupt copying can still be performed TIPS You can interrupt jobs with a reserv...

Page 303: ... when copying In addition attaching serial numbers or CONFIDENTIAL to important material calls attention to the handling of the material Finishing by Collating Grouping P 290 Finishing with the Stapler P 292 Other Finishing Functions P 294 Attaching Numbers and Symbols to Copies P 295 Copying 289 ...

Page 304: ...ets for the second page and so forth 1 Place the original Placing Originals P 109 2 Press Copy Home Screen P 141 3 Press Options on the Copy Basic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P 248 4 Press Finishing 5 Press Collate Page Order or Group Same Pages 6 Set Offset as necessary If you do not want to use offset a function to shift the paper output position press If you selected Collate Page...

Page 305: ... enables you to use the Collate Group function even if the original is placed on the platen glass Insert a job separator between each page during a group output If you select Group Same Pages you can insert a job separator between each group For more information see Job Separator Between Groups Copy P 1091 Job Separator Between Groups When configuring settings in Access Stored Files The finishing ...

Page 306: ...09 2 Press Copy Home Screen P 141 3 Press Options on the Copy Basic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P 248 4 Press Finishing 5 Press Staple Collate or Staple Group Next Staple is displayed only when you are printing a PDF file with Access Stored Files 6 Select how to staple To staple in one location in the corner of the page select Corner for the staple position Copying 292 ...

Page 307: ...ve staples or temporarily bind the paper as you can easily tear off the paper by rubbing the crimped part 7 Press OK Close 8 Press Copying starts Depending on finishing functions the installation of optional devices is needed Optional Equipment P 1516 Depending on the paper type you cannot use finishing functions Hardware Specifications P 1485 You can specify the procedure to perform when there ar...

Page 308: ...cape orientation Hole Punch You can make punch holes for filing Saddle Fold Using the booklet finisher you can fold the output sheets in half You can specify how many sheets to fold together and which page to start printing on Depending on the paper type you cannot use finishing functions Hardware Specifications P 1485 When configuring settings in Access Stored Files The finishing function can be ...

Page 309: ...tuations such as when you distribute multiple copies of documents 1 Place the original Placing Originals P 109 2 Press Copy Home Screen P 141 3 Press Options on the Copy Basic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P 248 4 Press Page Numbering Copy Set Numbering Watermark or Print Date 5 Select the printing format There are no settings to select if you specified Copy Set Numbering Watermark or...

Page 310: ... of the placed original As shown in the illustrations below if the original is placed in the portrait orientation when facing you select Upright Image if placed in the landscape orientation select Sideways Image Upright Image Sideways Image 8 Specify the content to print 9 Press OK Close 10 Press Copying starts Numbers and symbols are not printed on covers Adding a Cover and Back Cover P 307 or in...

Page 311: ...ith these settings appears when you press If you select With Chapter Numbers in combination with Insert Sheets the chapter numbers are counted at the following times After each chapter page is inserted After each sheet insertion is inserted If you set Copy Set Numbering Option Settings to On the settings you can specify change as follows Copy Set Numbering Option Settings P 1081 You can no longer ...

Page 312: ...ts with binding margins and covers In addition you can efficiently configure the settings for making booklets such as page layout 2 sided copying and adding covers Making Booklets Booklet Copying P 299 Setting Binding Margins P 305 Adding a Cover and Back Cover P 307 Copying 298 ...

Page 313: ...the following For information on restrictions on paper for each option see Hardware Specifications P 1485 Depending on paper size and type booklet copying may not be available The number of sheets to be printed using saddle stitch is limited Paper that can be used for the content and cover pages is limited 1 Place the original Placing Originals P 109 When copying a vertically long original place t...

Page 314: ...rs However page numbers cannot be printed on all pages of the original document Page numbers are printed on each page of the booklet 6 Select how to bind the booklet 7 Set the original size and the output size Press Change in Original Size and select the size of original If you select Auto the booklet size is automatically selected according to the size of original Press Change in Layout Size and ...

Page 315: ...t Details and specify detailed settings as necessary When the number of pages is large When the number of pages is large and the booklet cannot be stapled together you can divide it into volumes so that they can be stapled 1 Press Divided Booklet 2 Enter the number of pages per volume 3 OK Press OK When the inner pages protrude after being folded in half If a stack of paper is folded in half the i...

Page 316: ...t the trimming position Adjusting the saddle stitch position You can shift the folding position and stapling position at the same time 1 Press Change Fold Stitch Position 2 Select the paper for copying and enter the saddle stitch position 3 Press OK Close OK Adjusting the folding position of the paper When you selected Fold Only in step 6 you can shift the folding position from the center 1 Press ...

Page 317: ...flat spine by folding the bound portion at right angles 1 Press Saddle Press 2 Adjust the strength of the saddle press 3 Press OK Close OK 11 Press OK Close 12 Press Copying starts When configuring settings in Access Stored Files The booklet mode can be used only when you are printing a PDF XPS file or a file stored in the Mail Box You cannot set 2 Sided Original N on 1 and Original Size for a fil...

Page 318: ... When a PDF XPS file is selected you can only set the Fold mode and the Saddle Stitch mode LINKS Adding a Cover and Back Cover P 307 Hardware Specifications P 1485 Copying 304 ...

Page 319: ...on the Copy Basic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P 248 4 Press Gutter 5 Select the margin position If Gutter is set with N on 1 Copying Multiple Originals onto One Sheet N on 1 P 276 the margin specified for the front side is applied to both sides The margin specified for the back side is not applied 6 Enter the margin width Press Front Side or Back Side and enter each margin width If ...

Page 320: ...ack side only 2 Sided 2 Sided You do not need to set the Gutter mode 2 Sided 1 Sided Set the Gutter mode for the back side only If there is no gutter 1 Sided 2 Sided Set the Gutter mode for both the front side and back side 2 Sided 2 Sided Set the Gutter mode for both the front side and back side 2 Sided 1 Sided Set the Gutter mode for both the front side and back side Copying 306 ...

Page 321: ... Specifying Paper Size and Type P 166 1 Place the original Placing Originals P 109 2 Press Copy Home Screen P 141 3 Press Options on the Copy Basic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P 248 4 Press Add Cover 5 Specify the settings for the cover and back cover To add a cover press Front Cover When copying to the cover you can set where to copy the front side the back side or both sides To ad...

Page 322: ...8 Press Copying starts LINKS Making Booklets Booklet Copying P 299 Copying 308 ...

Page 323: ...es is completed by e mail Copying Free Size Originals P 311 Mirroring Images Mirror Image P 312 Shifting the Image P 313 Copying with the Image Repeated Repeat Images P 315 Inserting Sheets and Chapter Pages Insert Sheets P 317 Inserting Sheets When Copying Onto Transparencies P 322 Superimposing Images P 324 Combining Jobs with Different Settings Into a Single Job Merge Job Blocks P 327 Storing C...

Page 324: ...otifying You of the Completion of Copying by E Mail P 333 Making ID Card Copies P 335 Area Designation P 337 Enlarging an Image to Make a Poster P 341 Skipping Blank Pages When Printing P 346 Copying 310 ...

Page 325: ...r Placing Originals P 109 2 Press Copy Home Screen P 141 3 Press Options on the Copy Basic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P 248 4 Press Free Size Original and press Close 5 Select copy paper Basic Copy Operations P 250 6 To copy 2 sided originals configure the 2 sided copy settings Basic Copy Operations P 250 7 Press Copying starts The enlarging or reducing setting cannot be performed ...

Page 326: ...reflection in a mirror Without using a computer you can easily create symmetrical graphics and diagrams 1 Place the original Placing Originals P 109 2 Press Copy Home Screen P 141 3 Press Options on the Copy Basic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P 248 4 Press Mirror Image 5 Press Close 6 Press Copying starts Copying 312 ...

Page 327: ...margins around the image by copying to paper larger than the original or by reducing the copied image to a size smaller than the paper size When these margins are available the image can be shifted to an edge or the center of the paper 1 Place the original Placing Originals P 109 2 Press Copy Home Screen P 141 3 Press Options on the Copy Basic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P 248 4 Pre...

Page 328: ...specify the moving distance Press Set in Front Side and specify the moving distance Press the up down left right buttons indicating directions and enter the moving distance using the numeric keys If you want to move the image on the back side when copying both sides the Back Side setting is needed To move to the same position as the front side press Same as Front Side To move symmetrically press O...

Page 329: ...ted images may be partially cut off Example of an incorrect setting Placing an original that is the same size as the output paper and repeating the image twice vertically and twice horizontally Example of a correct setting Placing an original that is one fourth the size of the output paper and repeating the image twice vertically and twice horizontally If the original size is smaller than the outp...

Page 330: ...il the images fill the paper 6 Set blank spaces between images and press OK Enter the blank space width If you want to set a different blank space width above the image under the image to the left of the image and to the right of the image press Adjust Independently to enter each width 7 Press OK Close 8 Press Copying starts Copying 316 ...

Page 331: ...sert in front of the first page the front cover is output first and then the tab paper is output The front cover outputs as a blank paper and copies are made starting from the tab paper If you select Leave Blank for the sheet insertion you can set the same page for tab paper In this case the paper for the sheet insertion is output first and then the tab paper is output Inserting Sheets Specify the...

Page 332: ... Sheets to Insert and enter the number of sheets using the numeric keys To print on the sheets select Print on Front Side Print on Back Side or Print on Both Sides in Print Settings 9 Press OK The screen returns to the screen in step 5 and the setting you specified is shown in the first line of the list Inserting the sheet in another page Select the second line onwards in the list press Add and re...

Page 333: ...ings because Chapter Pages is set to print only on one side by default Print on TabPrint on Tab Inserting Tab Paper Specify the page to insert the tab paper set the number of sheets and select whether to print on the tab paper If you want to print on the tab paper include the original to be printed on the tab in the original document When you print on the tab place the original as in the following...

Page 334: ... Settings to enter the number of sheets using the numeric keys Select the paper size in Select Paper to match the tab paper you loaded To change the paper press Change Press Print Settings to set whether to print on the tab 10 Specify the page to insert the tab paper Press Page No to enter the page to insert the tab paper using the numeric keys If you will not print on the tab and insert the tab p...

Page 335: ...eleting tab paper Select the tab paper from the list and press Details Edit or Delete 12 Press OK Close 13 Press Copying starts TIPS Instead of inserting the tab paper when copying you can print the tab paper by itself Load the tab paper place the original to be printed on the tab paper and press Print on Tab in step 4 LINKS Inserting Sheets When Copying Onto Transparencies P 322 Adding a Cover an...

Page 336: ... paper Loading Paper P 116 For information on the paper size available for transparencies see Hardware Specifications P 1485 2 Place the original Placing Originals P 109 3 Press Copy Home Screen P 141 4 Press Options on the Copy Basic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P 248 5 Press Transparency Cover Sheets 6 Select whether to copy on the insert sheet and specify the insert sheet To copy ...

Page 337: ... Copying starts LINKS Inserting Sheets and Chapter Pages Insert Sheets P 317 Copying 323 ...

Page 338: ...ess Function Settings Common Print Settings Register Form Register 2 Select the size of the original for the form image and press Next 3 Specify scan settings as necessary For information on scan settings see Basic Copy Operations P 250 Enhancing and Adjusting Copy Quality P 263 Pressing Form Name enables you to set the name of the form image Even if you do not enter the form name the saving date ...

Page 339: ...lete You can register up to 100 image forms However this number varies depending on the capacity of the hard disk Superimposing the Form Image Superimpose the form image onto the document to output 1 Place the original Placing Originals P 109 2 Press Copy Home Screen P 141 3 Press Options on the Copy Basic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P 248 4 Press Superimpose Image 5 Press Set in Fr...

Page 340: ...mage from the list and press Check Print If you want to confirm the size of the form image and the overlap setting press Details 7 Select how the image overlaps and press OK To superimpose the form image without adjusting the density press Solid To superimpose the form image with the density decreased press Transparent and adjust the density 8 Press OK Close 9 Press Copying starts If you changed t...

Page 341: ...press OK To configure Finishing see Basic Copy Operations P 250 To configure Job Separator see Paper Output Settings Job Separator Between Jobs P 1077 or Job Separator Between Copies P 1077 To configure Secure Watermark Document Scan Lock see Restricting Copying of Confidential Documents P 348 To configure Page Numbering Copy Set Numbering Watermark Print Date see Functions Useful for Making and M...

Page 342: ...re scanning the next batch of originals i e between batches You need to set the necessary scan settings in advance since you cannot change the settings in Options during the Job Build mode Copy Ratio 2 Sided Original Density Original Type You cannot adjust the exposure while printing if Secure Watermark is set for the entire block 7 Place the next original configure settings on the Copy Basic Feat...

Page 343: ...rt Sheets P 317 Edit Adjust You can preview pages or delete specific pages or jobs Add Originals You can scan more originals to add to the output Add from Mail Box You can call documents from the Mail Box to add to the output Making Simple Edits to Files P 591 Details When selecting documents in Details is displayed You can confirm the settings for each document Print Sample You can print a copy s...

Page 344: ... Maximum number of job blocks that can be scanned 100 Copying 330 ...

Page 345: ...as necessary Basic Copy Operations P 250 4 Press Options on the Copy Basic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P 248 5 Press Store in Mail Box 6 Select the destination Mail Box 7 Enter a file name by pressing File Name and then press OK Even if you do not enter a file name the machine automatically assigns it a name using the year month day and time the file was created For example if a fil...

Page 346: ...5 to clear the check box Print settings are saved together allowing you to always print documents with the same finishing as well as save you the trouble of specifying settings To print the stored files see Printing Files in the Mail Box P 601 You can change the time period for storing files Specifying the Mail Box Settings P 604 LINKS Making Simple Edits to Files P 591 Copying 332 ...

Page 347: ...eds to be specified from the Address Book Register the desired destination beforehand Registering Destinations in the Address Book P 223 1 Place the original Placing Originals P 109 2 Press Copy Home Screen P 141 3 Specify the copy settings as necessary Basic Copy Operations P 250 4 Press Options on the Copy Basic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P 248 5 Press Job Done Notice 6 Select an...

Page 348: ...8 Press Documents are scanned and copying starts When copying is complete the notification e mail is sent to the specified address Copying 334 ...

Page 349: ... Place the ID card face down with its corner aligned with the top left corner of the platen glass as shown below The Copy ID Card mode cannot be used when the ID card is placed in the feeder If another original is set in the feeder you cannot start copying Remove the original from the feeder Only A4 and A4R paper can be used for Copy ID Card 1 Place the ID card on the platen glass face down Placin...

Page 350: ...s completed a screen will appear notifying you that preparations to scan the back side are complete 8 Turn the ID card over so that its back side is facing down and press to scan the back side After the back side is scanned printing starts automatically Copying 336 ...

Page 351: ...rea to copy while checking the preview screen it is not necessary to cut the original 1 Place the original Placing Originals P 109 2 Press Copy Home Screen P 141 3 Press Options on the Copy Basic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P 248 4 Press Area Designation 5 Press Touch Entry 6 Press Start Scanning The original is scanned and the preview screen is displayed 7 Specify the area to copy ...

Page 352: ...splay If it is difficult to specify an area because the space between text or images is small press Fine Adjust to perform fine adjustment of the area You can move the position of an individual point by selecting the desired Move Point button after selecting one of the corner points by pressing the Select Point You can specify up to four areas After specifying the first area press or to specify th...

Page 353: ...center of the paper press Center Shift 11 Press OK 12 Press Copying starts Specifying more complicated areas You can specify areas with a complicated shape as indicated in the diagram below Press Enter Multipoints on the screen in step 7 and specify the area using 4 to 10 points After pressing the last point press Set Multipoints to confirm the area When using this method you can only specify one ...

Page 354: ...a and the original s right edge X1 the left edge of the area and the original s right edge X2 the top edge of the area and the original s top edge Y1 and the bottom edge of the area and the original s top edge Y2 press Numeric Key Entry in step 5 and enter the dimensions of X1 X2 Y1 and Y2 using the numeric keys Combining with the Image Repeat mode If you want to use Framing and Repeat Images at t...

Page 355: ...B W Select Color is automatically set to Full Color Basic Copy Operations P 250 Copy Ratio and Paper Settings The following table indicates an estimate of the original size and copy ratio for different size posters and the optimal paper size and number of sheets to use Refer to this table when entering the copy ratio and when specifying the paper size and number of sheets Poster size Original size...

Page 356: ...S Joining the copied sheets The copied sheets have areas where the images overlap and as indicated in the diagram below When joining the sheets together cut these areas to an appropriate width and glue them together The width of the areas where the images overlap differs according to the copy ratio and paper size Specifying the Copy Ratio Specify the ratio for enlarging the image to create a poste...

Page 357: ...7 Press Copying starts Specifying the Paper Size to Use and Number of Sheets If you want to create a poster by selecting the paper because you want to use paper in the multi purpose tray or if there is only a specific size of paper loaded in the machine it is necessary to specify the paper size and number of sheets 1 Place the original Placing Originals P 109 Copying 343 ...

Page 358: ...creen P 141 3 Press Copy Ratio 4 Press Poster 5 Press Number of Output Pages Next 6 Press Change select the paper size and press OK If you select the multi purpose tray specify the paper size and type to load Copying 344 ...

Page 359: ...7 Select the number of sheets and press OK 8 Press Copying starts Copying 345 ...

Page 360: ...sic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P 248 4 Press Skip Blank Pages 5 Select the color of the originals to skip To skip blank originals regardless of their color select All Colors To skip blank originals only in white select White Only If a setting other than Auto Color B W is set in Select Color the same operations as All Colors is performed even if you select White Only 6 Press Adjust ...

Page 361: ...s below Copy Print Job Log select a document Details check the number displayed for Original Pages The status screen and report display the number including blank paper Checking the Status of Copies Prints P 788 The copy counter is not incremented for blank paper that is saved However the scan counter is incremented for those pages If you are configuring settings in Scan and Store read Skip Blank ...

Page 362: ...ables you to embed scan lock information on the copies and prevent them from being copied Embedding the TOP SECRET Text Secure Watermark P 349 Disabling Copying of Documents Document Scan Lock P 352 You can set the machine to always perform Secure Watermark or Document Scan Lock for every copy job Embedding Invisible Text Forced Secure Watermark P 769 Embedding Information That Restricts Copying F...

Page 363: ...uthorized copies of copies System Options P 1481 Depending on the machine you are using this function is available by default 1 Place the original Placing Originals P 109 2 Press Copy Home Screen P 141 3 Press Options on the Copy Basic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P 248 4 Press Secure Watermark 5 Select the type of characters and specify detailed settings as necessary Embedding water...

Page 364: ...meric keys 3 Select the format for dates Press Date Format to select the date format Embedding reference numbers If you copy specifying the number of copies you can embed different four digit reference numbers set by set 1 Press Copy Set Numbering 2 Enter the starting reference number Enter in the input field of Starting Number using the numeric keys Embedding serial numbers Embed the serial numbe...

Page 365: ...nt includes the hidden text and the background for each relative contrast value The area within the frame on the sample print is the output sample for the currently set relative contrast value The Adjust Background Character Contrast setting is canceled when the job is complete If you want to use the same settings for the next copy job specify the settings again 7 Press OK Close 8 Press Copying st...

Page 366: ...System Options P 1481 Restricting Copying Using a TL Code P 353 Restricting Copying Using a QR Code P 355 There are restrictions for paper that can be used with this function See Hardware Specifications P 1485 You cannot use both a TL code and a QR code at the same time Specify the Document Scan Lock settings beforehand such as whether to restrict scan job or not and which code to use to restrict ...

Page 367: ...ess Copy Home Screen P 141 3 Press Options on the Copy Basic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P 248 4 Press Document Scan Lock 5 Press Doc Scan Lock Information 6 Select conditions to restrict reproduction To prohibit every job for reproduction press Prohibit All To permit reproduction only when passwords are identified enter the password by pressing Password Authentication To permit rep...

Page 368: ...ot be scanned properly even after the TL Code adjustment In addition it may not be scanned properly when the original s entire surface is a photograph How the Scanned Document with Different Embedded Information Processed When copying documents set with Password Authentication or User Authentication the embedded information on the first page is used for authentication In the following case the job...

Page 369: ...ace the original Placing Originals P 109 2 Press Copy Home Screen P 141 3 Press Options on the Copy Basic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P 248 4 Press Document Scan Lock 5 Press Prohibit All Tracking Information is embedded together with Scan Lock Information If Allow All is selected only Tracking Information is embedded and reproduction is not prohibited 6 Press QR Code Print Position...

Page 370: ...QR code if you copy the output which is already printed QR code and embed the new QR code on it condition set for the Document Scan Lock mode will never be lowered than the previous one For example even if the latest scan lock information is set to Allow All the first scan lock information embedded in the QR code is Prohibit All Prohibit All is applied for the next Document Scan Lock mode Informat...

Page 371: ...alling previously used settings In addition switching the Copy Basic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P 248 to the Express Copy Screen enables you to change the settings with fewer steps Recalling Previously Used Copy Settings Previous Settings P 358 Changing the Settings Quickly Express Copy Screen P 360 Copying 357 ...

Page 372: ...ory are not deleted even when the main power is turned Off 1 Place the original Placing Originals P 109 2 Press Copy Home Screen P 141 3 Press Previous Settings on the Copy Basic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P 248 4 Select the setting to recall and press OK When personal authentication management is in use the machine recalls the settings specified in the past by the user who is logg...

Page 373: ... The Merge Job Blocks setting Combining Jobs with Different Settings Into a Single Job Merge Job Blocks P 327 cannot be recalled Copying 359 ...

Page 374: ...tly select 1 Sided 2 Sided or 2 Sided 2 Sided so you can finish settings with fewer steps Regular Copy Screen Express Copy Screen Switching to the Express Copy Screen P 360 Express Copy Screen P 360 Switching to the Express Copy Screen Preferences Display Settings Copy Screen Display Settings Express Copy OK Apply Set Changes Yes Express Copy Screen Current main setting status and setting buttons ...

Page 375: ...tton is displayed You can print a copy sample to check the copy result before making a large amount of copies Checking the Copy Results P 285 Function setting buttons Displays the most frequently used buttons from Options The setting status is displayed on the buttons You can change the buttons displayed currently into other function setting buttons using the icon in Previous Settings You can sele...

Page 376: ...isplay and copying starts without the supposedly set functions being activated Example If you selected and tried to copy on paper to which the Finish mode cannot be applied Functions that cannot be set in combination with the function on the left column because the paper source that contains the paper to be used for copying cannot be selected Functions that Have Priority when Set Last Functions th...

Page 377: ...b Blocks Merge Job Blocks Job Separator Store in Mail Box Store in Mail Box Copy upon Storing Secure Watermark Document Scan Lock TL code Document Scan Lock QR code Auto Color B W Full Color Black White Single Color Copy Ratio 1 1 100 Copy Ratio Manual Copy Ratio Preset Zoom Copy Ratio Auto XY Ratio Manual entry Set by Length XY Ratio Auto XY Ratio Poster Number of Output Pages Poster Copy Ratio M...

Page 378: ...et Numbering Watermark Print Date Free Size Original Poster Number of Output Pages Auto Color B W Density Auto Fit to Page Select Paper Auto Select Paper Custom Size Select Paper Free 1 Sided 2 Sided 2 Sided 2 Sided 2 Sided 1 Sided Book 2 Sided Book 2 Pages N on 1 Copy ID Card Erase Original Frame Erase Book Frame Erase Binding Shift By Position Shift By Numeric Keys Gutter Mirror Image Repeat Ima...

Page 379: ...Separator Skip Blank Pages 1 1 100 Copy Ratio Manual Copy Ratio Preset Zoom Copy Ratio Auto XY Ratio Manual entry Set by Length Copy Ratio Auto XY Ratio Auto XY Ratio Poster Number of Output Pages Select Paper Auto 1 Copy Ratio Auto XY Ratio Auto XY Ratio Poster Number of Output Pages Select Paper Paper source Select Paper Custom Size Select Paper Free Repeat Images Auto Print on Tab N on 1 Copy I...

Page 380: ...ges Staple Group Corner Double Staple Group Staple Free Max 5 pages Staple Collate Saddle Stitch Hole Punch Superimpose Image Page Numbering Copy Set Numbering Watermark Print Date Merge Job Blocks Merge Job Blocks Job Separator Store in Mail Box Store in Mail Box Copy upon Storing Secure Watermark Document Scan Lock TL code Document Scan Lock QR code Select Paper Auto Select Paper Paper source Se...

Page 381: ...atio Select Paper Free Book 2 Pages Copy ID Card Transparency Cover Sheets Print on Tab Booklet Scan Fold Saddle Stitch Fold Only Booklet Scan Do Not Fold Do Not Booklet Scan Fold Saddle Stitch Fold Only Do Not Booklet Scan Do Not Fold 2 Sided 2 Sided 2 Sided 1 Sided Book 2 Sided 2 Sided 2 Sided Poster Number of Output Pages Poster Copy Ratio Select Paper Free Book 2 Pages Copy ID Card Transparenc...

Page 382: ...put Pages Poster Copy Ratio Select Paper Free Copy ID Card Transparency Cover Sheets Add Cover Insert Sheets Sheets Chapter Pages Insert Sheets Tab Print on Tab Booklet Scan Fold Saddle Stitch Fold Only Booklet Scan Do Not Fold Do Not Booklet Scan Fold Saddle Stitch Fold Only Do Not Booklet Scan Do Not Fold Saddle Fold Fold Saddle Fold Copy Sample Copy Set Numbering Merge Job Blocks Merge Job Bloc...

Page 383: ...Copy ID Card Mirror Image Transparency Cover Sheets Add Cover Insert Sheets Sheets Chapter Pages Insert Sheets Tab Print on Tab Rotate 90 Degrees Booklet Scan Fold Saddle Stitch Fold Only Booklet Scan Do Not Fold Do Not Booklet Scan Fold Saddle Stitch Fold Only Do Not Booklet Scan Do Not Fold Offset Saddle Fold Hole Punch Superimpose Image Page Numbering Copy Set Numbering Watermark Print Date Mer...

Page 384: ...an Do Not Fold Offset Saddle Fold Copy Sample Copy Set Numbering Merge Job Blocks Merge Job Blocks Job Separator Collate Page Order Group Same Pages Staple Collate Corner Double Staple Collate Staple Free Max 5 pages Staple Group Corner Double Staple Collate Saddle Stitch Saddle Fold 4 Poster Number of Output Pages Poster Copy Ratio Select Paper Auto Select Paper Free Copy ID Card Mirror Image Tra...

Page 385: ... Lock QR code Booklet Scan Do Not Fold Do Not Booklet Scan Fold Saddle Stitch Fold Only Do Not Booklet Scan Do Not Fold Do Not Fold Fit to Page Poster Number of Output Pages Poster Copy Ratio Select Paper Auto Select Paper Custom Size Select Paper Free 1 Sided 2 Sided 2 Sided 2 Sided 2 Sided 1 Sided Book 2 Sided Book 2 Pages N on 1 Copy ID Card Erase Original Frame Erase Book Frame Erase Binding S...

Page 386: ...ly Booklet Scan Do Not Fold Do Not Booklet Scan Do Not Fold Do Not Fold Fit to Page Poster Number of Output Pages Poster Copy Ratio Select Paper Auto Select Paper Custom Size Select Paper Free 1 Sided 2 Sided 2 Sided 2 Sided 2 Sided 1 Sided Book 2 Sided Book 2 Pages N on 1 Copy ID Card Erase Original Frame Erase Book Frame Erase Binding Shift By Numeric Keys Gutter Mirror Image Repeat Images Numbe...

Page 387: ...t on Tab Booklet Scan Fold Saddle Stitch Fold Only Booklet Scan Do Not Fold Do Not Booklet Scan Fold Saddle Stitch Fold Only Do Not Booklet Scan Do Not Fold Group Same Pages Rotate 90 Degrees Staple Collate Staple Free Max 5 pages Staple Group Corner Double Staple Group Staple Free Max 5 pages Staple Collate Saddle Stitch Saddle Fold Superimpose Image Merge Job Blocks Merge Job Blocks Job Separato...

Page 388: ...Free Size Original Different Size Originals 1 10 Poster Number of Output Pages Poster Copy Ratio Book 2 Sided Book 2 Pages N on 1 Copy ID Card Repeat Images Number of times Repeat Images Auto Booklet Scan Fold Saddle Stitch Fold Only Booklet Scan Do Not Fold Do Not Booklet Scan Fold Saddle Stitch Fold Only Do Not Booklet Scan Do Not Fold Free Size Original Long Original Density Auto Text Photo Pos...

Page 389: ...Saddle Stitch Saddle Fold Hole Punch Superimpose Image Page Numbering Copy Set Numbering Watermark Print Date Print Check Free Size Original Merge Job Blocks Merge Job Blocks Job Separator 1 You cannot set Auto in Select Paper when Different Size Originals and Shift are set 3 You cannot set this function with Copy Set Numbering in Secure Watermark Document Scan Lock 4 Optional products are require...

Page 390: ...ot Booklet Scan Do Not Fold Superimpose Image Page Numbering Copy Set Numbering Watermark Print Date Free Size Original Document Scan Lock QR code QR code Single Color Two Colors Select Paper Free Sharpness Adjust OneTouch Color Vivid Colors Tranquil Colors Adjust OneTouch Color Lighten Image Darken Image Highlight Reproduction Adjust OneTouch Color Sepia Tone Color Balance Yellow Magenta Cyan Bla...

Page 391: ...ment Scan Lock QR code Copy Set Numbering 14 16 Fit to Page Select Paper Free Adjust OneTouch Color Sepia Tone Copy ID Card Shift By Numeric Keys Mirror Image Repeat Images Number of times Repeat Images Auto Transparency Cover Sheets Print on Tab Do Not Booklet Scan Fold Saddle Stitch Fold Only Do Not Booklet Scan Do Not Fold Group Same Pages Staple Group Corner Double Staple Group Staple Free Max...

Page 392: ...tio Select Paper Free N on 1 Copy ID Card Mirror Image Repeat Images Number of times Repeat Images Auto Insert Sheets Tab Print on Tab Booklet Scan Fold Saddle Stitch Fold Only Booklet Scan Do Not Fold Do Not Booklet Scan Fold Saddle Stitch Fold Only Do Not Booklet Scan Do Not Fold Page Numbering Copy Set Numbering Watermark Print Date Free Size Original Shift By Position Gutter Poster Number of O...

Page 393: ...Ratio Auto XY Ratio Auto XY Ratio Fit to Page Poster Number of Output Pages Poster Copy Ratio Select Paper Auto Select Paper Free Book 2 Sided Book 2 Pages N on 1 Copy ID Card Erase Original Frame Erase Book Frame Erase Binding Shift By Position Shift By Numeric Keys Gutter Mirror Image Blanking Transparency Cover Sheets Add Cover Insert Sheets Sheets Chapter Pages Insert Sheets Tab Print on Tab B...

Page 394: ... Poster Copy Ratio Select Paper Free Book 2 Sided Book 2 Pages N on 1 Copy ID Card Repeat Images Number of times Repeat Images Auto Transparency Cover Sheets Insert Sheets Tab Print on Tab Booklet Scan Fold Saddle Stitch Fold Only Booklet Scan Do Not Fold Do Not Booklet Scan Fold Saddle Stitch Fold Only Do Not Booklet Scan Do Not Fold Free Size Original Merge Job Blocks Merge Job Blocks Job Separa...

Page 395: ...Booklet Scan Fold Saddle Stitch Fold Only Do Not Booklet Scan Do Not Fold Repeat Images Number of times Repeat Images Auto Page Numbering Copy Set Numbering Watermark Print DateSecure Watermark Document Scan Lock TL code Document Scan Lock QR code Print Check Merge Job Blocks Merge Job Blocks Merge Job Blocks Store in Mail Box Store in Mail Box Copy upon Storing Add Cover Insert Sheets Sheets Chap...

Page 396: ... Max 5 pages Staple Collate Saddle Stitch Saddle Fold Different Size Originals Copy Sample Interrupt Superimpose Image Page Numbering Copy Set Numbering Watermark Print Date Print Check Free Size Original Merge Job Blocks Merge Job Blocks Job Separator Store in Mail Box Store in Mail Box Copy upon Storing Skip Blank Pages Free Size Original Copy Ratio Auto XY Ratio Auto XY Ratio Fit to Page Poster...

Page 397: ...Originals Together Different Size Originals 420 Sending Separately Scanned Documents Together Job Build 422 Recalling Previously Used Settings for Sending Previous Settings 424 Useful Functions When Sending 426 Sending at a Specified Time 427 Saving a Copy of a Sent Document 429 Various Receiving Methods 432 Saving Received Documents in the Machine Memory Reception 433 Keeping Received Documents P...

Page 398: ...essfully Easily Conveniently You can find and choose among various sending and receiving methods right for you Fully using functions can provide you with an efficient way to send and receive faxes Sending Faxes Successfully P 409 Simplifying Sending Operations P 419 Useful Functions When Sending P 426 Various Receiving Methods P 432 Forwarding Received Documents Automatically P 438 Sending Faxes f...

Page 399: ...ers on the network Using Internet Faxes I Fax P 449 Using Remote Faxes P 459 TIPS Installing an option enables you to use an IP fax The IP fax is a function to send and receive faxes over a TCP IP network such as an office LAN Sending and receiving faxes between devices in the same network helps reduce communication costs as well as makes communication speed faster than normal faxes IP FAX Expansi...

Page 400: ...stination the character T tone is inserted Even if you are using pulse dial numbers following T will be sent using tone dial Press this button when using fax information services One touch button Enables you to specify a fax destination registered in one touch buttons Address Book Enables you to specify a fax destination registered in the Address Book On Hook Press to send a fax document manually ...

Page 401: ...s P 389 Favorite Settings Register frequently used scan settings here in advance to easily recall them when necessary Registering a Combination of Frequently Used Functions P 193 Press this icon to register the current settings in Favorite Settings of and change the button displayed in Registering a Combination of Frequently Used Functions P 193 Customizing the Basic Features Screen P 196 Previous...

Page 402: ...sed in combination with each other Buttons that cannot be selected are displayed in light gray The total number of specified destinations is displayed on the top right of the screen LINKS Registering Destinations P 218 Faxing 388 ...

Page 403: ...ar when you specify a destination from the Remote Address Book If the server machine is performing the System Manager information settings authentication between the server machine and the client machine is performed while the client machine is obtaining the Remote Address Book one touch buttons Authentication is performed by matching the System Manager ID and System Manager PIN set by the server ...

Page 404: ... of destinations When you are logged in to the machine with personal authentication management selecting Personal Address List displays your personal Address Book Search by Name Enables you to search the destination by the name you are entering Search buttons by first letter Enables you to narrow down a search by the first letter of the destination name If you select the group destination containi...

Page 405: ...imes When a fax job has been sent on the client machine When you press the Reset key on the client machine When Auto Reset is activated on the client machine Entering Destinations Manually You can specify destinations manually that are not registered in the Address Book or one touch buttons 1 Enter a fax number using the numeric keys and press OK To add another fax number repeat this step If the m...

Page 406: ...he use of ITU T subaddresses you can enhance the confidentiality of sent documents using a subaddress and password To send a document with a subaddress enter a fax number press Subaddress or Set Details and then enter the subaddress and password Stands for International Telecommunication Union Telecommunication Standardization Sector which is the group that makes recommendations towards the standa...

Page 407: ...characters for the search condition To search with multiple conditions You can search destinations with multiple conditions Specify the first search condition press Add Search Condition and then select or or and for the next condition 5 Press Start Searching The search results are displayed To search with another condition press Delete to delete the specified settings and then set a new condition ...

Page 408: ...f Originals You can scan two facing pages in a book or magazine onto separate pages in one operation Scanning a Facing Page Original and Faxing it as Two Separate Pages Specifying the Scanning Size of Originals 1 Press the setting button for scanning size 2 Select the scanning size and press OK To set the machine to detect the size of the original select Auto If you want to scan an A3 original wit...

Page 409: ...enience Scanning Both Sides of Originals Place the original in the feeder For landscape oriented originals place them horizontally 1 Press Options 2 Sided Original 2 Select Book Type or Calendar Type and press OK Select Book Type for originals whose images on the front and back sides face the same direction or Calendar Type for originals whose images on the front and back sides face in opposite di...

Page 410: ...ographs enables you to send with optimal image quality Selecting the Type of Original You can adjust the density of the entire original For example increasing the density enables you to easily read faint characters written in pencil Adjusting the Density of the Entire Original You can adjust the density of the background You can clearly send originals with a colored background or thin originals su...

Page 411: ...for resolution 2 Select the resolution and press OK A lower resolution is suitable for originals containing text only while a higher resolution is suitable for originals containing photographs The higher the resolution is the more finely originals can be scanned Selecting the Type of Original 1 Press Options Original Type 2 Select the type of original and press OK 3 Press Close Adjusting the Densi...

Page 412: ... Speed Image Quality Priority for B W Scan P 1084 3 Adjust the density and press OK If is pressed the density of the entire background decreases If is pressed the density of the entire background increases Depending on the colors of originals sections other than the background may be affected 4 Press OK Close Adjusting Sharpness Sharpness The setting for Sharpness is invalid when all of the condit...

Page 413: ...larging or Reducing You can enlarge or reduce standard size originals to other standard sizes when scanning Enlarging or Reducing in Standard Paper Sizes You can enlarge or reduce by specifying magnification Enlarging or Reducing by Specifying Magnification Enlarging or Reducing in Standard Paper Sizes 1 Press Options Copy Ratio 2 To reduce select magnification from to enlarge select magnification...

Page 414: ...in the scanned image When scanning a thick book dark borders may appear This function enables you to erase these frame lines and dark borders You can also set the machine to not copy punch holes in the originals Place the original with punch holes on the platen glass Placing in the feeder may result in damage 1 Press Options Erase Frame 2 Specify the erasing type and width Erasing the frames in co...

Page 415: ...Size If the size displayed in Original Size is different from the size of the book press Change to select the size You can only set the Erase Book Frame mode for the original sizes shown on the touch panel display 2 Press Center or Sides and enter each erasing width Erasing punch holes in copies of documents 1 Press Erase Binding and select the punch hole location 2 Enter the erasing width If you ...

Page 416: ...h the sender s name and fax number TX Terminal ID P 1096 To check the statuses for sent documents On the Status Monitor screen you can check the statuses for sent documents This screen enables you to send faxes again or cancel sending after checking the statuses Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents P 441 When Display Notification When Job Is Accepted is set to On the Status Moni...

Page 417: ...ngs are met Job type Fax Memory Sending or Scan and Send Fax I fax Select Color Black White Scan and Send Original Type Text Density Background Density Auto Resolution 200 dpi x 400 dpi 300 dpi x 300 dpi 400 dpi x 400 dpi or 600 dpi x 600 dpi Can be set for Scan and Send Speed Image Quality Priority for B W Scan Fax I Fax Send Jobs Quality Priority Speed Image Quality Priority for B W Scan P 1084 ...

Page 418: ...n scanning originals you can quickly complete your settings Registering a Combination of Frequently Used Functions P 193 LINKS Canceling Sending Faxes P 405 Sending Faxes Successfully P 409 Simplifying Sending Operations P 419 Useful Functions When Sending P 426 Registering Destinations P 218 Registering the LDAP Server P 57 Managing Users P 675 Set Destination P 1127 Faxing 404 ...

Page 419: ...on the displayed screen or 2 Press Yes Scanning originals is canceled Canceling Sending Faxes Being Sent or Waiting to Be Sent 1 Press To Status Monitor on the displayed screen or 2 Press Send Job Status 3 Select Fax A list of jobs being sent or waiting to be sent is displayed 4 Select the job to cancel and press Cancel 5 Press Yes Sending the fax is canceled Faxing 405 ...

Page 420: ...or Job Being Sent to choose the job to cancel Job to Cancel When Stop is Pressed P 1100 Press when there are multiple send jobs to display the screen for selecting the send job to cancel If the send job you want to cancel is not displayed press Check Other Jobs to display Send Jobs Select the job that you want to cancel and press Cancel LINKS Basic Operations for Sending Faxes P 389 Checking Statu...

Page 421: ...ional Telecommunication Union Telecommunication Standardization Sector which is the group that makes recommendations towards the standardization of worldwide telecommunications TIPS You can save paper when printing Print on Both Sides P 1111 2 on 1 Log P 1112 Reduce Fax RX Size P 1111 You can include information such as reception time in received documents when printing Print RX Page Footer P 1112...

Page 422: ...LINKS Various Receiving Methods P 432 Forwarding Received Documents Automatically P 438 Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents P 441 Faxing 408 ...

Page 423: ...canning documents or a busy line etc Checking Scanned Images Before Sending Preview P 410 Stamping Scanned Originals for Sending P 412 Checking the Connection to the Recipient Before Sending Direct Send P 413 Sending Faxes Manually Manual Sending P 415 Notifying You by E Mail of the Completion of Sending P 417 Faxing 409 ...

Page 424: ... Basic Features Screen P 386 4 Specify the scan settings as necessary Basic Operations for Sending Faxes P 389 5 Press Options Preview Close 6 Press Originals are scanned and the preview screen appears To cancel scanning press Cancel or Yes When Press the Start key to scan the next original is displayed Place the next original to scan and press When scanning all of the originals is complete press ...

Page 425: ...ter the page numbers corresponding to Move Page and Behind Page 4 Press OK To switch the locations of pages You can switch the locations of specified pages 1 Press Edit Scanned Data 2 Press Switch Page Position 3 Enter the page numbers corresponding to Target Page A and Target Page B 4 Press OK 8 Press Start Sending Sending starts Faxing 411 ...

Page 426: ...inal in the feeder Placing Originals P 109 A stamp is applied on the originals placed in the feeder 2 Press Fax Home Screen P 141 3 Specify the destination on the Fax Basic Features screen Fax Basic Features Screen P 386 4 Specify the scan settings as necessary Basic Operations for Sending Faxes P 389 5 Press Options Finished Stamp Close 6 Press Originals are scanned and sending starts Stamps are ...

Page 427: ...tination on the Fax Basic Features screen Fax Basic Features Screen P 386 4 Specify the scan settings as necessary Basic Operations for Sending Faxes P 389 5 Press Options Direct Send Close 6 Press The machine dials the recipient s number When the machine connects the call originals are scanned and sending starts The machine does not start sending when the recipient s line is busy Direct Send is n...

Page 428: ...To specify the scanning size of originals The scanning size of originals placed in the feeder is automatically set To specify the size yourself use the platen glass Faxing 414 ...

Page 429: ... Hook with the Copy Card Reader attached the line is disconnected 1 Place the original Placing Originals P 109 When you want to send multiple pages place originals in the feeder When the original is placed on the platen glass you can only send one page 2 Press Fax Home Screen P 141 3 Press On Hook on the Fax Basic Features screen Fax Basic Features Screen P 386 4 Enter the recipient s phone number...

Page 430: ...ne is in the Department ID mode Configuring the Department ID Management Settings P 715 To specify the scanning size of originals The scanning size of originals placed in the feeder is automatically set To specify the size yourself use the platen glass Faxing 416 ...

Page 431: ...y it is necessary to register your e mail address in the user information in advance and log in using personal authentication management Registering User Information in the Local Device P 681 1 Place the original Placing Originals P 109 2 Press Fax Home Screen P 141 3 Specify the destination on the Fax Basic Features screen Fax Basic Features Screen P 386 4 Specify the scan settings as necessary B...

Page 432: ...lect Attach TX Image to attach the first page of the document as a PDF file to a notification e mail 7 Press OK Close 8 Press Originals are scanned and sending starts When sending is complete the notification e mail is sent to the specified address Faxing 418 ...

Page 433: ...ed documents together By recalling previously used settings you can simplify sending operations Sending Different Size Originals Together Different Size Originals P 420 Sending Separately Scanned Documents Together Job Build P 422 Recalling Previously Used Settings for Sending Previous Settings P 424 Faxing 419 ...

Page 434: ...ls or paper jams 1 Place the originals in the feeder Placing Originals P 109 To place the originals with the same width align the top and bottom edges of the originals with the edges of the feeder as shown in the figure below To place the originals with different widths align the top edges of all of the originals with the back edge of the feeder For originals with the same widths For originals wit...

Page 435: ...hs 7 Press Close 8 Press Originals are scanned and sending starts When the originals with different widths are scanned together the images of the smaller size originals may be slanted because the originals cannot be fixed with the slide guides If you set the Different Size Originals mode the scanning speed may be slower than normal Faxing 421 ...

Page 436: ...s necessary Basic Operations for Sending Faxes P 389 5 Press Options Job Build Close 6 Press to scan the original When scanning is complete the screen appears prompting you to scan the next original If you place your originals in the feeder remove the originals from the original output area when the scanning of each batch is complete 7 Place the next original and press Repeat this step until you f...

Page 437: ...ginals P 420 When scanning and sending 1 sided originals and 2 sided originals together if the first document you scan is a 2 sided original set 2 Sided Original When scanning a 1 sided original disable the 2 Sided Original setting in Change Settings 8 Press Start Sending All scanned documents are combined into one and sent to the specified destination Faxing 423 ...

Page 438: ...turned Off When you use fax information services you cannot specify a destination that is stored in the Address List or use the Job Recall mode 1 Place the original Placing Originals P 109 2 Press Fax Home Screen P 141 3 Press Previous Settings on the Fax Basic Features screen Fax Basic Features Screen P 386 4 Select the log to recall and press OK The destination and its scan settings are specifie...

Page 439: ...tarts If you set Manage Address Book Access Numbers to On you cannot recall settings from memory If you set any address type to On in Limit New Destination the currently stored Previous Settings are deleted LINKS Managing Users P 675 Faxing 425 ...

Page 440: ...ng 4XR3 06R This section describes how to send a document at a specified time and how to save a copy of a fax document in an external file server Sending at a Specified Time P 427 Saving a Copy of a Sent Document P 429 Faxing 426 ...

Page 441: ...estination on the Fax Basic Features screen Fax Basic Features Screen P 386 4 Specify the scan settings as necessary Basic Operations for Sending Faxes P 389 5 Press Options Delayed Send 6 Enter the time to send and press OK Enter all four digits of the time For example for 5 minutes past 7 enter 0705 and for 18 minutes past 23 enter 2318 7 Press Close 8 Press Originals are scanned and sent at the...

Page 442: ...n check on the Status Monitor screen whether sending is complete or not Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents P 441 LINKS Notifying You by E Mail of the Completion of Sending P 417 Faxing 428 ...

Page 443: ...tronic file Registering the Storage Location and File Format In order to back up fax documents it is necessary to register settings such as the storage location and file format in advance You cannot perform Direct Sending if you set Settings for Sent Document Backup to On This setting automatically switches to Off in the following cases Specify the destination again or return the setting to On as ...

Page 444: ... W Settings User Name When Sender Name TTI is set to No Settings and the user is authenticated Line Name When Sender Name TTI is set to No Settings the user is not authenticated and the user name is registered for the line used to send the fax Telephone Number When Sender Name TTI is set to No Settings the user is not authenticated and the user telephone number is registered but the user name is n...

Page 445: ...tion You can save a copy of a sent document by sending to multiple destinations which include a fax destination from the Scan Basic Features screen To display fax destinations on the Scan Basic Features screen it is necessary to set Enable Fax in Scan and Send Function to On Display Fax Function P 1043 LINKS Basic Operations for Sending Faxes P 389 Faxing 431 ...

Page 446: ...s private If image files attached to received I fax documents are not compatible with this machine the machine does not process print forward or store these files The files are deleted instead In this case the names of the deleted files and the message No programs can process the file attachment are printed with the text of the received I fax Saving Received Documents in the Machine Memory Recepti...

Page 447: ...ory Lock P 1114 and Use I Fax Memory Lock P 1114 and then follow the procedure below to specify the settings so that incoming documents can be received in memory 1 Press Fax I Fax Inbox Home Screen P 141 2 Press Memory RX Inbox If the password is set for the Memory RX Inbox the screen appears prompting you to enter the password Memory RX Inbox PIN P 1114 Enter the password and press OK Memory RX I...

Page 448: ...ders names and the number of pages received Pressing Display Image enables you to check the contents of the document as well as select and delete pages Delete Pressing Delete Yes deletes the document You cannot delete multiple documents simultaneously To delete multiple documents select and delete one document at a time Send Pressing Send enables you to specify destinations to send the document To...

Page 449: ...Registering an arbitrary level of the Memory RX Inbox to the Personal Shared button enables operations to be executed quickly and efficiently The Fax I Fax Inbox storage space is shared with Mail Boxes For information on the maximum space see the capacity for Mail Box P 1466 LINKS Basic Operations for Sending Faxes P 389 Sending I Faxes P 450 Basic Operations for Scanning Originals P 500 Faxing 43...

Page 450: ... as the save location and password for documents need to be registered beforehand Forwarding Received Documents Automatically P 438 Set Register Confidential Fax Inboxes P 1113 1 Press Fax I Fax Inbox Home Screen P 141 2 Press Confidential Fax Inbox 3 Select the box where documents are saved If the password is set for the box the screen appears prompting you to enter the password Enter the passwor...

Page 451: ...ceive the URL of the save location by e mail when receiving documents Just entering the URL in the address bar of a Web browser enables you to check the contents of documents from your computer through the Remote UI Set Register Confidential Fax Inboxes P 1113 Registering an arbitrary level of Fax Inboxes to the Personal Shared button enables operations to be executed quickly and efficiently LINKS...

Page 452: ...eived documents that only match the specific conditions such as sender s fax number and received dates times For example you can set conditions such as forwarding documents from Company A to all branch offices and forwarding documents received on holidays to e mail addresses Just like with the Forwarding All method above you can also set to print forwarded documents or receive an e mail notifying ...

Page 453: ... settings with Receive Method changed you have to register the forwarding settings again 5 Press Forwarding Destination and specify the destination to forward to Registering Destinations in the Address Book P 223 A destination in Personal Address List cannot be specified as the forwarding destination You can store received fax I fax files in the Confidential Fax Inbox by specifying it as a forward...

Page 454: ...o the Handle Files with Forwarding Errors P 1113 settings You can store up to 1 000 forwarding settings Selecting Forward without Conditions enables you to forward all received documents that do not meet the specified conditions to the desired destination You can forward to multiple destinations by specifying a group destination in Forwarding Destination However if the specified destination is a g...

Page 455: ... Press Send Job Status To display only fax documents select Fax from the drop down list in the upper right of the screen 3 Check the statuses Selecting a document and pressing Details enables you to check detailed information such as the destinations and the number of pages Selecting a document and pressing Cancel enables you to cancel sending You cannot select multiple jobs and cancel them all at...

Page 456: ... Press Receive Job Status To display only fax documents select Fax from the drop down list in the upper right of the screen 3 Check the statuses Selecting a document and pressing Details enables you to check detailed information such as the sender s names and the number of pages Selecting a document and pressing Cancel enables you to cancel receiving You cannot select multiple jobs and cancel them...

Page 457: ...error codes Countermeasures for Each Error Code P 1308 Pressing Communic Mgt Report or Fax Activity Report prints a log list of sent and received documents displayed on the screen TIPS Registering an address from the send history You can register an address to the Address Book or a one touch button via the send history on the Status Monitor screen This saves you the effort of directly entering the...

Page 458: ...documents for faxing allowing you to save paper To use this function you need to install a fax driver in your computer Installing Drivers P 71 Sending PC Faxes P 445 Help for fax driver Clicking Help Windows or Mac OS on the fax driver setting screen displays the Help screen For information that is not in the User s Guide including driver features and how to set up those features see Help Faxing 4...

Page 459: ...ck Print or OK 3 Click the Enter Destination tab and specify the communication mode and fax number you are using Communication Mode Make sure that G3 is selected Fax Number URI Make sure that Fax Number is selected Fax Number Enter a fax number If you need to specify a number to dial an outside line click Detailed Settings Add Outside Dialing Prefix to G3 IP Fax Number and enter a fax number in th...

Page 460: ...ay of the desktop select the file to cancel and click Document Cancel Yes If the icon is not displayed you can cancel from the control panel of the machine Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents P 441 When the department ID and password or the user name and password input screen is displayed Enter the department ID and password or the user name and password For Mac OS 1 Open a doc...

Page 461: ...3 Click General Settings 4 Click Add Destination Faxing 447 ...

Page 462: ...s panel and then enter the number 6 Click Print Sending starts To cancel sending click the printer icon displayed in the Dock select the file to cancel click Delete or If the icon is not displayed you can cancel from the control panel of the machine Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents P 441 When the department ID and password input screen is displayed Enter the department ID an...

Page 463: ...ve I faxes between devices in the same network using an office LAN Sending I Faxes P 450 Receiving I Faxes P 458 To send documents to an e mail address used on a computer or mobile device see Basic Operations for Scanning Originals P 500 Standards for I fax are defined by ITU T International Telecommunication Union Telecommunication Standardization Sector You can send and receive with other manufa...

Page 464: ...s Book one touch buttons Authentication is performed by matching the System Manager ID and System Manager PIN set by the server machine and client machine Changing the System Manager ID and PIN P 713 The availability of the Remote Address Book one touch buttons depends on the status of the System Manager information settings for the server machine and client machine as shown below When the server ...

Page 465: ...nal authentication management selecting Personal Address List displays your personal Address Book Search by Name Enables you to search the destination by the name you are entering Search buttons by first letter Enables you to narrow down a search by the first letter of the destination name To use the Remote Address Book it is necessary to configure the server machine settings Set to open the Remot...

Page 466: ...t select Simple Note that the recipient also needs to support the transmission mode in order to check the sending result Depending on the recipient s machine sending an I fax is not allowed unless you select Simple If you send an I fax to a destination that does not support the transmission mode the Status Monitor screen displays Awaiting result even if sending is complete This message is displaye...

Page 467: ... when the size of send data exceeds a certain value Maximum Data Size for Sending P 1102 Specifying the conditions the recipient does not support may cause a transmission error You can press Register to Address Book to register the entered destination Set the required conditions and specify Name and Address Book For information on the settings see Registering Destinations in the Address Book P 223...

Page 468: ...ent name etc Search conditions Select a search condition such as a destination name that contains John and a department name that begins with Development Search characters Press Set and enter search characters for the search condition To search with multiple conditions You can search destinations with multiple conditions Specify the first search condition press Add Search Condition and then select...

Page 469: ...divide send large amounts of document data for sending If the recipient does not have the function to combine divided data select Off For the Off setting a transmission error occurs when the size of send data exceeds a certain value Maximum Data Size for Sending P 1102 Specifying the conditions the recipient does not support may cause a transmission error 10 Press OK 4 Press Options and specify th...

Page 470: ... sent documents This screen enables you to send faxes again or cancel sending after checking the statuses Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents P 441 When Display Notification When Job Is Accepted is set to On the Status Monitor screen can be displayed from the following screen that is shown after a send job is received Display Notification When Job Is Accepted P 1100 To print th...

Page 471: ...e to be improved if the following conditions settings are met Job type Fax Memory Sending or Scan and Send Fax I fax Select Color Black White Scan and Send Original Type Text Density Background Density Auto Resolution 200 dpi x 400 dpi 300 dpi x 300 dpi 400 dpi x 400 dpi or 600 dpi x 600 dpi Can be set for Scan and Send Speed Image Quality Priority for B W Scan Fax I Fax Send Jobs Quality Priority...

Page 472: ... received When there is no paper matching the size of the received document the document is printed according to the setting of Select Drawer Select Drawer P 1111 To receive I faxes manually Press Receive Job Log Check I Fax RX Pressing Fax I Fax Inbox Home Screen P 141 Memory RX Inbox Divided Data RX Inbox enables you to check the receiving statuses of I faxes divided and their data size TIPS You...

Page 473: ...client machine Settings for server machines Send P 1095 Settings for client machines Send P 1095 To use this function You need to install an option beforehand System Options P 1481 Sending a Fax You can send a fax from a client machine in the same way as a normal fax Basic Operations for Sending Faxes P 389 The following settings are required to use the address book of a server machine Settings fo...

Page 474: ...s displayed enter the ID and password registered in the server machine The sender information of a fax sent from the client machine is printed according to the setting in the server machine TX Terminal ID P 1096 LINKS Receiving I Faxes P 458 Faxing 460 ...

Page 475: ...d From a Computer 473 Moving Duplicating a File 475 Printing Job Hold Documents 477 Printing Documents Retained in the Machine Forced Hold Printing 479 Printing at a Specified Time Scheduled Printing 483 Printing With Settings Disabling Unauthorized Copying 485 Various Printing Methods 487 Directly Printing Files without Opening Them 488 Printing Using a Virtual Printer 490 Printing From Memory Me...

Page 476: ...edit the document before printing large quantities avoid to leave or to be copied printed paper etc Printing After Checking the Document Hold P 472 Printing Documents Retained in the Machine Forced Hold Printing P 479 Printing at a Specified Time Scheduled Printing P 483 Printing With Settings Disabling Unauthorized Copying P 485 Printing in various environments This section introduces printing me...

Page 477: ... You can print photographs PDF files etc from a mobile device such as a smart phone tablet etc For more information see Linking with Mobile Devices P 629 Printing 463 ...

Page 478: ...ormation that is not in the User s Guide including about driver features and how to set up those features see Help Basic Printing Operations This section describes the basic flow when printing from a computer In case of Windows P 464 In case of Mac OS P 465 In case of Windows 1 Open a document and display the print screen 2 Select the machine and click Preferences or Properties 3 Specify the print...

Page 479: ...Mac OS 1 Open a document and display the print screen 2 Select the machine 3 Specify the print settings as necessary After selecting the setting panel from the drop down list set for printing on each panel 4 Click Print Printing starts If you want to cancel see Canceling Printing P 467 Printing 465 ...

Page 480: ...LINKS Checking the Printing Status and History P 469 Paper Feed Mode for Printer Driver Jobs with MP Tray P 1093 Printing 466 ...

Page 481: ...ouble click the printer icon on the system tray in the lower right of the screen When the printer icon is not displayed Open the printer folder and click or double click the icon for the machine 2 Select the document to cancel and click Document Cancel If you cannot find the document to cancel the document is already sent to the machine In that case you cannot cancel the printing on the computer 3...

Page 482: ...1 Click the printer icon displayed on the Dock 2 Select the document to cancel and click Delete or Printing is canceled Printing 468 ...

Page 483: ...lecting a document enables you to cancel printing to check the status of the job etc Pressing Cancel after selecting a document enables you to cancel printing When pressing Interrupt Priority Print after selecting a document Interrupt and Print and Priority Print appear Press Interrupt and Print to suspend a print job in process and immediately start printing the document selected Press Priority P...

Page 484: ...ent is printed without problems the Result column displays OK If NG is displayed it shows that printing was canceled or an error occurred To see the detailed information press Details after selecting a document To print a history list press Print List LINKS Canceling Printing P 467 Printing 470 ...

Page 485: ...print job efficiently or improving the security on printing Printing After Checking the Document Hold P 472 Printing Documents Retained in the Machine Forced Hold Printing P 479 Printing at a Specified Time Scheduled Printing P 483 Printing With Settings Disabling Unauthorized Copying P 485 Printing 471 ...

Page 486: ...is called Job Hold Sending Documents for Job Hold From a Computer P 473 Moving Duplicating a File P 475 Printing Job Hold Documents P 477 To use the Job Hold mode you have to set this mode in advance Hold P 1126 Note that print jobs saved on the Job Hold area are automatically deleted after a specified period of time passes You can change the period of time Hold P 1126 The Hold storage space is sh...

Page 487: ...e space Mail Box of the machine to the Job Hold saving area Moving Duplicating a File P 475 In case of Windows P 473 In case of Mac OS P 474 In case of Windows 1 Open a document and display the print screen For information on displaying the print screen see Help of each application 2 Select the machine and click Details or Properties 3 Select Hold at Output Method 4 Change the print settings as ne...

Page 488: ... screen For information on displaying the print screen see Help of each application 2 Select the machine 3 Specify the print settings as necessary and click OK 4 Select Hold at Job Processing of the Special Features panel 5 Click Print 6 Click OK The document is sent to the Job Hold saving area Printing 474 ...

Page 489: ...5 Moving Duplicating a File from the Hold Queue to a Mail Box P 475 Moving Duplicating a File from a Mail Box to the Hold Queue 1 Press Access Stored Files Home Screen P 141 2 Press Mail Box 3 Select a box and then files Editing Files in the Mail Box P 596 4 Press Edit File Move Duplicate Hold When copying instead of moving press Duplicate Files 5 Press Start Moving Duplic The document is moved co...

Page 490: ...me of the moved or duplicated job is the same as that of the original job The date time is updated to the time that the job was moved or duplicated Depending on the job from the printer driver some jobs cannot be moved to the Mail Box If the control panel power switch is turned OFF while jobs are being moved or duplicated only those jobs that have been processed up to the time when the power is tu...

Page 491: ... job ticket is JDF Job Definition Format attribute information included in a document through the entire printing process Some apply to the entire document and others apply to each page range divided by page As for editing checking the job ticket you can confirm the steps one by one You can operate Edit Confirm Job Ticket only if you select a job with a job ticket If you select a job that is submi...

Page 492: ... 3 Set in accordance with the purpose Checking the printed material in the test print Print Sample 1 Press Details Edit Print Sample 2 Set the number of copies and partition Depending on the document the partition cannot be set 3 Press Start Printing Printing starts 4 Press Close Checking the contents of the document Display Image 1 Press Details Edit Preview Deleting a job 1 Press Details Edit De...

Page 493: ...he user who sends the job is counted You can store up to 2 000 jobs At least 4 GB is guaranteed for storing retained documents The maximum size of a retained document that can be stored is 2 GB The documents retained in the machine are saved even if the machine is turned OFF Note that documents are automatically deleted after a specified period of time passes Please consult your administrator rega...

Page 494: ...ettings P 1124 You can print from here if the printer driver output method is set to Secured Print Jobs to Be PrintedJobs PrintedScheduled Print Jobs to Be Printed Jobs Printed Scheduled Print When selecting an unprinted document confirm that Jobs to Be Printed is selected Update button Updates the document list No of Copies To change the number of sets to be printed enter the number of sets to ch...

Page 495: ...sages Some jobs could not be stored after being received and Some jobs have been deleted may be displayed if an error occurs when receiving a document or a document is automatically deleted because its retention period has elapsed etc In this case press to cancel the message 3 Press Start Printing Printing starts To cancel printing select the job to cancel in Jobs Printed and select Cancel Printin...

Page 496: ...safely Use this especially when printing highly confidential documents The document with Encrypted Secure Printing is displayed along with on the setting change screen To print the encrypted document you must enter the password The password must be the same as the password you set on the printer driver For information on setting items see Help by clicking Help on the printer driver setting screen ...

Page 497: ...d to Off in advance Forced Hold P 1123 To use the scheduled print function it is necessary to set Use ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM P 1141 to Off in advance The scheduled print jobs are deleted when Use ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM P 1141 is set to On Sending Scheduled Print Documents from a Computer Windows 1 Open the document and display the print screen For information on displaying the print screen see...

Page 498: ...urs in advance the job is canceled A print start time between 0 00 and 23 59 is specified on the printer driver screen but the time is processed in the format year month day hour minute and second with the second fixed to 0 Checking the Scheduled Print Jobs 1 Press Print Home Screen P 141 2 Press Scheduled Print and check the print jobs waiting to be output The scheduled print date and time can be...

Page 499: ...t Scan Lock information is automatically embedded Embedding Information That Restricts Copying Forced Document Scan Lock P 771 Embedding Invisible Text Forced Secure Watermark P 769 When enabling or disabling the Secure Watermark and Document Scan Lock functions for each document printed follow the followings Enabling the Secure Watermark and Document Scan Lock Windows P 485 Printing Using Secure ...

Page 500: ...ne and click Details or Properties 3 Click Advanced Settings on the Finishing tab 4 Select On at Secure Printing Function of Device and click OK 5 Click OK 6 Click Print or OK Printing is executed using the Secure Watermark and Document Scan Lock functions LINKS Restricting Copying of Confidential Documents P 348 Printing 486 ...

Page 501: ...ion introduces printing method using the Remote UI or how to print a file stored in memory media Directly Printing Files without Opening Them P 488 Printing Using a Virtual Printer P 490 Printing From Memory Media Media Print P 493 Printing 487 ...

Page 502: ...he print settings as necessary If a password is set for the PDF file press Specify PDF File enter the password in Document Password When printing PDF files linked to the policy server select Specify PDF File enter the policy server user name in Policy Server User Name and the policy server password in Policy Server Password To print the PDF file which is prohibited for printing or to print PDF fil...

Page 503: ...may occur and the file may not be transferred Printing may not be performed properly depending on the data If printing with Direct Print is not possible or the printing position deviates opening files from the application and using the printer driver may enable proper printing Printing 489 ...

Page 504: ...ancel The job is canceled If the job matches the set conditions for Job Action and Print The job is printed according to the virtual printer If the job matches the set conditions for Job Action and Hold as Shared Job The virtual printer is disabled and the job is held in the machine For Secure Print and Encrypted Secure Print the virtual printer is disabled and the job is held in the machine Set L...

Page 505: ...ect Role to Set in Registering User Information in the Local Device P 681 Administrator DeviceAdmin NetworkAdmin This setting can be imported exported with models that support batch importing of this setting Importing Exporting the Setting Data P 827 This setting is included in Settings Registration Basic Information when batch exporting Importing Exporting All Settings P 831 Printing with a Virtu...

Page 506: ...For FTP printing put file name virtual printer name Example Printing sample pdf with a virtual printer named 001 put sample pdf 001 Printing 492 ...

Page 507: ... an outside location or when printing data you have brought with you to a business destination Using memory media For available memory media and information on inserting removing memory media see Connecting a USB Memory Device P 95 For instructions on using memory media see Working with Data in Memory Media P 606 Depending on the file format an optional product may be required System Options P 148...

Page 508: ... Saving Separately Scanned Documents Together Job Build 532 Useful Scanning Functions 534 Skipping Blank Pages When Scanning 536 Checking Scanned Originals Before Sending Saving Preview 538 Stamping Scanned Originals for Sending Saving 540 Sending Saving at a Specified Time 541 Notifying You by E Mail of the Completion of Sending Saving 543 Scanning with the OCR Function 545 Enhancing the Security...

Page 509: ...ic operations Introduction to Basic Operations This section describes the Scan Basic Features screen and the basic sending saving methods Scan Basic Features Screen P 497 Basic Operations for Scanning Originals P 500 Scanning Clearly This section describes the methods to solve problems such as blurry photographs illegible text due to dark paper and the appearance of dark borders Scanning Clearly P...

Page 510: ... for increasing working efficiency avoiding operation errors and enhancing security Useful Scanning Functions P 534 Scanning Using a Computer If you are editing a scanned document in a computer save directly into the computer for convenience Using Your Computer to Scan Remote Scan Windows P 561 Scanning 496 ...

Page 511: ...ss to recall the previously specified settings Basic Operations for Scanning Originals P 500 Press this icon to register the current settings in Favorite Settings of and change the button displayed in Managing the Machine P 662 Customizing the Basic Features Screen P 196 Favorite Settings Register frequently used scan settings here in advance to easily recall them when necessary Managing the Machi...

Page 512: ...of specified destinations Send to Myself Enables you to directly specify your own e mail address This button is available only when you are logged in to the machine with personal authentication management Managing Users P 675 Mobile Portal Enables you to specify a destination from the address book of a mobile device Basic Operations for Scanning Originals P 500 Personal Folder Enables you to speci...

Page 513: ...LINKS Registering Destinations P 218 Scanning 499 ...

Page 514: ...s You can select a destination and press Details to confirm the detailed information for the destination You can only change destinations from Details specified using the New Destination and destinations obtained via an LDAP server If the server machine is performing the System Manager information settings authentication between the server machine and the client machine is performed while the clie...

Page 515: ...gged in to the machine with personal authentication management selecting Personal Address List displays your personal Address Book You can also display dedicated user group address lists User Group Address Lists in which you are included Search by Name Enables you to search the destination by the name you are entering Search buttons by first letter Enables you to narrow down a search by the first ...

Page 516: ...x job has been sent on the client machine When you press the Reset key on the client machine When Auto Reset is activated on the client machine Entering Destinations Manually You can specify destinations manually that are not registered in the Address Book or one touch buttons 1 Press New Destination and select E Mail or File Selecting Store in Mail Box enables you to save scanned documents in the...

Page 517: ... administrator Specifying Destinations in the LDAP Server You can search and specify destinations registered in the LDAP server 1 Press Address Book 2 Press To LDAP Server When Change Address Book is displayed press Change Address Book LDAP Server If the network password input screen is displayed enter the user name and password and press OK 3 When searching destinations in the LDAP server press e...

Page 518: ...st search condition press Add Search Condition and then select or or and for the next condition To change conditions and search again Press Delete to delete the specified contents and specify the conditions again When searching by name Press Search by Name enter the text to search press OK You can specify attributes used when performing Search by Name for a destination from the LDAP server Configu...

Page 519: ...ecified from the address book of a mobile device To use this function you must install the Canon PRINT Business application to your mobile device Utilizing the Machine through Applications P 637 1 Connect to the mobile device Connecting with Mobile Devices P 630 2 Send the address from the mobile device to the machine For detailed information on operations using the mobile device see Canon PRINT B...

Page 520: ...or Bcc 4 Specify the scan settings as necessary File FormatFile FormatFile Format Selecting a File Format ResolutionResolution Selecting Resolution Scan SizeScan Size Specifying the Scanning Size of Originals Select ColorSelect Color Selecting Color Scan Black White Scan 2 Sided Original2 Sided Original Scanning Both Sides of Originals Copy RatioCopy Ratio Enlarging or Reducing Selecting a File Fo...

Page 521: ...s computer regardless of the operating system used OOXML This file format can be edited in Microsoft Office Word or PowerPoint The optional Universal Send Advanced Feature Set is required for this format You cannot select OOXML if you are sending a file stored in Memory RX Inbox of Fax I Fax Inbox PDF Trace Smooth is only valid with the following settings Select Color Color mode other than the Bla...

Page 522: ...e instead of saving all pages as a single file press Divide into Pages To specify the number of pages to include in each file after pressing Divide into Pages specify the desired number of pages To save each page as a separate file specify 1 for the number of pages If you select TIFF JPEG each page will automatically be created as a separate file according to the Select Color mode When Black White...

Page 523: ...ct the size of the original select Auto If you want to scan an A3 original with an image that extends all the way to the edges without the periphery of the original being cut off place the original on the platen glass and press A3 When scanning a special size document such as OFICIO Press Other Size and select the paper size When scanning a free size original Place the original in the feeder and s...

Page 524: ...ence If the scanning size is specified Documents that are scanned using a specified scan size Custom Long Original or Free Size cannot be stored in a mail box If you are currently using the Scan and Store function you cannot select Long Original Selecting Color Scan Black White Scan You can specify color when scanning original 1 Press the setting button for color 2 Select the color and press OK De...

Page 525: ...nned even if you set Auto Color B W To avoid this set the color mode to Full Color Black White Scans in black and white regardless of an original s color This mode is automatically set for the TIFF file format Grayscale Scans in grayscale regardless of an original s color This mode uses different shades of color such as black dark gray gray light gray and white making color look more natural and b...

Page 526: ...riginals whose images on the front and back sides face the same direction or Calendar Type for originals whose images on the front and back sides face in opposite directions Enlarging or Reducing You can enlarge or reduce standard size original to other standard sizes when scanning Enlarging or Reducing in Standard Paper Sizes You can enlarge or reduce by specifying magnification Enlarging or Redu...

Page 527: ...ect magnification from and press OK 3 Press Close Enlarging or Reducing by Specifying Magnification 1 Press Options Copy Ratio 2 Specify magnification and press OK 3 Press Close Enlarging and Reducing to Fit the Finished Paper Size 1 Press Options Copy Ratio 2 Press Auto specify the finished size and then press OK Scanning 513 ...

Page 528: ...press Start Sending to send save the file Depending on the communication settings you may be prompted to enter the user name and password Setting E mail I Fax Communication P 74 To check the total number of specified destinations The total number of specified destinations is displayed on the top right of the screen This enables you to confirm that the number of destinations is correct before sendi...

Page 529: ...llowing format You can change the setting so that a different name can be assigned Setting a File Name P 557 When sending by e mail Job numbers four digits _page numbers three digits file extension name format such as 1042_001 jpg When saving in a file server The year month day hour minute and second the file is saved 14 digits file extension name format such as 20151030133541 jpg E mail subject T...

Page 530: ...ay Fax Function P 1043 This setting is useful for specifying multiple destinations including faxes such as when saving a copy of a sent fax in a file server Checking scanned images before sending saving You can check scanned images on the preview screen before sending saving Checking Scanned Originals Before Sending Saving Preview P 538 Registering frequently used settings You can combine frequent...

Page 531: ...nations and the number of pages Selecting a document and pressing Cancel enables you to cancel sending saving Pressing Print List prints a status list of sent saved documents displayed on the screen Pressing Details Resend enables you to resend resave the documents that failed to send save To specify another destination press Change Destination For documents with multiple destinations specified us...

Page 532: ...mn on the information represents an error code You can check the causes and solutions for errors based on error codes Countermeasures for Each Error Code P 1308 By pressing Communic Mgt Report the displayed send save log can be printed as a list TIPS Registering an address from the send history You can register an address to the Address Book or a one touch button via the send history on the Status...

Page 533: ...pencil and thick magazines adjusting the density and sharpness and erasing unnecessary shadows can scan originals clearly Adjusting Image Quality P 520 Adjusting Density P 521 Adjusting Sharpness When Scanning Sharpness P 522 Erasing Dark Borders When Scanning Erase Frame P 523 Scanning 519 ...

Page 534: ...1 Place the original Placing Originals P 109 2 Press Scan and Send Home Screen P 141 3 Specify the destination on the Scan Basic Features screen Scan Basic Features Screen P 497 4 Press Options Original Type 5 Select the type of original and press OK 6 Press Close 7 Press Originals are scanned and sending saving starts If the phenomenon called moire striped pattern noise occurs when scanning an or...

Page 535: ...n Basic Features screen Scan Basic Features Screen P 497 4 Press Options Density 5 Adjust the density and press OK Press to decrease the density Press to increase the density To adjust the density of the background You can send store documents such as newspapers or documents with colored backgrounds clearly Press Auto to automatically adjust the background density Press Adjust to manually adjust t...

Page 536: ...othen the finished image 1 Place the original Placing Originals P 109 2 Press Scan and Send Home Screen P 141 3 Specify the destination on the Scan Basic Features screen Scan Basic Features Screen P 497 4 Press Options Sharpness 5 Adjust the sharpness and press OK To sharpen blurred text adjust the control to High To reduce moire when scanning originals that contain printed photos such as magazine...

Page 537: ...l Placing Originals P 109 2 Press Scan and Send Home Screen P 141 3 Specify the destination on the Scan Basic Features screen Scan Basic Features Screen P 497 4 Press Options Erase Frame 5 Specify the erasing type and width Erasing the frames in copies of documents 1 Press Erase Original Frame and check Original Size If the size displayed in Original Size is different from the size of the original...

Page 538: ...uments 1 Press Erase Binding and select the punch hole location 2 Enter the erasing width If you want to adjust the width for each border independently press Erase Original Frame or Erase Book Frame and then press Adjust Independently to enter the erasing widths If you are using Erase Binding the borders you do not select are also erased by 4 mm 6 Press OK Close 7 Press Originals are scanned and s...

Page 539: ... pages and scanning a large number of originals separately to put into one Sending Saving Different Size Originals Together Different Size Originals P 526 Scanning a Facing Page Original and Storing Sending it as Two Separate Pages P 528 Scanning to Make a Booklet Booklet Scan P 530 Sending Saving Separately Scanned Documents Together Job Build P 532 Scanning 525 ...

Page 540: ...riginals or paper jams 1 Place the originals in the feeder Placing Originals P 109 To place the originals with the same width align the top and bottom edges of the originals with the edges of the feeder as shown in the figure below To place the originals with different widths align the top edges of all of the originals with the back edge of the feeder For originals with the same widths For origina...

Page 541: ...placing the originals with different widths 7 Press Close 8 Press Originals are scanned and sending saving starts When the originals with different widths are scanned together the images of the smaller size originals may be slanted because the originals cannot be fixed with the slide guides Scanning 527 ...

Page 542: ...lass Place it face down with its corner aligned with the top left corner of the platen glass as shown below 1 Place the original Placing Originals P 109 2 Press Scan and Send Home Screen P 141 3 Specify the destination on the Scan Basic Features screen Scan Basic Features Screen P 497 4 Specify the scan settings as necessary Basic Operations for Scanning Originals P 500 5 Press Options Book 2 Page...

Page 543: ...Erasing Dark Borders When Scanning Erase Frame P 523 Scanning 529 ...

Page 544: ...3 Press Mail Box 4 Select the destination Mail Box For information on the items displayed on the screen and the method for operating them see Editing Files in the Mail Box P 596 5 Press Scan 6 Press Options Booklet Scan 7 Specify the original size and the paper size for the booklet Press Change for Original Size and select the original size If you select Auto the optimal booklet layout size is aut...

Page 545: ... the same size for Original Size and Layout Size the size of the image is automatically reduced when output 8 Press OK Close 9 Press Originals are scanned and saving starts Make sure to use the same size for all originals Make sure to place portrait originals vertically because the images for even number pages become upside down if you scan them when placed horizontally Scanning 531 ...

Page 546: ... is complete the screen appears prompting you to scan the next original If you place your originals in the feeder remove the originals from the original output area when the scanning of each batch is complete 7 Place the next original and press Repeat this step until you finish scanning all of the originals To change the scan settings press Change Settings If you place different size originals in ...

Page 547: ...tination is Mail Box You need to set the necessary scan settings in advance since you cannot change the other functions during the Job Build mode Select Color 2 Sided Original Density Original Type If the Scan and Store destination is Mail Box and you set the N on 1 mode together with the Job Build mode you cannot change Select Color and Density in Change Settings The following functions can be us...

Page 548: ...n Scanning P 536 Checking Scanned Originals Before Sending Saving Preview P 538 Stamping Scanned Originals for Sending Saving P 540 Sending Saving at a Specified Time P 541 Notifying You by E Mail of the Completion of Sending Saving P 543 Scanning with the OCR Function P 545 Enhancing the Security of Electronic Files P 550 Recalling Previously Used Settings for Sending Saving Previous Settings P 5...

Page 549: ...Specifying E Mail Settings P 559 Scanning 535 ...

Page 550: ...als P 500 5 Press Options Skip Blank Originals 6 Select the color of the originals to skip To skip blank originals regardless of their color select All Colors To skip blank originals only in white select White Only When something other than Auto Color B W or Auto Color Gray is selected in Select Color the same operation as All Colors is performed even if White Only is set Pressing Preview to selec...

Page 551: ...nnot be performed if a destination with a type other than E Mail or File is set If the size of the original is smaller than the scan size setting it may not be skipped correctly To check the number of pages that have been sent saved follow the procedures below Send Job Log select a document Details check the number displayed for Send Pages The status screen and Communication Management Report disp...

Page 552: ...s as necessary Basic Operations for Scanning Originals P 500 5 Press Options Preview Close 6 Press Originals are scanned and the preview screen appears To cancel scanning press Cancel or Yes When Press the Start key to scan the next original is displayed Place the next original to scan and press When scanning all of the originals is complete press Preview and Send to display the preview screen 7 C...

Page 553: ...mbers corresponding to Move Page and Behind Page 4 Press OK To switch the locations of pages You can switch the locations of specified pages 1 Press Edit Scanned Data 2 Press Switch Page Position 3 Enter the page numbers corresponding to Target Page A and Target Page B 4 Press OK 8 Press Start Sending Sending saving starts Scanning 539 ...

Page 554: ...he feeder Placing Originals P 109 A stamp is applied on the originals placed in the feeder 2 Press Scan and Send Home Screen P 141 3 Specify the destination on the Scan Basic Features screen Scan Basic Features Screen P 497 4 Specify the scan settings as necessary Basic Operations for Scanning Originals P 500 5 Press Options Finished Stamp Close 6 Press Originals are scanned and sending saving sta...

Page 555: ...y the destination on the Scan Basic Features screen Scan Basic Features Screen P 497 4 Specify the scan settings as necessary Basic Operations for Scanning Originals P 500 5 Press Options Delayed Send 6 Enter the time to send save and press OK Enter all four digits of the time For example for 5 minutes past 7 enter 0705 and for 18 minutes past 23 enter 2318 7 Press Close 8 Press Originals are scan...

Page 556: ...ng However the actual number of send jobs that the machine can handle may be fewer than 120 depending on the following conditions When multiple documents are being sent at the same time When large documents are being sent When a large amount of memory is being used for the Mail Box and Fax I Fax Inbox LINKS Notifying You by E Mail of the Completion of Sending Saving P 543 Scanning 542 ...

Page 557: ... register the destination in advance Registering Destinations in the Address Book P 223 To select Send to Myself as the destination to notify it is necessary to register your e mail address in the user information in advance and log in using personal authentication management Registering User Information in the Local Device P 681 1 Place the original Placing Originals P 109 2 Press Scan and Send H...

Page 558: ...on on how to view and use the Address Book see Address Book P 218 If you want to check the content of the sent document select Attach TX Image to attach the first page of the document as a PDF file to a notification e mail 7 Press OK Close 8 Press Originals are scanned and sending saving starts When sending saving is complete the notification e mail is sent to the specified address Scanning 544 ...

Page 559: ...inals P 109 2 Press Scan and Send Home Screen P 141 3 Specify the destination on the Scan Basic Features screen Scan Basic Features Screen P 497 4 Specify the scan settings as necessary Basic Operations for Scanning Originals P 500 5 Select a file format If you want to separate multiple images and send them as separate files each of which consists of only one page press Divide into Pages enter the...

Page 560: ...e for OCR press OK Only European languages can be detected with OCR Prioritize Precision Settings and Languages for OCR Processing P 548 To select XPS 1 Select XPS press OCR Text Searchable 2 Select a language to use for OCR press OK To select the Word format for OOXML 1 Select OOXML Word To change a language to use for OCR press Change select a language or language group press OK Select a languag...

Page 561: ...OXML you can set to delete the scanned background images You can generate Word files which are easy to edit without unwanted images Include Background Images in Word File P 1087 If you are currently using the Scan and Store function the OCR language can only be specified when Word is selected for OOXML or OCR Prioritize Precision is selected for PDF OCR Results Are Not Satisfactory When you create...

Page 562: ...sh Thai or Vietnamese the selected language is recognized as Western European ISO 2 Asian languages cannot be detected when OCR Prioritize Precision is selected 3 Including English French Italian German Spanish Dutch Portuguese Albanian Catalan Danish Finnish Icelandic Norwegian and Swedish 4 Including Croatian Czech Hungarian Polish and Slovak 5 Including Estonian Latvian and Lithuanian Recogniza...

Page 563: ...es Item Details Original Format Printed documents Word processor documents documents consisting of text graphics photographs or tables and with no character slant Text Format Horizontal and vertical writing documents containing both horizontal and vertical writing can also be recognized Only horizontal writing can be recognized for European languages and Korean text One to three column documents w...

Page 564: ...lled in the machine System Options P 1481 Depending on the machine you are using this function is available by default Only PDF files can be encrypted PDF and XPS files can have digital signatures Performing Encryption P 550 Adding a Digital Signature P 553 Performing Encryption Setting a password when scanning an original enables PDF files to be encrypted for sending saving This helps reduce the ...

Page 565: ... Password to Open Doc to enter the password Password Required to Change Permission Enables you to set the password that is required when printing the file or editing the file such as deleting pages as well as to specify the operations that are allowed Press Password Required to Change Permission Permission Password to enter the password and then specify the operations to be permitted Allow Printin...

Page 566: ...ge Text Appears only if you select Acrobat 3 0 or Later 40 bit RC4 for Encryption Level Selecting this key sets both Enable Copying and Extraction of Images Text and Enable Access for the Visually Impaired at the same time If you are logging in to the machine with personal authentication management Managing Users P 675 the Store Password button is displayed Pressing this button saves the passwords...

Page 567: ... Specify the destination on the Scan Basic Features screen Scan Basic Features Screen P 497 4 Press the setting button for file format 5 Press PDF or XPS Add Digital Signatures If you do not log in to the machine with personal authentication management and select XPS press Add Device Signature 6 Select the digital signature and press OK Device Signature The name of the machine is added to the file...

Page 568: ...e enabling the reader to check at a glance who created the file When using together with PDF file encryption If you want to set a password for Password Required to Change Permission when encrypting a PDF file select Changes but Extract Pages for Allow Changes Performing Encryption P 550 Setting S MIME enables you to send an e mail with a digital signature as well as encryption S MIME Settings P 11...

Page 569: ...Select the log to recall and press OK The destination and its scan settings are specified according to the selected log When personal authentication management is in use the machine recalls the settings specified in the past by the user who are logging in to the machine You can change the recalled settings before sending saving 5 Press Originals are scanned and sending saving starts If you set Man...

Page 570: ...tication Password P 1146 is set to On the following password will not be stored in Previous Settings A password entered by specifying the destination in New Destination and then pressing File LINKS Managing Users P 675 Scanning 556 ...

Page 571: ...ginals are scanned and sending saving starts When sending a document by e mail it is sent with its file name assigned in the format of entered file name_page numbers three digits file extension such as business log_001 jpg If you do not enter a file name the format will be Job numbers four digits _page numbers three digits file extension When saving a document in a file server it is saved with its...

Page 572: ...tracted text is appended to the end of the filename Characters over the character limit will be cut off When OCR Prioritize Precision is set for File Format the settings for Auto OCR are disabled Editing a file name from the Remote UI If you register a file name in a state where File Name is set in Favorite Settings you can edit the file name from the Remote UI Start the Remote UI click Settings R...

Page 573: ... Originals P 109 2 Press Scan and Send Home Screen P 141 3 Specify the destination on the Scan Basic Features screen Scan Basic Features Screen P 497 4 Specify the scan settings as necessary Basic Operations for Scanning Originals P 500 5 Press Options and specify e mail settings Subject MessageSubject Message To specify subject body 1 Press Subject Message 2 Press Subject enter the subject and th...

Page 574: ... recipient replies When you send an I fax a Full mode delivery confirmation message is sent to the selected reply to address If you set a login service for the machine and set Specify Authentication User for Reply To to On the e mail address of the login user appears as the reply to address E Mail PriorityE Mail Priority To specify priority 1 Press E Mail Priority 2 Select a priority level and pre...

Page 575: ... for Windows Using Color Network ScanGear 2 to Scan You can scan originals directly into your favorite application for editing This method is useful when you want to edit scanned photos in Photoshop or want to paste scanned picture into a Word document Using Color Network ScanGear 2 P 562 Using WSD to Scan Even if you do not have a dedicated scanner driver you can scan an original easily from a co...

Page 576: ... TWAIN or not Help for Color Network ScanGear 2 Clicking Help Color Network ScanGear 2 Help on the Color Network ScanGear 2 screen displays the Help screen For information that is not in the User s Guide including driver features and how to set up those features see Help Preparing to Use Color Network ScanGear 2 After installing Color Network ScanGear 2 on a computer Installing Drivers P 71 follow...

Page 577: ...3 Click OK The Select Scanner dialog box closes 4 Check that this machine is selected and click Exit To check if it can be connected properly click Test Connection Scanning 563 ...

Page 578: ...ss Online Now you are ready for scanning from your computer During the online state other functions such as copying are not available You can also set the machine to automatically go online Auto Online P 1084 From a computer 4 From the application menu select the command that starts the scanning Color Network ScanGear 2 starts For more information see the instruction manual for each application 5 ...

Page 579: ...ntation For more information see Help for Color Network ScanGear 2 7 Click Scan Scanning an original starts When scanning is complete the Color Network ScanGear 2 screen closes and the scanned original is displayed on the application screen When the scanning operations are complete press Offline on the Scanner screen You can also set the machine to automatically go offline Auto Offline P 1085 Scan...

Page 580: ... Preparing for WSD Scan P 566 Scanning Originals Using WSD WSD Scan P 568 In the following cases WSD Scan is not available ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM is activated Using ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM P 723 DepartmentID Authentication is in use as a login service Changing Login Services P 1450 Preparing for WSD Scan From the control panel 1 Press 2 Press Preferences Network TCP IP Settings WSD Settings 3 P...

Page 581: ... machine and click Next Follow the on screen instructions to operate If this machine is not displayed a Firewall setting problem may exist For more information see the instruction manual of the computer Scanning 567 ...

Page 582: ...at even if you place an original larger than A4 LTR only A4 LTR size is scanned From the control panel 1 Place the original Placing Originals P 109 2 Press WSD Scan Home Screen P 141 3 Press Allow Remote Scan Now you are ready for scanning from your computer From a computer 4 Click Start All Programs Windows Fax and Scan 5 Click Scan 6 Click New Scan Scanning 568 ...

Page 583: ...ttings as necessary Selecting the type of original from the Profile drop down list enables you to make adjustments for the optimal image quality For originals mainly consisting of text select Document For originals consisting of photographs only select Photo Default From the File type drop down list select the file format for the saved image of the scanned original To check the scanned image with ...

Page 584: ...l them when scanning Select Add profile from the Profile drop down list Specify the scan settings you want to register Enter a name in the Profile name text box Click Save Profile Sending the document to a computer using WSD You can also send the scanned document to computers on the network that support WSD In this case press WSD Scan select the computer you want to send to Enable The Windows Fax ...

Page 585: ... Other Devices 588 Printing Files in Other Devices 589 Making Simple Edits to Files 591 Saving Documents in the Mail Box 592 Editing Files in the Mail Box 596 Printing Files in the Mail Box 601 Sending Files in the Mail Box 603 Specifying the Mail Box Settings 604 Working with Data in Memory Media 606 Saving Documents in Memory Media 608 Working with Files and Folders in Memory Media 610 Printing ...

Page 586: ...ample saving scanned documents in the Advanced Box can achieve the sharing of information among the staff in an office A part of the Advanced Box also can be assigned as a personal storage space not open to the public Using as a Simple File Server P 574 Working with Other Devices You can access a shared storage Advanced Box of other Canon multifunction printers from your machine for remote operati...

Page 587: ...an get started using it quickly and easily Once files are edited you can handle them according to your purposes such as printing and sending files to a computer via e mail Making Simple Edits to Files P 591 Working with Data in Memory Media Even if the machine is not connected to a network the use of memory media allows for easy data exchange with computers With memory media you can also rename da...

Page 588: ...se the Advanced Box some settings need to be specified beforehand Setting the Advanced Box of the Machine P 78 To use the Personal Space both the personal authentication management and Personal Space settings need to be specified beforehand Creating the Personal Space in the Advanced Box P 583 As the Advanced Box is intended for use on a network it normally requires a user authentication during us...

Page 589: ...destination from Scan and Store For instructions on sending documents to the Advanced Box see Registering Destinations in the Address Book P 223 1 Set the original Placing Originals P 109 2 Press Scan and Store Home Screen P 141 3 Press Advanced Box 4 Press Shared Space or Personal Space For information on the items on the screen and instructions on how to use them see Working with Files and Folde...

Page 590: ...Place the next original to scan and press After scanning all of the originals press Start Storing to save the file To check the result of saving press Store Job Log If NG is displayed the file is not saved successfully Try the operation again Using Storage Space 576 ...

Page 591: ...ncomplete file is generated in the Advanced Box In this case perform the operation again after restarting the machine If the Advanced Box is opened externally as an SMB or WebDAV server a user with Administrator privileges can delete the folders and files created by general users by directly connecting to the Advanced Box from Windows Explorer on a computer When Opened Using SMB P 577 When Opened ...

Page 592: ... machine share To access the Personal Space enter http host name or IP address of this machine users When login is successful the Advanced Box is displayed If you are using an IPv6 address enclose the address with If TLS is in use enter https instead of http when entering the address When the login screen is displayed enter the user name and password Using Storage Space 578 ...

Page 593: ...rom the current one Advanced Box DetailsAdvanced Box Details Advanced Box Details Enables you to check the locations URL of the Shared Space and the Personal Space and the available memory of the Advanced Box Edit Personal Space Enables you to create rename and delete the Personal Space Creating the Personal Space in the Advanced Box P 583 4 Operate files and folders Location currently displayed D...

Page 594: ...inting Files in the Advanced Box P 584 Folder OperationsFolder Operations Folder Operations Press to create or delete folders Edit FileEdit File Edit File Press to rename or delete files Display ImageDisplay Image Display Image Displays the preview image of a file You can also print after checking the preview image DetailsDetails Details Displays the size and the updated date time of a file Clear ...

Page 595: ...ons for Scanning to Save P 615 To create a folder 1 Press Folder Operations 2 Press Create Folder 3 Enter a folder name and press OK 4 Press OK To change a folder name 1 Display a folder whose name you want to change and press Folder Operations 2 Select a folder and press Details 3 Press Rename Folder 4 Enter a folder name and press OK 5 Press OK To check the detailed information of a folder 1 Dis...

Page 596: ...To delete a folder 1 Display a folder to delete and press Folder Operations 2 Select a folder and press Delete Yes Using Storage Space 582 ...

Page 597: ... Home Screen P 141 2 Press Advanced Box 3 Press Edit Personal Space Create Personal Space When a Personal Space already exists Delete Personal Space is displayed instead of Create Personal Space Each user is allowed to create only one Personal Space but you can create multiple folders in the Personal Space 4 Press Yes To change the public folder name of a Personal Space The name of a user who logs...

Page 598: ...dvanced Box 3 Press Shared Space or Personal Space For information on the items on the screen and instructions on how to use them see Working with Files and Folders in the Advanced Box P 579 4 Select a file and press Print If you select PDF or XPS files proceed to step 6 You can select and print up to 6 files in the same folder at a time 5 Select the paper source and press OK 6 Enter the number of...

Page 599: ...on enter the specified password If you press Start Printing without entering a password a password entry screen is displayed if the file has an encryption password 8 Press Start Printing Printing starts To cancel printing press Cancel Yes You can also display the file preview image and print from this screen Working with Files and Folders in the Advanced Box P 579 LINKS Saving Documents in the Adv...

Page 600: ...rinting Available only for imageRUNNER ADVANCE series machines connected to a network Saving Documents in Other Devices P 587 Working with Files and Folders in Other Devices P 588 Printing Files in Other Devices P 589 To access other devices some settings need to be specified beforehand Connecting to the Other Devices P 84 To prevent unauthorized operations from being performed the Advanced Box th...

Page 601: ...h Files and Folders in Other Devices P 588 5 Display the save location and press Scan 6 Specify the scan settings as necessary For scan settings see Setting Screen and Operations for Scanning to Save P 615 7 Press Originals are scanned and saved as files When canceling scanning press Cancel or Yes When Press the Start key to scan the next original is displayed Place the next original to scan and p...

Page 602: ...ck Storage InformationCheck Storage Information Check Storage Information Selecting a device and pressing Details enables you to check the information protocol path of the device You can also use a personal folder as the destination For information on the personal folder settings see Configuring Personal Folders P 719 4 Operate files and folders For information on the items on the screen and instr...

Page 603: ...an select and print up to 6 files in the same folder at a time 5 Select the paper source and press OK 6 Enter the number of prints using the numeric keys Change No of Copies If you select multiple files in step 4 press Change No of Copies and enter the number of prints 7 Specify the print settings as necessary For print settings see Setting Screen and Operations for Printing Saved Files P 618 To p...

Page 604: ...8 Press Start Printing Printing starts To cancel printing press Cancel Yes LINKS Saving Documents in Other Devices P 587 Loading Paper P 116 Using Storage Space 590 ...

Page 605: ...ail Box in the Copy function contain print settings specified when saving such as two sided printing you can print the files without specifying the print settings Saving Documents in the Mail Box P 592 Editing Files in the Mail Box P 596 Printing Files in the Mail Box P 601 Sending Files in the Mail Box P 603 Specifying the Mail Box Settings P 604 The machine is set to automatically delete saved f...

Page 606: ...ommend that you delete unwanted files or image data from your Mail Box to make space for storing new documents Scanning from the Machine to Save P 592 Saving Data on Computers P 593 Scanning from the Machine to Save 1 Set the original Placing Originals P 109 2 Press Scan and Store Home Screen P 141 3 Press Mail Box 4 Select the box to save in For information on the items on the screen and instruct...

Page 607: ...n and press After scanning all of the originals press Start Storing to save the file Saving Data on Computers For Windows P 593 For Mac OS P 594 For Windows 1 Open a file and display the print screen 2 Select the machine and click Preferences or Properties 3 Select Store from Output Method and click Yes 4 Specify the detailed settings for saving and click OK Using Storage Space 593 ...

Page 608: ...you to select multiple boxes and save the same files in each box The box name registered in the machine can be applied to the printer driver For details see Help of the printer driver 5 Specify the print settings as necessary and click OK 6 Click Print or OK The file is saved in the box selected in step 4 For Mac OS 1 Open a file and display the print screen 2 Select the machine and specify the pr...

Page 609: ...es Select the box you want to save in Clicking while holding down the COMMAND key on the computer keyboard enables you to select multiple boxes and save the same files in each box 6 Click OK The file is saved in the box selected in step 5 LINKS Printing From a Computer P 464 Canceling Printing P 467 Using Storage Space 595 ...

Page 610: ... also enter the box number using the numeric keys to directly specify the desired box Mail box list Displays icons indicating the statuses of the boxes box numbers box names and the amount of memory consumed by each box Icon types displayed are as follows Mail box with files saved Mail box with no files saved Mail box with passwords set Specifying the Mail Box Settings P 604 Used Displays the tota...

Page 611: ...nts in the Machine P 331 contain print settings Note that if you edit files such as combining and inserting files all the print settings for each file are canceled Total number of files and number of selected files Displays the total number of files saved and the number of files in the selection Print ListPrint List Print List Prints a list of documents saved in the box displayed You can check the...

Page 612: ... Image 2 After checking the preview image press Back To print the file press Print To check the detailed information of a file 1 Select a file and press Details 2 After checking the detailed information press OK To delete a file 1 Select a file and press Edit File Delete 2 Press Yes To scan and save documents 1 Set the original Placing Originals P 109 2 Press Edit File Add Files Scan and Store 3 S...

Page 613: ... applied to a new file Access Stored Files Settings Change Default Settings P 1119 To insert a file into another one The files in the same box can be inserted Note that if the resolution settings of each file do not match you cannot insert files 1 Select the file where you want to insert another file and press Edit File Insert Pages 2 Specify the file to insert and the position to insert it and pr...

Page 614: ...e pages to delete To delete only one page press Single Page and enter the corresponding page number To delete multiple pages at the same time press Multiple Pages First Page or Last Page and enter the corresponding page numbers 3 Press Start Deleting Yes Using Storage Space 600 ...

Page 615: ... Box P 596 4 Select a file and press Print You can select and print up to 100 files in one mail box at a time However if there are reserved jobs in the mail box the number of files you can select and print varies depending on the number of files reserved 5 Enter the number of prints using the numeric keys Change No of Copies If you select multiple files in step 4 press Change No of Copies and ente...

Page 616: ...s the machine does not support the settings of the file You can also display the file preview image and print from this screen Editing Files in the Mail Box P 596 The maximum number print jobs that can be reserved is 100 LINKS Saving Documents in the Mail Box P 592 Loading Paper P 116 Using Storage Space 602 ...

Page 617: ...hem see Editing Files in the Mail Box P 596 4 Select a file and press Send 5 Specify the destination and the settings for sending as necessary For details see the following but note that they include some settings that you cannot specify in this step Faxing P 384 Scanning P 495 Delete File After Sending To delete the selected file after sending press Delete File After Sending 6 Press Start Sending...

Page 618: ... are not allowed If you forget your password there is no way to retrieve it Be careful not to forget the password Time Until File Auto Delete Press to change the period of time until saved files are automatically deleted When set to 0 files will not be deleted URL Send Settings Notifies you by e mail of the location URL of the box where files are saved This setting is helpful for checking saved fi...

Page 619: ...e Auto Delete and Print When Storing from Printer Driver can be specified for all boxes at the same time See Time Until File Auto Delete P 1119 and Print When Storing from Printer Driver P 1119 Using Storage Space 605 ...

Page 620: ...it is necessary that Memory Media in Store Location Display Settings is set to On Store Location Display Settings P 1043 Set Use Scan Function and Use Print Function to On Use Scan Print Function P 1122 When the memory media is not recognized even if it is connected properly the machine may be set to use the MEAP driver for USB external storage device Set Use MEAP Driver for USB Storage Device to ...

Page 621: ... Using a different procedure to remove the memory media may cause damage to the memory media and the main unit of the machine 1 Press 2 Select the memory media that you want to disconnect and press Remove 3 Disconnect the memory media from the USB port and press OK OK Using Storage Space 607 ...

Page 622: ... set to On a shortcut to Scan and Store in Memory Media is displayed when you insert memory media Press Scan and Store in Memory Media and proceed to step 4 Select Option When Connecting Memory Media P 1122 Inserting a memory media P 606 3 Press Memory Media 4 Select the desired memory media For information on the items on the screen and instructions on how to use them see Working with Files and F...

Page 623: ...Place the next original to scan and press After scanning all of the originals press Start Storing to save the file To check the result of saving press Store Job Log If NG is displayed the file is not saved successfully Try the operation again Using Storage Space 609 ...

Page 624: ...ress to move to the upper level from the current one Check Media InformationCheck Media Information Check Media Information Enables you to check the serial number and the free space of the memory media Press to remove the memory media Be sure to press this button to safely remove the memory media For instructions on how to remove see Removing the memory media P 607 4 Operate files and folders File...

Page 625: ...ions Folder Operations Press to create a new folder Edit FileEdit File Edit File Press to rename or delete files Display ImageDisplay Image Display Image Displays the preview image of a file You can also print after checking the preview image and deleting unnecessary pages DetailsDetails Details Displays the size and the updated date time of a file Clear SelectionClear Selection Clear Selection De...

Page 626: ...P 615 To create a folder 1 Press Folder Operations 2 Press Create Folder 3 Enter a folder name and press OK 4 Press OK To change a folder name 1 Display a folder whose name you want to change and press Folder Operations 2 Select a folder and press Details 3 Press Rename Folder 4 Enter a folder name and press OK 5 Press OK To check the detailed information of a folder 1 Display a folder whose infor...

Page 627: ...the items on the screen and instructions on how to use them see Working with Files and Folders in Memory Media P 610 4 Select a file and press Print If you select PDF or XPS files proceed to step 6 You can select and print up to 6 files in the same memory media at a time 5 Select the paper source and press OK 6 Enter the number of prints using the numeric keys Change No of Copies If you select mul...

Page 628: ...d password If you press Start Printing without entering a password a password entry screen is displayed if the file has an encryption password 8 Press Start Printing Printing starts To cancel printing press Cancel Yes LINKS Saving Documents in Memory Media P 608 Loading Paper P 116 Using Storage Space 614 ...

Page 629: ... the settings in order to scan properly To change the settings press the button under the display section For information on file formats see System Options P 1481 You can select the color mode for scanning by pressing Select Color You can set the copy ratio to 100 by pressing 1 1 You can specify the copy ratio to enlarge reduce the scanning size by pressing Copy Ratio When the size of the origina...

Page 630: ... cannot use a period or space for the first or last character of a file name If you do not specify anything the saved date and time is automatically assigned as a file name For example if a file is saved as a JPEG at 1 05 12 p m on October 30 2015 its name will be 20151030130512 jpg If a file name is too long the string path indicating the file location may exceed the maximum of 256 characters cau...

Page 631: ...ments in the Advanced Box P 575 Saving Documents in Other Devices P 587 Saving Documents in the Mail Box P 592 Saving Documents in Memory Media P 608 Basic Operations for Scanning Originals P 500 Using Storage Space 617 ...

Page 632: ...nge the settings press the button under the display section To change the number of prints enter the number using the numeric keys You can select the color mode for printing by pressing Select Color Depending on the settings you are specifying the Print Sample button is displayed which enables you to check the print result of a file If you select multiple files the Change No of Copies button appea...

Page 633: ...file automatically after it is printed Start Printing Starts printing Cancel Cancels print settings and returns to the file selection screen Restore Settings Restore Settings Press to specify the settings again from the beginning and return to the print screen Favorite Settings Favorite Settings Register frequently used scan settings here in advance to easily recall them when necessary Merge Files...

Page 634: ...n opposite top bottom orientations Finishing Select the type of 2 sided printing Options Add Cover Adds covers Job Separator Insert Sheets Job Separator Inserts blank sheets between the specified pages When selecting multiple documents you can select Job Separator which can separate each document Booklet Prints a document with several pages in such a way that the prints are made into a booklet Shi...

Page 635: ...the original image for printing Gutter Creates gutters along the sides of the paper Page Numbering Adds page numbers Copy Set Numbering Adds the number of sets Watermark Adds watermarks Print Date Adds the date Color Balance Enables you to adjust the color balance Adjust One Touch Color Enables you to adjust the contrast Print on Tab Prints on the tabs of tab paper Using Storage Space 621 ...

Page 636: ...ected files When selecting multiple files the Change No of Copies button appears To change the number of prints press this button Press this icon to register the current settings in Favorite Settings of or to change the factory default print settings Favorite Settings Favorite Settings Register frequently used scan settings here in advance to easily recall them when necessary Print Range Print Ran...

Page 637: ...differ the pages are printed as one sided prints on paper of their respective sizes If you want such pages to be printed as two sided documents select the appropriate paper sizes in advance Finishing Select the finishing method Available when printing PDF XPS files Cancel Cancels print settings and returns to the file selection screen Options Resolution Resolution Enables you to select the resolut...

Page 638: ... to set the machine to detect blank pages included in documents and not print them Enlarge Reduce Enlarge Reduce Enables you to adjust the image size of JPEG and TIFF files to match the paper size when printing Image Orientation Image Orientation Enables you to set the machine to automatically detect the aspect ratio of the image for a JPEG or TIFF file and print it vertically or horizontally as r...

Page 639: ...LINKS Printing Files in the Advanced Box P 584 Printing Files in Other Devices P 589 Printing Files in the Mail Box P 601 Printing Files in Memory Media P 613 Using Storage Space 625 ...

Page 640: ... for each storage location and file format Available Unavailable Options Storage Mail Box Advanced Box Network Memory Media TIFF JPEG PDF XPS Front Cover Job Separator Insert Sheets Booklet Shift Secure Watermark Document Scan Lock Superimpose Image Gutter Page Numbering Copy Set Numbering Watermark Print Date Color Balance Adjust OneTouch Color Print on Tab Resolution Halftones Enlarge Reduce Enl...

Page 641: ... N on 1 Print Comments Password to Open Doc Skip Blank Pages Using Storage Space 627 ...

Page 642: ...the Machine through Applications 637 Using AirPrint 639 Printing with AirPrint 644 Scanning with AirPrint 648 Faxing with AirPrint 650 If AirPrint Cannot Be Used 652 Using Google Cloud Print 653 Configuring the User Settings for Google Cloud Print 656 Printing with Default Print Service Android 658 Linking with Mobile Devices 628 ...

Page 643: ...achine from mobile devices via remote control to confirm printing status and change the settings of the machine Connecting with Mobile Devices P 630 Utilizing the Machine through Applications P 637 Using AirPrint P 639 Using Google Cloud Print P 653 Printing with Default Print Service Android P 658 Depending on your mobile device the machine may not operate correctly Linking with Mobile Devices 62...

Page 644: ... how to connect a mobile device to your wireless LAN router see the manuals provided with the devices or contact the manufacturer Connect with the machine using either a wired LAN or wireless LAN router Setting up the Network Environment P 21 If you connect to the machine via a wireless LAN router you can confirm details of the machine on the LAN Connection screen by pressing Mobile Portal Home Sc...

Page 645: ...al products are required to use Bluetooth or NFC System Options P 1481 Preparing to Connect Directly Establish a connection by using Access Point Mode in the following order Check the network settings of the machine Press Preferences Network TCP IP Settings IPv4 Settings set Use IPv4 to On Prepare the mobile device Configure the mobile device to enable Wi Fi connection Prepare the machine for conn...

Page 646: ...the IP address in IP Address Settings for Direct Connection Use Direct Connection P 1061 IP Address Settings for Direct Connection P 1063 When using the Access Point Mode if the machine is started with Always Keep Enabled If SSID Network Key Specified set to On direct connections are possible without pressing Mobile Portal Enable Always Keep Enabled If SSID Network Key Specified P 1062 Connecting ...

Page 647: ...esired operations press Disconnect Connecting with Bluetooth iOS 1 Press Preferences Network Bluetooth Settings set Use Bluetooth to On 2 Start Canon PRINT Business on the mobile device 3 Configure the mobile device to enable the use of Bluetooth settings 4 Approach the machine with the mobile device The device name and PIN code are shown on the touch panel display Using this information perform p...

Page 648: ...nection you may not be able to connect to the Internet depending on the mobile device you are using If a wireless connection from a mobile device is not performed within 5 minutes while the SSID and network key are displayed the status waiting for connection ends If the status without data transmission between a mobile device and the machine continues during communication by direct connection the ...

Page 649: ... the mobile device is displayed on the touch panel display of the machine 2 Press Yes on the touch panel display of the machine A connection between the machine and the mobile device is started 3 After completing the desired operations press Disconnect Connecting to a Mobile Device from the Machine 1 Press the name of the device to directly connect to from the list displayed on the touch panel dis...

Page 650: ... machine continues during communication by direct connection the communication may end Power saving performance of sleep mode degrades while connecting via direct connection When you finish the desired operation be sure to terminate the connection between the machine and the mobile device If they remain connected power saving performance of sleep mode degrades If you use the direct connection do n...

Page 651: ...dures see the Canon website http www canon com gomp Printing and Scanning with Mopria The machine also supports Mopria Using Mopria enables you to print from mobile devices that support Android using common operations and settings even if manufacturers and models differ For example if you are using printers supporting Mopria made by multiple manufacturers or a printer supporting Mopria that is loc...

Page 652: ...ated application or installing a driver Make sure that the Use WSD Use WSD Browsing and Multicast Discovery Settings are enabled WSD Settings P 1055 Multicast Discovery Settings P 1056 TIPS Scan for Mobile Scan for Mobile The MEAP application Scan for Mobile enables you to use the Scan function of the machine from the mobile device You can operate the machine from your mobile device to scan origin...

Page 653: ...iguring AirPrint Settings You can register information including the name of the machine and installation location that is used for identifying the machine The settings required for using AirPrint can be configured remotely using the Remote UI Configuring Settings Using the Remote UI 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode Starting the Remote UI P 784 2 Click Settings Registration ...

Page 654: ...istered in Device Information Settings Device Management in Management Settings Settings Registration the registered name is displayed Latitude Enter the latitude of the location where the machine is installed Longitude Enter the longitude of the location where the machine is installed 5 Restart the machine Turn OFF the machine wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON Configuring Settings from...

Page 655: ...s that support AirPrint Displaying the Screen for AirPrint You can display the screen for AirPrint on which you can not only access the AirPrint Settings but also view information about consumables such as paper and toner cartridge Further you can configure security function settings Displaying from a Mac 1 Click System Preferences in the Dock on the desktop Printers Scanners 2 Select the machine ...

Page 656: ...urity Settings change according to the value in Use TLS in Use Network Link Scan User Management You can add edit users to authenticate Managing Users P 675 TLS Settings Enables you to change the key and certificate used for TLS Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS P 739 Key and Certificate Settings Enables you to generate and install a key and certificate or request a certificate to be iss...

Page 657: ...iOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U S and other countries and is used under license Linking with Mobile Devices 643 ...

Page 658: ...n environment where an Apple device and the machine are connected directly An environment where a Mac is connected to the machine via USB When searching for a printer using Bluetooth from an iPad iPhone or iPod touch the Apple device and the machine do not need to be connected to the same LAN as long as the IP can be reached Searching for a Printer Using Bluetooth You can use Bluetooth to search f...

Page 659: ...K Use Bluetooth Select the check box Beacon Settings Select the check box for Use Beacon for AirPrint Set Device Name PIN Code This setting is not required when searching for the printer using Bluetooth Connection Timeout This setting is not required when searching for the printer using Bluetooth Configuring the Printer Using the Touch Panel 1 Press Preferences Network Bluetooth Settings set Use B...

Page 660: ...The screen for selecting the machine in Printer is not displayed for applications that do not support AirPrint In this case printing cannot be performed 5 Specify the print settings as necessary The available settings and paper sizes differ depending on the application you are using 6 Tap Print Printing starts Checking the print status During printing press the Home button of the Apple device twic...

Page 661: ...rinters added to the Mac are displayed Select the machine in this step 5 Specify the print settings as necessary The available settings and paper sizes differ depending on the application you are using 6 Click Print Printing starts You can specify whether to display an error screen on the control panel if printing cannot be performed as expected due to a problem with the print data For details see...

Page 662: ...e Network Link Scan to On TCP IP Settings Use Network Link Scan P 1058 A firmware update may also be required Updating the Firmware P 852 You cannot scan while settings for operations are being made or while the machine is performing any operation whatsoever Scanning from a Mac 1 Make sure that the machine is turned ON and connected to the Mac For how to make sure of this see Setting up the Networ...

Page 663: ... The Scanner screen is displayed 6 Configure the scan settings as necessary 7 Click Scan The document is scanned and the image is displayed Linking with Mobile Devices 649 ...

Page 664: ...ke sure that the machine is turned ON and connected to the Mac For how to make sure of this see Setting up the Network Environment P 21 2 From your Mac add the machine in System Preferences Printers Scanners If the machine has already been added for printing or sending faxes this operation is not required 3 Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box How to display the print...

Page 665: ...6 Click Fax Fax sending starts Linking with Mobile Devices 651 ...

Page 666: ...ame LAN If the machine is turned ON it may take several minutes before the machine is ready for communication Make sure that Bonjour on your Apple device is enabled Make sure that the machine is configured to enable operations from a computer even when no department ID and password are entered For printing make sure that the paper is loaded in the machine and the machine has sufficient toner level...

Page 667: ...elect Interface only local printing can be performed when directly connected to the machine using wireless LAN Select Interface P 1061 A Google account is required to use Google Cloud Print If you do not have a Google account create one on the Google website Checking the Settings of the Machine Check the following before configuring cloud printing Make sure that the IPv4 address is specified for t...

Page 668: ...loud Print check box OK 6 Click Register in Registration Status Re Registering the Machine To re register the machine delete its registration before registering it again 7 Click the URL link displayed for URL for Registration 8 Follow the instructions on the screen to register the machine Printing can now be performed from applications that support Google Cloud Print such as Google Chrome Linking ...

Page 669: ... Chrome You can register the machine from a mobile device or Google Chrome Before registration is complete the following confirmation screen will appear on the display of the machine Press Yes to complete the registration For information on registration methods see the manual of your device or the Google Cloud Print home page Linking with Mobile Devices 655 ...

Page 670: ...s the settings Register the settings from user management in the Remote UI Registering User Information in the Local Device P 681 When the administrator registers the settings using a CSV file E mail addresses can also be added by editing a CSV file Associating Google Cloud Print E Mail Addresses with Users Using a CSV File P 684 If the User Is Not Registered The administrator should also specify ...

Page 671: ...example com When printing select user1 example com on the control panel to log in select Print Home Screen P 141 execute printing Linking with Mobile Devices 657 ...

Page 672: ...ettings Registration Network Settings Mopria Settings select the Use Mopria check box OK If you enable the Mopria setting Use Network Link Scan also changes to On To use the Mopria scan service Use Network Link Scan must be set to On TCP IP Settings Use Network Link Scan P 1058 In order to use the Canon machine printer from the Default Print Service of your Android terminal you must first configur...

Page 673: ...nager ID and PIN 713 Configuring the Department ID Management Settings 715 Using Department IDs to Manage Printing or Remote Scanning via Computer 718 Configuring Personal Folders 719 Using ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 723 Deleting User Setting Information 724 Configuring the Network Security Settings 726 Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls 728 Specifying IP Addresses in Firewall Settings 729...

Page 674: ...t CSR 807 Retrieving Updating a Certificate from an SCEP Server 810 Managing Stored Files 816 Managing the Logs 822 Importing Exporting the Setting Data 827 Importing Exporting All Settings 831 Importing Exporting the Settings Individually 835 Address Book Items 842 Backing Up Restoring Data 847 Updating the Firmware 852 Setting Scheduled Updates 853 Displaying Messages from the Administrator 855 ...

Page 675: ... Data 890 Removing Unnecessary Data from the Hard Disk 891 Initializing All Data Settings 893 Using TPM 895 Concerning the Information Security Standard 899 Functions Linked to Cloud Service 900 Managing the Machine 661 ...

Page 676: ...nfiguring the Basic Management System Applying a Security Policy to the Machine P 664 Managing Users P 675 Configuring the Network Security Settings P 726 Managing Hard Disk Data P 890 Limiting Risks from Negligence Operation Errors and Misuse Restricting the Machine s Functions P 752 Increasing the Security of Documents P 765 Ensuring Effective Management Managing the Machine from a Computer Remo...

Page 677: ... Managing the System Configuration and Settings Installing System Options P 862 Initializing All Data Settings P 893 Managing the Machine 663 ...

Page 678: ... Remote UI and a dedicated password can be set up so that only the information security administrator is able to modify the settings Before configuring these settings make sure that the Remote UI is set up to use TLS Starting the Remote UI P 784 Using a Password to Protect the Security Policy Settings P 665 Configuring the Security Policy Settings P 667 Security Policy Setting Items P 669 The purp...

Page 679: ...played 4 Click Password Settings 5 Enter a password and click OK Use alphanumeric characters or symbols for the password Make sure that the password is entered correctly and enter the new password again in Confirm To change the password Enter the current password in Old Password and the new password in New Password then enter the new password again in Confirm and click OK To remove the password En...

Page 680: ...sary to log in to the Remote UI with one of the following privileges Administrator DeviceAdmin NetworkAdmin If a password is set it will be required for authentication in order to initialize the machine After authentication is performed and the machine is initialized the password will be deleted Initializing All Data Settings P 893 Managing the Machine 666 ...

Page 681: ... Click Settings Registration on the portal page Remote UI Screen P 785 3 Click Security Settings Security Policy Settings 4 Click Security Policy Settings The setting precautions are displayed Make sure to read and understand the contents If no password has been configured Using a Password to Protect the Security Policy Settings P 665 read the contents and click OK to proceed to step 6 5 Enter the...

Page 682: ...evice You can import and export the machine s security policy settings By applying the same policy to multiple devices you can manage all of the devices in your organization using identical settings Importing Exporting the Setting Data P 827 Only Canon devices that are compatible with security policy settings The security policy settings can only be imported if the security policy setting password...

Page 683: ...e security of communications by requiring the verification of signatures and certificates Always verify signatures for SMS WebDAV server functions In SMB Server Settings the Require SMB Signature for Connection and Use SMB Authentication options are set to On and Use TLS in WebDAV Server Settings is set to On When the machine is used as an SMB server or WebDAV server digital certificate signatures...

Page 684: ...pply to communication with IEEE 802 1X networks even if the check box is selected for Always verify server certificate when using TLS If Prohibit cleartext authentication for server functions is selected and your device management software or driver version is old it may not be possible to connect to the machine Ensure that you are using the latest versions Port Usage Policy Prevent external breac...

Page 685: ...ort port number 427 In Multicast Discovery Settings Response is set to Off It is not possible to search the network or perform automatic settings using SLP Multicast Discovery Settings P 1056 Restrict SNMP port port number 161 In SNMP Settings the Use SNMPv1 and Use SNMPv3 options are set to Off and Display Scan for Mobile is set to Off It is not possible to obtain device information from the comp...

Page 686: ...nd a period of validity for user authentication passwords Set minimum number of characters for password Minimum Length Settings is set to On It is not possible to set a password with fewer characters than the number specified for Minimum Number of Characters on the Remote UI setting screen Minimum Length Settings P 1147 Set password validity period Validity Period Settings is set to On A period of...

Page 687: ...enabled Make sure to change the Administrator password from the default value to prevent a third party other than the administrator from being able to back up the TPM key If a third party takes the TPM backup key you will not be able to restore the TPM key For the purpose of enhanced security the TPM key can only be backed up once If the TPM settings are enabled make sure to back up the TPM key on...

Page 688: ...ory Lock P 1114 Memory Lock End Time P 1115 Set Register Mail Boxes P 1119 Display Print When Storing from Printer Driver P 1119 Forced Hold P 1123 Print When Storing from Printer Driver P 1119 Saving Received Documents in the Machine Memory Reception P 433 Sending Receiving Policy Limit the sending operations for destinations and limit how received data is processed Allow sending only to register...

Page 689: ...user The user information is checked either on the database inside the machine or on an external authentication server With the ability to precisely define which functions are available to each user you can personalize machine operations and improve security by limiting access to certain functions It may also be possible to use Department ID Management to manage groups depending on the device used...

Page 690: ...naging Groups of Users Users can be assigned to groups based on Department ID Department ID Management enabling you to check the total number of printed or scanned pages for each Department ID You can also set specific limits for each Department ID such as a maximum of 500 printed pages or a maximum of 200 copied pages This function can help boost cost awareness and provide hints on how to improve...

Page 691: ...ated with Department IDs By specifying copy and print restrictions for Department IDs in advance you can apply restrictions on the number of copies or prints for each department that a user belongs to For information on associating user accounts with Department IDs see Registering User Information in the Local Device P 681 For information on specifying restrictions according to department see Conf...

Page 692: ...Manage Printing Faxing Remote Scanning via a Computer P 710 Authentication Device The authentication devices described below can be used for personal authentication management Each type of authentication device requires a different environment and settings Confirm your system environment before configuring System Specifications P 1458 Local Device This Machine User information is managed on the da...

Page 693: ...og in to the machine Mobile Authentication Perform user authentication with a mobile device You can log in to the machine using Canon PRINT Business Optional products are required to use this function System Options P 1481 You must first configure Bluetooth settings in the machine Network P 1052 Bluetooth Settings and enter user information with Canon PRINT Business For more information on setting...

Page 694: ...elect the user authentication system Configuring the Authentication Functions P 701 Using Personal Authentication to Manage Printing Faxing Remote Scanning via a Computer P 710 Make sure to log out after you finish using the Remote UI If you close the Remote UI without logging out it may take a long time to log in next time If you want to limit authentication method to User Authentication restrict...

Page 695: ...isabling Administrator Administrator is registered as the default administrator name user name This user cannot be deleted but it can be disabled after adding a user with Administrator privileges Logging in as an Administrator P 17 4 Click Add User To edit user information Click Edit for the user information that you want to edit make the necessary changes and click Update To delete user informati...

Page 696: ...ender s name This address is also used when sending documents by using Send to Myself When an I fax is sent the e mail address registered here is displayed in the Sender line on the recipient device Icon Specify the icon image that the user selects when logging in via Picture Login Use an image that will be easy to find when displayed in a list It is also possible for general users to change their...

Page 697: ...n you can create your own roles Using ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM P 723 Administrator Allows all operations as an administrator of the machine GeneralUser Allows general user privileges DeviceAdmin Allows operations that are available to general users along with the ability to change settings related to basic functions such as copying printing sending and receiving NetworkAdmin Allows operations that...

Page 698: ...ame user is registered as a number that is seven digits or fewer it is also set as the PIN for that Department ID If the user name and password do not meet the above conditions a Department ID is automatically assigned starting from 0000001 and 0 none is set for the PIN Registering the Department ID as the User Name If you click Add User Using Department ID on the screen in step 4 a new user with ...

Page 699: ...step 5 and click Import LINKS Registering Server Information P 695 Configuring the Authentication Functions P 701 Using Personal Authentication to Manage Printing Faxing Remote Scanning via a Computer P 710 Managing the Machine 685 ...

Page 700: ...st will be prioritized and registered It is recommended that you export the registered edited user data to make a backup copy Exporting User Data 1 Start the Remote UI Starting the Remote UI P 784 2 Click Settings Registration on the portal page Remote UI Screen P 785 3 Click User Management Authentication Management 4 Click Export 5 Select the file format and click Start Export User information c...

Page 701: ...o access along with the path that require authentication Example Host Name IP Address Shared Folder Name File Path Enter the path of the file for importing User Name Password Enter the user name and password required to log in to the computer in which the file for importing is stored File Update Confirmation Interval You can specify the interval in minutes for checking for files to import If the o...

Page 702: ...d Administrator which are registered by default will remain even if they are not listed in the imported files User Authentication Format is the only file format that is supported Also the uid column is required Note that if you are using a server that does not support SMBv3 0 encrypted communication user data travels unencrypted across communication paths while it is being obtained 6 Click Connect...

Page 703: ...ox with SMB specify the appropriate value in the password column If you export the data from the machine and import it to the other machine without performing the above operation authentication may fail The value is when exported When performing a complete import any users not listed in the imported files are deleted from the machine However and Administrator which are registered by default will r...

Page 704: ...when importing changes even if you leave the field unspecified blank it will not be overwritten as empty blank but will instead retain the existing value If this item is omitted when importing changes the existing user will carry over the original password cn Yes 0 to 32 characters Control characters N A cn lang ja phonetic Yes 0 to 32 characters Control characters See Notes Displayed as phonetic ...

Page 705: ...s 0 to 64 characters You can specify up to 10 items Control characters single byte spaces and special symbols The Group name registered in the user group management is written here If the user belongs to multiple groups group names are connected with a createDate Yes See Notes See Notes N A Output in the TYYYYMMDDhhmmssmmm format when exporting The T is added in order to prevent corruption of the ...

Page 706: ...rs Control characters N A Cannot be changed It will be automatically assigned for the following users Users registered following server authentication Users registered via Register Automatically When Job Is Received in Picture Login uuid No Cannot be changed Automatically assigned during user registration sdl_digest No Cannot be changed Automatically generated when registering changing password ua...

Page 707: ...tered after completing server authentication belongs CharSet For UTF8 CharSet UTF8 will be written in the column line The line at the beginning of the file is the column line Items names may not appear in sequence The encodings supported by CSV files are UTF 8 SJIS BIG5 GB2312 and Korean Text strings in exported CSV files are surrounded by and if any of the following conditions apply When editing ...

Page 708: ... Numbers starting with 0 Numbers greater than 12 digits Text strings surrounded by and Managing the Machine 694 ...

Page 709: ...uct a connection test as necessary 1 Start the Remote UI Starting the Remote UI P 784 2 Click Settings Registration on the portal page Remote UI Screen P 785 3 Click User Management Authentication Management 4 Click Server Settings Edit 5 Set the authentication server and domain information Use Active Directory Select the check box when using Active Directory Set Domain List Managing the Machine 6...

Page 710: ... the site can be accessed priority is given to accessing domain controllers outside the site Number of Caches for Service Ticket Specify the number of service tickets that the machine can hold A service ticket is an Active Directory function that acts as a record of a previous login which reduces the amount of time it takes for the same user to log in next time Use LDAP server Select the check box...

Page 711: ...nd e mail address of each user account on the Active Directory server Example sAMAccountName cn mail 5 Click Connection Test to confirm that connection is possible and then click Add To edit server information Click Edit for the server information that you want to edit make the necessary changes and click Update Registering LDAP server information 1 Select the check box for Use LDAP server and cli...

Page 712: ...ify the location level to search for user information when LDAP server authentication is performed 4 Specify how to set the attribute names and domain name User Name Keyboard Authentication Specify the LDAP data field attribute name for the user name on the LDAP server Example uid Login Name Display Name E Mail Address Specify the LDAP data fields attribute names for the login name display name an...

Page 713: ... indicates the group that the user belongs to Retrieve role name to apply from User Attribute to Browse Select the check box to use the character string registered in the data field on the server specified in User Attribute to Browse for the role name Before configuring check the role names that can be selected on the machine and register them on the server Conditions You can set the conditions th...

Page 714: ... Service _kerberos Protocol _udp Port number The port number used by the Kerberos service of the Active Directory domain zone Host offering this service Host name of the domain controller that is actually providing the Kerberos service of the Active Directory domain zone LINKS Registering User Information in the Local Device P 681 Configuring the Authentication Functions P 701 Using Personal Authe...

Page 715: ...gistering User Information in the Local Device P 681 Registering Server Information P 695 1 Start the Remote UI Starting the Remote UI P 784 2 Click Settings Registration on the portal page Remote UI Screen P 785 3 Click User Management Authentication Management 4 Click Basic Settings Edit 5 Select the check box for Use the user authentication function and specify the required settings Select the ...

Page 716: ...can be set when Register Automatically When Job Is Received and Add Domain Name to User Name to Be Registered are enabled Register Manually from Settings Menu Select the check box to manually register users Display Administrators You can select whether or not to display users with administrator privileges on the login screen for Picture Login Doing so reduces the risk of unauthorized logins becaus...

Page 717: ...correct a screen confirming whether the user PIN should be reset and a new PIN should be sent to the e mail address of the corresponding user is displayed This function is enabled only if the e mail address of the corresponding user is registered Registering User Information in the Local Device P 681 Configuring mobile authentication Specify the following settings when using mobile authentication ...

Page 718: ...e login screen on the machine Select 0 to hide the login history and select 1 to display only the name of the user who logged in most recently Display Button on Settings Menu Select the check box to add the Change Password button to the menu that is displayed when pressing on the top right corner of the login screen Use Numeric Keys for Authentication If this function is enabled and the user name ...

Page 719: ...ntication is a function that enables the authentication information used when logging in to be used when logging in at other times Select the check box to disable the integrated authentication function To disable the integrated authentication function only for logged in users who are registered in the local device select the check box for Disable integrated authentication using credentials for loc...

Page 720: ... If the user name is comprised of numbers and is seven digits or fewer the same number is assigned to the same user as the Department ID If the password of the same user is registered as a number that is seven digits or fewer it is also set as the PIN for that Department ID If the user name and password do not meet the above conditions a Department ID is automatically assigned starting from 000000...

Page 721: ...unts are deleted the next time that the machine starts If a user has never logged in before the date and time that the user was registered is displayed as the time that the user last logged in 6 Click Update 7 Restart the machine Restarting the Machine P 793 The authentication method selected for Web Service Authentication Method is also used for personal authentication during the device informati...

Page 722: ...ck box is selected and the Copy Access Stored Files or Print check box is selected in Select Function That Will Require Authentication Copy Print in Restrict Access to Other User Jobs is set to On When the Display login screen when functions requiring authentication are selected check box is selected and the Fax or Scan and Send check box is selected in Select Function That Will Require Authentica...

Page 723: ... LINKS Registering User Information in the Local Device P 681 Registering Server Information P 695 Using Personal Authentication to Manage Printing Faxing Remote Scanning via a Computer P 710 Managing the Machine 709 ...

Page 724: ...1 via a computer This can provide greater security as the machine does not accept these operations unless the user is identified Management Settings User Management Authentication Management Restrict Job from Remote Device without User Auth On OK Apply Set Changes Yes LINKS Registering User Information in the Local Device P 681 Registering Server Information P 695 Configuring the Authentication Fu...

Page 725: ... of pages that each group can use for copying or printing which can help reduce costs Setting the Department ID Management P 712 Personal Folder Users who log in with personal authentication management can create a Personal folder for individual use A Personal folder can be specified as the send destination for scanned documents and it can be created in a shared folder or on a file server Register...

Page 726: ...ocal Device P 681 After assigning users to Department IDs enable Department ID Management To perform the same type of management for printing or sending faxes from a computer configure the additional required settings Administrator privileges are required in order to configure these settings Changing the System Manager ID and PIN P 713 Configuring the Department ID Management Settings P 715 Using ...

Page 727: ...elect Role to Set to Administrator Registering User Information in the Local Device P 681 1 Press 2 Press Management Settings User Management System Manager Information Settings 3 Make the necessary changes to the System Manager settings and press OK System Manager ID Enter a number of 7 digits or less for the new System Manager ID System Manager PIN Enter a number of 7 digits or less for the new ...

Page 728: ...Equipment P 1516 You can also make entering seven digits a requirement for the System Manager ID and System Manager PIN For more information contact your local authorized Canon dealer LINKS Configuring the Department ID Management Settings P 715 Registering User Information in the Local Device P 681 Managing the Machine 714 ...

Page 729: ...If you login as a user with Administrator privileges a System Manager ID and PIN are automatically assigned and managed as Department ID If Department ID Management is activated through the Copy Card Reader the Department IDs assigned to the cards are used Therefore you cannot register Department IDs For information on the number of Department IDs that you can register see Management Functions P 1...

Page 730: ...ontact your local authorized Canon dealer The machine stops printing if any one of the color or black and white page limits is reached while printing a document that contains both color and black and white areas he machine stops copying if any one of the total color or black and white print or copy limits is reached while copying a document that contains both color and black and white areas 4 Pres...

Page 731: ...al authentication management as the login service However you can change the login service to DepartmentID Authentication using SMS Changing Login Services P 1450 LINKS Using Department IDs to Manage Printing or Remote Scanning via Computer P 718 Managing the Machine 717 ...

Page 732: ...Computer to Scan Remote Scan Windows P 561 Use this function when you would like to improve security or monitor the number of pages that are printed 1 Press 2 Press Management Settings User Management Department ID Management 3 Select Off for the functions that you want to manage then press OK If Off is selected a Department ID must be entered when executing a corresponding job Managing the Machin...

Page 733: ...nal folder in any location they desire This enables each user to send documents to a folder in a familiar location Creating Folders in a Home Folder Specified by the Administrator A folder for each user name is created inside a parent folder home folder specified by the administrator Personal folders are easier to manage because they are all kept together in one location A Windows SMB shared folde...

Page 734: ...e same function Function Settings Store Access Files Network Settings Personal Folder Specification Method 3 Select how to specify the location of Personal folders Creating folders in any location specified by users Press Register for Each User OK Each user can specify the location of the Personal folder Creating folders in a home folder specified by the administrator 1 Press Home Folder Set 2 Spe...

Page 735: ...he same user name and password entered at login If a check mark is added to this item a user name and password must be registered for each user A folder is created inside a home folder with the following names If a check mark is added to Use Authentication Info of Each User the user name specified by a user If no check mark is added to Use Authentication Info of Each User the user name used for lo...

Page 736: ...ation configure a folder in homeDir which is a user attribute in the Active Directory using the host name folder path format Registering a Personal folder and authentication information for each user If Personal Folder Specification Method is set to Register for Each User register one of the following as the Personal folder for each user The registered settings are the same and the same Personal f...

Page 737: ... to On Use User Authentication in Settings Registration is also set to On To set Use User Authentication to Off first set this setting to Off If you set this function to On the following settings in Settings Registration are disabled Setting a PIN for Address Book Restricting New Destinations Similar restrictions can be set for roles using the ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM For details see ACCESS MANAGE...

Page 738: ...m amount of information that can be registered has been reached Action When Maximum Number of Users Exceeded P 1138 For information on the maximum amount of user setting information that can be registered see System Specifications P 1458 The User Setting Information that the User Setting Information Management can link with User Authentication is as follows Information of Personal buttons Shared b...

Page 739: ...ups Click Delete All User Group Setting Information Yes Deleting the setting information for individual user groups 1 Click Select User Group and Delete Setting Information 2 Select the check box for the user group with the setting information that you want to delete and click Delete Yes The changed user setting information is enabled when the machine is restarted It may take some time until the o...

Page 740: ...ide greater security by using a proxy server for connections outside the network such as when browsing websites Setting a Proxy P 737 TLS Encrypted Communication TLS is a protocol for encryption for data sent over a network and is often used for communication via a Web browser or an e mail application TLS enables secure network communication when accessing the machine in a variety of situations su...

Page 741: ...ser Authentication information is sent to and checked by a RADIUS server which permits or rejects communication to the network depending on the authentication result If authentication fails a LAN switch or an access point blocks access from the outside of the network The machine can connect to an 802 1X network as a client device Configuring the IEEE 802 1X Authentication Settings P 749 Managing t...

Page 742: ...ess or MAC address you can reduce the risk of unauthorized access by outside third parties Administrator or NetworkAdmin privileges are required in order to configure these settings Specifying IP Addresses in Firewall Settings P 729 Specifying MAC Addresses in Firewall Settings P 732 Configuring the Firewall of the Sub Line P 734 Managing the Machine 728 ...

Page 743: ...4 Select Outbound Filter or Inbound Filter To restrict data sent from the machine to a computer select Outbound Filter To restrict data received from a computer select Inbound Filter To restrict data communication but allow only ICMP communications such as PING commands etc set Always Allow Sending Receiving Using ICMP to On 5 Set Use Filter to On select Default Policy then press Register For Defa...

Page 744: ...ion filter reception filter 1 Select the IP address input method and enter the exception addresses 2 Press Next 3 Set the port number if necessary and press OK Select whether to specify a port number You can configure detailed communication restrictions by specifying a port number for the exception address Do Not Specify The exception address setting applies to all communication received from the ...

Page 745: ...s Network Firewall Settings IP Address Block Log The history of blocked communications can be exported from the Remote UI in the CSV format Exporting a Log as a File P 824 If Default Policy is set to Reject the history of communication blocked by the firewall is not displayed in IP Address Block Log LINKS Specifying MAC Addresses in Firewall Settings P 732 Managing the Machine 731 ...

Page 746: ...mmunication with devices that have a MAC address specified in Exception Addresses in the next step or select Allow to reject communication with them If Reject is selected for Default Policy the restrictions do not apply to sending to multicast or broadcast addresses 5 Enter the exception addresses and press OK Specify the MAC addresses to designate as exceptions of the Default Policy option select...

Page 747: ...LINKS Specifying IP Addresses in Firewall Settings P 729 Managing the Machine 733 ...

Page 748: ...rewall Settings 3 Press IPv4 Address Filter 4 Select Outbound Filter or Inbound Filter To restrict data sent from the machine to a computer select Outbound Filter To restrict data received from a computer select Inbound Filter 5 Set Use Filter to On select Default Policy then press Register For Default Policy select Reject to only allow communication with devices that have an IP address specified ...

Page 749: ...ss input method and enter the exception addresses 2 Press Next 3 Set the port number if necessary and press OK Select whether to specify a port number You can configure detailed communication restrictions by specifying a port number for the exception address Do Not Specify The exception address setting applies to all communication received from the specified IP address Specify The exception addres...

Page 750: ...isplayed from Preferences Network Firewall Settings IP Address Block Log The history of blocked communications can be exported from the Remote UI in the CSV format Exporting a Log as a File P 824 If Default Policy is set to Reject the history of communication blocked by the firewall is not displayed in IP Address Block Log Managing the Machine 736 ...

Page 751: ...ecessary settings and press OK Server Address Enter the address of the proxy server to use Specify the IP address or host name depending on your environment Port Number Enter the port number of the proxy server to use Use Proxy within Same Domain Select On if you want to use the proxy server even when communicating with devices in the same domain This setting is only displayed for the proxy settin...

Page 752: ...4 Press Apply Set Changes Yes Managing the Machine 738 ...

Page 753: ...ication P 741 If you want to use a key and certificate that you acquire from a certification authority CA register the key and certificate before performing the procedure below Registering a Key and Certificate P 802 If you set Format Encryption Method to FIPS 140 2 to On you can make the TLS communication encryption method comply with the United States government approved FIPS Federal Information...

Page 754: ...pecify Specify Allowed Versions and Minimum Version press OK 8 Press Algorithm Settings 9 Select the encryption algorithm and DSA restriction to use press OK OK 10 Press Apply Set Changes Yes The machine restarts and the settings are applied LINKS Starting the Remote UI P 784 Distributing the Device Information to Other Canon Multifunction Printers P 880 Setting E mail I Fax Communication P 74 Set...

Page 755: ...nerating a Key and CSR P 807 1 Press 2 Press Management Settings Device Management Certificate Settings Generate Key Generate Network Communication Key 3 Configure the necessary items for the key and press Next Key Name Enter a name for the key Use a name that will be easy to find when displayed in a list Signature Algorithm Select the hash algorithm to use for the signature The available hash alg...

Page 756: ...erver is not used Managing keys and certificates You can check the detailed settings or delete keys and certificates on the screen that is displayed when you press Management Settings Device Management Certificate Settings Key and Certificate List If the list of keys and certificates is not displayed press Key and Certificate List for This Device to display it If is displayed the key is corrupted ...

Page 757: ...he pre shared key method you need to decide on a passphrase pre shared key in advance which is used between the machine and the IPSec communication peer When setting the digital signature method use a CA certificate and a PKCS 12 format key and certificate to perform mutual authentication between the machine and the IPSec communication peer For more information on registering new CA certificates o...

Page 758: ...onfigure the IPSec application parameters 1 Press Selector Settings 2 Specify the IP address to apply the IPSec policy to Specify the IP address of this machine in Local Address and specify the IP address of the communication peer in Remote Address All IP Addresses IPSec is applied to all sent and received IP packets IPv4 Address IPSec is applied to IP packets sent to and received from the IPv4 ad...

Page 759: ...cify a range of IPv6 addresses Enter a separate address for First Address and Last Address Select Specify Prefix to specify a range of IPv6 addresses using a prefix Enter separate values for Address and Prefix Length 3 Specify the port to apply IPSec to Press Specify by Port Number to use port numbers when specifying the ports that IPSec applies to Select All Ports to apply IPSec to all port numbe...

Page 760: ... authentication and encryption algorithm for IKE phase 1 If you select Auto an algorithm that can be used by both this machine and the communication peer is set automatically If you want to specify a particular algorithm select Manual Settings and configure the settings below Authentication Select the hash algorithm Encryption Select the encryption algorithm DH Group Select the group for the Diffi...

Page 761: ...ication method press Manual Settings and select one of the authentication methods below ESP Authentication and encryption are both performed Select the algorithm for ESP Authentication and ESP Encryption Select NULL if you do not want to set the authentication or encryption algorithm ESP AES GCM AES GCM is used as the ESP algorithm and authentication and encryption are both performed AH SHA1 Authe...

Page 762: ...on the screen displayed in step 3 To edit the details of a policy select the policy in the list and press Edit To disable a policy select the policy in the list and press Policy On Off To delete a policy select the policy in the list and press Delete Yes Managing the Machine 748 ...

Page 763: ...t be specified in this setting so that the authentication server can authenticate the machine Register these items before configuring the settings Registering a Key and Certificate P 802 This authentication method cannot be used in combination with the other methods EAP TTLS EAP Tunneled TLS Only the authentication server sends a certificate A CA certificate must be registered on the machine to ve...

Page 764: ... Name 4 Select the authentication method and configure the necessary settings Selecting EAP TLS 1 Press On for Use TLS and press Key and Certificate 2 In the list select the key and certificate to use and press Set as Default Key Yes 3 Press OK Selecting EAP TTLS 1 Press On for Use TTLS 2 Select MSCHAPv2 or PAP and press OK 3 Enter the user name and password Press User Name or Password and enter t...

Page 765: ...e for User Name disable Same User Name as Login Name If you want to set User Name to the same login name that was entered in step 3 press Same User Name as Login Name Confirm is displayed when you enter a password and press OK For confirmation enter the password again and press OK 5 Press OK 6 Press Apply Set Changes Yes Managing the Machine 751 ...

Page 766: ...everyone so that only the users who know the number can access the destination Restricting Access to Address Book and Sending Functions P 753 Restricting Printing from a Computer You can prohibit all users from printing documents from a computer or only allow printing if the user is authorized on the machine You can also configure the machine so that only Encrypted Secure Print documents can be pr...

Page 767: ... the available sending destinations to reduce the risk of information leakage You can also prevent documents from being sent to unintended recipients by requiring users to enter the fax number twice for confirmation before sending Restricting Use of the Address Book P 754 Limiting Available Destinations P 757 Restricting the Fax Sending Functions P 759 Managing the Machine 753 ...

Page 768: ...s Book can be set to require users to enter a PIN in order to add new entries to the Address Book or edit existing entries This can reduce the risk of unauthorized editing of the Address Book Note however that even if a PIN is set for the Address Book a user who logs in with Administrator privileges can add and edit entries without entering the required PIN 1 Press 2 Press Set Destination Address ...

Page 769: ... function If the access number registration function is enabled users cannot specify a destination using Previous Settings Set Destination Manage Address Book Access Numbers On OK After configuring this setting register the access numbers in the Address Book You can enter up to seven digits for the access number If you enter fewer than seven digits the machine stores the access number with leading...

Page 770: ...trict Address Book Use On OK Hiding the Scan and Send Address Book and One Touch Buttons Function Settings Send Common Settings Restrict Address Book Use On OK LINKS Registering Destinations in the Address Book P 223 Registering Destinations via the Remote UI P 794 Managing the Machine 756 ...

Page 771: ... that are described below may not be available when ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM is enabled Using ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM P 723 Restricting New Destinations P 757 Restricting E Mail Destination to Send to Myself P 758 Restricting File Send Destination to Personal Folder P 758 Restricting the Domain of Send Destination P 758 Restricting New Destinations The destinations that can be specified when send...

Page 772: ...nd scanned documents to their Personal folder Configuring Personal Folders P 719 Function Settings Send Common Settings Restrict File TX to Personal Folder On OK Restricting the Domain of Send Destination You can restrict e mail and I fax destinations so that only addresses in a specific domain are available When a domain is specified you can also set whether to allow sending to subdomains Functio...

Page 773: ...ng faxes to prevent misdialing This setting can also be configured with DeviceAdmin privileges Function Settings Send Fax Settings Confirm Entered Fax Number On OK Restricting Fax Sending from a Computer You can prohibit users from sending faxes from a computer Sending Faxes from Your Computer PC Fax P 444 This setting can also be configured with DeviceAdmin privileges Function Settings Send Fax S...

Page 774: ...ial broadcasting function which enables users to send a fax to multiple recipients in succession Function Settings Send Fax Settings Restrict Sequential Broadcast When Fax Dest Included On OK Apply Set Changes Yes Restricting Sending from Log You can prohibit users from being able to specify a previously used destination from the log After configuring this setting previously used destinations cann...

Page 775: ...mputer You can prohibit users from printing documents from a computer However even when printing from a computer is prohibited you can allow users to save documents in the temporary storage space of the machine Mail Box as well as print documents saved in the Mail Box Function Settings Printer Restrict Printer Jobs On Select the restriction exceptions OK Configuring the Forced Hold Printing Settin...

Page 776: ...y a particular printing protocol as the condition Job Action Select how to handle documents that match the conditions When Hold as Shared Job is selected you can set ID for Substitution to specify the user name output to the log when printing Select Cancel to discard the document Target You can set either a value specified by the operation target or one not specified 3 Set the order in which to ap...

Page 777: ...age due to unprotected print data With this setting documents cannot be printed using normal printing operations Users are required to enter a password on the machine when printing Encrypted Secure Print documents Printing More Safely with Encrypted Secure Print P 482 Function Settings Print Only Allow Encrypted Print Jobs On OK Apply Set Changes Yes Managing the Machine 763 ...

Page 778: ...ll as for restricting the ability to save scanned documents on memory media or print data saved on memory media Administrator or DeviceAdmin privileges are required in order to configure these settings Function Settings Store Access Files Memory Media Settings Use Scan Print Function Select Off for Use Scan Function or Use Print Function OK Apply Set Changes Yes LINKS Working with Data in Memory M...

Page 779: ...ment Printing User Information on Documents P 767 Forced Secure Watermark You can configure the machine to always embed invisible text such as CONFIDENTIAL or TOP SECRET in the background of printed or copied documents The embedded text becomes visible when the documents are copied alerting users to unauthorized duplication or the risk of information leakage Embedding Invisible Text Forced Secure ...

Page 780: ...al signatures to scanned documents The digital signature is added using a key and certificate mechanism which enables you to identify the device and or user that created the document while ensuring that the data has not been altered Adding a Digital Signature to Sent Files P 778 Managing the Machine 766 ...

Page 781: ...ese settings 1 Press 2 Press Function Settings Common Print Settings Forced Print of Recognition Information 3 Press On and select the functions that forcibly print the user information In Target Function press On for each function that you want to apply this setting to 4 Specify the print position and original s orientation and press OK Press the arrow buttons to select the print position To prec...

Page 782: ...LINKS Configuring the Forced Hold Printing Settings P 761 Managing the Machine 768 ...

Page 783: ... 2 Press Function Settings Common Print Settings Secure Watermark Settings Forced Secure Watermark If the Document Scan Lock function is enabled press Secure Watermark Document Scan Lock Forced Secure Watermark Document Scan Lock instead of Secure Watermark Settings Forced Secure Watermark 3 Select the functions for which Forced Secure Watermark is enabled Press Set for the functions that you want...

Page 784: ...ckground pattern such as polka dots or mesh select the desired pattern in the Background Pattern drop down list To rotate the text and print it sideways press Print Vertically To print white text on a colored background press White Letters on Colored Background 6 Press OK If you want to configure Secure Watermark for additional functions return to step 3 You can adjust the density of the watermark...

Page 785: ...e held responsible for any damages caused by the use of the Document Scan Lock mode or the inability to use the Document Scan Lock mode Document Scan Lock TL Code Settings P 1088 TL Code and QR Code TL code or QR code is used to embed scan lock information and tracking information TL code and QR code differ from each other in terms of the embedding procedure restriction conditions and tracking inf...

Page 786: ...nformation is also embedded automatically You can analyze the tracking information to check the data embedded in the QR code such as the date user name and device name In addition the tracking information is updated each time the document is copied enabling you to analyze the information for the most recent copy operation It is also possible to only embed the tracking information without prohibiti...

Page 787: ...Restricting Copying Using a QR Code P 355 Managing the Machine 773 ...

Page 788: ...nction is enabled press Secure Watermark Document Scan Lock Forced Secure Watermark Document Scan Lock instead of Document Scan Lock Settings Forced Document Scan Lock 3 Select the functions for which to enable Document Scan Lock with TL code Press Set or Forced Doc Scan Lock for the functions that you want to use TL code for When Set or Forced Doc Scan Lock is selected for Access Stored Files the...

Page 789: ...o allow copying and only embed the tracking information press Doc Scan Lock Information Allow All OK A TL code that allows copying is printed on the document If you want to change the color of the text you can select it from Color 5 Press OK If you want to configure additional functions to use Document Scan Lock with TL code return to step 3 You can adjust the size and density of the dots used in ...

Page 790: ...k instead of Document Scan Lock Settings Forced Document Scan Lock 3 Select the functions for which to enable Document Scan Lock with QR code Press Set or Forced Doc Scan Lock for the functions that you want to use QR code for When Set or Forced Doc Scan Lock is selected for Access Stored Files the QR code is embedded in stored files when they are printed You can press Forced Secure Watermark Docu...

Page 791: ...n and specify where to print the QR code You can also configure settings so that copies can only be made when a QR code is printed in the original document Doc Scan Lock Operation Settings Document Scan Lock QR Code Settings P 1088 LINKS Common P 1076 Print Settings Secure Watermark Doc Scan Lock Using TL Code to Restrict Copying P 774 Managing the Machine 777 ...

Page 792: ...r to use this function System Options P 1481 Before you can add a user signature a key and certificate user certificate needs to be registered for each user via the Remote UI Registering a User Signature Certificate P 780 For information on validating certificates registering certificates in the trusted certificates list and verifying signatures on the reader side see the documentation for the sof...

Page 793: ...te by configuring the settings again If you select Device Signature Key and press Certificate Details detailed information about the device signature certificate is displayed You can also press Verify Certificate on this screen to check whether the certificate is valid The PDF XPS file contains sender information that the reader of the file can use to validate the reliability of the device signatu...

Page 794: ...scanned documents that are sent in a particular file format Adding a Digital Signature P 553 A system option is required in order to use this function System Options P 1481 You may not be able to register some types of keys and certificates System Specifications P 1458 1 Start the Remote UI Starting the Remote UI P 784 2 Click Settings Registration on the portal page Remote UI Screen P 785 3 Click...

Page 795: ...re displayed For users who do not log in with Administrator privileges only the key and certificate of the logged in user are displayed Click a login name to display detailed information about the certificate To delete keys and certificates select the ones that you want to delete and click Delete OK For information on the certificate authority that issues the User Certificate for each user compati...

Page 796: ...chine This section describes how to check the status of copied printed sent and received documents as well as error information and the remaining amount of paper Checking the Status and Logs P 788 Other Functions Available Using the Remote UI This section describes various other convenient functions that can be performed via computer using the Remote UI such as editing the Address Book checking fi...

Page 797: ... 857 Sending E Mail Notification When an Error Occurs P 860 When using a proxy server You cannot access the machine via a proxy server If a proxy server is used in your environment configure your Web browser to bypass the proxy server and access the machine directly Managing the Machine 783 ...

Page 798: ...1 Start the Web browser 2 Enter the IP address of the machine and press the ENTER key on the computer keyboard Enter http IP address of the machine in the address input field When using an IPv6 address enclose the IP address portion in brackets Example http fe80 2e9e fcff fe4e dbce If the Remote UI does not start If the login screen is not displayed in step 3 of this procedure clear the Web browse...

Page 799: ... The portal page shown below is displayed when you log in to the Remote UI This section describes the items displayed on the portal page and the basic operations Some display items and functions are only available if you log in with Administrator privileges If multiple users are operating the Remote UI at the same time or the control panel of the machine is being operated at the same time as the R...

Page 800: ... Setting Data P 827 You can use either the control panel or the Remote UI to change most machine settings but some settings can only be changed using one or the other Basic Tools You can perform operations such as printing documents or registering editing destinations Managing Stored Files P 816 Directly Printing Files without Opening Them P 488 Registering Destinations via the Remote UI P 794 Man...

Page 801: ...Settings Registration P 905 Managing the Machine 787 ...

Page 802: ... P 789 Checking the Status of Stored Documents P 790 Checking the Job Log P 790 Checking the Machine Status P 791 When personal authentication management is used you can restrict users from performing operations on the jobs of other users on the Status Monitor screen Restrict Access to Other User Jobs P 1136 Checking the Status of Copies Prints You can check the status of documents that are waitin...

Page 803: ...on to display detailed information about the document Checking the Status of Sent Received Documents You can check the status of faxes and e mails that are waiting to be sent faxes that have been received and faxes that are waiting to be forwarded You can also cancel the process for sending and receiving documents Start the Remote UI Status Monitor Cancel Job Status under Send or Receive Function ...

Page 804: ...Monitor Cancel Job Status under Store Cancel Document storing is canceled The canceled document is deleted and cannot be recovered Document icon Click the icon to display detailed information about the document Checking the Job Log You can display a log for documents that were copied printed sent received or stored Start the Remote UI Status Monitor Cancel Job Log Managing the Machine 790 ...

Page 805: ... on your machine model and optional equipment Checking the Machine Status You can check a variety of information about the machine such as error information the amount of remaining paper and toner information about attached optional equipment and the total number of pages that have been printed up to now Start the Remote UI Status Monitor Cancel Select the item that you want to check LINKS Managin...

Page 806: ...Starting the Remote UI P 784 Managing the Machine 792 ...

Page 807: ... Remote UI Settings Registration Device Management Remote Shutdown Start Restarting the Machine Start the Remote UI Settings Registration Restart Device Perform Restart OK If optional equipment is not recognized after restart The machine may not recognize optional equipment after it is restarted If this happens turn OFF the power of the optional equipment and then turn it back ON LINKS Starting th...

Page 808: ...ss Lists Address List 01 to Address List 10 or Address List for Administrators Personal Address List is for the exclusive use of the logged in user and is only available when personal authentication management is enabled Address List for Administrators is only available to administrators who log in with Administrator or DeviceAdmin privileges If the page for entering a PIN is displayed enter the P...

Page 809: ... that you want to register to the group and click OK 4 Click OK Registering a name for the address list Click Register Address List Name or Register Change Address List Name enter the name and click OK You can set to also change the name of the user group address book when a user group name is changed Log in to the Remote UI as a user with Administrator privileges press Settings Registration Set D...

Page 810: ...ists in an address book between registered users Registering User Groups P 800 1 Click the address list in which to register the destination User Group Address List 01 to User Group Address List 50 2 Click Public View Settings 3 Select the group in which to share the address list and click OK 4 Click Register New Destination or Register New Group 5 Register the necessary information and click OK R...

Page 811: ...r the necessary information and click OK For more information on the information to register see Registering a Destination in a One Touch Button P 239 LINKS Registering Destinations P 218 Restricting Use of the Address Book P 754 Managing the Machine 797 ...

Page 812: ... Registering Users Register the users to share with Registering User Information in the Local Device P 681 If you are using Server Authentication proceed to step 2 Registering a Group to Share Register a user group Registering User Groups P 800 Setting the Group Share Destination Specify the group created in step 2 in Public View Settings from the address list in which to register the destination ...

Page 813: ... To add new users to an existing group set the destination group when registering the users in step 1 Managing the Machine 799 ...

Page 814: ...t Authentication Management User Group Management 4 Click Add Group Local Device Users or Add Group Other Users Select Add Group Other Users if Server Authentication is set Adding Groups to a Local Device 1 Enter the group ID and user group name 2 Select the users to include in the user group and click Add 3 Click Add Adding Groups to an Authentication Server 1 Enter the group ID user group name a...

Page 815: ...ion destination ActiveDirectory LDAP server etc For example enter company or department For Attributes input the values you wish to extract as a group from the values listed for Attribute Name in the server For example you may enter Company A for the company name and Sales 1 for the department name Managing the Machine 801 ...

Page 816: ...o specify the key and certificate in the settings for each communication method However an X 509 DER format CA certificate does not need to be specified in the settings for each communication method You can use it simply by registering it to the machine TLS encrypted communication Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS P 739 IPSec Configuring the IPSec Settings P 743 IEEE 802 1X Configuring t...

Page 817: ...ailed settings or delete keys and certificates on the screen displayed in step 4 If is displayed the key is corrupted or invalid If is displayed the certificate for the key does not exist Click a key name to display detailed information about the certificate You can also click Verify Certificate on this screen to check whether the certificate is valid To delete a key and certificate select the one...

Page 818: ...ck Start Installation 7 Register the CA certificate Select the CA certificate that you want to register and click Register Managing CA certificates You can check the detailed settings or delete CA certificates on the screen displayed in step 4 Click to display detailed information about the CA certificate You can also click Verify Certificate on this screen to check whether the CA certificate is v...

Page 819: ...ortal page Remote UI Screen P 785 3 Click Device Management S MIME Certificate Settings 4 Click Register S MIME Certificate 5 Register the S MIME certificate Click Browse specify the file S MIME certificate to register and click Register Managing S MIME certificates You can check the detailed settings or delete S MIME certificates on the screen displayed in step 4 Click to display detailed informa...

Page 820: ...Remote UI Screen P 785 3 Click Device Management Certificate Revocation List CRL Settings 4 Click Register CRL 5 Register the CRL Click Browse specify the file CRL to register and click Register Managing CRLs You can check the detailed settings or delete CRLs on the screen displayed in step 4 Click to display detailed information about it You can also click Verify CRL on this screen to check wheth...

Page 821: ...cate to a Key P 808 Generating a Key and CSR You can generate a key and CSR on the machine You can also display the CSR data on the screen and export it as a file 1 Start the Remote UI Starting the Remote UI P 784 2 Click Settings Registration on the portal page Remote UI Screen P 785 3 Click Device Management Key and Certificate Settings 4 Click Generate Key 5 Click Key and Certificate Signing Re...

Page 822: ...r is not used 7 Click OK The CSR data is displayed If you want to save the CSR data to a file click Store in File and specify the save location The key that generated the CSR is displayed on the key and certificate list screen but you cannot use it by itself To use this key you need to register the certificate that is later issued based on the CSR Registering a Certificate to a Key P 808 Registeri...

Page 823: ...5 Click Register Certificate 6 Register the certificate Click Browse specify the file certificate to register and click Register Managing the Machine 809 ...

Page 824: ... Status of Requesting a Certificate to Be Issued P 814 Specifying the Communication Settings of the SCEP Server You can specify the settings for communicating with the SCEP server 1 Start the Remote UI Starting the Remote UI P 784 2 Click Settings Registration on the portal page Remote UI Screen P 785 3 Click Device Management Settings for Certificate Issuance Request SCEP 4 Click Communication Se...

Page 825: ...sued 1 Start the Remote UI Starting the Remote UI P 784 2 Click Settings Registration on the portal page Remote UI Screen P 785 3 Click Device Management Settings for Certificate Issuance Request SCEP 4 Click Certificate Issuance Request 5 Set the items required for requesting a certificate to be issued Key Name Enter the name for the key Enter a name that will be easy to find when displayed in a ...

Page 826: ... obtained with the various functions disabled the certificate is assigned as the destination but the various functions are not automatically enabled 6 Click Send Request 7 Click Restart A manual request for issuing a certificate cannot be sent when Enable Timer for Certificate Issuance Auto Request is selected Requesting a Certificate to Be Issued at the Specified Time P 812 The information set he...

Page 827: ... number of polling times and polling interval In the following cases polling is not performed and an error occurs When the machine has exceeded the limit of keys and certificates it can hold When an error is included in the retrieved response data When an error occurs on the SCEP server side Send Periodic Issuance Requests Select this to periodically send an automatic request for a certificate to ...

Page 828: ...essfully issued is displayed in Request Date Time The information displayed in Details in Error is indicated below Details Cause Deferred The pending status was returned from the SCEP server Key and Certificate Registration Limit Error The limit to the number of keys and certificates that can be registered in the machine was reached Communication Error TOP ERROR Connection to the SCEP server faile...

Page 829: ...ort batch importing of this setting Importing Exporting the Setting Data P 827 When performing batch exporting this setting is included in Settings Registration Basic Information Importing Exporting All Settings P 831 LINKS Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS P 739 Configuring the IEEE 802 1X Authentication Settings P 749 Configuring the IPSec Settings P 743 Managing the Machine 815 ...

Page 830: ... Mail Box You can also edit stored documents by deleting specific pages 1 Start the Remote UI Starting the Remote UI P 784 2 Click Access Received Stored Files on the portal page Remote UI Screen P 785 3 On the Mail Box page click the number of the desired Mail Box If the page for entering a PIN is displayed enter the PIN and click OK You can also specify a Mail Box by entering its number in Box N...

Page 831: ...tiple files 2 Click Select Destination select the destination and click OK You can click Move to Top Move Up Move Down or Move to Bottom to change the order in which files are sent You can click Settings in Set Details to change the send settings You can also change detailed settings of the file in File Settings Scanning P 495 If you select the check box for Delete File After Sending files are aut...

Page 832: ...Select the number of the destination Mail Box in Target Box and click Start Changing a file name 1 Click a Type icon or file name 2 Click Change File Name enter the new name in File Name and click OK Deleting pages from a file 1 Click a Type icon or file name 2 Select the check box for the pages that you want to delete and click Delete Page OK You can also click Delete Pages Consecutively and spec...

Page 833: ...erform the desired operation Click the Type icon to display detailed information about the document Printing a document 1 Select the check box for a document that you want to print and click Print You can select multiple documents 2 Click Start Printing Documents are automatically deleted after they are printed Forwarding a document 1 Select the check box for a document that you want to forward an...

Page 834: ...ng a check mark to Set PIN To configure Memory Lock settings You can set whether to receive faxes and I faxes in the Memory RX Inbox by clicking Memory Lock Settings on the screen displayed in step 4 Managing Documents Temporarily Stored in Confidential Fax Inbox You can print or delete faxes and I faxes that are temporarily stored in the Confidential Fax Inbox 1 Start the Remote UI Starting the R...

Page 835: ...e 1 Select the check box for the file that you want to delete 2 Click Delete OK To change the settings of a Confidential Fax Inbox You can change the name and PIN for the selected Confidential Fax Inbox by clicking Settings on the screen displayed in step 4 LINKS Making Simple Edits to Files P 591 Saving Received Documents in the Machine Memory Reception P 433 Keeping Received Documents Private P ...

Page 836: ...screen appears If you can obtain the audit log from before the error occurred click Download Audit Log to obtain the log and then click OK If you cannot obtain the audit log from before the error occurred click OK When initialization is completed Audit Log Collection is resumed and the automatic initialization process is recorded in the log Starting Log Recording Follow the procedure below to star...

Page 837: ...h day or when the number of audit logs reaches 95 of the maximum number approximately 38 000 1 Start the Remote UI Starting the Remote UI P 784 2 Click Settings Registration on the portal page Remote UI Screen P 785 3 Click Device Management Export Clear Audit Log Settings for Auto Export Audit Logs 4 Select the check box for Use Auto Export and specify the required settings User Name Password Ent...

Page 838: ...that if you are using a server that does not support SMB v3 0 encrypted communication audit log data travels unencrypted across communication paths while it is being automatically exported Depending on your environment automatic exporting of logs may be performed later than the specified time 6 Follow the instructions on the screen to specify the location to store the files The csv files are store...

Page 839: ...ation on the portal page Remote UI Screen P 785 3 Click Device Management Export Clear Audit Log Syslog Settings 4 Select Use Syslog Send and specify the required settings Syslog Server Address Specify the address of the Syslog server to connect to Enter the necessary information such as IP address and host name according to your environment Syslog Server Port Number Enter the port number used by ...

Page 840: ...ification Items Set whether to verify the TLS server certificate sent when connecting and its CN Common Name 5 Click Update A slight time lag occurs after the error for some audit logs because Syslog transmission is performed after polling every 30 seconds The supported RFCs are 5424 Syslog format 5425 TLS and 5426 UDP LINKS Starting the Remote UI P 784 Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS ...

Page 841: ...and other data are overwritten which may prevent some functions from working properly or cause problems with machine operation Exercise caution when importing data Do not turn OFF the machine until importing or exporting is complete It may take several minutes for the process to complete Do not turn OFF the machine before the process is complete Doing so may result in data loss or cause the machin...

Page 842: ...es and group management data Do not import or export in different display languages If the display language differs between the exporting machine and the importing machine the setting values may corrupt causing malfunction of the machine Do not edit exported files Do not open and edit exported XML files as this may cause the machine to malfunction When importing to a Canon multifunction printer ot...

Page 843: ...h the server machine Conditions for Removing Restrictions on the Importing Exporting of Settings and Other Items Importing exporting becomes possible if the corresponding conditions are met for the items described below Batch Importing Batch Exporting Export Import Personal Setting Information Only possible if both conditions and are met Unavailable User Group Address List Only possible if both co...

Page 844: ...machine is localhost 8443 For instructions on preparing to export user data see Specifying Detailed Synchronization Settings Server Machine or Server Client Machine P 870 For instructions on importing Address Lists see Importing Settings Individually P 837 Managing the Machine 830 ...

Page 845: ...er models that support the import export of all settings Exporting All Settings P 831 Importing All Settings P 832 Exporting All Settings 1 Start the Remote UI Starting the Remote UI P 784 2 Click Settings Registration on the portal page Remote UI Screen P 785 3 Click Data Management Export 4 Select the check box for Select All Specific items can also be exported For information on which Settings ...

Page 846: ...y where to save the data To export all setting data without using a computer You can export all setting data to memory media such as a USB memory device Import Export Export to USB Memory P 1143 Importing All Settings You can import all setting data that was exported to a computer When importing the previously configured setting values are overwritten Note however that some machine models may not ...

Page 847: ...mporting machine or if no password has been set for the importing machine If no password has been set for the importing machine the password configured for the exporting machine is automatically set to the importing machine 1 Start the Remote UI Starting the Remote UI P 784 2 Click Settings Registration on the portal page Remote UI Screen P 785 3 Click Data Management Import 4 Click Browse and spe...

Page 848: ...t using a computer You can import all setting data from memory media such as a USB memory device Import Export Import from USB Memory P 1143 Only one report file is saved The next time a batch import is executed the existing report file is deleted Reports are created in the following language If the display language of the machine is set to Japanese immediately after the import process Japanese If...

Page 849: ...nformation on editing an Address Book CSV file for importing see Address Book Items P 842 Exporting Settings Individually 1 Start the Remote UI Starting the Remote UI P 784 2 Click Settings Registration on the portal page Remote UI Screen P 785 3 Click Data Management and select the settings to export When exporting address lists 1 Click Address Lists in Import Export Individually 2 Click Export I...

Page 850: ... select LDAP Format or CSV Format if the file is to be used by a computer application Note however that if LDAP Format is selected only the e mail addresses and fax numbers are saved To set a password for exported data Set Include Password When Exporting Address Book to On Include Password When Exporting Address Book P 1128 When this setting is configured the items for entering the password are di...

Page 851: ... 1 Click Web Access Favorites in Import Export Individually 2 Click Export When exporting printer settings 1 Click Printer Settings in Import Export Individually 2 Click Export When exporting paper information 1 Click Paper Information in Import Export Individually 2 Click Export 3 Select the paper setting information in Category 4 Click Start Exporting 5 Follow the on screen instructions to speci...

Page 852: ...gure the necessary settings Address Lists Select the address list that is the import destination Import Method Select Add if you want to add the imported destinations without deleting the current address list or select Delete and Overwrite if you want to delete the current address list and overwrite the data with the imported destinations File Path Managing the Machine 838 ...

Page 853: ...gs in Import Export Individually 2 Click Import 3 Configure the necessary settings The current Address Book is deleted and overwritten with the imported Address Book information When importing no operations can be performed on the Remote UI until the machine is restarted In addition the imported settings become valid after you restart the machine Turning OFF Restarting the Machine P 793 File Forma...

Page 854: ...er Settings in Import Export Individually 2 Click Import 3 Click Browse and specify the setting data to import When importing paper information 1 Click Paper Information in Import Export Individually 2 Click Import 3 Configure the necessary settings Category Select the paper setting information File Path Click Browse and specify the file to import 4 Click Start Importing OK The machine may need to...

Page 855: ...LINKS Importing Exporting All Settings P 831 Restricting Use of the Address Book P 754 Managing the Machine 841 ...

Page 856: ...on 0x010a Yes Fixed value Crypto Version 2 No Leave this section blank if you are creating a new Address Book CSV file Crypto Attribute pwd No Leave this section blank if you are creating a new Address Book CSV file The presence a header relating to Crypt in a header indicates that the password attribute is encrypted However when entering this information into a newly created CSV file or when edit...

Page 857: ...tination using a URI you must also specify the URI flag see below url File server destination host name Yes Required for certain destination types This attribute is required for file server destinations You can only use letters and symbols path File path for file server destination No You can only use letters and symbols protocol Protocol Yes Required for certain destination types This attribute i...

Page 858: ...ernational line 1 international1 For PSTN international line 2 international2 For PSTN international line 3 international3 lineselect Selected fax line No Enter one of the following Otherwise auto is used For lines 1 to 4 line1 line2 line3 or line4 For automatic line specification auto uricommode IP fax communication mode Yes Required for certain destination types This is the chosen communication ...

Page 859: ... I fax No clpapersize Paper size allowable when sending a color I fax No clcompressiontype Compression format used when sending a color I fax No Fixed as jpeg clpixeltype Color space allowable when sending a color I fax No Fixed as rgb clbitsperpixel Bit count allowable when sending a color I fax No Fixed as 8 clresolution Resolution allowable when sending a color I fax No accesscode Access code N...

Page 860: ...d for Personal Address List User Group Address List No usergroupname Used for Personal Address List User Group Address List No personalid Used for Personal Address List User Group Address List No Managing the Machine 846 ...

Page 861: ... may be lost if a problem occurs with the hard disk Periodically back up export sensitive data Please note that Canon is not liable for any damages caused by loss of data Connecting an external hard disk When using an external hard disk to back up or restore data it is recommended that you connect it to the USB port on the right side of the machine Front Side P 92 For more information on the exter...

Page 862: ...ure the necessary settings When backing up to an external hard disk Backup Location Select USB HDD Folder Path Enter the path to the folder on the external hard disk in which to save the backed up data Encrypt Backup Data If you select the check box and enter a password you can encrypt the backed up data The password specified here will be required when restoring the encrypted backup data When bac...

Page 863: ...re the backed up data properly Encrypt Backup Data If you select the check box and enter a password you can encrypt the backed up data The password specified here will be required when restoring the encrypted backup data 5 Click OK 6 Click Back Up 7 Select the backup method and click Execute OK Backup Data Capacity Backup Location Available Space If Backup Location Available Space is not enough fo...

Page 864: ...he portal page Remote UI Screen P 785 3 Click Data Management Restore 4 Click Display Backup Data 5 Select the backup data to restore and click Execute OK Enter the password if one was set when backing up the data 6 Click Restart Main Unit After the machine restarts the backup data is restored The backup data may not be fully restored when certain machine settings are used Restoring saved data Res...

Page 865: ... If you back up data from an optional internal hard disk and restore it on the standard equipped hard disk some of the data may not be restored Managing the Machine 851 ...

Page 866: ...achine data and settings in case the firmware update is not performed properly Backing Up Restoring Data P 847 Importing Exporting the Setting Data P 827 1 Start the Remote UI Starting the Remote UI P 784 2 Click Settings Registration on the portal page Remote UI Screen P 785 3 Click License Other Register Update Software 4 Click Manual Update 5 Click Browse select the firmware update to use and c...

Page 867: ...mote UI Starting the Remote UI P 784 2 Click Settings Registration on the portal page Remote UI Screen P 785 3 Click License Other Register Update Software 4 Click Scheduled Update Settings Edit 5 Select the check box for Enable scheduled update settings and configure the necessary settings Update Schedule Confirm Select the cycle Biweekly or Weekly a day Sun to Sat and the time The time is displa...

Page 868: ... is entered you can identify which device status the e mail is about If previously downloaded firmware has not been applied by scheduled update the next scheduled update is not performed If Scheduled Update is set a firmware update is applied at the specified time after the new firmware is downloaded from the distribution server After application is complete the machine automatically restarts 6 Cl...

Page 869: ...e portal page Remote UI Screen P 785 3 Click License Other Message Board Support Link 4 Enter the message and click OK Enable Status Display To display the message at the bottom of the touch panel display select the check box and enter the message in Message Use this setting for displaying operational tips and other low priority messages Enable Pop up Window To display the message in a pop up wind...

Page 870: ...le notice Remote UI If you select the check box the message shown in the pop up window is also displayed on the Remote UI portal page Canceling the message display Clear the check boxes for Enable Status Display Enable Pop up Window and Remote UI If you also want to delete the message contents remove the text that was entered in the Message text boxes LINKS Timer Energy Settings P 1047 Managing th...

Page 871: ...t a file saved on a file server or in an Advanced Box on the same network as the content to display Using as a Simple File Server P 574 You can also set a website on the internet as the content via a proxy server The proxy settings used for this function are the same as the settings in Proxy Settings P 1057 The content is displayed when printing starts if the forced hold print function is enabled ...

Page 872: ... Reset Time to 1 minute or longer Display After Login Select this check box to display the content after logging in This is enabled when Login Screen Display Settings is set to Display When Device Operation Starts Display When Print Job Starts Select this check box to display the content when printing starts This is enabled when forced hold printing is set Setting the Content for Each Display Timi...

Page 873: ...uting the Device Information to Other Canon Multifunction Printers P 880 This setting can be imported exported The same setting can be imported to multiple devices only Canon devices that support the Visual Message function to display the same notice or information on multiple devices Importing Exporting the Setting Data P 827 File Path is imported exported with this setting If a file in the Advan...

Page 874: ...e UI Screen P 785 3 Click Device Management E Mail Notification Settings Add Destination to Notify 4 Specify settings as necessary Destination to Notify Enter the e mail address Notify When Select the information to send You can register up to five destinations 5 Click OK The result of sending the e mail can be checked in Status Monitor Cancel in Job Log This setting can only be specified by a use...

Page 875: ...from exported to the same series machines Importing Exporting the Setting Data P 827 This setting is included in Settings Registration Basic Information when batch exporting Importing Exporting All Settings P 831 Managing the Machine 861 ...

Page 876: ...ion The Do you want to test communication message is displayed 4 Press Yes The results of the communication test are displayed If NG is displayed check that the LAN cable is connected and the network settings are configured properly Setting up Using the Setup Guide P 8 If you cannot connect to the network register the license online When Registration Cannot Be Performed over the Network P 863 2 Pr...

Page 877: ...ense and obtain the license key Follow the on screen instructions and enter the license access number and serial number to obtain the license key 2 Press 3 Press Management Settings License Other Register License 4 Enter the license key 5 Press Enable OK 6 Press Apply Set Changes Yes Registering a license for a MEAP application You may also need to register a license when using a MEAP application ...

Page 878: ...chronization Settings Server Machine or Server Client Machine P 870 Switching the Machines to Synchronize P 875 Up to 10 machines including the server machine can be synchronized Synchronized values may not be reflected depending on the optional products and the machine configuration A server machine can either be used as a server machine that does not synchronize its own data or as both a server ...

Page 879: ... the server machine Specifying Detailed Synchronization Settings Server Machine or Server Client Machine P 870 To change the scope of sharing etc after starting synchronization shut down all the client machines change the settings on the server machine and start all the client machines again Specifying Detailed Synchronization Settings Server Machine or Server Client Machine P 870 Synchronization ...

Page 880: ...achines the machine authentication settings and group management settings must be the same For information on specifying the same authentication settings see the instructions for the login application For group management settings it is recommended that the settings in one machine are exported and imported into the other machines When Department IDs are used for group management set the same Depar...

Page 881: ...the Remote UI Starting the Remote UI P 784 2 Click Synchronize Custom Settings on the portal page Remote UI Screen P 785 3 Click Change Connection Destination 4 Specify the required settings Service Select Start to use the machine as the server machine Service Select Start to use the machine as a client machine To use the machine as a server client machine select Start for Service in both Synchron...

Page 882: ... for the machine to use as the server machine Allow custom settings to be applied during operation Select the check box to reflect the Switch Language Keyboard Accessibility and Personal SSID and Network Key Settings settings when it becomes possible if they could not be reflected immediately after logging in In the following cases synchronization can be set without performing step 5 When the mach...

Page 883: ...chronization You can check the communication log from the screen for synchronizing custom settings The log can also be downloaded as a file Warning is recorded as the level when the server machine cannot communicate temporarily Error is recorded as the level when the maximum amount of data that can be registered has been exceeded or authentication with the server machine fails Simple Synchronizati...

Page 884: ...hronize Custom Settings Server screen User Data You can delete or update the user data that can be exported from the server machine Delete User Data Deletes user data by searching for a user name or group ID Search with the search conditions left blank to display all the user data If custom setting synchronization client is started the data in the server machine is prioritized when synchronizing t...

Page 885: ...e scope of data sharing Confirm Device Information Displays Device Name Serial Number and Location of synchronized machines The machines can also be filtered Data Sharing Details Set whether to share the synchronized data with all machines or retain settings in individual machines without sharing For information on the items that are synchronized when Device Specific Not Shared is set for all the ...

Page 886: ...replication destination cannot be connected to via the network the data is not replicated until the next replication Recovery Using Replicated Data Use replicated data stored in another Canon multifunction printer to restore the server machine It is recommended that you stop replication on the replication settings screen before performing recovery using replicated data When performing recovery usi...

Page 887: ...n destination being turned OFF or the authentication information having been changed Log in to the Remote UI as an administrator select Synchronize Custom Settings Server Server click Replication check the displayed message The following message is displayed if replication has been executed correctly Waiting for replication To change the Destination Device for Replication first perform Stop Replic...

Page 888: ... generate the backup file due to lack of free space DBBU08 Cannot find the network destination DBBU07 Cannot access the network destination DBBU02 Failed to save the backup data DBRS01 Failed to restore data from the machine DBRS02 Failed to restore data from the network destination DBRS08 Cannot find the network destination DBRS07 Cannot access the network destination If DBBU02 or DBRS02 is displ...

Page 889: ... UI of each client machine Starting Setting Synchronization P 867 2 Create backup data in Synchronize Custom Settings Server Back Up Network in the Remote UI of the server machine server client machine Specifying Detailed Synchronization Settings Server Machine or Server Client Machine P 870 3 Stop synchronization in Synchronize Custom Settings in the Remote UI of the server machine server client ...

Page 890: ...ronization Settings Server Machine or Server Client Machine P 870 If you cannot access Synchronize Custom Settings Server use past backup data 2 Start synchronization in Synchronize Custom Settings in the Remote UI of the new server machine server client machine Starting Setting Synchronization P 867 3 Restore the backup data from step 1 in Synchronize Custom Settings Server in the Remote UI of th...

Page 891: ...machine to use as the replication destination restore the replication data If the IP address and host name of the server machine have not changed the subsequent steps are not required 3 Stop synchronization in Synchronize Custom Settings in the Remote UI of each client machine Starting Setting Synchronization P 867 4 Change the address of the destination server in Synchronize Custom Settings in th...

Page 892: ...f each client machine and start synchronization of custom settings Specifying Detailed Synchronization Settings Server Machine or Server Client Machine P 870 The client machines must be restarted after configuring synchronization When Replication Cannot Be Stopped on the Server Machine If replication could not be stopped from the server machine because the server machine is not working etc the mac...

Page 893: ...nfirm Device Information in the Remote UI of the server machine server client machine 2 Configuring Synchronization on a New Client Machine Starting Setting Synchronization P 867 If synchronization was not correctly stopped on a client machine or if the client machine was not deleted in Synchronize Custom Settings Server Confirm Device Information in the Remote UI of the server machine server clie...

Page 894: ...when Distributing Device Information P 884 Distributing the Device Information P 886 Checking the Results of Device Information Distribution P 889 If both the host and client machines are imageRUNNER ADVANCE series models the device information can be distributed It is also possible to receive some setting information from models other than those in this series However some information may not be ...

Page 895: ...authentication when device information is received configure the necessary settings on the host and client machines Performing User Authentication when Distributing Device Information P 884 Distribute the device information Distributing the Device Information P 886 On the host and client machines check the results of device information distribution Checking the Results of Device Information Distri...

Page 896: ...tination and press OK Press Display Host Name to display the host names for the multifunctional printers shown in Destination Registering destinations manually When destinations clients cannot be searched automatically you can register them manually by entering the IP address or domain name 1 Press Register 2 Enter the IP address or domain name of a destination client and press OK When entering th...

Page 897: ...K LINKS Performing User Authentication when Distributing Device Information P 884 Distributing the Device Information P 886 Checking the Results of Device Information Distribution P 889 Managing the Machine 883 ...

Page 898: ...main based on the authentication device 1 Press 2 Press Management Settings Device Management Device Information Distribution Settings Set MEAP Authentication 3 Configure the necessary information and press OK User Name Password Enter the user name and password of an administrator with Administrator privileges Make sure that this administrator is registered as a user on the client machine and on t...

Page 899: ...ation P 695 1 Press 2 Press Management Settings Device Management Device Information Distribution Settings Use MEAP Authentication When Receive 3 Select On and press OK OK 4 Press Apply Set Changes Yes Managing the Machine 885 ...

Page 900: ...o malfunction The setting update screen is displayed on the client machine that receives the device information and no operations can be performed until the update is complete It is recommended that you distribute the device information at a time when there are no users Distributing the Device Information Manually P 886 Distributing Automatically at a Specified Time P 887 Distributing the Device I...

Page 901: ...to Distribution 3 Select Everyday or Specify Days then specify the distribution times For Everyday select a number and enter a time For Specify Days select a day and enter a time 4 Press Next 5 Press On for the information to distribute and press Next If On is selected for Settings Registration Value the screen for setting whether or not to distribute the Network Settings device information is dis...

Page 902: ...ns to receive device information for When the machine is used as a client machine you can restrict the functions to receive information for by setting Restrict Receiving for Each Function in Receiving Settings to Off Restoring the previous device information You can perform operations on the client machine to restore the device information that existed before the update was performed However you c...

Page 903: ...ce Management Device Information Distribution Settings Communication Log 3 Check the communication log and press OK The log of previously distributed device information is displayed in a list OK indicates that device information was distributed received properly NG indicates that distribution was canceled or an error occurred To display the details of an item in the list select the item and press ...

Page 904: ...of the test subject with the prescribed standards The TPM setting can also be used to encrypt the password information and certificate information managed in the memory Removing Unnecessary Data from the Hard Disk P 891 Initializing All Data Settings P 893 Using TPM P 895 HDD data encryption on the machine may not be able to protect data from all unauthorized activity Exercise caution when managin...

Page 905: ...in the Mail Box Address Book information or copy and print log information Initializing All Data Settings P 893 1 Press 2 Press Management Settings Data Management HDD Data Complete Deletion 3 Press Hard Disk Data Complete Deletion On OK 4 Specify how to delete the data Setting the deletion timing 1 Press Timing of Deletion 2 Select the deletion timing and press OK Select During Job to delete data...

Page 906: ... with Random Data Data is overwritten once or three times with random data DoD Standard Data is overwritten three times The first time is with a fixed value the second is with a complement of the fixed value and the third is with random data 3 Press Apply Set Changes Yes Managing the Machine 892 ...

Page 907: ...process If you perform Initialize All Data Settings P 1144 when the Copy Card Reader is attached it is necessary to reinstall the Copy Card Reader For more information contact your local authorized Canon dealer Before performing initialization Back up your important data or export it as a file Data saved on the machine Backing Up Restoring Data P 847 Machine setting information Importing Exporting...

Page 908: ...d the Initialize All Data Settings Report is printed When the A security policy is applied to this device message is displayed a password must be entered by the security administrator For more information contact your security administrator Applying a Security Policy to the Machine P 664 Although the job log information can be deleted by initializing all data settings the result of printing the In...

Page 909: ...tored Backup the TPM key immediately on to the USB memory after the TPM setting is activated For security reasons you can only backup the TPM key once Manage the password set during the backup so that it is not forgotten The security provided by TPM does not guarantee complete protection of the data and hardware Note that Canon will not be liable for any failure or damages resulting from the use o...

Page 910: ...sword press OK 6 Enter the password again on the confirmation screen press OK OK 7 Connect the USB memory to the machine press OK If the error screen appears follow the instructions on the screen and backup again Before backing up make sure that writing is allowed for the memory media connected to the machine You cannot back up the TPM key for the following cases The password is incorrect USB memo...

Page 911: ...fails you can use the previously backed up data of the TPM key to restore the TPM key on to the new TPM chip For information on TPM chip failure contact your local authorized Canon dealer 1 Press 2 Press Management Settings Data Management TPM Settings 3 Press Restore TPM Key 4 Press Password 5 Enter the password you specified when backing up press OK OK 6 Connect the USB memory to the machine pre...

Page 912: ...nitializing All Data Settings P 893 all of the data encrypted by the TPM key is completely erased and the TPM setting becomes inactive You cannot restore the TPM key for the following cases USB memory is not connected Multiple USB storage devices are connected A TPM key does not exist on the USB memory The TPM key on the USB memory is not correct The password set during the backup was not entered ...

Page 913: ...Generating exporting audit logs You can record user authentication logs and job logs and export them from the Remote UI Managing the Logs P 822 Completely deleting unnecessary data from the hard disk HDD Complete Deletion Unnecessary data can be deleted from the hard disk by overwriting with random data multiple times Managing Hard Disk Data P 890 Protecting the various types of data and confident...

Page 914: ...Steps Guide Authentication Function That Creates a Secure Device Usage Environment By registering users and devices to uniFLOW Online Express you can create a secure and personalized print environment without the need for a local server In this environment for example you can help prevent troubles where a user takes away prints left by someone else or you can customize the device screen only for y...

Page 915: ... Scan Function That Sends Scanned Data to an E Mail Address or in the Cloud This function enables you to send scanned documents to your e mail address Scan to Myself or directly store them in the external cloud service Main Specifications Authentication Function User registration method Linking the Office 365TM account Uploading in CSV format Registering users via e mail Manual entry User authenti...

Page 916: ... each device Copy print scan fax logs of all users Copy print scan fax logs of all devices all periods Copy print scan fax logs of all devices specified period Simple Scan Function Send store function Scan to Myself Sending an e mail Scan to Google Drive File format TIFF PDF Managing the Machine 902 ...

Page 917: ...ent Maintenance 952 Adjust Image Quality 953 Adjust Action 955 Maintenance 956 Function Settings 957 Common 958 Copy 969 Printer 971 Output Report 973 Custom Settings 974 UFR II 980 PCL 981 PS 984 Imaging 986 PDF 988 XPS 990 Utility 992 Send 993 Receive Forward 1004 Store Access Files 1007 Print 1011 Hold 1013 Web Access 1014 Set Destination 1017 Management Settings 1020 User Management 1021 Devic...

Page 918: ...8 Adjustment Maintenance 1069 Adjust Image Quality 1070 Adjust Action 1072 Maintenance 1074 Function Settings 1075 Common 1076 Copy 1091 Printer 1093 Send 1095 Receive Forward 1111 Store Access Files 1118 Print 1123 Hold 1126 Set Destination 1127 Management Settings 1131 User Management 1132 Device Management 1135 License Other 1140 Data Management 1143 Security Settings 1146 Settings Registration...

Page 919: ...es Restart the machine Personal Settings and Device Settings When User Authentication Managing Users P 675 is enabled Personal Settings and Device Settings are displayed on the screen after you log in with Administrator privileges by pressing If you select Personal Settings and change the items that can be personalized settings are registered as the personal settings for the user who is logged int...

Page 920: ...tion The factory defaults are written in bold red characters DeviceAdmin and NetworkAdmin The DeviceAdmin and NetworkAdmin items are written for each item in the Settings Registration table If the administrator role is specified for the machine users with Administrator privileges can change all of the settings while general users are restricted and can change only some of the settings Meanwhile us...

Page 921: ... Import Name of Item When Exporting with the Remote UI This section indicates which Settings Registration items correspond with which items of the batch export function of the Remote UI is indicated for items that are not imported exported Importing Exporting All Settings P 831 The items that can be selected for the batch export function of the Remote UI are indicated below Items That Can Be Selec...

Page 922: ... Security Policy Settings Personal Setting Information MEAP Application Setting Information For information on the settings that are included in Personal Setting Information see List of Items That Can Be Personalized P 163 Select an item in Name of Item When Exporting with the Remote UI listed on the Settings Registration table when exporting the value which you set from Device Settings from the R...

Page 923: ... P 915 Network P 917 External Interface P 949 Accessibility P 950 Volume Settings P 951 Some items can be set using the Remote UI Use the control panel of the device to set items which cannot be set using the Remote UI The names may be different on the Remote UI Settings Registration 909 ...

Page 924: ...56 g m2 Recycled 1 64 75 g m2 Pre Punched Transparency Tab 4 151 220 g m2 Color 64 81 g m2 Letterhead Custom Size Envelope Other Size Unrecognized Standard Size Yes Yes Yes 1 No B 2 Settings Registration Basic Information Paper Size Group for Auto Recognition in Drawer Multi Purpose Tray A B Size Inch Size A K Size Paper Drawer All Sizes A B Size Inch Size A K Size Yes Yes No No B Settings Registr...

Page 925: ...Favorite Paper Yes Yes No No B Settings Registration Basic Information Register Custom Size S1 to S5 Register Edit Rename Delete Yes Yes No Yes B Settings Registration Basic Information 1 Custom Size and Envelope cannot be set from the Remote UI 2 Custom Size and Other Size cannot be imported with the Import All function 3 Use as Template Paper 2nd Side of 2 Sided Page Adjust Image Position Adjust...

Page 926: ...ess Stored Files Fax I Fax Inbox Scanner Web Access Tutorial Dest Fwd Settings Print Hold WSD Scan Scan for Mobile Mobile Portal iW Function Flow 1 Scan Lock Analyzer 1 uniFLOW Online Setup No No No No C Settings Registration Basic Information Open Status Monitor Screen On Off Default Screen Status Monitor Default Status Type Copy Print Send Receive Store Consumables Others Yes Yes No No C Setting...

Page 927: ...c Information Advanced Box Network On Off Memory Media On Off Switch Language Keyboard Language Keyboard Layout Yes Yes No No C Settings Registration Basic Information Display Switch Language Keyboard Button 2 On Off Yes Yes No No C Settings Registration Basic Information Use Keyboard Shift Lock Feature On Off Yes Yes No Yes C Settings Registration Basic Information Registered Characters for Keybo...

Page 928: ... Error Message On Off Yes No No No C Settings Registration Basic Information Delete Remaining Toner Error Yes No Yes Yes No No No IP Address Display Settings On Off No Yes No No C Settings Registration Basic Information Display Scan for Mobile On Off No Yes No No C Settings Registration Basic Information Display Mobile Portal On Off No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Display Q...

Page 929: ... UTC 12 00 No No Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Daylight Saving Time On Off No No Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Start Date Month Day Time 0 to 23 End Date Month Day Time 0 to 23 No No Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Time Format 24 Hour 12 Hour No No Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Quick Startup Settings for Main Power On Off No...

Page 930: ...Auto Adjust Gradation Sunday to Saturday 00 00 to 23 59 in one minute increments Yes Yes Yes Yes C Settings Registration Basic Information Sleep Mode Exit Time Settings 00 00 to 23 59 in one minute increments Yes Yes Yes Yes C Settings Registration Basic Information Sleep Mode Eco Exit On Off Yes Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Use Motion Sensor 2 On Off Yes Yes Yes No C Setti...

Page 931: ...ork Connection Setting Changes On Off No Yes No Yes C Settings Registration Basic Information TCP IP Settings IPv4 Settings Item Setting Description DeviceAdmin NetworkAdmin Can be set in Remote UI Device Information Delivery Available Import All Function Name of Item When Exporting with the Remote UI Use IPv4 On Off No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information IP Address Settings IP Ad...

Page 932: ...gistration Basic Information Release Address Last Acquired from DHCP Server When Address Cannot Be Acquired 1 On Off No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information PING Command IPv4 Address 0 0 0 0 No Yes No No No 1 This setting can only be specified from the Remote UI TCP IP Settings IPv6 Settings Item Setting Description DeviceAdmin NetworkAdmin Can be set in Remote UI Device Informatio...

Page 933: ...s Acquire DNS Server Address On Off Yes No Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Acquire Domain Name On Off Yes No Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information TCP IP Settings DNS Settings Item Setting Description DeviceAdmin NetworkAdmin Can be set in Remote UI Device Information Delivery Available Import All Function Name of Item When Exporting with the Remote UI DNS Server Addres...

Page 934: ... Settings Registration Basic Information IPv6 DNS Dynamic Update On Off No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Register Stateless Address On Off No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Register Manual Address On Off No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Register Stateful Address On Off No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information mDNS S...

Page 935: ...formation Comment 48 characters maximum No Yes Yes No A Settings Registration Basic Information Use NetBIOS On Off No Yes Yes No A Settings Registration Basic Information SMB Server Settings Use SMB Server On Off No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Use SMB Authentication On Off No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Authentication Type NTLMv1 NTLMv2 No Yes Yes ...

Page 936: ... to 10 to 300 sec No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Specify SMB Client Version 1 0 On Off Yes Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information 2 0 On Off Yes Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information 3 0 On Off Yes Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information WINS Settings WINS Resolution On Off No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information WI...

Page 937: ...erval 10 to 1440 to 2880 min No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information NTP Server Address IP Address or Host Name No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Check NTP Server No Yes Yes No No FTP Print Settings Use FTP Printing On Off No Yes Yes Yes C Settings Registration Basic Information User Name guest No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Password 7...

Page 938: ...On Off No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Multicast Discovery Settings Response On Off No Yes Yes Yes C Settings Registration Basic Information Scope Name No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Sleep Mode Notification Settings 1 Notify On Off No Yes Yes Yes C Settings Registration Basic Information Port Number 1 to 11427 to 65535 No Yes Yes Yes C Settings Regi...

Page 939: ...ocation Displays what the key pair is being used for No Yes Yes No No Specify Allowed Versions Maximum Version TLS 1 0 TLS 1 1 TLS 1 2 No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Minimum Version TLS 1 0 TLS 1 1 TLS 1 2 No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Algorithm Settings Encryption Algorithm AES CBC 256 bit On Off AES GCM 256 bit On Off 3DES CBC On Off AES CBC 128...

Page 940: ...cters maximum No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Confirm Auth Info When in Auth Management Mode On Off No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information 1 This setting can only be specified from the Remote UI TCP IP Settings IPSec Settings Item Setting Description DeviceAdmin NetworkAdmin Can be set in Remote UI Device Information Delivery Available Import All Function N...

Page 941: ...ss Prefix Length No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Prefix Length 0 to 64 to 128 No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Remote Address All IP Addresses All IPv4 Addresses All IPv6 Addresses IPv4 Manual Settings IPv6 Manual Settings No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information IPv4 Manual Settings Single Address Address Range First Address Last Addre...

Page 942: ... 1 to 480 to 65535 min No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Authentication Method Pre Shared Key Method Shared Key Digital Sig Method Key and Certificate No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Key and Certificate Set as Default Key No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Key and Certificate Certificate Details Version Serial Number Signature Algo...

Page 943: ... Time On Off No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information On 1 to 480 to 65535min No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Validity Size On Off No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information On 0 to 1 to 65535 MB No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information PFS On Off No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Authentication Encryption Alg...

Page 944: ...o Yes Yes No No Print List Yes No No Yes Yes No No TCP IP Settings Item Setting Description DeviceAdmin NetworkAdmin Can be set in Remote UI Device Information Delivery Available Import All Function Name of Item When Exporting with the Remote UI TCP IP Option Settings 1 Use Window Scale Option On Off No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information MTU Size 600 to 1500 bytes 600 1500 No Yes...

Page 945: ...Item Setting Description DeviceAdmin NetworkAdmin Can be set in Remote UI Device Information Delivery Available Import All Function Name of Item When Exporting with the Remote UI Use SNMPv1 On Off No Yes Yes Yes C Settings Registration Basic Information Set Dedicated Community Dedicated Community On Off No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information MIB Access Permission Read Write Read O...

Page 946: ...c Information Encryption Password No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Use Same Password as for Authentication On Off No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information User Settings User On Off On Off No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Register User Name MIB Access Permission Read Write Read Only Security Settings Auth Yes Encrypt Yes Auth Yes Encrypt ...

Page 947: ...No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Format Host Resources MIB to RFC2790 Item Setting Description DeviceAdmin NetworkAdmin Can be set in Remote UI Device Information Delivery Available Import All Function Name of Item When Exporting with the Remote UI Format Host Resources MIB to RFC2790 On Off No Yes No No C Settings Registration Basic Information Dedicated Port Settings Item ...

Page 948: ...et in Remote UI Device Information Delivery Available Import All Function Name of Item When Exporting with the Remote UI Waiting Time for Connection at Startup 0 to 300 sec No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Ethernet Driver Settings Item Setting Description DeviceAdmin NetworkAdmin Can be set in Remote UI Device Information Delivery Available Import All Function Name of Item W...

Page 949: ...on Name of Item When Exporting with the Remote UI Use IEEE 802 1X On Off No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Login Name Login Name No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Verify Authentication Server Certificate On Off No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Verify Authentication Server Name On Off No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Info...

Page 950: ... to be authenticated with IEEE802 1X authentication No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Password Password of the user to be authenticated with IEEE802 1X authentication No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Same User Name as Login Name On Off No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Firewall Settings IPv4 Address Filter Item Setting Description ...

Page 951: ...ecify Specify No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Prefix Length 1 to 32 No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Inbound Filter Use Filter On Off No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Default Policy Allow Reject No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Register Up to 16 IPv4 addresses Details Edit Delete No Yes Yes No C Settings R...

Page 952: ...ort All Function Name of Item When Exporting with the Remote UI Outbound Filter Use Filter On Off No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Default Policy Allow Reject No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Register Up to 16 IPv6 addresses Details Edit Delete No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Register Single Address Address Prefix Address IPv6 P...

Page 953: ...tings Registration Basic Information Details Edit Single Address Address Prefix Address IPv6 Prefix Prefix Length Port Number Do Not Specify Specify No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Prefix Length 1 to 128 No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Always Allow Sending Receiving Using ICMPv6 On Off No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Firewall ...

Page 954: ...Information Delivery Available Import All Function Name of Item When Exporting with the Remote UI IP Address Block Log Time Type IP Address Port Number Result Display IP Address No Yes Yes No No Use Mopria Item Setting Description DeviceAdmin NetworkAdmin Can be set in Remote UI Device Information Delivery Available Import All Function Name of Item When Exporting with the Remote UI Use Mopria On O...

Page 955: ...Can be set in Remote UI Device Information Delivery Available Import All Function Name of Item When Exporting with the Remote UI Device Position Information Settings Latitude Specify the latitude No Yes Yes No No Longitude Specify the longitude No Yes Yes No No Select Interface Item Setting Description DeviceAdmin NetworkAdmin Can be set in Remote UI Device Information Delivery Available Import Al...

Page 956: ... WEP Key 3 WEP Key 4 Security Settings WPA WPA2 PSK Encryption Method Auto AES CCMP PSK No Yes No No No Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Information Item Setting Description DeviceAdmin NetworkAdmin Can be set in Remote UI Device Information Delivery Available Import All Function Name of Item When Exporting with the Remote UI Wireless LAN Information Display All No Yes Yes No No Details No Yes Yes No No ...

Page 957: ...ated 0 None 1 to 30 to 60 min No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Access Point Mode Settings Use Personal SSID and Network Key On Off No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Specify SSID to Use On Off No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information SSID Enter SSID No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Specify Network Key to Use On Off N...

Page 958: ...gs Item Setting Description DeviceAdmin NetworkAdmin Can be set in Remote UI Device Information Delivery Available Import All Function Name of Item When Exporting with the Remote UI Use Bluetooth On Off No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Beacon Settings Use Beacon for Canon PRINT Business On Off No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Use Beacon for AirPrint On...

Page 959: ...ation Basic Information Gateway Address 0 0 0 0 No Yes No No C Settings Registration Basic Information Priority Line for Communication with Mobile Devices Main Line Sub Line No Yes No No C Settings Registration Basic Information Ethernet Driver Settings Auto Detect On Off No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Communication Mode Off Half Duplex Full Duplex No Yes Yes No C Settings...

Page 960: ... Address Address Prefix Length Port Number Do Not Specify Specify Specify Port Number Add Delete No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Details Edit Single Address Range Address First Address Last Address Prefix Address Address Prefix Length Port Number Do Not Specify Specify No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Prefix Length 1 to 32 No Yes Yes No C Settings Reg...

Page 961: ...Admin Can be set in Remote UI Device Information Delivery Available Import All Function Name of Item When Exporting with the Remote UI DNS Server Address Settings Primary DNS Server No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Secondary DNS Server No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Proxy Settings Use Proxy On Off No Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Informati...

Page 962: ... Device Information Delivery Available Import All Function Name of Item When Exporting with the Remote UI Static Routing Settings Use Static Routing On Off No Yes No No C Settings Registration Basic Information Edit Delete No Yes No No No Edit Address 0 0 0 0 Prefix Length 1 to 32 Gateway Address 0 0 0 0 No Yes No No C Settings Registration Basic Information Settings Registration 948 ...

Page 963: ...nction Name of Item When Exporting with the Remote UI USB Settings Use as USB Device On Off No No Yes Yes C Settings Registration Basic Information Use MEAP Driver for USB Input Device On Off No No Yes Yes C Settings Registration Basic Information Use MEAP Driver for USB Storage Device On Off No No Yes Yes C Settings Registration Basic Information Use USB Storage Device On Off Yes No Yes No C Sett...

Page 964: ...Function Name of Item When Exporting with the Remote UI Key Repetition Settings Standard Slightly Slow Slow Yes Yes No No C Settings Registration Basic Information Reversed Display Color On Off Yes Yes No No C Settings Registration Basic Information Enable Screen Magnification On Off Yes Yes No No C Settings Registration Basic Information Use Flick Pinch Function On Off Yes Yes No No C Settings Re...

Page 965: ...Yes C Settings Registration Basic Information Memory RX TX End Tone On Off Yes Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Memory RX TX Error Tone On Off Yes Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Incoming Fax Ring On Off When On is selected Ring Count 1 to 2 to 99 Yes Yes Yes Yes C Settings Registration Basic Information Other Volume Settings Entry Tone 0 to 2 to 3 Invalid ...

Page 966: ...Adjustment Maintenance 4XR3 0HL Adjust Image Quality P 953 Adjust Action P 955 Maintenance P 956 Settings Registration 952 ...

Page 967: ...er Select Start Printing Start Scanning When Quick Adjust is set Start Adjustment Level Simple By Paper Type Group Initialize When Using Full Adjust On Off Auto Correct Color Tone Settings Auto Correct Color Tone Start Correcting Change Corr Pattern Yes Yes No No No Settings Registration Basic Information Register Correction Pattern Pattern 2 to Pattern 5 Yes No No No No Job Type to Apply To Copy ...

Page 968: ...increments Y 1 0 to 0 to 1 0 in 0 1 increments Yes Yes No No A Settings Registration Basic Information Dither Pattern Settings Pattern 1 Pattern 2 Pattern 3 Pattern 4 Yes No No No No Color Balance Coated Non Coated Yes No No No A Settings Registration Basic Information Color Balance for each color 8 to 0 to 8 Fine Adjust Density for each color High Dark Area 8 to 0 to 8 Medium 8 to 0 to 8 Low Ligh...

Page 969: ...Position 1 2 00 mm to 0 00 mm to 2 00 mm in 0 25 mm increments Yes Yes No No No Adjust Saddle Stitch Fold Position 1 2 00 mm to 0 00 mm to 2 00 mm in 0 25 mm increments Yes Yes No No No Switch Finisher Puncher Mode 1 Speed Priority Precision Priority Yes Yes No No B Adjust Fold Position 1 2 00 mm to 0 00 mm to 2 00 mm in 0 25 mm increments Yes Yes No No No Time Until Stapling Starts in Stapler Mod...

Page 970: ...l Scanning Area Cleaning Method Displays the Cleaning Method Yes Yes No No No Check Maintenance Method Replace Toner Cartridge Displays the toner cartridge replacement method Yes Yes No No No Replace Waste Toner Container Displays the waste toner container replacement method Yes Yes No No No Load Staples Staples Displays the staple cartridge replacement method Yes Yes No No No Load Staples Saddle ...

Page 971: ...Function Settings 4XR3 0HW Common P 958 Copy P 969 Printer P 971 Send P 993 Receive Forward P 1004 Store Access Files P 1007 Print P 1011 Hold P 1013 Web Access P 1014 Settings Registration 957 ...

Page 972: ...tings Registration Basic Information Other On Off Yes Yes Yes No B Settings Registration Basic Information Copy Consider Color On Off Yes Yes Yes No B Settings Registration Basic Information Copy Consider Paper Type On Off Yes Yes Yes No B Settings Registration Basic Information Printer Use Group On Off Yes Yes Yes No B Settings Registration Basic Information Paper Drawer Auto Selection Based on C...

Page 973: ...on Basic Information Offset Jobs 1 On Off Yes Yes Yes Yes C Settings Registration Basic Information Job Separator Between Jobs On Off Yes Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Change Select Paper Source Yes Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Job Separator Between Copies On Off Yes Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information copies 1 to 10 to 9999 Yes Yes Y...

Page 974: ...s C Settings Registration Basic Information Text Photo Priority When Recognized as B W by ACS Text Priority Photo Priority Yes Yes Yes Yes B Settings Registration Basic Information Conversion Color by Specific Color for Two Colors Print All Chromatic Colors Approximate Colors Only Yes Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Output Report Default Settings 2 Sided Printing On Off Yes Ye...

Page 975: ...ht Yes No Yes Yes B Settings Registration Basic Information Forced Print of Recognition Information On Off Yes No Yes No B Settings Registration Basic Information Target Function Copy On Off Printer On Off Access Stored Files On Off Yes No Yes No B Settings Registration Basic Information Position Top Left Top Right Bottom Left Bottom Right Yes No Yes No B Settings Registration Basic Information Or...

Page 976: ...Using QR Code Do Not Set Driver Secure Watermark Driver Doc Scan Lock Sec Watermark Doc Scan Lock Yes No Yes Yes 5 C Settings Registration Basic Information Adjust Background Character Contrast Black Relative Contrast 7 to 0 to 7 Yes No No No A Settings Registration Basic Information Sample Print Yes No No No No Print Settings Background Pattern None Arabesque Fans Polka Dots Stars Mesh Clouds Che...

Page 977: ...No No No No Print Settings Size Small Medium Large Yes No No No No Print Settings Print Vertically On Off Yes No No No No Print Settings White Letters on Colored Background On Off Yes No No No No Initialize Yes No Yes No No No No Standard Value Settings 1 to 64 1 to 12 to 64 Yes No No No A Settings Registration Basic Information Latent Area Density 1 to 36 1 to 7 to 36 Yes No No No A Settings Regi...

Page 978: ...o A Settings Registration Basic Information Adjust TL Code Color Magenta Black Yes No No Yes A Settings Registration Basic Information Magenta Dot Size 1 to 7 1 to 4 to 7 Yes No No Yes A Settings Registration Basic Information Black Dot Size 1 to 7 1 to 4 to 7 Yes No No Yes A Settings Registration Basic Information Dot Density Standard Rough Yes No No Yes C Settings Registration Basic Information ...

Page 979: ...Settings Speed Priority Quiet Yes Yes Yes No B Settings Registration Basic Information Streak Prevention On Off Yes Yes Yes No B Settings Registration Basic Information Speed Image Quality Priority for B W Scan Fax I Fax Send Jobs Speed Priority Quality Priority All Send Jobs Except Fax I Fax Jobs Speed Priority Quality Priority Yes Yes Yes No B Settings Registration Basic Information LTRR STMT Or...

Page 980: ...utline Graphics On Off Yes Yes Yes Yes C Settings Registration Basic Information Graphics Recognition Level Normal Moderate High Yes Yes Yes Yes C Settings Registration Basic Information Background Image Level Data Size Priority Normal Quality Priority Yes Yes Yes Yes C Settings Registration Basic Information OOXML Settings Background Image Level Quality Priority Standard Data Size Priority Yes Ye...

Page 981: ...s No Yes Yes C Settings Registration Basic Information Multiple Embedded Information Action Continue Job Cancel Job Yes No Yes Yes C Settings Registration Basic Information Restrict Functions Affecting Document Scan Lock On Off Yes No Yes Yes C Settings Registration Basic Information Document Scan Lock QR Code Settings Scan Job Restriction A Mode Standard B Mode Secured Off Restrict Functions Affe...

Page 982: ...nly when the appropriate optional equipment is available for use 2 Forced Secure Watermark No Password When Analyzing Embedded Info No 3 Forced Secure Watermark No Forced Document Scan Lock No Sec Watermark Doc Scan Lock No 4 Driver Secure Watermark No Password When Analyzing Embedded Info No 5 Driver Secure Watermark No Driver Doc Scan Lock No Sec Watermark Doc Scan Lock No Settings Registration ...

Page 983: ...lt Settings Register Initialize Yes Yes No No C Favorite Settings Register Options Shortcuts Shortcut 1 Each mode Finishing Yes Yes No No C Favorite Settings Shortcut 2 Each mode 2 Sided Yes Yes No No C Favorite Settings Shortcut 3 Each mode Density Yes Yes No No C Favorite Settings Shortcut 4 Each mode Original Type Yes Yes No No C Favorite Settings Shortcut 5 Each mode Unassigned Yes Yes No No C...

Page 984: ...Use Single Color On Off Yes No Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Use Two Colors On Off Yes No Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Speed Priority for Copying from Feeder On Off Yes Yes No No B Settings Registration Basic Information Job Separator Between Groups On Off Change Select Paper Source Yes Yes No No B Settings Registration Basic Information Settings Registration...

Page 985: ...XPS XPS P 990 Utility Utility P 992 Restrict Printer Jobs On Off Yes No Yes Yes C Settings for Printer Settings When On is selected Select Jobs to Allow Reserved Jobs Yes No Yes Yes C Settings for Printer Settings PDL Selection Plug and Play UFR II PCL6 PS3 UFR II V4 Fax PCL6 V4 Yes No Yes No C Settings for Printer Settings Paper Feed Mode for Printer Driver Jobs with MP Tray Mode A Prioritize Pri...

Page 986: ...rinter Settings Paper Feed Mode When Using PCL Emulation Mode 0 Mode 1 Mode 2 No No Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional product is available for use or the appropriate setting is specified Settings Registration 972 ...

Page 987: ... Remote UI PCL Configuration Page Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No Font List Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No PS 1 Configuration Page Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No Font List Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No RGB Test Page Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No CMYK Test Page Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No RGB Color Chart Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No CMYK Color Chart Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No 1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate opti...

Page 988: ...gs for Printer Settings 2 Sided Printing On Off Yes Yes Yes Yes C Settings for Printer Settings Paper Feed Default Paper Size Letter Legal A4 B5 A3 B4 A5 A6 11x17 Executive Statement Env KAKUGATA 2 Env NAGAGATA 3 Env YOGATANAGA3 Envelope Monarch Env No 10 Envelope ISO C5 Envelope DL 305x457 mm 320x450 mm SRA3 FOOLSCAP FOLIO OFICIO LEGAL India FOOLSCAP Australia F4A LETTER Government LEGAL Governme...

Page 989: ...oup 1 Offset Collate 1 2 Offset Group 1 Staple Collate 1 3 Staple Group 1 3 Eco Stpl Fr Col 1 4 Eco Stpl Fr Grp 1 4 Offset Copies 1 to 9999 Binding Position Corner Upper L Double Top Corner Upper R Double Right Corner Lower R Double Bottom Corner Lower L Double Left Yes Yes Yes Yes C Settings for Printer Settings Punch Punch On Off Punch Position Left Right Top Bottom Punch Type Finisher 2 Hole Fi...

Page 990: ...Off Yes Yes Yes Yes B Settings for Printer Settings Sharpness 3 to 3 0 Yes Yes Yes No B Settings for Printer Settings Sharpness Photo 1 to 3 0 Yes Yes Yes No C Settings for Printer Settings Trapping Trapping On Off Trapping Width Upper 0 to 3 1 pixel Lower 0 to 3 1 pixel Left 0 to 3 1 pixel Right 0 to 3 1 pixel Trapping Density Cyan 0 to 100 100 Magenta 0 to 100 100 Yellow 0 to 100 100 Yes Yes Yes...

Page 991: ...yout Binding Location Long Edge Short Edge Yes Yes Yes Yes C Settings for Printer Settings Gutter 50 0 mm to 50 0 mm 0 0 mm Yes Yes Yes Yes C Settings for Printer Settings Offset Short Edge Front 50 0 mm to 50 0 mm 0 0 mm Yes Yes Yes Yes C Settings for Printer Settings Offset Long Edge Front 50 0 mm to 50 0 mm 0 0 mm Yes Yes Yes Yes C Settings for Printer Settings Offset Short Edge Back 50 0 mm to...

Page 992: ...Full Surface Yes Yes Yes Yes C Settings for Printer Settings Starting Number 1 1 to 9999 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes C Settings for Printer Settings Number Size 1 Small 12 point Medium 24 point Large 36 point Yes Yes Yes Yes C Settings for Printer Settings Density 1 1 to 5 3 Yes Yes Yes Yes C Settings for Printer Settings Color 1 Yellow Magenta Cyan Black Red Green Blue Yes Yes Yes Yes B Settings for Printe...

Page 993: ... Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional product is available for use or the appropriate setting is specified 2 Copies 1 to 9999 3 Staple Position Staple Collate Staple Group Corner Upper L Double Top Corner Upper R Double Right Corner Lower R Double Bottom Corner Lower L Double Left 4 Staple Position Eco Stpl Fr Col Eco Stpl Fr Grp Corner Upper L Corner Upper R Corner Lower...

Page 994: ...ution Gradation Error Diffusion Yes Yes Yes Yes B Settings for Printer Settings Graphics Resolution Gradation Error Diffusion Yes Yes Image Resolution Gradation Error Diffusion Yes Yes Matching Method General Perceptual Colorimetric Vivid Photo Download Profile Yes Yes Yes No C Settings for Printer Settings Gray Compensation Text On Off Yes Yes Yes Yes B Settings for Printer Settings Graphics On O...

Page 995: ...Landscape Yes Yes Yes Yes C Settings for Printer Settings Font Source Internal Soft External Yes Yes No No C Settings for Printer Settings Font Number 0 to 104 0 If the Font Source setting is Internal 1 to 999 1 If the Font Source setting is Soft External Yes Yes Yes No C Settings for Printer Settings Point Size 1 4 00 to 999 75 point 12 00 point Yes Yes Yes No C Settings for Printer Settings Pitc...

Page 996: ...ings for Printer Settings Unit of Measure 1 Millimeters inches Yes Yes Yes No C Settings for Printer Settings X dimension 1 98 4 mm to 1200 0 mm 457 2 mm Yes Yes Yes No B Settings for Printer Settings Y dimension 1 98 0 mm to 320 0 mm 320 0 mm Yes Yes Yes No B Settings for Printer Settings Append CR to LF Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes C Settings for Printer Settings Enlarge A4 Print Width On Off Yes Yes ...

Page 997: ... Yes Yes B Settings for Printer Settings Graphics On Off Image On Off BarDIMM Enable Disable Yes Yes Yes Yes C Settings for Printer Settings FreeScape 1 Off Yes Yes Yes Yes C Settings for Printer Settings 1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional product is available for use or the appropriate setting is specified Settings Registration 983 ...

Page 998: ... Yes Yes Yes Yes C Settings for Printer Settings Pure Black Text On Off Yes Yes Yes Yes C Settings for Printer Settings Black Overprint 1 On Off Yes Yes Yes Yes C Settings for Printer Settings RGB Source Profile sRGB Gamma 1 5 Gamma 1 8 Gamma 2 4 None Download Profile Yes Yes Yes No No CMYK Simulation Profile JapanColor Canon US Web Ctd Canon Euro Standard None Download Profile Yes Yes Yes No No U...

Page 999: ... Image Resolution Gradation Error Diffusion Brightness 1 85 to 115 100 Yes Yes Yes Yes C Settings for Printer Settings Composite Overprint On Off Yes Yes Yes Yes C Settings for Printer Settings Grayscale Conversion 1 sRGB NTSC Uniform RGB Yes Yes Yes Yes C Settings for Printer Settings 1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional product is available for use or the appropriate ...

Page 1000: ... Warnings On Off Yes Yes Yes Yes C Settings for Printer Settings Enlarge Print Area On Off Yes Yes Yes Yes C Settings for Printer Settings Matching Method General Perceptual Colorimetric Vivid Photo Download Profile Yes Yes Yes No C Settings for Printer Settings Photo Correct Color Only Photo Optimizer PRO On Off Yes Yes Yes No C Settings for Printer Settings Red Eye Correction Red Eye Correction ...

Page 1001: ...er Settings Grayscale Conversion 1 sRGB NTSC Uniform RGB Yes Yes Yes Yes C Settings for Printer Settings 1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional product is available for use or the appropriate setting is specified Settings Registration 987 ...

Page 1002: ...r Printer Settings N on 1 Off 2 on 1 4 on 1 6 on 1 8 on 1 9 on 1 16 on 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes C Settings for Printer Settings Comment Print Off Auto Yes Yes Yes Yes C Settings for Printer Settings Pure Black Text On Off Yes Yes Yes Yes C Settings for Printer Settings Black Overprint 1 On Off Yes Yes Yes Yes C Settings for Printer Settings RGB Source Profile sRGB Gamma 1 5 Gamma 1 8 Gamma 2 4 None Downl...

Page 1003: ...er Settings Graphics Resolution Gradation Error Diffusion Image Resolution Gradation Error Diffusion Brightness 1 85 to 115 100 Yes Yes Yes Yes C Settings for Printer Settings Composite Overprint On Off Yes Yes Yes Yes C Settings for Printer Settings Grayscale Conversion 1 sRGB NTSC Uniform RGB Yes Yes Yes Yes C Settings for Printer Settings 1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate ...

Page 1004: ...nter Settings Photo Correct Color Only Photo Optimizer PRO On Off Yes Yes Yes No C Settings for Printer Settings Red Eye Correction Red Eye Correction On Off Yes Yes Yes No C Settings for Printer Settings Red Eye Correction Level 1 Weak Standard Strong Face Brightener Face Brightener On Off Yes Yes Yes No C Settings for Printer Settings Face Brightener Level 1 Weak Standard Strong Halftones Text G...

Page 1005: ...orm RGB Yes Yes Yes Yes C Settings for Printer Settings Graphics sRGB NTSC Uniform RGB Image sRGB NTSC Uniform RGB 1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional product is available for use or the appropriate setting is specified Settings Registration 991 ...

Page 1006: ...tting Description DeviceAdmin NetworkAdmin Can be set in Remote UI Device Information Delivery Available Import All Function Name of Item When Exporting with the Remote UI Initialize PCL Hard Disk Yes No Yes Yes No No No Initialize PS Hard Disk Yes No Yes Yes No No No Reset Printer Yes No Yes Yes No No No Settings Registration 992 ...

Page 1007: ...lect Location M1 to M18 Yes Yes No Yes C Favorite Settings Show Comments On Off Yes Yes No Yes C Settings Registration Basic Information Name Comment Yes Yes No Yes C Favorite Settings Edit Favorite Settings Select the Button M1 to M18 Yes Yes No Yes 2 C Favorite Settings Settings Registration Basic Information Show Comments On Off Delete Check Content Rename Display Confirmation for Favorite Sett...

Page 1008: ...d Report with TX Image On Off Report with Color TX Image On Off When Off is selected Allow Printing from Options On Off Report with TX Image On Off Report with Color TX Image On Off Communication Management Report Print Send Every Specified No of Transm Print Send Off Yes No Yes Yes C Settings Registration Basic Information Number of transmissions 100 to 1000 Print Send at Specified Time Print Sen...

Page 1009: ...X On Off No No Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information When On is selected CN On Off Limit New Destination Fax 1 On Off Yes No Yes Yes C Settings Registration Basic Information E Mail On Off I Fax On Off File On Off Always Add Device Signature to Send On Off Yes No Yes Yes C Settings Registration Basic Information When On is selected Restrict File Formats On Off Limit E Mail to Send to My...

Page 1010: ...ddress Details Register Addresses Folder Name Sender Information Date Off Do Not Create File Format TIFF PDF Display Notification When Job Is Accepted On Off Yes Yes No Yes C Settings Registration Basic Information Job to Cancel When Stop is Pressed Latest Received Job Job Being Sent Yes No Yes Yes C Settings Registration Basic Information E Mail I Fax Settings Register Unit Name Register Unit Nam...

Page 1011: ...al 0 to 99 minutes Yes Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Authent Encryption Yes Yes Yes No No POP Auth Method Standard APOP POP AUTH Yes Yes Yes Yes C Settings Registration Basic Information POP Authentication Before Sending On Off Yes Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information SMTP Authentication SMTP AUTH On Off Yes Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Informatio...

Page 1012: ... Signature upon Receipt On Off Print Signature upon Receipt On Off Confirm TLS Certificate for SMTP TX On Off No No Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information When On is selected CN On Off Confirm TLS Certificate for POP RX On Off No No Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information When On is selected CN On Off Maximum Data Size for Sending 0 to 3 to 99 MB Yes No Yes Yes C Settings Regist...

Page 1013: ...ic Information When On is selected Register Details Edit Delete Auto Complete for Entering E Mail Addresses Off Address Book Local LDAP Server Yes No No No C Settings Registration Basic Information Auto Add Specified Domain to Dest Without Domain Domain Name When Sending E Mail On Off When Sending I Fax On Off Yes No No No C Settings Registration Basic Information Fax Settings 1 Register Favorite ...

Page 1014: ... 1 Density Each mode Unassigned Yes Yes No No C Favorite Settings Shortcut 2 Original Type Each mode Unassigned Shortcut 3 2 Sided Original Each mode Unassigned Shortcut 4 Different Size Originals Each mode Unassigned Register Sender Name TTI Register Edit Delete Yes Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Use Authentication User Name as Sender Name On Off Yes No No Yes C Settings Reg...

Page 1015: ...eport Print Send Every Specified No of Transm Print Send Off Yes No Yes Yes C Settings Registration Basic Information Number of transmissions 40 to 1000 Print Send at Specified Time Print Send Off Specify Print Time 00 00 to 23 59 Print Send Receive Jobs Separately On Off Send Destination Set Line Line 1 to Line 4 Yes No No No No Register Unit Telephone Number Enter the User Telephone No Yes No Ye...

Page 1016: ... 20 digits maximum Hooking Yes No Yes Yes C Settings Registration Basic Information Confirm Entered Fax Number On Off Yes No Yes Yes C Settings Registration Basic Information Allow Fax Driver TX On Off Yes No Yes Yes C Settings Registration Basic Information Confirm Before Sending When Fax Dest Included On Off No No Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information When On is selected Only for Seq ...

Page 1017: ...ettings Use Remote Fax On Off Yes Yes Yes Yes C Settings Registration Basic Information Auto Adjust Communication Speed When Using VoIP On Off Yes Yes Yes Yes C Settings Registration Basic Information 1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional products are available for use 2 Show Comments No 3 Details Edit No Delete No 4 Indicates items that may not be displayed on the Setti...

Page 1018: ...on Settings Print on Both Sides On Off Yes Yes Yes Yes C Settings Registration Basic Information Select Drawer Switch A On Off Switch B On Off Switch C On Off Switch D On Off Yes Yes Yes Yes C Settings Registration Basic Information Reduce Fax RX Size On Off Yes Yes Yes Yes C Settings Registration Basic Information Reduction Mode Auto Fixed Reduction 75 to 90 to 97 Reduction Direction Vertical Hor...

Page 1019: ...l Priority Print List Search Clear Yes No Yes Yes 2 No 3 Forwarding Settings Set Fax I Fax Inbox Set Register Confidential Fax Inboxes Box No 00 to 49 Yes Yes No Yes C Box Settings Register Box Name Yes Yes No Yes 4 C Box Settings PIN Yes Yes No Yes C Box Settings URL Send Settings Yes Yes No Yes 4 C Box Settings Initialize Yes Yes No Yes No Memory RX Inbox PIN Set PIN Confirm Yes No No No C Box S...

Page 1020: ...r Error Only On Off Yes Yes Yes Yes C Settings Registration Basic Information Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report On Off Yes Yes Yes Yes C Settings Registration Basic Information RX Start Speed 33600 bps 14400 bps 9600 bps 7200 bps 4800 bps 2400 bps Yes No Yes Yes C Settings Registration Basic Information RX Password Set Password Confirm Yes No Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information 1 Indic...

Page 1021: ...ngs Register Edit Favorite Settings Register Rename Delete Check Content M1 to M9 Yes Yes No No C Favorite Settings Change Default Settings Register Initialize Yes Yes No No C Favorite Settings Limit Box PIN to 7 Digits Restrict Access On Off Yes No Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Mail Box Settings Set Register Mail Boxes Box No 00 to 99 Yes Yes Yes No C Box Settings Register Box ...

Page 1022: ...onal Space On Off Yes Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Delete All Personal Spaces Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No Initialize Shared Space Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No Prohibit Writing from External On Off Yes Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Authentication Management On Off Yes Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information File Formats Allowed for Storing Dev Su...

Page 1023: ...ected Set Use Authentication Info of Each User Set Protocol Windows SMB WebDAV Host Name Folder Path When Use Login Server is selected Use Authentication Info of Each User Memory Media Settings Use Scan Print Function Use Scan Function On Off Yes No Yes Yes C Settings Registration Basic Information Use Print Function On Off Yes No Yes Yes C Settings Registration Basic Information Select Option Whe...

Page 1024: ... File Formats Allowed for Storing WebDAV Server Settings SMB Server Settings Settings Registration 1010 ...

Page 1025: ...2 3 6 12 hr 1 2 3 days Yes Yes No No C Settings Registration Basic Information Delete Job After Printing On Off Yes Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Only Allow Encrypted Print Jobs On Off Yes Yes Yes No C 1 Settings Registration Basic Information Include Domain as User Recognition Condition On Off Yes Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Display Other User Jobs ...

Page 1026: ...to 9999 If 1 Sided Print Jobs Are Included On Off If Color Print Jobs Are Included On Off Yes Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information PIN Settings for Secure Print Jobs Require PIN for Printing Displaying User Jobs On Off Require PIN for Job Deletion On Off Yes Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Enable Auto Print Function When Logging In On Off Yes Yes Yes No C Setti...

Page 1027: ...unction Name of Item When Exporting with the Remote UI Use Hold Function On Off Yes Yes No No C Settings Registration Basic Information Time Until Hold Job Auto Delete 0 Off 1 2 3 6 12 hr 1 2 3 7 30 days Yes No No No No Store PS PDF Data to Hold On Off Yes Yes No No C Settings Registration Basic Information Default Settings for Job Deletion After Printing On Off Yes No No No C Settings Registratio...

Page 1028: ... Yes Yes No No C Web Access Settings Server Address to Exempt from Warning NULL Yes Yes No No C Web Access Settings Server Address to Allow for Sharing Info NULL Yes Yes No No C Web Access Settings Server Addr to Allow for Simple PDF Print NULL Yes Yes No No C Web Access Settings Restrict Share Device Information On Off Yes Yes No No C Web Access Settings Display Warning When No Root Certificate O...

Page 1029: ... Settings Hide Buttons in Toolbar On Off Yes Yes No No C Web Access Settings Hide Address in Toolbar On Off Yes Yes No No C Web Access Settings Hide Web Access Button On Off Yes Yes No No C Web Access Settings Proxy Settings Use a proxy server Display Only Yes Yes No No No Proxy Server Address Display Only Yes Yes No No No Port Number Display Only Yes Yes No No No Use proxy auth Display Only Yes Y...

Page 1030: ... User Agent User Agent Information Restore Initial Settings Yes Yes No No C Web Access Settings Version About Display Only Yes Yes No No No Settings Registration 1016 ...

Page 1031: ...st 10 Rename Yes Yes Yes Yes C Address Book Register One Touch 001 to 200 Register Edit Delete Yes Yes Yes Yes C Address Book Change Default Display of Address Book Local LDAP Server Remote Yes Yes No No C Settings Registration Basic Information Address Book PIN Set PIN Enter the PIN 7 digits maximum Confirm No No Yes Yes C Settings Registration Basic Information Manage Address Book Access Numbers...

Page 1032: ...yName sn givenName Custom Yes No No No C Settings Registration Basic Information Filter Contains Does Not Contain Equals Differs from Begins with Ends with Acquire Remote Address Book Acquire Address Book On Off Yes Yes Yes Yes C Settings Registration Basic Information Remote Address Book Server Address Enter the IP Address or Host Name Yes Yes Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Comm...

Page 1033: ...ress List On On Browse Only Off Yes No Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information 1 Server to Search No 2 Personal Address List User Group Address List No 3 Register Details Edit B 4 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional products are available for use Settings Registration 1019 ...

Page 1034: ...Management Settings 4XR3 0JL User Management P 1021 Device Management P 1026 License Other P 1034 Data Management P 1036 Security Settings P 1038 Settings Registration 1020 ...

Page 1035: ...o Yes No C Authentication User Management Use User Authentication On Off When On is selected Picture Login On Off Keyboard Authentication On Off Mobile Authentication On Off No No Yes Yes C Settings Registration Basic Information Picture Login User Registration Method Register Automatically When Job Is Received 2 On Off Add Domain Name to User Name to Be Registered On Off Add Computer Name to User...

Page 1036: ...gs Registration Basic Information Display Button to Change Password on Settings Menu On Off No No Yes Yes C Settings Registration Basic Information Use Numeric Keys for Authentication On Off No No Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Login Screen Display Settings Displ When Dev Operation Start Display When Func Is Selected No No Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information When Dis...

Page 1037: ...ch Case for User Name On Off No No Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Allow Use of in User Name On Off No No Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information System Manager Information Settings System Manager ID 7654321 Seven digits maximum System Manager PIN 7654321 Seven digits maximum System Manager E Mail Address Contact Information Comment No No Yes Yes C Department ID Managemen...

Page 1038: ...imit On Off Page Limit 0 to 999999 Color Print Limit On Off Page Limit 0 to 999999 Black White Print Limit On Off Page Limit 0 to 999999 No No Yes Yes C Department ID Management Settings Page Totals Clear Print List Clear All Totals Large 2 Count Management No No Yes No No Allow Printer Jobs with Unknown IDs On Off No No Yes Yes C Department ID Management Settings Allow Remote Scan Jobs with Unkno...

Page 1039: ...fault setting is On but it changes depending on the license status of Picture Login when starting the machine for the first time When you start the machine for the first time the default setting is On if the license is enabled or Off if the license is disabled 3 Indicates items that appear only if ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM is enabled 4 Indicates items that appear only if DepartmentID Authentication...

Page 1040: ...e Information Distribution Settings Transmitting Settings Register Destinations Auto Search Register Register Details Delete Print List No No No No B 1 Settings Registration Basic Information Auto Search Register Search Depth Router 1 to 8 No No No No No Display Host Name On Off No No No No No Start Auto Search No No No No No Set Auto Distribution Everyday 1 to 5 Specify Days Sun to Sat 1 to 5 Off...

Page 1041: ...Manual Distribution Settings Registration Value On Off Network Settings Include Exclude No No No No No Department ID On Off No No No No No Address Book On Off No No No No No Web Access Favorites On Off No No No No No Printer Settings On Off No No No No No Paper Information On Off No No No No No iW Function Flow 2 On Off No No No No No Set MEAP Authentication User Name Password Login Destination No...

Page 1042: ... Registration Basic Information Printer Settings On Off No No No No C Settings Registration Basic Information Paper Information On Off No No No No C Settings Registration Basic Information iW Function Flow 2 On Off No No No No C Settings Registration Basic Information Set Paper Information All Basic Only No No No No C Settings Registration Basic Information Use MEAP Authentication When Receiving O...

Page 1043: ...e Validity End Date Issuer Public Key Certificate Thumbprint Issued To Altn Name Verify Certificate Yes Yes Yes No No Confirm User Signature Certificate 2 Version Serial Number Signature Algorithm Issued To Validity Start Date Validity End Date Issuer Public Key Certificate Thumbprint Issued To Altn Name Verify Certificate Yes Yes Yes No No Certificate Settings Generate Key Generate Network Commun...

Page 1044: ... Control Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No Key and Certificate List Key and Certificate List for Users 2 Certificate Details Version Serial Number Signature Algorithm Issued To Validity Start Date Validity End Date Issuer Public Key Certificate Thumbprint Issued To Altn Name Verify Certificate Yes Yes Yes No C 3 4 Certificate Certificate Revocation List CRL Settings Delete Yes Yes Yes No No Key and Certifi...

Page 1045: ...Revocation List CRL Settings Delete Yes Yes Yes No No Register Key and Certificate Register Yes Yes Yes No No Delete Yes Yes Yes No No Register CA Certificate Register Yes Yes Yes No No Delete Yes Yes Yes No No Display Job Status Before Authentication On Off No No Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Restrict Access to Other User Jobs Copy Print On Off Send On Off Receive On Off Store ...

Page 1046: ...s Enable Use of Personal Settings On Off No No No No C Settings Registration Basic Information Action When Maximum Number of Users Exceeded Delete Oldest User Settings Discard New User Settings No No No No C Settings Registration Basic Information Use Default Screen After Startup Restoration On Off No No No No C Settings Registration Basic Information Home Management Settings for Personal Use Allo...

Page 1047: ...s On Off No No No No No 1 Imports the registered distribution destination 2 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is available for use 3 Supports only algorithms that can be imported from the Remote UI 4 Keys and certificates are exported in the PKCS 12 format Settings Registration 1033 ...

Page 1048: ...n Confirm TLS Certificate Using MEAP Application On Off When On is selected Add Items to Verify CN On Off No No Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Use DNS Caching On Unlimited Use On Specify Period Off When On Specify Period is selected Period of Validity 1 to 60 to 120 sec No No Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Use Proxy Settings of This Device On Off No No Yes No C ...

Page 1049: ...C Settings Registration Basic Information Use ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM On Off No No Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Register Update Software Install Applications Options Software Management Settings Scheduled Update No No Yes No No Start Setup Guide Start No No No No No Allow Use of Print Function from Mobile On Off No No No No C 1 Settings Registration Basic Information 1 Only fo...

Page 1050: ...Import Result Report Yes No No No No No No Restrict Import Export from Web Service On Off No No Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information HDD Data Complete Deletion Hard Disk Data Complete Deletion On Off No No Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Timing of Deletion During Job After Job No No Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Overwrite Method for Deletion Mode Onc...

Page 1051: ...1 Settings Registration Basic Information Back Up TPM Key Password 12 characters maximum Restore TPM Key No No No No No 1 If TPM Settings is set to On make sure to back up the TPM key in the import destination machine Settings Registration 1037 ...

Page 1052: ...kout Settings Enable Lockout On Off No No Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information When On is selected Lockout Threshold 1 to10 times Lockout Period 1 to 60 min No No Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Password Settings Prohibit Caching of Authentication Password On Off No No Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Display Warning When Default Password Is in Use On O...

Page 1053: ...s No C Settings Registration Basic Information Use at Least 1 Symbol On Off No No Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Encryption Settings Prohibit Use of Weak Encryption On Off On is selected Prohibit Use of Key Certificate with Weak Encryption On Off No No Yes No C Settings Registration Basic Information Format Encryption Method to FIPS 140 2 On Off No No Yes No C Settings Registrati...

Page 1054: ...ings P 1047 This section describes the timer settings and energy settings Network P 1052 This section describes the network settings External Interface P 1066 This section describes the USB settings Accessibility P 1068 This section describes settings for improving accessibility such as the speed of repetition when keys are held down and the ability to reverse the contrast of the touch panel displ...

Page 1055: ...o Recognition in Drawer Preferences Paper Settings You can set the paper size group for each paper source to make the machine detect the loaded paper size automatically Make sure to set the paper guides to match the paper size Setting the paper guides incorrectly may result in a paper jam A5R STMTR Paper Selection Preferences Paper Settings When A5R or STMTR paper is loaded in the paper drawer you...

Page 1056: ...ays Specify If you frequently use multiple types of paper you can eliminate the procedure for selecting the paper type by registering the paper types in advance Registering Frequently Used Paper Size and Type for the Multi purpose Tray P 175 When the following conditions are met you can press Temp Change Ppr in MP Tray on the paper selection screen of Copy and Access Stored Files to change the pap...

Page 1057: ...e settings Default Screen Status Monitor Preferences Display Settings You can change the screen that is displayed when you press Copy Screen Display Settings Preferences Display Settings You can specify the screen that appears when you press Copy Changing the Settings Quickly Express Copy Screen P 360 Display Fax Function Preferences Display Settings You can set the machine to display the Fax func...

Page 1058: ...ers continuously or for entering text which begins with an uppercase letter Registered Characters for Keyboard Preferences Display Settings You can register strings often used when entering E Mail I Fax destinations using the keyboard Display Remaining Paper Message Preferences Display Settings You can set to display a message indicating that the remaining paper loaded in a paper source is low No ...

Page 1059: ...f the screen If User Authentication is set as the login service User Name is displayed when At Screen Bottom is selected Display Remaining Toner Error Message Preferences Display Settings Displays a warning screen that enables you to identify which color is running low when remaining toner is low This message is useful as it enables you to prepare a new toner cartridge in advance etc The following...

Page 1060: ... on the counter information screen This setting is only valid when Use IPv4 is set to On Display Scan for Mobile Preferences Display Settings You can set whether to enable the Scan for Mobile setting which sends scanned data to mobile devices such as smartphones and tablets Display Mobile Portal Preferences Display Settings You can set whether to display Mobile Portal on the Home screen Display QR...

Page 1061: ...ith a server on the network using SNTP Making SNTP Settings P 67 Quick Startup Settings for Main Power Preferences Timer Energy Settings If you set this function to On you can reduce the time it takes until you can perform operations on the screen and scan originals after the power is turned ON When this function is enabled Standby power is consumed even when the power is turned OFF A tone sounds ...

Page 1062: ...od in which you are logged out and the touch panel display returns to the default setting automatically If the login service is being used the machine automatically logs out the user when the Auto Reset Time elapses The screen displayed after the Auto Reset initiates differs depending on the following settings Setting 1 The settings in Visual Message Settings when When to Display is set to After L...

Page 1063: ... can set the time until the machine automatically enters the Sleep mode if no operations are performed It is recommended that the default value is used for this setting Sleep Mode Energy Use Preferences Timer Energy Settings You can set the amount of energy that the machine consumes when it is in the Sleep mode If the machine is connected to a computer using a USB cable depending on the timing for...

Page 1064: ...necessary functions sequentially The control panel is activated first followed by other functions activated in response to the user s operations You can save energy and lower noise by not activating unnecessary functions Use Motion Sensor Preferences Timer Energy Settings When the motion sensor detects a person near the machine the machine exits the Sleep mode automatically You can adjust the accu...

Page 1065: ...rature of the user is low the machine will have trouble detecting the user In this case set Sensor Sensitivity to High If the temperature around the machine changes the sensor will become sensitive and easily recover from the Sleep mode In this case set Sensor Sensitivity to Low Depending on the sensitivity setting the machine may recover from the Sleep mode even when not in use If you are disturb...

Page 1066: ...P IP Settings IPv4 Settings Specify the IPv4 address Setting an IPv4 Address P 37 DHCP Option Settings Preferences Network TCP IP Settings IPv4 Settings Specify the optional settings for DHCP Using a DHCP Server P 50 PING Command Preferences Network TCP IP Settings IPv4 Settings Tests whether the IPv4 address is set correctly Conducting a Connection Test for an IPv4 Address P 38 Use IPv6 Preferenc...

Page 1067: ...y the DNS server address settings Making DNS Settings P 47 DNS Host Domain Name Settings Preferences Network TCP IP Settings DNS Settings Specify the host name and domain name of the machine Making DNS Settings P 47 DNS Dynamic Update Settings Preferences Network TCP IP Settings DNS Settings Specify whether to perform the automatic update when the mapping between the host name and IP address is ch...

Page 1068: ...used if the versions differ SMB Client Settings Preferences Network TCP IP Settings Specify the settings to use when the machine connects to a network as an SMB client Setting the SMB Client P 53 Specify SMB Client Version Preferences Network TCP IP Settings Specify the version of SMB to use with the SMB client Setting the SMB Client P 53 Use the same version of SMB with the SMB server and SMB cli...

Page 1069: ... IP Settings Specify settings for Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP Making SNTP Settings P 67 FTP Print Settings Preferences Network TCP IP Settings Specify settings for FTP printing To use FTP printing press On and set User Name and Password as necessary Use UTF 8 to Display Name of FTP Print Job Preferences Network TCP IP Settings Specify whether to use UTF 8 for displaying file names when you p...

Page 1070: ... be performed correctly if a key length of 512 is set depending on the operating system you are using To use the IPP authentication function by setting Use Authentication to On the user information of the machine is used as the user and password for IPP authentication Make sure to register the user information in advance when using the IPP authentication function Registering User Information in th...

Page 1071: ...cate for TLS P 739 Proxy Settings Preferences Network TCP IP Settings Specify settings for the proxy Setting a Proxy P 737 Confirm Auth Info When in Auth Management Mode Preferences Network TCP IP Settings Specify whether the machine checks authentication information when you print using the V4 printer driver If there is no key to use for TLS communication or it is corrupted this setting is disabl...

Page 1072: ...s Network Specify the SNMP settings Monitoring and Controlling via SNMP P 61 Format Host Resources MIB to RFC2790 Preferences Network Specify whether the host resources MIB is compliant with the specifications of RFC2790 Dedicated Port Settings Preferences Network Specify whether to configure refer to detailed information of the machine from the Canon drivers or utility software If the setting is ...

Page 1073: ...riority on either the speed of waking from sleep mode or saving power consumption during sleep mode IEEE 802 1X Settings Preferences Network Specify the settings for IEEE 802 1X Configuring the IEEE 802 1X Authentication Settings P 749 If you set IEEE 802 1X Settings to On the machine will not completely enter the Sleep mode Outbound Filter Preferences Network Firewall Settings IPv4 Address Filter...

Page 1074: ... Settings P 729 Use Mopria Preferences Network Specify whether to print data directly from mobile devices that support Mopria such as smartphones and tablets Utilizing the Machine through Applications P 637 Use AirPrint Preferences Network Specify whether to print directly from an iPhone iPad iPod Touch or Mac that supports AirPrint Using AirPrint P 639 Display Errors for AirPrint Preferences Netw...

Page 1075: ...ireless LAN Information Preferences Network Wireless LAN Displays the setting information of wireless LAN Check the settings and information of the wireless LAN P 29 Power Save Mode Preferences Network Wireless LAN Specify whether to set the machine to the power save mode periodically according to the signals sent by a wireless LAN router Connecting to a Wireless LAN P 28 Use Direct Connection Pre...

Page 1076: ...ion on the user and SSID network key when logging in is associated and stored in the machine Only one mobile device can be connected When Use Personal SSID and Network Key is set to Off If both Specify SSID to Use and Specify Network Key to Use are set to On multiple mobile devices can be connected at the same time A maximum of five devices can be connected at the same time If either or both Speci...

Page 1077: ...Use to On and enter the SSID To set a network key set Specify Network Key to Use to On and enter the network key If Automatically Enable Disable Direct Connection at Login Logout is set to On direct connections are possible when logging in without pressing Mobile Portal Direct Connection Enable When specifying this setting as an administrator select Personal Settings on the Settings Registration s...

Page 1078: ...the Sub Line P 42 Priority Line for Communication with Mobile Devices Preferences Network Sub Line Settings Select the line to connect mobile devices to when using both a main line and sub line at the same time Ethernet Driver Settings Preferences Network Sub Line Settings Specify the Ethernet driver settings for the sub line Making Ethernet Settings P 44 Outbound Filter Preferences Network Sub Li...

Page 1079: ...he proxy settings for the sub line Setting a Proxy P 737 Static Routing Settings Preferences Network Specify the static routing settings for IPv4 addresses Setting Static Routing P 65 Settings Registration 1065 ...

Page 1080: ...EAP application that uses device such as a keyboard or card reader you may need to set this to On To check whether you need to set this to On see the manual for the MEAP application you are using or contact your local authorized Canon dealer Changes in settings are effective after performing Apply Setting Changes on the Top screen of the Settings Registration Use MEAP Driver for USB Storage Device...

Page 1081: ...ttings Registration Use USB Storage Device Preferences External Interface USB Settings You can set whether to allow the use of USB external storage devices Changes in settings are effective after performing Apply Setting Changes on the Top screen of the Settings Registration Settings Registration 1067 ...

Page 1082: ...t hard to view the display even after adjusting the brightness try specifying this setting Enable Screen Magnification Preferences Accessibility On the Home screen and the Basic Features Screen of each function you can zoom in or out by spreading two fingers apart zoom in or pinching two fingers together zoom out If Enable Screen Magnification is set to On and you want to enlarge or reduce the pre...

Page 1083: ... adjust image quality for copying and printing Adjust Action P 1072 This section describes the copy and print finishing settings such as adjusting the saddle stitch position Maintenance P 1074 This section describes how to use the auto cleaning function for the main unit and feeder Settings Registration 1069 ...

Page 1084: ... Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Correct Color Tone Settings If the color of the printing is significantly different from the original document this correction adjusts the printing so that it more closely matches the original document Adjusting Color Tone P 1203 Register Correction Pattern Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Correct Color Tone Settings To create an ad...

Page 1085: ...only effective for copy jobs and print jobs of documents scanned data stored in mail boxes Changes in settings are effective after performing Apply Setting Changes Fine Adjust Zoom Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality If the size of the image copied is significantly different from the original document fine adjustment is performed so that the printing more closely matches the size of the or...

Page 1086: ...the paper source to which transparencies are registered unavailable This mode can be set when the Booklet Finisher Y is attached Change Fold Stitch Position Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Action If you notice that the saddle stitch position of the paper is not exactly in the middle of the booklet you can make adjustments to the saddle stitch position to compensate for this error Adjust the folding ...

Page 1087: ...osition Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Action You can adjust the paper folding position Adjusting the Paper Folding Position P 1216 Time Until Stapling Starts in Stapler Mode Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Action You can set the time until stapling is performed after inserting paper when using manual stapling Settings Registration 1073 ...

Page 1088: ...ntenance Maintenance Check Maintenance Method Plays the sample video explaining the method for replacing the waste toner container You can play this sample video even when replacement is not necessary so that you may understand the process in advance Load Staples Staples Adjustment Maintenance Maintenance Check Maintenance Method Plays the sample video explaining the method for loading staples You...

Page 1089: ...is section describes how to specify the copy settings Printer P 1093 This section describes how to specify printer settings Send P 1095 This section describes how to specify scan and send settings Receive Forward P 1111 This section describes how to receive E mail and fax settings Store Access Files P 1118 This section describes the settings for scanning originals and printing stored files Print P...

Page 1090: ...olor B W set the color mode selected for scanning is used A setting other than Black White is set for Color This setting is only valid for copying This setting is only valid when Consider Color in Paper Drawer Auto Selection On Off is set to On In the following cases the paper source set in Color is automatically selected regardless of the color mode specified when copying When the Merge Job Block...

Page 1091: ... 1083 Output Tray Settings Function Settings Common Paper Output Settings You can set the tray to output to for each function Specifying the Output Tray for Preprinted Paper P 184 Offset Jobs Function Settings Common Paper Output Settings This enables you to shift the output for each job when multiple jobs are printed consecutively Job Separator Between Jobs Function Settings Common Paper Output S...

Page 1092: ...nishing with the Stapler P 292 Enable Offset for Single Sheet Print Jobs Function Settings Common Paper Output Settings If this is set to On you can set the Offset mode to shift the output when printing single page jobs other than copy jobs This is useful when you want to separate a single page job from another when printing multiple jobs Print Priority Function Settings Common Print Settings A jo...

Page 1093: ...image data Approximate Colors Only When using the color for only the specified color or approximate color and using black for all other chromatic colors in the original or image data Example Replaced Colors and Settings When the two color mode is specified for an original or image data including the following colors the colors are replaced as indicated below Colors included in the original or imag...

Page 1094: ...ion is processed so that the image quality is the same as when only the original is printed or copied However if the print areas of the form image and original image overlap the image is processed with the image quality of the form image prioritized Original Priority The original image after superimposition is processed so that the image quality is the same as when only the original is printed or ...

Page 1095: ...Embedding Invisible Text Forced Secure Watermark P 769 The Document Scan Lock mode does not guarantee restriction of unauthorized copying You may not be able to restrict unauthorized copying or analyze tracking information depending on the combination of settings and the output such as a document with an image on the entire page Printer Driver Watermark Document Scan Lock Function Settings Common ...

Page 1096: ...s denser and if you decrease the value the text becomes lighter Print Settings If you select White Letters on Colored Bkground set the standard value for the density of the text and the latent area density for the density of the background Standard Value Settings If you increase the value for the standard value the background gets denser and if you decrease the value the background gets lighter Wh...

Page 1097: ...out automatically deleting it see Suspended Job Timeout P 1077 Feeder Jam Recovery Method Function Settings Common Scan Settings You can select whether scanning will start again from the first page of the original or the page of the original in which scanning was interrupted if a paper jam occurs in the feeder Direct sending of faxes does not support this setting If a paper jam occurs while perfor...

Page 1098: ...eaks when scanning originals When On is selected extremely thin lines may be detected as streaks Speed Image Quality Priority for B W Scan Function Settings Common Scan Settings You can set whether priority is given to scanning speed or to image quality when performing black and white scanning LTRR STMT Original Selection Function Settings Common Scan Settings You can forcibly designate the way th...

Page 1099: ...utomatically Image Quality Level for Limited Color Compact Function Settings Common Generate File If you select PDF Compact Low Color XPS Compact as the file format when using Scan and Send or Scan and Store you can set the image quality level of the document This setting is disabled when sending a fax or I fax If you set both OCR European Languages and Compact for the file format this setting is ...

Page 1100: ... in Options on the Scan and Send screen Setting a File Name P 557 You cannot use the Auto OCR in File Name mode and the Encrypted PDF mode at the same time when sending a file Trace Smooth Settings Function Settings Common Generate File You can change the recognition rate of line drawings of the original when creating a file with outline graphics If you increase the value in Graphics Recognition L...

Page 1101: ...r long term storage because it guarantees that the visual quality of the PDF does not change with the machine or viewing software This setting is linked with the following default settings File Format in Scan and Send File Format in Scan and Store File Format in Send in Access Stored Files File Format in Forwarding Settings This setting is disabled when sending a fax or I fax The following PDF fun...

Page 1102: ... a TL code embedded to a generic file format such as PDF and TIFF using the functions described in Scan and Send or Scan and Store the embedded information is not retained Therefore when you print the file after it has been converted the settings in Doc Scan Lock Operation Settings are not reflected You can analyze the embedded information using the Document Scan Code Analyzer for MEAP that is sup...

Page 1103: ...chine is used When Registered Information for Each User is set The authentication information of the LDAP server is registered for each user Device Login Authentication Information is available only when using the same authentication information for logging in to the machine and accessing the LDAP server and when using a login service which supports Integrated Authentication For information whethe...

Page 1104: ...for SMB and WebDAV When Normal is set The information set in Registering Destinations in the Address Book P 223 is used When Device Login Authentication Information is set The authentication information used when logging into the machine is used When Registered Information for Each User is set The authentication information of the file server is registered for each user When Registered Information...

Page 1105: ...ly used from Options and Favorite Settings Shortcuts are registered separately for Regular Copy and Express Copy Regular Copy and Express Copy can be switched in Copy Screen Display Settings P 1043 Five shortcuts can be registered to Regular Copy and six shortcuts can be registered to Express Copy Auto Collate Function Settings Copy If this setting is set to On the machine can automatically switch...

Page 1106: ...als are enlarged onto A3 or B4 copy paper Auto Orientation is not performed even if you select On Only the images of standard size originals up to A4 size can be rotated when the copy ratio is set to 100 Select Color Settings for Copy Function Settings Copy You can restrict the use of the color mode in Select Color when copying Speed Priority for Copying from Feeder Function Settings Copy You can ...

Page 1107: ...oritized the settings in the machine set the paper feed mode for when free size paper is set in the multi purpose tray When the following conditions are met you can press Temp Change Ppr in MP Tray on the paper selection screen of Copy and Access Stored Files to change the paper size type to load from the multi purpose tray If paper is loaded in the multi purpose tray If this setting is set to On ...

Page 1108: ...er driver If Prioritize Printer Driver Settings for Jobs with MP Tray is set to On PS Password Settings Function Settings Printer You can specify the password that restricts the use of the control command prepared by the PS printer SystemParamsPassword is a password that allows changes to the system parameter and StartJobPassword is a password that allows startjob exitserver operator to perform Fo...

Page 1109: ... Favorite Settings Function Settings Send Common Settings You can select whether to display a confirmation screen when recalling Favorite Settings Default Screen Function Settings Send Common Settings You can specify the screen to display when Scan and Send or is pressed Restrict Address Book Use Function Settings Send Common Settings You can select whether to hide the Address Book and one touch b...

Page 1110: ...parately When the report is sent as data it is sent in the CSV file format Communication Management Report P 1229 TX Terminal ID Function Settings Send Common Settings You can select whether to add the sender information to the top of a sent document when sending a fax I fax Information such as the fax number name and I fax address of the machine is printed enabling the recipient to check who sent...

Page 1111: ... set it to High Ratio images may be output in low quality even if you select Quality Priority in Generate File Image Quality Level for Limited Color Compact This setting is disabled when sending faxes YCbCr TX Gamma Value Function Settings Send Common Settings If you are sending a document in color or grayscale you can specify the gamma value to use when converting scanned RGB image data to YCbCr ...

Page 1112: ...certificate chain as well as confirm the CN Common Name If you do not verify the certificate TLS communication is performed even with an invalid certificate If there is a problem with the certificate WebDAV sending will fail Limit New Destination Function Settings Send Common Settings When sending faxes and scanned data the available destinations can be limited to the following three ways to ensur...

Page 1113: ...estrict File TX to Personal Folder Function Settings Send Common Settings You can limit the destination that can be specified when saving to a file server to the dedicated folder of the user that is logged in This setting enables you to prevent information leaks due to transmission to a wrong destination This setting applies to users with the GeneralUser role Personal Folder Specification Method F...

Page 1114: ...x function or the Scan and Send function is being processed You can select either Latest Received Job or Job Being Sent If you selected Job Being Sent and the machine has multiple fax lines that are currently being used for sending the last of those jobs is canceled Register Unit Name Function Settings Send E Mail I Fax Settings You can register the name of your company or department as the unit n...

Page 1115: ...ngs Send E Mail I Fax Settings You can set S MIME If you set S MIME you can add a digital signature or encrypt the e mail when using the e mail I fax function Setting E Mail Encryption 1 Press 2 Press Function Settings Send E Mail I Fax Settings S MIME Settings 3 Set encryption and the digital signature 4 Press OK It is necessary to register the public key certificate of the recipient in advance G...

Page 1116: ... the maximum data size for outgoing e mail messages and I fax documents If an e mail message exceeds this data size limit it is split up into several e mail messages before being sent However if an I fax transmission exceeds the data size limit it is handled as an error and not sent If you enter 0 MB as the data size there is no size limit on the data that is sent Set the maximum data size for sen...

Page 1117: ... I Fax Settings When the machine is in use with personal authentication management you can select whether to allow the sending of an e mail from a user whose e mail address is not registered in the machine If Off is selected users with their e mail addresses registered can only send e mails If you set Specify Authentication User as Sender to Off the address registered in the Device Information set...

Page 1118: ...ses registered in the Address Book or an LDAP server based on the initial characters of an e mail address entry E mail addresses that are stored with an access number do not appear Auto Add Specified Domain to Dest Without Domain Function Settings Send E Mail I Fax Settings You can register frequently used domain names in advance to eliminate the need to enter a domain when specifying an address b...

Page 1119: ...s whether to restrict use of the Address Book Change Default Settings Function Settings Send Fax Settings You can change the settings registered as default for the Fax function Register Options Shortcuts Function Settings Send Fax Settings You can register modes in the shortcut keys displayed on the Fax screen Customizing the Basic Features Screen P 196 Register Sender Name TTI Function Settings S...

Page 1120: ...es Some overseas dialing may not be successful when dialing the international access code country code and the destination s telephone number all at once In such cases inserting a pause after the international access code can make it easier to connect Pauses entered at the end of dialed fax numbers are always 10 seconds long Auto Redial Function Settings Send Fax Settings Auto Redial enables the m...

Page 1121: ...gs Send Fax Settings Set Line Line X You can register the name of your company or department as the unit name The registered name is printed on paper at the recipient as the sender information when you send a fax Fax Line Settings P 72 Select Line Type Function Settings Send Fax Settings Set Line Line X You can set the type of telephone line connected to the machine If this setting is incorrect yo...

Page 1122: ...cted through a PBX Private Branch Exchange it is necessary to set the access method You can set the PBX type to Prefix or Hooking If you register the outside line access number in the R key you can easily access the outside line Confirm Entered Fax Number Function Settings Send Fax Settings To prevent sending a fax to an incorrect destination you can select whether to display an entry confirmation...

Page 1123: ...ction Settings Send Fax Settings Remote Fax TX Settings You can specify the communication mode to use when sending IP faxes Use Remote Fax Function Settings Send Fax Settings Remote Fax Settings You can specify whether to use the machine as a server machine for the Remote Fax function If you want to use the machine as a Remote Fax server machine press Network set Dedicated Port Settings to On Auto...

Page 1124: ... The reception speed set in RX Start Speed RX Start Speed P 1117 Settings Registration 1110 ...

Page 1125: ...that have the same combined size as the received document Switch B The image is printed with blank space on paper that has the same width as the received document Switch C The image is reduced and printed on paper that differs in width from the received document Switch D The image is printed on paper that is larger in size than the received document Reduce Fax RX Size Function Settings Receive For...

Page 1126: ...ion such as reception time and page number at the bottom of received documents When an e mail without a body is received the From information and Subject information up to 24 characters for each is printed at the top of the first page of the attachment file YCbCr RX Gamma Value Function Settings Receive Forward Common Settings You can print received I fax documents in the appropriate quality This ...

Page 1127: ...Forwarding Settings Function Settings Receive Forward Common Settings You can specify the conditions for forwarding received documents You can also set to forward all incoming documents to a specified destination without specifying any conditions Forwarding Received Documents Automatically P 438 Set Register Confidential Fax Inboxes Function Settings Receive Forward Common Settings Set Fax I Fax I...

Page 1128: ...Inbox You can select whether to save received fax documents in the Memory RX Inbox Saving Received Documents in the Machine Memory Reception P 433 Use I Fax Memory Lock Function Settings Receive Forward Common Settings Set Fax I Fax Inbox You can select whether to save received I fax documents in the Memory RX Inbox Saving Received Documents in the Machine Memory Reception P 433 Memory Lock Start ...

Page 1129: ... Set Fax I Fax Inbox You can specify the time to deactivate the Memory Reception function The machine will automatically cancel the Memory Reception mode at the specified time Setting the End Time for Memory Reception 1 Press 2 Press Function Settings Receive Forward Common Settings 3 Press Set Fax I Fax Inbox 4 Press Memory Lock End Time and specify the required settings Everyday Set the time tha...

Page 1130: ...ry RX Inbox if they cannot be printed due to an error etc Saving Received Documents in the Machine Memory Reception P 433 Always Send Notice for RX Errors Function Settings Receive Forward Common Settings You can select whether to notify the sender that an I fax was not received successfully ECM RX Function Settings Receive Forward Fax Settings You can receive faxes using the Error Correction Mode...

Page 1131: ... slower which reduces errors If Auto Adjust Communication Speed When Using VoIP is set to Off the speed returns to the value displayed in RX Start Speed RX Password Function Settings Receive Forward Fax Settings You can set an ITU T standard password If a subaddress is not set in a document that was received from another party using the ITU T standard a reception password check takes place If the ...

Page 1132: ...ttings Function Settings Store Access Files Common Settings Scan and Store Settings You can change the settings registered as default for the Scan and Store function Specifying Settings in Advance To register edit these settings specify the settings from after performing the following procedure in advance 1 Press Scan and Store Home Screen P 141 2 Press the location to save to and select a mail bo...

Page 1133: ...ing to On users are forced to set a seven digit PIN thus enhancing security The PIN for User Inboxes can set using at least one digit Set Register Mail Boxes Function Settings Store Access Files Mail Box Settings You can set a PIN and name for a box as well as specify the period of time before files in a box are automatically deleted Specifying the Mail Box Settings P 604 Time Until File Auto Dele...

Page 1134: ... You can select whether to allow a Personal Space to be created in the Advanced Box Delete All Personal Spaces Function Settings Store Access Files Advanced Box Settings You can delete all Personal Spaces in the Advanced Box Initialize Shared Space Function Settings Store Access Files Advanced Box Settings You can delete all folders and files stored in the Shared Space of the Advanced Box Users wi...

Page 1135: ...e the recorded user operations using the Remote UI In addition the logs can be saved to a computer in the CSV format Managing the Logs P 822 Network Place Settings Function Settings Store Access Files Network Settings You can register the Advanced Box of another imageRUNNER ADVANCE series machine or a Windows server as an external reference Connecting to the Other Devices P 84 Protocol for Externa...

Page 1136: ...Store Network in Access Stored Files Use Scan Print Function Function Settings Store Access Files Memory Media Settings Specifying this setting enables you to save documents stored in memory media as well as print files in memory media Restricting the Use of Memory Media P 764 Select Option When Connecting Memory Media Function Settings Store Access Files Memory Media Settings You can set whether ...

Page 1137: ...s of a login user by user name domain name or only user name Depending on your environment if print jobs are not correctly determined as My Jobs they can be correctly determined as jobs of the login user by selecting Off and excluding domain name Display Other User Jobs Function Settings Print Specify whether to display the jobs from users other than the authorized user Restrict Deletion of Other ...

Page 1138: ...nction you can only set whether to require a PIN to be entered when deleting In addition it is necessary to enter a PIN to print a document display the preview regardless of the values specified in Require PIN for Printing Displaying User Jobs Require PIN for Printing Displaying User Jobs can be set if the following conditions are met Picture Login is set Use User Authentication P 1132 Always Requ...

Page 1139: ... Hold Print Jobs after Logging In P 481 This setting is disabled if any of the following settings is specified Use User Authentication is Off Enable Auto Print Function When Logging In is Off Enable Use of Personal Settings is Off Use ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM is On Only Allow Encrypted Print Jobs is On Personal for Job List Display Settings is Off Display Warning When Starting to Print for Held Jo...

Page 1140: ...utomatically deleted Held jobs are automatically deleted after a certain period of time or if the job ticket is edited or a job operation is performed Store PS PDF Data to Hold Function Settings Hold You can set to store PS PDF data jobs which are executed with LPR protocol in the Hold Queue Default Settings for Job Deletion After Printing Function Settings Hold You can set the default setting for...

Page 1141: ...estination You can rename each address list Register One Touch Set Destination You can register destinations to the one touch buttons of the machine Registering a Destination in a One Touch Button P 239 Change Default Display of Address Book Set Destination You can specify the type of the Address Book to display when you press Address Book on the Fax Basic Features screen or the Scan and Send Basi...

Page 1142: ...arch When Using LDAP Server Set Destination If you set this setting to On you can immediately start searches when accessing an LDAP server from the control panel of the machine Automatic searches are only performed for the first LDAP server registered which is displayed on the top of the LDAP server drop down list Confirm TLS Certificate for LDAP Server Access Set Destination You can select whethe...

Page 1143: ...d 2 and press Register Edit To edit a search attribute select a registered attribute and press Register Edit To delete a search attribute press Delete 4 Specify Display Name and Attribute Name and press OK Close You cannot edit or delete names E Mail Fax Organization or Organization Unit Settings for Search by Name When Using LDAP Server Set Destination You can specify the attribute used when sear...

Page 1144: ... fax to a destination obtained from a Remote Address Book Make Address Book Open Set Destination Make Remote Address Book Open You can select whether to open the Address Book of this machine to another imageRUNNER ADVANCE series machine on a network Use Personal Address List Set Destination You can select whether to use a personal Address Book of a user who logs in to the machine with personal aut...

Page 1145: ...rmation about the hardware and operations as well as various data required when using the machine functions License Other P 1140 You can register licenses and configure the settings related to the software and system options available for the machine Data Management P 1143 You can configure settings to utilize the machine settings or data such as address lists or to manage the hard disk securely S...

Page 1146: ...elect how to register users in the machine for Picture Login Configuring the User Login Methods and Authentication Devices P 701 Display Administrators Management Settings User Management Authentication Management Picture Login Select whether or not to display users with administrator privileges on the login screen for Picture Login You can specify this setting for all of the administrators or the...

Page 1147: ...gin Methods and Authentication Devices P 701 Use Numeric Keys for Authentication Management Settings User Management Authentication Management Keyboard Authentication If the user name and password are comprised of numbers only authentication can be performed with numeric key entry only Login Screen Display Settings Management Settings User Management Authentication Management Specify when to displ...

Page 1148: ...P 701 Match Case for User Name Management Settings User Management Authentication Management Select whether user names are case sensitive It is recommended that this is set together with Function Settings Print Match Case for User Name Allow Use of in User Name Management Settings User Management Authentication Management Select whether to allow to be used in user names System Manager Information ...

Page 1149: ...tion to Other Canon Multifunction Printers P 880 Changes in settings are effective after performing Apply Set Changes Finisher Tray A Management Settings Device Management Limited Functions Mode Select whether to disable Output Tray A of the finisher Changes in settings are effective after performing Apply Set Changes Finisher Tray A B Management Settings Device Management Limited Functions Mode S...

Page 1150: ... also check whether the certificate is valid Certificate Settings Management Settings Device Management You can manage keys certificates CA certificates and certificate revocation lists CRL that are used on the machine Generating the Key and Certificate for Network Communication P 741 Generating a Device Signature Certificate P 779 Registering a User Signature Certificate P 780 Generating a Key an...

Page 1151: ...ng cannot be used Changes in settings are effective after performing Apply Set Changes Retrieve Network Authentication Log Management Settings Device Management Select whether to start log recording for authentication performed when the machine is accessed via the network such as when printing from a computer or accessing the Advanced Box Store Key Operation Log Management Settings Device Manageme...

Page 1152: ...tion Starting Setting Synchronization P 867 Enable Use of Personal Settings Management Settings Device Management Manage Personal Settings Select whether to enable users that are logged into the machine to use the Personalization function such as the display language accessibility settings and the screen to display after startup restoration Action When Maximum Number of Users Exceeded Management S...

Page 1153: ...ce Management Specify whether to use NFC functions to connect to mobile devices Prohibit Initialization of Administrator Password Management Settings Device Management Specify whether to restrict operations of Initialize Admin Password Counter Device Information Device Info Other Restrict Special Mode Operations Management Settings Device Management Select whether to restrict use of Special Mode w...

Page 1154: ...Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS P 739 Changes made for this setting are also applied to Use TLS in Remote UI P 1141 Changes in settings are effective after performing Apply Set Changes Confirm TLS Certificate Using MEAP Application Management Settings License Other MEAP Settings Select whether to verify TLS server certificates and their common names CN when TLS communication is used fo...

Page 1155: ...ithout OK displayed you need to use the Remote UI Remote Operation Settings Management Settings License Other Select whether to enable the Remote Operation function This function enables you to specify settings and process jobs from a computer by displaying the screen of the touch panel display on the computer screen When remote operation is performed the following settings cannot be changed or ex...

Page 1156: ...ng System Options P 862 Start Setup Guide Management Settings License Other You can follow the wizard instructions to configure the machine s initial settings Setting up Using the Setup Guide P 8 Allow Use of Print Function from Mobile Management Settings License Other If this setting is set to On you can perform operations from a mobile device for documents stored in Print Settings Registration 1...

Page 1157: ...ort all the settings information into a USB memory device You cannot select which settings to export when exporting to USB memory All settings are batch exported If USB memory is already connected to the machine that USB memory will be recognized as the media to use for exporting even if you connect new USB memory Press remove the connected USB memory insert the desired USB memory Import Result Re...

Page 1158: ...on Select when to delete unnecessary data Removing Unnecessary Data from the Hard Disk P 891 Changes in settings are effective after performing Apply Set Changes Overwrite Method for Deletion Mode Management Settings Data Management HDD Data Complete Deletion You can set the Deletion mode and how many times to erase the data Removing Unnecessary Data from the Hard Disk P 891 Changes in settings ar...

Page 1159: ...ey that encrypts confidential information such as the password public key pair for TLS communication and user certificate stored in the machine Doing so you can prevent important information for the machine from leaking Also you can recover the system if the TPM chip fails by restoring the TPM key Using TPM P 895 Settings Registration 1145 ...

Page 1160: ...o block users from logging in for a specified period of time after a certain number of consecutive invalid login attempts This setting does not apply to authentication with a Department ID or PIN or authentication for the Mail Box Users may be blocked from logging in before a specified number of consecutive invalid login attempts if login operations are performed on Windows or other operating syst...

Page 1161: ...are registered edited after the restrictions are set When a password that is already registered exceeds the restrictions for these settings a screen prompting to change the password is displayed when user authentication is performed Validity Period Settings Management Settings Security Settings Authentication Password Settings Password Settings You can set a password expiration period to force use...

Page 1162: ...he restrictions for these settings a screen prompting to change the password is displayed when user authentication is performed Use at Least 1 Lowercase Character Management Settings Security Settings Authentication Password Settings Password Settings You can restrict passwords so that only passwords which include at least one lowercase character can be registered This setting applies to personal ...

Page 1163: ...t Settings Security Settings Encryption Settings Select whether to restrict the use of weak encryption or a key and certificate with weak encryption Management Functions P 1468 This setting applies to functions such as IPSec TLS Kerberos S MIME wireless LAN and SNMPv3 The machine may not be able to communicate with devices that only support weak encryption Even if the use of weak encryption is res...

Page 1164: ...ication is performed The following events and results are recorded to the device management log Managing the Logs P 822 Event Result Firmware verification Success MEAP application verification Failure If an error code is displayed on the screen when the machine is started with this setting set to On contact your local authorized Canon dealer McAfee Embedded Control Management Settings Security Set...

Page 1165: ... Staple Finisher 1187 Emptying the Punch Waste in the Booklet Finisher 1189 Emptying the Punch Waste in the Inner Finisher 1191 Replacement Parts 1192 Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables 1195 Adjusting Print and Finish Quality 1198 Adjusting Gradation 1200 Adjusting Color Tone 1203 Adjusting Density 1205 Correcting Uneven Density 1206 Correcting Color Mismatch 1209 Making Colors More Vivi...

Page 1166: ...Adjusting the Secondary Transfer Voltage 1224 Checking the Number of Pages for Copy Print Fax Scan 1225 Printing Reports and Lists 1226 Maintenance 1152 ...

Page 1167: ...y Canon For information on precautions to take during maintenance see Important Safety Instructions in the FAQ Guide and Options P 1513 Basic Cleaning Regular Cleaning P 1155 Emptying the Punch Waste Optional P 1186 Replacing Consumables Replacing the Toner Cartridge P 1165 Replacing the Waste Toner Container P 1170 Replacing the Stamp Cartridge P 1173 Loading Staples Optional P 1176 Maintenance 1...

Page 1168: ...ing the Remaining Amount of Consumables P 1195 Other Maintenance and Adjustment Adjusting Print and Finish Quality P 1198 Printing Reports and Lists P 1226 Checking the Number of Pages for Copy Print Fax Scan P 1225 Maintenance 1154 ...

Page 1169: ...e you to use the machine comfortably and safely Clean the machine in the order indicated by to below Exterior Cleaning the Exterior P 1156 Platen glass Cleaning the Platen Glass P 1157 Feeder Cleaning the Feeder P 1159 Interior Clean Inside Main Unit P 1074 Dust proof glass Cleaning the Dust Proof Glass P 1163 Maintenance 1155 ...

Page 1170: ...n turn the power OFF even if the machine is executing an operation but this may cause the operation to be interrupted or data to become damaged 2 Wipe the surface of the machine Wet a soft cloth with water or diluted mild detergent wring the cloth out well and wipe the machine Wait until the moisture has completely dried before proceeding to the next step 3 Insert the power plug into the power out...

Page 1171: ... is executing an operation but this may cause the operation to be interrupted or data to become damaged 2 Open the feeder 3 Wipe the reverse side of the feeder and the platen glass Wipe the platen glass Wipe the platen glass with the included cleaning cloth If the cleaning sheet is dirty rinse it in water and dry it before using it Wipe the reverse side of the feeder If you cannot remove the dirt ...

Page 1172: ...annot remove the dirt Wet a soft cloth with mild detergent and wring it out well then wipe the machine with it Afterwards wipe the machine with a soft and dry cloth 4 Gently close the feeder 5 Insert the power plug into the power outlet and turn the power ON Turning ON the Machine P 106 Maintenance 1158 ...

Page 1173: ...emove the power plug from the power outlet Turning OFF the Machine P 107 Check the operation status of the machine before turning the power OFF You can turn the power OFF even if the machine is executing an operation but this may cause the operation to be interrupted or data to become damaged 2 Pull the lever and open the feeder cover 3 Clean the rollers inside the feeder cover Wet a soft cloth wi...

Page 1174: ... sensor If trash does get in remove it using a soft cloth If the rollers and surrounding areas are very dirty clean them out To do this wet a cloth with water and wring it out well then wipe the dirty areas Afterwards wipe the areas with a soft and dry cloth 4 Gently close the feeder cover Maintenance 1160 ...

Page 1175: ...er and wring it out well then wipe the machine with it Afterwards wipe the machine with a soft and dry cloth Wait until the moisture has completely dried before proceeding to the next step 7 Wipe the document feed scanning area on the feeder side Pull the top lever to open the document feed scanning area cover Gently open the cover so that you do not damage the platen glass Open the inner cover Ma...

Page 1176: ...ks into place 8 Gently close the feeder 9 Insert the power plug into the power outlet and turn the power ON Turning ON the Machine P 106 If streaks still appear on the originals or paper after the feeder cleaning operation Load about 10 sheets of A4 size paper in the feeder and perform the following procedure to execute Clean Feeder P 1074 When a message indicating that cleaning is complete is dis...

Page 1177: ...the machine before turning the power OFF You can turn the power OFF even if the machine is executing an operation but this may cause the operation to be interrupted or data to become damaged 2 Open the front cover of the main unit Hold the left and right edges of the front cover of the main unit when opening it 3 Slide the cleaning stick to the right to remove it The cleaning stick is stored in th...

Page 1178: ...les to clean them 5 When cleaning is complete return the cleaning stick to its original position Return the cleaning stick to the front cover of the main unit with its tip on the left side 6 Close the front cover of the main unit 7 Insert the power plug into the power outlet and turn the power ON Turning ON the Machine P 106 Maintenance 1164 ...

Page 1179: ...untermeasures for Each Message P 1264 For information on the product numbers for toner cartridges see Consumables P 1192 You can check the current amount of toner remaining Checking the Remaining Toner Level P 1195 Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge When replacing toner cartridges follow the instructions shown in the video along with those written below When replacing multiple toner cartr...

Page 1180: ...o may damage the machine 3 Pull out the toner cartridge Make sure to avoid applying shocks to the toner cartridge by hitting it against something etc Doing so may cause the toner to leak 4 Remove the new toner cartridge from its box Maintenance 1166 ...

Page 1181: ...ridge evens out the toner inside An error message is displayed if you install the toner cartridge before the toner inside has evened out Follow the instructions on the screen and perform the procedure again Do not have the white part of the toner cartridge face down Doing so may prevent the toner from being supplied properly Maintenance 1167 ...

Page 1182: ... slide the toner cartridge into the small cover as far as it will go 7 Close the small cover The small cover cannot be closed unless the toner cartridge has been pushed in as far as it will go Do not try to force the cover closed as doing so may cause it to break 8 Close the toner replacement cover If printing was interrupted because toner ran out it will automatically resume when you replace the ...

Page 1183: ...inting quality will drop If you want to continue printing in black and white do not replace the toner cartridge until printing is complete If the color and density of printing differ after replacing the toner cartridge perform adjustment Adjusting Gradation P 1200 Adjusting Density P 1205 Adjusting Color Tone P 1203 Maintenance 1169 ...

Page 1184: ... details about each message see Countermeasures for Each Message P 1264 For information on the model number of the waste toner container see Consumable Parts P 1194 You can check the current amount of space remaining in the waste toner container Checking the Space Remaining in the Waste Toner Container P 1195 Procedure for Replacing the Waste Toner Container When replacing the waste toner containe...

Page 1185: ...Remove the new waste toner container from its box 4 Place the waste toner container you removed into a box Use the bag included in the box for the new waste toner container Tightly twist the opening of the bag so that the toner does not spill out and then place the bag in the box Maintenance 1171 ...

Page 1186: ...ntainer in as far as it will go If the waste toner container is not installed correctly the container shutter may stay open when the waste toner container is removed which may cause toner to scatter 6 Close the waste toner cover Used toner cannot be reused Do not mix new and used toner together The used waste toner container will be collected by your local authorized Canon dealer Maintenance 1172 ...

Page 1187: ...nt replace the stamp cartridge attached to the feeder For information on the product number for the stamp cartridge see Consumables P 1192 1 Turn the power OFF and remove the power plug from the power outlet Turning OFF the Machine P 107 Check the operation status of the machine before turning the power OFF You can turn the power OFF even if the machine is executing an operation but this may cause...

Page 1188: ...Remove the stamp cartridge Install the new stamp cartridge Push the stamp cartridge straight in until it clicks into place Installing it at an angle may cause paper jams 6 Close the stamp cover 7 Close the document feed scanning area cover until it clicks into place Maintenance 1174 ...

Page 1189: ...eeder 9 Insert the power plug into the power outlet and turn the power ON Turning ON the Machine P 106 LINKS Stamping Scanned Originals for Sending P 412 Stamping Scanned Originals for Sending Saving P 540 Maintenance 1175 ...

Page 1190: ...ight of the screen Press the icon and follow the instructions on the screen to replace the staple case Loading Staples of the Staple Finisher P 1177 Loading Staples of the Booklet Finisher P 1179 Loading Staples of the Inner Finisher P 1184 Copies and prints may be output to optional equipment while you are replacing the staple Take care when handling the optional equipment installed to the machin...

Page 1191: ... out the staple cartridge Hold the green tab on the staple cartridge and pull it straight out 3 Remove the empty staple case from the staple cartridge Pinch the arrow marks on the staple case and remove it in the direction of the arrow 4 Remove the new staple case from its box Maintenance 1177 ...

Page 1192: ...e Insert the tab on the end of the staple case into the staple cartridge then lower the staple case to attach it 6 Hold the green tab on the staple cartridge and push it in as far as it will go 7 Close the front cover of the finisher Maintenance 1178 ...

Page 1193: ...nit P 1181 Replacing the staple case of the Staple Unit 1 Open the front cover of the finisher 2 Pull out the staple cartridge Hold the green tab on the staple cartridge and pull it straight out 3 Remove the empty staple case from the staple cartridge Pinch the arrow marks on the staple case and remove it in the direction of the arrow Maintenance 1179 ...

Page 1194: ...he new staple case to the staple cartridge Insert the tab on the end of the staple case into the staple cartridge then lower the staple case to attach it 6 Hold the green tab on the staple cartridge and push it in as far as it will go Maintenance 1180 ...

Page 1195: ... finisher Replacing the staple case of the Saddle Stitcher Unit Confirm before handling If there is any paper in the booklet tray remove it 1 Open the front cover of the finisher 2 Pull out the saddle stitcher unit Maintenance 1181 ...

Page 1196: ...ever towards yourself 4 Remove the empty staple case While holding both sides of the top of the empty staple case lift up the staple case to remove it 5 Remove the new staple case from its box 6 Load the new staple case to the staple cartridge Maintenance 1182 ...

Page 1197: ...Push them in as far as they will go 8 Push in the saddle stitcher unit and close the front cover of the finisher If stapling dose not work after staples are replenished perform staple repositioning manually Saddle Stitch Staple Repositioning P 1072 Maintenance 1183 ...

Page 1198: ...tridge Pull the green tab to disengage the lock and lift the case slightly upwards while pulling it straight out 3 Remove the empty staple case from the staple cartridge Pinch the arrow marks on the staple case and remove it in the direction of the arrow 4 Remove the new staple case from its box Maintenance 1184 ...

Page 1199: ...case into the staple cartridge then lower the staple case to attach it 6 Hold the green tab on the staple cartridge and push it in as far as it will go 7 Close the front cover of the finisher The finisher may automatically perform dry stapling to perform staple repositioning Maintenance 1185 ...

Page 1200: ... on the screen to empty the punch waste Emptying the Punch Waste in the Staple Finisher P 1187 Emptying the Punch Waste in the Booklet Finisher P 1189 Emptying the Punch Waste in the Inner Finisher P 1191 Copies and prints may be output to optional equipment while you are emptying the punch waste Take care when handling the optional equipment installed to the machine Maintenance 1186 ...

Page 1201: ... 2 Pull out the punch waste tray Hold the handle and gently pull out the tray towards yourself After pulling out the punch waste tray half way place your hand underneath it and pull it out all the way 3 Empty the punch waste 4 Return the punch waste tray to its original position Maintenance 1187 ...

Page 1202: ... Push the punch waste tray in as far as it will go 5 Close the front cover of the finisher Maintenance 1188 ...

Page 1203: ...r 2 Pull out the punch waste tray Hold the handle and gently pull out the tray towards yourself After pulling out the punch waste tray half way place your hand underneath it and pull it out all the way 3 Empty the punch waste 4 Return the punch waste tray to its original position Maintenance 1189 ...

Page 1204: ... Push the punch waste tray in as far as it will go 5 Close the front cover of the finisher Maintenance 1190 ...

Page 1205: ...dle and gently pull out the tray towards yourself After pulling out the punch waste tray half way place your hand underneath it and pull it out all the way 2 Empty the punch waste 3 Return the punch waste tray to its original position Push the punch waste tray in as far as it will go Maintenance 1191 ...

Page 1206: ...recautions indicated in the FAQ Guide included with the machine You can check the current amount of replacement parts remaining Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables P 1195 Consumables Toner Cartridge for Replacement Confirm that the code on the front cover of the machine and the one on the package of the genuine toner are the same Model name Genuine Canon toner imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5560i I...

Page 1207: ...ollection of used toner cartridges see the FAQ Guide Stamp Cartridges Stamp Ink Cartridge C1 and tweezers included NOTE The Stamp mode is available when the optional Stamp Unit B is attached to the feeder Staple Case for Replacement Make sure to use the dedicated replacement staple case for this machine Also note that the product number of the staple case to use differs according to the finisher S...

Page 1208: ...es Finisher name Genuine Canon staple case Booklet Finisher Y Staple Cartridge Y1 Consumable Parts Waste Toner Container Make sure to use the dedicated waste toner container for this machine WT 202 Maintenance 1194 ...

Page 1209: ...remaining toner level before printing a large job to determine whether or not to prepare a new toner cartridge Press check the remaining toner level Checking the Space Remaining in the Waste Toner Container It is recommended that you check the space remaining in the waste toner container before performing a large job to determine whether or not to prepare a new waste toner container Press Consumab...

Page 1210: ...s Others Punch Waste Checking the Detailed Status of Consumables Check the detailed status of consumables Press Consumables Others Check Consumables Toner Waste Toner Screen Item Item Name Status and Remaining Days are displayed Other Screen Item Item Name and Status are displayed Remaining Days displays the expected number of days remaining until replacement is required based on past usage Mainte...

Page 1211: ...ent for Remaining Days does not complete for a while after the machine starts operation and 1 year or more is displayed during this time The remaining days displayed after this time may be extremely small temporarily LINKS Replacing the Toner Cartridge P 1165 Replacing the Waste Toner Container P 1170 Loading Staples Optional P 1176 Emptying the Punch Waste Optional P 1186 Countermeasures for Each...

Page 1212: ...ificantly different from the original document this adjusts the scan density to be closer to the original Adjusting Density P 1205 Shading Correction If the image areas of the printing have uneven density this correction adjusts the printing so that the density is even Correcting Uneven Density P 1206 Color Mismatch Correction If the colors of printing run or blur color mismatch color misregistrat...

Page 1213: ...itch Position Adjustment If the saddle stitch position of the paper is not exactly in the middle of the booklet you can make adjustments to the saddle stitch position Adjusting the Saddle Stitch Position P 1214 Saddle Stitch Folding Position Adjustment You can adjust the saddle stitch folding position during booklet printing Adjusting the Saddle Stitch Folding Position P 1215 Paper Folding Positio...

Page 1214: ...rformed effectively if there is not sufficient toner Checking the Remaining Toner Level P 1195 Full Adjustment Correct the gradation of an image accurately and optimize reproducibility during printing Optimized information will be retained until the next accurate correction You can use the following paper sizes types Size A3 A4 11x17 LTR Type Plain Heavy 1 Heavy 2 to 7 1 Press Adjustment Maintenan...

Page 1215: ...t steps 4 to 7 To complete the adjustment print the test page four times and scan it each time it is printed Quick Adjustment This adjustment maintains the optimized status that was acquired by Full Adjust If the result of this adjustment is not satisfactory perform Full Adjust 1 Press Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation 2 Select the paper to adjust and press Quick Ad...

Page 1216: ...o set the level for gradation adjustment Initialize When Using Full Adjust Enables you to set whether to use default settings for gradation adjustment Since this may cause poor color balance make sure to perform auto gradation adjustment full adjustment after changing the settings Maintenance 1202 ...

Page 1217: ...med auto gradation adjustment full adjustment press No to execute it Adjusting Gradation P 1200 3 Press Start Correcting To perform color adjustment based on an adjustment standard registered in advance select the adjustment standard in Change Corr Pattern For information on creating a new adjustment standard see Creating a Color Adjustment Standard P 1204 4 Select the paper source and press OK St...

Page 1218: ...ation adjustment full adjustment press No to execute it Adjusting Gradation P 1200 3 Select the destination to register the new adjustment standard press Next 4 Select the paper press Next select the paper source and press OK 5 Press Start Printing A test page is printed 6 Place the test page on the platen glass Place the test page sheet in the machine in a manner that its side on which the four c...

Page 1219: ...lity Correct Density 2 Adjust the density When set to the Dark side areas printed with the maximum density are increased When set to the Light side filled areas text and lines may be printed like halftones with dots missing This setting should mainly be used to adjust the intermediate densities 3 Press OK LINKS Basic Copy Operations P 250 Basic Operations for Sending Faxes P 389 Basic Operations f...

Page 1220: ...e output with a commercial densitometer and enter the measured density values to correct the density of halftone areas 1 Press Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Correct Shading Densitometer Correction 2 Press Start Printing A test page is printed 3 Measure the test page with a densitometer Measure marks 1 to 7 printed on the test page and make a note of the density values that are detect...

Page 1221: ... to determine the density adjustment values The range of marks printed for each color may be 6 to 6 or 5 to 5 depending on the paper size used for the test page 4 Press Fine Adjust for each color 5 Enter the density values Enter the density values according to the results that you visually checked in step 3 from 6 to 6 or 5 to 5 for each color Enter a plus value to increase the density or a minus ...

Page 1222: ...OK 3 Press Start Printing A test page is printed 4 Place the test page on the platen glass Place the test page face down on the platen glass Make sure the cyan bar is at the top edge of the glass 5 Close the feeder and press Start Scanning The test page is scanned 6 Open the feeder and remove the test page Maintenance 1208 ...

Page 1223: ...he print positions slightly shift for the respective colors use the following procedure to perform color print mismatch correction 1 Press Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Correct Color Mismatch 2 Press Start Maintenance 1209 ...

Page 1224: ...llowing procedure to configure the necessary settings 1 Press Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Full Color Printing Vividness Settings 2 Select the level Standard prints with the same color as the original Level 1 prints with more saturated colors than the original Level 2 prints with even more saturated colors 3 Press OK Maintenance 1210 ...

Page 1225: ...size You can adjust the magnification of the horizontal width and vertical width respectively 1 Press Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Fine Adjust Zoom 2 Adjust the image size Set the magnification of X for horizontal width adjustment and the magnification of Y for vertical width adjustment 3 Press OK LINKS Basic Copy Operations P 250 Maintenance 1211 ...

Page 1226: ...Dither Pattern Settings 2 Select the dither pattern Pattern 1 The default setting Pattern 2 This setting enhances reproduction of edge areas of the printed image Pattern 3 This setting enhances reproduction of highlight areas of black and white images Pattern 4 This setting enhances reproduction of highlight areas of color images 3 Press OK 4 Press Yes and perform auto gradation adjustment full ad...

Page 1227: ...the strength and density of the color balance 1 Press Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Color Balance 2 Select the paper type 3 Adjust the color balance 4 Press Fine Adjust Density 5 Select the color to adjust then adjust the density 6 Press OK Maintenance 1213 ...

Page 1228: ... compensate for this error Adjust the folding position of the paper and the saddle stitch position at the same time This mode can be set when the Booklet Finisher Y is attached 1 Press Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Action Change Fold Stitch Position 2 Select the paper size you want to adjust 3 Adjust the saddle stitch position 4 Press OK Close LINKS Basic Copy Operations P 250 Making Booklets P 29...

Page 1229: ...he middle of the booklet use this setting to adjust the saddle stitch fold placement This mode can be set when the Booklet Finisher Y is attached 1 Press Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Action Adjust Saddle Stitch Fold Position 2 Adjust the folding position 3 Press OK LINKS Basic Copy Operations P 250 Making Booklets P 298 Optional Equipment P 1516 Maintenance 1215 ...

Page 1230: ... the intended position perform a fine adjustment of fold position This mode can be set when the Booklet Finisher Y is attached 1 Press Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Action Adjust Fold Position 2 Select the paper 3 Adjust the folding position 4 Press OK LINKS Basic Copy Operations P 250 Making Booklets P 298 Optional Equipment P 1516 Maintenance 1216 ...

Page 1231: ...ustom paper types or change the settings of registered custom paper types Logging into the Machine P 160 When you register the custom paper type you cannot specify the paper source For more information on registering the paper source see Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer P 167 You can import export the registered custom paper type information and share it with another Canon machin...

Page 1232: ...it delete custom paper types 4 Press OK Items that can be specified The following items can be specified Name You can change the name of the custom paper type When you register the settings for the custom paper type make sure to change its name You cannot change the settings of the default paper types registered in the machine Basis Weight You can change the basis weight of the custom paper type I...

Page 1233: ...te Paper You can set this mode to On to use preprinted paper paper which has logos already printed on it such as a letterhead The custom paper type with On set for Use as Template Paper is not automatically selected in the following cases When the paper type for printing is set to Auto If Paper Drawer Auto Selection On Off is set to On and Consider Paper Type is set to Off when copying Methods for...

Page 1234: ...increase the gloss and press to decrease the gloss Depending on the paper if the value in this mode is increased a paper jam may occur If the value is decreased the quality of the image could be adversely affected or toner may not be applied properly to the image Make sure to change the value in small increments as changing the value abruptly may cause some troubles Adjust Secondary Transfer Volta...

Page 1235: ...t can be used as test pages see Paper Available for Two Sided Copying Two Sided Printing P 1497 Make sure that a sufficient supply of paper is loaded in the paper source before outputting the test pages Adjusting Lead Edge Alignment of the Image This setting enables you to adjust the image position by checking whether the register mark and the image at the leading edge toward the feeding direction...

Page 1236: ...k is located inside of the edge of the test page The image is shifted to the forwards as seen from the feeding direction of the paper according to the entered value 3 Turn over the test page check the lead edge image on the back side of the test page 4 Press or for Back Side in Lead Edge Alignment to input the value to shift the image 5 Perform the test page again and check the image position pres...

Page 1237: ...6 Press OK Maintenance 1223 ...

Page 1238: ...nt in Direction is Recommended for Following Cases Paper Weight Light thin paper Heavy thick paper Poor Images Although the density in the high density areas is normal tiny white spots may appear in the low density areas White spots appear in high density areas Enough toner is not applied in high density areas and tiny dense spots appear Dense spots may appear in low density areas In high density ...

Page 1239: ...odically sent to the remote monitoring server It is necessary to enable communication between the machine and the server providing the service in order to use this function You can print a list that shows the number of pages used for copying printing scanning and faxing Printing a Report on the Number of Copied and Printed Pages P 1226 On this screen you can also check the counter information for ...

Page 1240: ...agement Department ID Management On Page Totals Print List Select the items to print Start Printing Department ID Management must be set in order to calculate the Page Count List for each Department ID Setting the Department ID Management P 712 With the Remote UI Page Count List you can check how many pages have been printed or scanned by individual user names linked to a Department ID To display ...

Page 1241: ...git number preceded by to find the reason and solutions Countermeasures for Each Error Code P 1308 If Management Settings Device Management Restrict Access to Other User Jobs is set to On jobs other than those of the logged in user are displayed as and cannot be operated If you log in with administrator privileges the jobs of all users are displayed 1 Press 2 Display the usage history of each func...

Page 1242: ... results that appear in the list You can specify whether or not to print the list automatically Communication Management Report P 1229 Fax sending receiving log 1 Press Send or Receive Job Log 2 Select Fax from the list and press Fax Activity Report 3 Press Start Printing If you select Output Spec No of Transm in step 3 you can specify the number of log results that appear in the list You can spec...

Page 1243: ...an send the report to a specified destination as a CSV file If NG appears in the RESULT column in the printed list check the three digit number preceded by to find the reason and solutions Countermeasures for Each Error Code P 1308 If Management Settings Device Management Restrict Access to Other User Jobs is set to On jobs other than those of the logged in user are displayed as and cannot be oper...

Page 1244: ...u change Display Job Log in Management Settings from Off to On Print Send Every Specified No of Transm and Print Send at Specified Time in the Communication Management Report automatically changes to Off Display Job Log P 1137 For documents sent by e mail the report indicates the sending results between the machine and the mail server not between the machine and the destination You can manually pr...

Page 1245: ...sults of fax transmissions are printed In addition a Fax TX Report is printed with the TX Report if Fax TX Report is set to For Error Only or On For documents sent by e mail the report indicates the sending results between the machine and the mail server not between the machine and the destination Send jobs originating from the fax driver are omitted from this report If unnecessary streaks or shad...

Page 1246: ...fied No of Transm and Print Send at Specified Time in the Fax Activity Report automatically changes to Off Display Job Log P 1137 You can manually print a Fax Activity Report from a list in the usage history Fax sending receiving log P 1228 The name of the remote party registered in the Address Book is printed when sending to a destination selected from the Address Book If sending by entering a nu...

Page 1247: ... Frame Erasing Dark Borders When Scanning Erase Frame P 523 If TX Report is set to For Error Only or On a TX Report is printed with the Fax TX Report Fax RX Report You can set a Fax RX Report to print automatically every time a fax is received It is also possible to set the report to print only when an error occurs Function Settings Receive Forward Fax Settings Fax RX Report Set the report OK Conf...

Page 1248: ... history as a list Press Management Settings Device Management Device Information Distribution Settings Communication Log Print List Yes When setting to print a report at a specified time If a report is set to print at a specified time the 100 most recent results are printed with the most recent results first If the number of results exceeds 100 the older results are not printed Printing a List of...

Page 1249: ...ted with an asterisk next to them Forwarding Settings You can print a list of the settings configured for fax and I fax forwarding by using Receive Forward under Settings Registration You are required to log in with administrator privileges to print this list Function Settings Receive Forward Common Settings Forwarding Settings Print List Yes Mail Box File List You can print a list of temporarily ...

Page 1250: ...nd licenses You are required to log in with administrator privileges to print this list Management Settings License Other MEAP Settings Print System Information Yes Device Information Distribution Destination List You can print a list of devices registered as information distribution destinations You are required to log in with administrator privileges to print this list Management Settings Device...

Page 1251: ...f A3 B4 A4 11 x 17 LGL or LTR plain recycled thin or color is loaded in a paper source whose settings in Other in Paper Drawer Auto Selection On Off in Function Settings Settings Registration are set to On However if Consider Paper Type for Copy is set to On in Paper Drawer Auto Selection On Off you cannot print from a paper source with color paper specified Automatically Selecting the Appropriate...

Page 1252: ...a Local Authorized Canon Dealer Is Displayed 1262 Countermeasures for Each Message 1264 Countermeasures for Each Error Code 1308 Clearing Paper Jams 1337 Paper Jams in the Feeder 1340 Paper Jams in the Main Unit 1343 Paper Jams in a Paper Source 1348 Paper Jams in a Finisher Optional 1355 Paper Jams in the Staple Finisher 1356 Paper Jams in the Booklet Finisher 1359 Paper Jams in the Inner Finishe...

Page 1253: ...m do you have If the Machine Does Not Operate P 1241 Cannot Print P 1243 Problems with Printing Results P 1244 Problems with Faxes P 1247 Problems with Scanning P 1249 Problems with the Network P 1251 A Message or a Number Starting with an Error Code Is Displayed P 1261 Problems with Security P 1255 Problems with MEAP P 1256 Other Problems P 1258 Troubleshooting 1239 ...

Page 1254: ... When a paper jam staple jam occurs Clearing Paper Jams P 1337 Clearing Staple Jams Optional P 1367 Troubleshooting 1240 ...

Page 1255: ... the Main Power indicator does not light up even though the power switch is ON check the power plug Is lit If it is lit press to cancel the Sleep mode Is the machine connected to a computer correctly Check the network connection of the machine and the computer Setting up the Network Environment P 21 If the machine does not respond to computer operations Restart the machine If the machine does not ...

Page 1256: ...formation on the settings see Setting up Using the Setup Guide P 8 When the authentication screen login screen is displayed Log in as a registered user When the authentication screen login screen is displayed you must log in as a registered user to continue operating the machine Logging into the Machine P 160 Troubleshooting 1242 ...

Page 1257: ... or a problem occurs while operating the machine A Message or a Number Starting with an Error Code Is Displayed P 1261 Is Auto Select set to No To switch to the appropriate operation mode change all items or the items you are using to Yes For more details see Setting the Machine PS PCL UFR II Printer via the online manual site Is forced hold printing enabled If it is enabled documents may not be p...

Page 1258: ...g P 1246 The printed image is displaced or skewed Are the paper guides misaligned Match the paper guides with the paper loaded in the paper source Images are uneven or faint Is the paper damp Replace the paper with paper that is not damp Are the gradation and density set appropriately Perform gradation adjustment Adjusting Gradation P 1200 Black streaks appear Is the document feed scanning area di...

Page 1259: ...64 Images are not printed on the intended side of the paper Is the orientation of the loaded paper correct Check the orientation and side of the paper that is facing up Load the paper again if it is incorrectly orientated Loading Paper P 116 Images are not printed in the intended size Do the original size and size of the paper that is loaded match Replace the paper that is loaded with paper of the...

Page 1260: ...1 Select the orientation of the original on the print settings screen of the application 2 On the Basic Settings screen of the driver set Orientation to the same orientation you set in step 1 3 While checking the print preview set Page Layout Page Order 1 sided 2 sided Booklet Printing Binding Location Page Order is displayed when Page Layout is set to 2 on 1 or higher Troubleshooting 1246 ...

Page 1261: ... touch button and change it if it is incorrect Editing the Registered Destinations in the Address Book P 237 Editing the Registered Destinations in One Touch Buttons P 243 If you are using an optical line or an IP phone line Communication errors may occur depending on the line quality For more information contact your service provider You may be able to reduce communication errors by lowering the ...

Page 1262: ...reception or transmission fails a number error code preceded by is displayed on the touch panel display or in a communication management report You can refer to the necessary countermeasures according to the error code Countermeasures for Each Error Code P 1308 Troubleshooting 1248 ...

Page 1263: ...ch Buttons P 243 Cannot send scanned documents via e mail Is the information for the destination correct Change the settings registered in the address book or one touch buttons Editing the Registered Destinations in the Address Book P 237 Editing the Registered Destinations in One Touch Buttons P 243 Are the settings for the SMTP server or DNS server correct If no e mail can be sent set the SMTP s...

Page 1264: ...Bleedthrough occurs in scanned documents Is the background density set appropriately Set the background density to Auto Adjusting Density P 521 Troubleshooting 1250 ...

Page 1265: ...S server is on the network that the machine is connected to check whether the information for devices connected to an external network is registered on the DNS server and whether it is correct Cannot recognize the machine from a computer If the IP address of the computer where the Remote UI and utility software are executed is not allowed for sending and receiving in Firewall Settings the informat...

Page 1266: ...hine in Exceptions addresses to not use a proxy for in the proxy server settings of the Web browser Is communication with computers restricted in the firewall If the Remote UI cannot be displayed because the settings are incorrect set IPv4 Address Filter IPv6 Address Filter or MAC Address Filter to Off from the control panel of the machine Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls P 728 Network...

Page 1267: ...close the SSID This function prevents the SSID of a wireless LAN router from being automatically detected Check whether the machine is connected to the network If you cannot connect to a wireless LAN P 1253 If you cannot connect to a wireless LAN Check the status of the computer Is setup of the computer and wireless LAN router complete Are any of cables of the wireless LAN router power cable LAN c...

Page 1268: ... a Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings P 33 ANY rejection is enabled An automatically generated WEP key hexadecimal is set The stealth function is enabled A wireless LAN router function for refusing connections if the device trying to connect has ANY or blank set for the SSID If it is necessary to change the settings on the wireless LAN router side If the wireless LAN router is set as follo...

Page 1269: ...deselecting the check box Deselect the check box and change the corresponding settings from the button or from Settings Registration in the Remote UI Cannot import security policy settings Have you set a different security policy password from the source device Remove the password in the destination device or set the same password as the source device Using a Password to Protect the Security Polic...

Page 1270: ...p blocking port 389 Communication is performed with the TCP protocol using port 389 by default If you have changed the port stop blocking the new port Cannot log in to Active Directory Did you perform user registration before installing Active Directory After installation accounts are automatically generated in the Users folder but since a user logon name is not set you cannot log in to the Active...

Page 1271: ...hen Connecting to a Network P 46 Login is slow Check whether the domain name specified in the DNS server that is set can perform name resolution or whether the address can be identified and make changes if necessary The DNS server set in the machine is not found or cannot communicate Check the settings and communication environment Multiple domain controllers manage the specified domain Login may ...

Page 1272: ...nnot be used because the optional equipment or system options that they require are not installed The buttons displayed on the screen have been changed Press or at the bottom of the screen to switch the display or press Options and search for the desired button For a Basic Features screen press Options and search for the desired button Customizing the Home Screen P 189 Customizing the Basic Featur...

Page 1273: ... Settings Store Access Files Advanced Box Settings Authentication Management Log In Using Touch Panel Display Log In Using Client Computer Use SMB Server Use SMB Authentication On On On Required Required On Off On Required No access On Off Off Not required Not required On On Off Not required Required The Advanced Box is open to public via WebDAV but it cannot connect via WebDAV Check the ON OFF se...

Page 1274: ...On On Basic Required Required On On Off Required No access On Off Basic Not required Not required On Off Off Not required Not required Troubleshooting 1260 ...

Page 1275: ...WJ 0KK 0YWH 0LL 0YWR 0KC 0YWK 0LL 0YWE 0RH 0YWF 0LL 0YAS 0S4 If a message is displayed on the screen of the machine or the Remote UI or a number starting with an error code is displayed on the details screen for job log or a communication management report refer to the following to check the remedy A Message Saying to Contact a Local Authorized Canon Dealer Is Displayed P 1262 Countermeasures for ...

Page 1276: ... dealer is displayed 1 Restart the machine Press the power switch to turn the power OFF Turning OFF the Machine P 107 wait for longer than 10 seconds after the Main Power indicator turns off and then turn the power ON again Turning ON the Machine P 106 Note that data waiting to be processed is erased when you turn the power OFF 2 If the message is still displayed prepare the following information ...

Page 1277: ... Scan Scanner Web Access Tutorial MEAP Application Quick Menu Status Monitor Remote UI Functions available when the Scan function is limited Access Stored Files Fax I Fax Inbox Print Hold Web Access Tutorial MEAP Application Quick Menu Status Monitor Remote UI Depending on the error the process for storing system information is performed after the error occurs Do not turn OFF the machine until the...

Page 1278: ...L UFR II Printer via the online manual site Press Skip Error to skip the printing that an error occurred for You can perform the following printing 33 WORK FULL Could not print because the dedicated work memory was insufficient Cancel printing Canceling Printing P 467 initialize the printer to increase the free memory and then try printing again However note that initializing the printer will eras...

Page 1279: ...ta could not be registered to the polygon buffer Press Skip Error and continue printing However the data that could not be registered will not be printed correctly For information on the polygon buffer see Print D0 nn error nn is two alphanumeric characters The printer stopped operating normally due to an unknown problem Restart the machine Press the power switch to turn OFF the machine Turning OF...

Page 1280: ...er FM FILE ACCESS ERROR The printer stopped operating normally due to an unknown problem Restart the machine If the message is still displayed after restarting the machine make a note of the message and contact your local authorized Canon dealer FM SC WORK MEM ERROR n n is a single alphanumeric character The printer stopped operating normally due to an unknown problem Restart the machine If the me...

Page 1281: ...ot set correctly Check whether the authentication method and authentication information key and certificate user name and password and CA certificate are set correctly IEEE 802 1X error No reply from the destination An error occurred while communicating with the authenticator Check whether the authenticator LAN switch and RADIUS server are set correctly IEEE 802 1X error Cannot analyze the certifi...

Page 1282: ...r default settings after changing settings other than the Format PDF to PDF A setting Check the server name in the SMB server settings A computer or printer with the same name as the SMB server is registered in the WINS database If WINS Resolution is set to On in WINS Settings do not register a computer or printer with the same name as the SMB server in Computer Name Workgroup Name Settings in TCP...

Page 1283: ...ddress P 37 IP Address Settings P 1052 Sub Line Settings The IPv6 address is not set correctly Check the following It may take several minutes until the stateless address is decided Check whether Use IPv6 is set to On in IPv6 Settings When using a stateless address or DHCPv6 check whether each address has been retrieved If the address has not been retrieved check the settings of the router and the...

Page 1284: ... or the USB LAN adapter is not connected recognized Check the connection of the USB LAN adapter Connecting to a Wired LAN for the Sub Line P 27 If you reconnected the USB LAN adapter restart the machine Front Side P 92 XPS Print Range Error There are no pages that can be processed in the specified range for printing Specify a correct page range XPS Image Data Error Failed to extend the image data ...

Page 1285: ...equired privileges Log in as a user with the required privileges The account has expired Contact the system manager The certificate may have expired Confirm the expiration date of for the certificate registered in the machine If the certificate has expired register a certificate within the validity period Registering a Key and Certificate for Network Communication P 802 The expiration date of the ...

Page 1286: ... disk space may not be able to be secured You may be able to use the desired application by closing other applications Cannot download application logs because application logs do not exist The application log does not exist The operation cannot be performed because the log does not exist Use the Back button to return to the previous page The contents of the file for the application to install are...

Page 1287: ...perations and log in again If you still cannot log in consult your system administrator No response Could not send because an error occurred in the server Check whether the server is operating normally The machine is not connected to the network correctly Check the machine and network settings and try connecting again Setting up the Network Environment P 21 Could not send e mail or an I fax becaus...

Page 1288: ...en stopped Press the button after enabling the function that was stopped to be used Synchronize Custom Settings Log in again for synchronization There is an inconsistency between the synchronization data of the server machine and that of the client machine synchronizing custom settings Log out and then log in again Synchronize Custom Settings Some settings are restricted The client machine was syn...

Page 1289: ... for Auto Search Starting Setting Synchronization P 867 Without using Auto Search manually specify the server address of the destination for the synchronization of custom settings client and the search depth router If the synchronization of custom settings client is complete restart synchronization Restart the machine Synchronize Custom Settings Cannot identify the server Multiple server machines ...

Page 1290: ...ertificate P 779 The function may be stopped Buttons could not be imported When importing data buttons with functions not supported by the machine were included Check whether all the buttons have been imported to the machine Routing registration failed Check Static Routing Settings There is an entry that routing table registration failed for in the static routing settings Check the registered dest...

Page 1291: ...rch results exceeds the limit Change search conditions then try again Destinations exceeding the maximum number of search results were found Narrow the search conditions and try searching again Increase the maximum number of search results in Max Addresses to Search in Register LDAP Server Registering the LDAP Server P 57 The search condition includes characters that cannot be used with the select...

Page 1292: ...s of the machine Check the security functions of the application to see whether it can be used Cannot register because the algorithm of this key is not supported You tried to register the key and certificate file of an unsupported encryption algorithm Register the key and certificate file of a supported encryption algorithm Registering a Key and Certificate P 802 System Specifications P 1458 Canno...

Page 1293: ... Enhanced System Applications Specify the application to install again No response from the server Check the settings The specified server may have a problem such as not being specified correctly not being turned on or having insufficient resources Try specifying the server again after waiting a while If there is still no response from the server select another server Cannot start searching becaus...

Page 1294: ...of a type that cannot be selected with Automatic Paper Selection is loaded Specify the paper drawer manually If you are copying select the Consider Paper Type check box in Paper Drawer Auto Selection On Off Paper Drawer Auto Selection On Off P 1076 Sub line was disconnected due to a subnet mask conflict The network addresses of the main line and sub line conflict Check the IP address and subnet ma...

Page 1295: ...Check the content of the file Cannot find the specified application It may have been uninstalled by another user The specified application is not installed to the machine Use the Back button to return to the previous page The contents of the specified file may be incorrect You tried to register a button by specifying a different file when importing Register the correct file and try importing again...

Page 1296: ...tication Check whether the proxy settings are correct Setting a Proxy P 737 Cannot edit delete the paper because it is being used for other settings in Settings Registration You tried to edit or delete paper that was registered in another setting via Paper Type Management Settings The paper is set as a target for automatic gradation adjustment or automatic color tone adjustment To edit or delete p...

Page 1297: ...t the remedies contact your local authorized Canon dealer from which you purchased the toner cartridge Cannot change the settings because the selected key is being used The key and certificate you are trying to delete is being used in TLS encrypted communications or the Restrict Receiving for Each Function mode of Device Information Distribution Set all TLS settings to Off to stop TLS encrypted co...

Page 1298: ... and register the button again Administrator has been disabled Select a user with administrator privileges Could not send An error occurred in the WebDAV server or proxy server Check the settings for the WebDAV server or proxy server The target file or directory does not allow access from outside Check whether the WebDAV server settings are correct Check whether the destination is correct Register...

Page 1299: ...time Check the connection between the machine and the mobile device Direct Connection Ended because no other device could be found Cannot find a mobile device capable of connection Check the network settings of the mobile device and then connect by holding it near the machine Depending on your mobile device the machine may not operate correctly If you cannot successfully connect contact your local...

Page 1300: ...are set to be not case sensitive Change the settings to make user names case sensitive or register another user name Cannot register any new buttons because the number of registered buttons has reached the limit Buttons already registered can be overwritten The button cannot be registered because the maximum number of buttons has been exceeded Overwrite an existing button or delete unnecessary but...

Page 1301: ...s but device information cannot be distributed Replace the toner cartridge XXXX The toner in the toner cartridge has run out Pressing the icon displayed at the bottom right of the screen displays a motion video to give the instructions for toner cartridge replacement Follow these instructions to replace the toner cartridge Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge P 1165 The XXXX in the message ...

Page 1302: ...ut of staples Replace the staple case of the saddle stitcher unit Loading Staples Optional P 1176 The entered PIN is incorrect An incorrect PIN was entered Enter the PIN again If you do not know the correct PIN contact the administrator The authentication server is not running Contact the system manager The LAN cable is disconnected Connect the LAN cable The Active Directory server is not running ...

Page 1303: ...not log in because anonymous access to the authentication server is not allowed Contact the system manager Anonymous access is not allowed on the LDAP server On the information input screen of the LDAP server select Use authentication information and then specify the user name and password according to what is registered in the LDAP server Registering Server Information P 695 The account informati...

Page 1304: ...ternal for the destination to Off You tried to save a file directly under a shared space or personal space Files cannot be saved directly under the shared space share or personal space users of an Advanced Box Select a folder in the space and save the file The full path the folder name indicating the filename and destination to save is too long Shorten the folder name or file name or change the de...

Page 1305: ...to a network set Confirm Network Connection Setting Changes to Off Confirm Network Connection Setting Changes P 1052 The hard disk needs to be replaced Call service representative The hard disk has failed Alternatively a hard disk is not installed Contact your local authorized Canon dealer If the optional Removable HDD Kit is installed check the hard disk Eco Staple Free is currently unavailable T...

Page 1306: ...ignment function of the finisher needs to be checked Contact your service representative Printing is still possible The paper alignment function of the finisher is broken Restart the machine If the message is still displayed after restarting the machine make a note of the message and contact your local authorized Canon dealer Output the paper to a tray with a working paper alignment function Outpu...

Page 1307: ...DL DLG Rendering Error The printer stopped operating normally due to an unknown problem Restart the machine If the message is still displayed after restarting the machine make a note of the message and contact your local authorized Canon dealer PDL DLG Unknown Error The printer stopped operating normally due to an unknown problem Restart the machine If the message is still displayed after restarti...

Page 1308: ... and text processing Press Skip Error and continue printing However pages that include the data that caused the error may not be printed correctly PDL GL Mem Alloc Err The printer stopped operating normally due to an unknown problem Restart the machine If the message is still displayed after restarting the machine make a note of the message and contact your local authorized Canon dealer PDL IMG Re...

Page 1309: ... try printing again However note that initializing the printer will erase all the data in the memory of the machine For more details see Setting the Machine PS PCL UFR II Printer via the online manual site Press Skip Error and continue printing However the data that caused the error will not be printed PDL nn Rendering Error nn is the module name The printer stopped operating normally due to an un...

Page 1310: ...starting the machine make a note of the message and contact your local authorized Canon dealer PDL XPS Error An undefined error occurred Restart the machine and try again If the message is still displayed make a note of the message and contact your local authorized Canon dealer PDL XPS Initialize Error An unknown error such as not being able to retrieve memory during initialization occurred Restar...

Page 1311: ...d to the function screen because you do not have permission to register buttons Log in as an administrator then try again Registering personal buttons shared buttons is restricted in user authentication Register the button after logging in as an administrator Check the following settings Allow Home Screen Customization for Common Use Allow Registration Editing of Personal Buttons Customizing the H...

Page 1312: ...m the operation because the memory is full When using the Scan and Store function scanning was canceled because the memory became full while scanning the original Press OK to return to the Basic Features screen Delete unnecessary data to increase the free space and try scanning the original again Scanning will be canceled because the memory is full Do you want to print the scanned pages When using...

Page 1313: ... automatically delete old user setting information if the number of users who can be registered is exceeded Action When Maximum Number of Users Exceeded P 1138 Register to Home will be canceled because you are not logged in Return to the function screen log in then try again Registering shared buttons is restricted in user authentication Register the button after logging in as an administrator Che...

Page 1314: ...n The license file of a MEAP application will expire soon Add a license file Information set by the currently logged in user will not be stored The user setting information cannot be saved because the maximum number of users who can be registered was exceeded To save new user setting information delete any unnecessary user setting information Deleting User Setting Information P 724 You can specify...

Page 1315: ...olution is working correctly with the DNS server set for the machine on the domain controller Try again after augmenting the current value of Period Until Timeout in the Active Directory settings 310002 When Use access mode within sites is enabled on the machine the site information of Active Directory is not set correctly Check whether the site setting on Active Directory is valid 310003 The netw...

Page 1316: ...n to Active Directory P 1256 Check whether the encryption method for Kerberos authentication is set to a method AES128 bit encryption and DES supported by User Authentication 322018 The validity period of the account has expired Check the validity period of the account in question 322023 The validity period of the password has expired Change the password In Active Directory check the setting of th...

Page 1317: ...entical to those on the server side 323048 You are attempting to log in as an anonymous user for LDAP server authentication Check whether the LDAP service setting permits anonymous user authentication 323049 323053 The user information for LDAP server authentication is not set correctly Check the user name and password of the authentication user or search user Check whether the authentication user...

Page 1318: ...modify an attribute of a Relative Distinguished Name RDN such as cn attribute You are attempting to modify an attribute of a Relative Distinguished Name RDN such as cn attribute The information of such attribute cannot be modified so specify another attribute 325xxx An LDAP server update error An LDAPModify error code is displayed in place of xxx 331000 User authentication failed Check the user na...

Page 1319: ... value 331008 The account of the logged in user is locked out Contact your system manager 331009 The user ID of the account you are using to log in to the machine is invalid Or the Active Directory settings may not be correct Check whether all of the required attributes are set correctly In Active Directory clear the check box for Do not require Kerberos preauthentication which is an account optio...

Page 1320: ...r attribute 332003 An invalid login name was specified for user information updating It is not permitted to register the name of the logged in user login name Check the user name and contact your system manager 332004 An invalid display name was specified for user information updating It is not permitted to register the display name of the logged in user Check the display name attribute value on t...

Page 1321: ...ck the attribute value for determining the privileges on the side of the server being referred to and contact your system manager 332008 The maximum registerable number of users was exceeded during user information updating Contact your system manager Troubleshooting 1307 ...

Page 1322: ...406 P 1314 407 P 1314 409 P 1314 410 P 1315 411 P 1315 701 P 1315 702 P 1315 703 P 1315 704 P 1315 705 P 1316 706 P 1316 711 P 1316 712 P 1316 713 P 1316 715 P 1316 716 P 1316 749 P 1317 751 P 1317 752 P 1317 753 P 1318 754 P 1318 755 P 1318 759 P 1318 761 P 1318 762 P 1319 766 P 1319 769 P 1319 770 P 1319 771 P 1320 772 P 1320 773 P 1320 801 to 999 801 P 1320 802 P 1321 803 P 1321 804 P 1321 805 ...

Page 1323: ...ving the paper jam check the documents and the settings and then scan again 003 Communication that exceeds the specified time 64 minutes causes an error Lower the resolution and try sending again Basic Operations for Sending Faxes P 389 When receiving a document ask the other party to lower the resolution when scanning or divide the document into multiple parts 005 There was no response from the o...

Page 1324: ...m a remote fax client machine sending could not be performed because the memory of the remote fax server machine became full Try sending again after the other sending to the remote fax server machine is complete Delete unnecessary documents and error documents from the remote fax server machine to free up space The document could not be sent because the memory of the machine is full Delete unneces...

Page 1325: ... using confidential communication or subaddresses 034 The confidential storage location in the device of the other party specified for confidential communication was not found Check the confidential storage location in the device of the other party and try sending again The memory was insufficient in the device of the other party Ask the other party to free up some space 035 The device of the othe...

Page 1326: ... the document again Lower the resolution and try sending again The document could not be sent because the memory of the machine is full Delete unnecessary documents and documents with errors to make more memory available Divide the sending operation into multiple batches instead of sending the document to all destinations at once Lower the resolution and then send the document again 054 The sendin...

Page 1327: ... party and try sending again There was insufficient memory in the recipient s machine Ask the recipient to make more memory available 107 The document could not be sent because there was insufficient memory available Lower the resolution or divide the document into two or more parts and then try sending the document again Delete unnecessary files to make more memory available Saving Received Docum...

Page 1328: ...ork was deleted while the file was being written to it Check that the memory media is inserted or that the Advanced Box of another machine on the network is available and read the file again The image transfer failed when transferring to the memory media because an unspecified error occurred The connected memory media may be formatted with an unsupported file system Check the status of the memory ...

Page 1329: ...med because the remote fax client machine failed authentication to the remote fax server machine If Department ID Management is set in the remote fax server machine log in to the remote fax client machine using the Department ID and PIN set in the remote fax server machine 702 Sending could not be performed because the memory was full Wait a while Try sending again after the other sending is compl...

Page 1330: ...r deleting unnecessary files in mail boxes 713 The document in Mail Box or Fax I Fax Inbox was deleted before sending the URL Try sending again after saving the required document in the Mail Box or Fax I Fax Inbox 715 The certificate to use was not found when sending an e mail with a digital signature attached When using a device signature set the e mail address of the machine Setting E mail I Fax...

Page 1331: ... with WebDAV via a proxy using TLS communication Use Divided Chunk Send for WebDAV TX P 1097 The IP address is not set Check TCP IP Settings in Preferences Network P 1052 TCP IP Settings Could not send to an SMB server including the Advanced Box of another imageRUNNER ADVANCE series machine disclosed with SMB because a file server is being browsed using Windows SMB If an error occurs with delayed ...

Page 1332: ... LAN in Select Wired Wireless LAN also check Sub Line Settings in Preferences Network P 1052 Sub Line Settings When the machine was turned ON an IP address was not assigned to the machine by DHCP or Auto IP Check TCP IP Settings in Preferences Network P 1052 TCP IP Settings If you selected Wired LAN Wireless LAN in Select Wired Wireless LAN also check Sub Line Settings in Preferences Network P 105...

Page 1333: ...e or proxy server side Check the WebDAV server settings Check the proxy server if you are sending via a proxy Sending could not be performed because a validation error occurred when validating the TLS server certificate when sending with WebDAV because Confirm TLS Certificate for WebDAV TX is set to On Check whether the CA certificate used to sign the TLS server certificate on the WebDAV server si...

Page 1334: ...o On are selected Cancel the Encrypt and Visible Signatures settings Alternatively set Format PDF to PDF A to Off Format PDF to PDF A P 1087 801 A timeout error occurred due to a problem on the mail server side when communicating with the SMTP server to send an e mail or send or receive an I fax Check whether the SMTP server is operating normally Check the status of the network An error was return...

Page 1335: ...ing normally The settings for the FTP server specified as the destination are incorrect Check the FTP server specified as the destination Connection to the FTP server failed Check that the FTP server is functioning normally 803 The connection was interrupted due to reasons on the recipient s side before all of the pages could be sent Re enter the group destination and try sending again 804 When se...

Page 1336: ...ausing a wait time timeout on the machine side before the data could be sent or forwarding could be completed Set a longer timeout time in Timeout on the SMB client Setting the SMB Client P 53 810 A POP server connection error occurred when an I fax was received Check the POP server settings in Communication Settings Setting E mail I Fax Communication P 74 Check whether the POP server is operating...

Page 1337: ...4 or uuencode is invalid Tell the other party to check the settings and send again 821 Data that cannot be handled was received A TIFF analysis error occurred Tell the other party to check the settings and send again 822 Data that cannot be handled was received The image cannot be decoded Tell the other party to check the settings and send again 825 The Department ID and PIN of a job being execute...

Page 1338: ... the destination conditions A DSN error notification was received because the size of the file that was sent exceeded the size allowed by the mail server Change the setting in Maximum Data Size for Sending so that the size of the file to send does not exceed the size allowed by the mail server Maximum Data Size for Sending P 1102 Check the status of the mail server DNS server and network 831 An I ...

Page 1339: ...tion was received because a problem occurred in the mail server or network Check the status of the mail server and network An MDN error notification was received because a problem such as a full memory occurred at the other party Check the conditions and status of the other party 835 The maximum number of text lines that can be received with I fax was exceeded Tell the other party to reduce the nu...

Page 1340: ... UI to check whether the CA certificate used to sign the TLS server certificate on the SMTP server side is registered in the machine Check whether the TLS server certificate on the SMTP server side is correct Check whether the TLS server certificate is a self signed certificate 843 There is a great difference between the time of the KDC Key Distribution Center server and the time set in the machin...

Page 1341: ...d in Communication Settings Setting E mail I Fax Communication P 74 Check the APOP settings of the POP server Select Standard or POP AUTH in POP Auth Method in Communication Settings If the problem is not resolved set POP Authentication Before Sending to Off in Communication Settings and switch the communication settings to something other than POP before SMTP Setting E mail I Fax Communication P ...

Page 1342: ...he number of jobs waiting to be processed has decreased and execute the job again 854 Device information was delivered from a machine of a different model group with Restrict Receiving Device Information set to On on the destination client machine Set Restrict Receiving Device Information to Off and deliver the device information again Distributing the Device Information P 886 855 Device informati...

Page 1343: ... data or image data Check the image size and paper size as well as the color specification settings 862 Settings are included which are not supported cannot be combined or otherwise exceed the limits of the machine Check the job settings 863 The job was canceled because initialization operations were performed while the print data was being processed Execute the job again 864 Could not correctly r...

Page 1344: ...WebDAV communication with the destination failed and access via a proxy was requested received HTTP Error 305 Use Proxy Check the WebDAV server settings Check the proxy settings Setting a Proxy P 737 869 When sending with WebDAV a response indicating that authentication failed was received from the destination received HTTP Error 401 Unauthorized Check the user name or password Check the WebDAV se...

Page 1345: ...used was received from the destination received HTTP Error 411 Length Required Set Use Divided Chunk Send for WebDAV TX to Off Use Divided Chunk Send for WebDAV TX P 1097 Check the WebDAV server settings 876 When sending with WebDAV a response indicating that the size of the data was too large was received from the destination received HTTP Error 413 Request Entity Too Large Check the WebDAV serve...

Page 1346: ...eceived HTTP Error 503 Service Unavailable Check the WebDAV server settings 882 When sending with WebDAV a response indicating that communication with an upstream server failed was received from the proxy server received HTTP Error 504 Gateway Timeout Check the WebDAV server settings Check the proxy server settings 883 When sending with WebDAV a response indicating that the server does not support...

Page 1347: ...client However reception may be incomplete because the transmission was relayed via a remote fax server Check whether the fax was sent in the transmission results of the remote fax server Check the status of the server and network Ask the recipient to check that the document was received properly 904 Destinations registered in Favorite Settings are not updated when the Address Book is retrieved us...

Page 1348: ...tion was specified which cannot be combined with the Eco Staple Free mode If you change the staple position or the paper type it may be possible to bind with the Eco Staple Free mode 925 A transmission error occurred from the fax driver An image size that cannot be sent was specified Check the size of the image 927 A transmission error occurred from the fax driver Font that cannot be processed is ...

Page 1349: ...ble automatic deletion from Auto Delete Suspended Jobs Settings Registration Auto Delete Suspended Jobs P 1083 935 The job was canceled and one copy was output without being bound because the maximum number of sheets of paper that can be bound with the Eco Staple Free mode was exceeded Check the maximum number of sheets of paper that can be bound with the Eco Staple Free mode and execute the job a...

Page 1350: ...form when there are too many sheets to staple at once Action When Too Many Sheets to Staple P 1078 939 Printing was canceled due to an error that occurred while processing the image data Execute the job again 995 Reserved communication jobs were cleared Perform the operation again as necessary Troubleshooting 1336 ...

Page 1351: ...ent so that your clothing and hands do not get caught in the rollers Cautions when clearing paper jams When clearing paper jams do not turn the power OFF Data being printed is erased when you turn the power OFF Take particular care when a fax is being received When the paper gets torn be sure to remove all of it so that no pieces remain Do not forcibly remove the jammed paper from the machine Forc...

Page 1352: ...nd references Feeder Paper Jams in the Feeder P 1340 Inside the main unit Paper Jams in the Main Unit P 1343 Paper drawer Paper Jams in a Paper Source P 1348 Paper deck unit Paper Jams in a Paper Source P 1348 Staple finisher Paper Jams in the Staple Finisher P 1356 Booklet finisher Paper Jams in the Booklet Finisher P 1359 Inner finisher Paper Jams in the Inner Finisher P 1364 Paper may not actua...

Page 1353: ...Do not remove paper from a location other than that displayed as a paper jam location on the screen This may cause paper jams in other locations or missing pages in output documents Troubleshooting 1339 ...

Page 1354: ... 1 Remove the originals in the original supply tray 2 Check whether an original is jammed in the feeder cover Pull the lever to open the cover If an original is jammed gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow If you cannot remove the jammed original proceed to the next step without forcibly removing it Troubleshooting 1340 ...

Page 1355: ...d gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow 4 After removing all jammed originals close the feeder cover 5 Lift up the feeder and check whether there is a jammed original Lift up the feeder and check the position indicated by If an original is jammed gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow Troubleshooting 1341 ...

Page 1356: ...ntinue following the instructions on the screen to proceed with the interrupted operation or continue clearing paper jams When closing the feeder take care that your eyes are not exposed to light emitted through the platen glass Troubleshooting 1342 ...

Page 1357: ...s that are open 1 Check whether paper is jammed in the multi purpose tray If paper is jammed gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow 2 Open the upper right cover and lower right cover of the main unit When you lift up the lever both the upper right cover and lower right cover of the main unit open at the same time 3 Check whether paper is jammed in the output unit Hold the green lever and...

Page 1358: ...the arrow Close the output unit 4 Check whether paper is jammed in the reversing unit If paper is jammed gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow 5 Check whether paper is jammed in the duplexing unit entrance If paper is jammed in the upper area gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow Troubleshooting 1344 ...

Page 1359: ...a gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow 6 Check whether paper is jammed in the fixing unit Hold the green lever and open the fixing unit If paper is jammed gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow Troubleshooting 1345 ...

Page 1360: ...s jammed in the duplexing unit If paper is jammed gently pull it out in the direction where the most paper is protruding 8 Check whether paper is jammed in the multi purpose tray paper supply area If paper is jammed gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow 9 Check whether paper is jammed between the main unit and the upper right cover or lower right cover of the main unit Troubleshooting 1...

Page 1361: ...on of the arrow 10 Gently close the upper right cover and lower right cover of the main unit until they click Continue following the instructions on the screen to proceed with the interrupted operation or continue clearing paper jams Troubleshooting 1347 ...

Page 1362: ...achine Close any covers that are open Clearing Paper Jams in Paper Drawers 1 1 Check whether paper is jammed in the paper drawer 1 Open the paper drawer If paper is jammed gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow Push the paper drawer in until it clicks When closing the paper drawer be careful not to get your fingers caught as this may result in personal injury Continue following the instr...

Page 1363: ...r of the paper drawer until it clicks 3 Check whether paper is jammed in the paper drawer Open the paper drawer If paper is jammed gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow Push the paper drawer in until it clicks When closing the paper drawer be careful not to get your fingers caught as this may result in personal injury Troubleshooting 1349 ...

Page 1364: ...stalled pull it away from the machine 1 Check whether paper is jammed in the upper right cover or lower right cover of the paper drawer Open the upper right cover and lower right cover of the paper drawer When the Cassette Feeding Unit is attached When the High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit is attached If paper is jammed gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow When the Cassette Feeding U...

Page 1365: ...ht cover of the paper drawer until they click 3 Check whether paper is jammed in the paper drawer Open the paper drawer If paper is jammed gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow When the Cassette Feeding Unit is attached When the High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit is attached Troubleshooting 1351 ...

Page 1366: ...he instructions on the screen to proceed with the interrupted operation or continue clearing paper jams Clearing Paper Jams in the Paper Deck Unit Optional 1 Press and pull the paper deck unit away from the main unit 2 Check whether paper is jammed in the side of the paper deck unit If paper is jammed gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow Troubleshooting 1352 ...

Page 1367: ... arrow 4 Connect the paper deck unit to the machine Make sure that the paper deck is securely connected to the machine If the paper jam message is no longer displayed after connecting the paper deck proceed with the interrupted operation or continue clearing paper jams 5 Press to open the paper deck Troubleshooting 1353 ...

Page 1368: ...ther paper is jammed If paper is jammed gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow Check carefully as the paper may be jammed in a location that is difficult to see 7 Gently close the paper deck Continue following the instructions on the screen to proceed with the interrupted operation or continue clearing paper jams Troubleshooting 1354 ...

Page 1369: ...m location on the screen and follow the procedure in the reference indicated below to remove the paper Paper Jams in the Staple Finisher P 1356 Paper Jams in the Booklet Finisher P 1359 Paper Jams in the Inner Finisher P 1364 Confirm before handling Remove any paper loaded in a tray Close any covers that are open Troubleshooting 1355 ...

Page 1370: ...XR3 0SA 1 Check whether paper is jammed in the finisher Open the front cover of the finisher Lift up the output tray paper supporter of the main tray Turn the green knob to feed the jammed paper to the main tray side Troubleshooting 1356 ...

Page 1371: ...rection of the arrow 2 Check whether paper is jammed in the delivery unit Open the escape delivery guide If paper is jammed gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow Lift up the first flapper If paper is jammed gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow Troubleshooting 1357 ...

Page 1372: ...Open the cover of the buffer pass unit 5 Check whether paper is jammed If paper is jammed gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow 6 Close the cover of the buffer pass unit Continue following the instructions on the screen to proceed with the interrupted operation or continue clearing paper jams Troubleshooting 1358 ...

Page 1373: ...f there is any paper in the booklet tray remove it 1 Check whether paper is jammed in the finisher Open the front cover of the finisher Lift up the output tray paper supporter of Tray B Turn the green knob to feed the jammed paper to the Tray B side Troubleshooting 1359 ...

Page 1374: ... Tray B gently pull the paper out in the direction of the arrow 2 Check whether paper is jammed in the delivery unit Open the escape delivery guide If paper is jammed gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow Troubleshooting 1360 ...

Page 1375: ...n the direction of the arrow Return the first flapper to its original position Lower the escape delivery guide 3 Turn the green knob about 10 times If you do not turn the knob the jammed paper may tear when the saddle stitcher unit is pulled out Troubleshooting 1361 ...

Page 1376: ...there is any jammed paper If paper is jammed gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow 6 Close the transparent guide 7 Return the saddle stitcher unit to its original position 8 Close the front cover of the finisher 9 Open the cover of the buffer pass unit Troubleshooting 1362 ...

Page 1377: ...s jammed gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow 11 Close the cover of the buffer pass unit Continue following the instructions on the screen to proceed with the interrupted operation or continue clearing paper jams Troubleshooting 1363 ...

Page 1378: ...ed in output tray of the finisher If paper is jammed gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow 2 Open the front cover of the finisher 3 Hold the lever and slide the inner finisher to the left 4 Check whether paper is jammed in the inner finisher Troubleshooting 1364 ...

Page 1379: ...e direction of the arrow Return the guide to its original position When the Puncher Unit is attached If paper is jammed in the 2nd output area gently pull the jammed paper out in the direction of the arrow 5 Return the inner finisher to its original position Troubleshooting 1365 ...

Page 1380: ...6 Close the front cover of the finisher Continue following the instructions on the screen to proceed with the interrupted operation or continue clearing paper jams Troubleshooting 1366 ...

Page 1381: ... staple jams see Important Safety Instructions in the FAQ Guide and Optional Equipment P 1516 Staple Jams in the Staple Finisher P 1368 Staple Jams in the Booklet Finisher P 1370 Staple Jams in the Inner Finisher P 1374 Copies and prints may be output to optional equipment while you are clearing staple jams Take care when handling optional equipment that is installed Confirm before handling When c...

Page 1382: ...he finisher 2 Pull out the staple cartridge Hold the green tab on the staple cartridge and pull it straight out 3 Remove any jammed staples from the staple cartridge Lift up the knob on the staple cartridge Remove all jammed staples and exposed staples Troubleshooting 1368 ...

Page 1383: ...ts original position 4 Hold the green tab on the staple cartridge and push it in as far as it will go 5 Close the front cover of the finisher The finisher may automatically perform dry stapling to perform staple repositioning Troubleshooting 1369 ...

Page 1384: ...fore handling If there is any paper in the booklet tray remove it Clearing Staple Jams in the Staple Unit 1 Open the front cover of the finisher 2 Pull out the staple cartridge Hold the green tab on the staple cartridge and pull it straight out 3 Remove any jammed staples from the staple cartridge Lift up the knob on the staple cartridge Troubleshooting 1370 ...

Page 1385: ...4 Hold the green tab on the staple cartridge and push it in as far as it will go 5 Close the front cover of the finisher The finisher may automatically perform dry stapling to perform staple repositioning Clearing Staple Jams in the Saddle Stitcher Unit 1 Open the front cover of the finisher Troubleshooting 1371 ...

Page 1386: ... saddle stitcher unit 3 Remove the two staple cartridges while pulling down the lever towards yourself 4 Remove any jammed staples from the staple cartridge Lower the knob on the staple cartridge Troubleshooting 1372 ...

Page 1387: ...ition 5 Install the two staple cartridges to the saddle stitcher unit 6 Gently return the saddle stitcher unit to its original position 7 Close the front cover of the finisher After clearing a staple jam make sure to adjust the staple position Saddle Stitch Staple Repositioning P 1072 Troubleshooting 1373 ...

Page 1388: ... tray If paper is jammed gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow 2 Open the front cover of the finisher 3 Pull out the staple cartridge Hold the green handle on the staple cartridge and pull it straight out 4 Remove any jammed staples from the staple cartridge Troubleshooting 1374 ...

Page 1389: ...turn the knob on the staple cartridge to its original position 5 Hold the green handle on the staple cartridge and push it in as far as it will go 6 Close the front cover of the finisher The finisher may automatically perform dry stapling to perform staple repositioning Troubleshooting 1375 ...

Page 1390: ...Implementing Security Measures Implementing Security Measures 1377 Various Security Functions 1378 Implementing Security Measures 1376 ...

Page 1391: ...es the value the machine provides as an information asset The machine provides various functions for enhancing security such as preventing information leaks preventing unauthorized access and protecting confidential information Using these security functions together enables you to use the machine securely Various Security Functions P 1378 Implementing Security Measures 1377 ...

Page 1392: ...ation Security Standard This machine is compliant with IEEE Std 2600 2008 IEEE 2600 an international standard concerning information security for multifunctional peripherals and printers Concerning the Information Security Standard P 899 Preventing Documents Leaks and Modification When managing confidential documents it is necessary to handle problems such as leaks loss and modification The machin...

Page 1393: ...ase the reliability of documents created on the machine by adding digital signatures to scanned documents The digital signature is added using a key and certificate mechanism which enables you to identify the device and or user that created the document while ensuring that the data has not been altered Adding a Digital Signature to Sent Files P 778 Encrypted PDF Setting a password when scanning an...

Page 1394: ...ending to the wrong destination or careless mistakes such as entering the wrong fax number can lead to leaks of confidential information The machine provides various measures for increasing security when sending such as limiting the destinations that can be sent to and forcing the fax number to be entered twice before sending Use the following functions as security measures for preventing trouble ...

Page 1395: ...nding to a fax destination Displaying a Confirmation Screen for Fax Destinations P 759 Previewing Documents before Sending You can check scanned images on the preview screen before sending Checking Scanned Images Before Sending Preview P 410 Preventing Leaks of Confidential Information during Operation of the Machine The machine generates value as an information asset by storing important data Pre...

Page 1396: ...ed from the hard disk when operations are complete some data remains You can further improve security by using the hard disk data complete deletion function to automatically delete any data that remains after operations are complete Removing Unnecessary Data from the Hard Disk P 891 Initialize All Data Settings You can restore all of the machine settings to the factory default values All of the da...

Page 1397: ...ons and Items 1411 Home 1412 Copy 1413 Fax 1415 Scan and Send 1417 Scan and Store 1419 Access Stored Files 1426 Fax I Fax Inbox 1435 Print 1437 MEAP 1438 Installing MEAP Applications 1440 Managing MEAP Applications 1443 Managing MEAP Application Licenses 1448 Changing Login Services 1450 Basic Windows Operations 1455 System Specifications 1458 Fax Function 1459 Send Functions 1460 Printer Function...

Page 1398: ...FL Cassette 1520 Cassette Feeding Unit AM 1522 High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit A 1523 Paper Deck Unit F 1527 Staple Finisher Y Booklet Finisher Y Buffer Pass Unit L 2 4 Hole Puncher Unit A 2 3 Hole Puncher Unit A 4 Hole Puncher Unit A 1531 Inner Finisher H Inner 2 4 Hole Puncher B Inner 2 3 Hole Puncher B 1544 Copy Tray J 1556 Inner 2way Tray J 1557 Platen Cover Type W 1558 Copy Card Reader 15...

Page 1399: ...em Specifications P 1458 Enhancing Functions of the Machine Refer to this section when you use the MEAP application the dedicated application for enhancing functions MEAP P 1438 Using Optional Equipment See this section to check the optional equipment and the system options to use the machine more efficiently Options P 1513 Optional Equipment P 1516 System Options P 1481 Referencing the Manual of ...

Page 1400: ...s Guide P 1570 Others This section describes basic OS operations and includes disclaimers copyright information and other information Third Party Software P 1387 Feature Highlights P 1391 Basic Windows Operations P 1455 Notice P 1388 Appendix 1386 ...

Page 1401: ...Third Party Software 4XR3 0SU For information related to third party software click the following icon s Third Party Services THIRD PARTY LICENSE README Appendix 1387 ...

Page 1402: ...ww canon co in environment or write to us at customer delight canon co in Also this product complies with the E Waste Management Rules 2016 and prohibits use of lead mercury hexavalent chromium polybrominated biphenyls or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations exceeding 0 1 by weight and 0 01 by weight for Cadmium except for the exemptions set in Schedule II of the Rule Disclaimers The i...

Page 1403: ... FreeType Project www freetype org All rights reserved OCR Technology by I R I S copyright 1987 2015 All Rights Reserved iHQC compression technology by I R I S copyright 2007 2015 All Rights Reserved PDF iHQC XPS iHQC technology by I R I S copyright 2007 2015 All Rights Reserved Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and or its affiliates Adobe PostScript and the PostScript logo are either regis...

Page 1404: ...ostScript language interpreter Except as otherwise stated any reference to a PostScript printing device PostScript display device or similar item refers to a printing device display device or item respectively that contains PostScript technology created or licensed by Adobe Systems Incorporated and not to devices or items that purport to be merely compatible with the PostScript language Adobe the ...

Page 1405: ...Superior productivity to help your business daily operations run more smoothly Productivity P 1401 Clearer images thanks to high quality image printing and corrective functions Image Quality P 1402 Expanded capabilities and easier management Manageability P 1403 Convenience and peace of mind Reliability P 1408 An energy saving design that s environmentally friendly Office Compatibility P 1410 Appe...

Page 1406: ...st be logged in to personal authentication in order to use personalization Utilizing Personalization P 1393 List of Items That Can Be Personalized P 163 Automatically Deleting Blank Pages from the Scanned Data Specify settings for Skip Blank Pages or Skip Blank Originals to set the machine to detect blank pages when scanning and automatically delete them from the scanned data This is useful for pr...

Page 1407: ...curity and reduce costs The user must be in a position to use the personal authentication function in order to use personalization For information on personal authentication contact your device administrator Managing Users P 675 The settings that were personalized for each user can be synchronized with other Canon machines on the same network and used on all synchronized machines Synchronizing Set...

Page 1408: ...hortcuts to Setting Items at a Deep Level Register Options Shortcuts P 1397 Recalling Past Settings for Copying Previous Settings P 1397 Making the Job List Easy to See Sorting the Job List P 1398 Managing Destinations in Personal Address Lists User Group Address Lists Personal Address List User Group Address List P 1398 Enabling Multiple Settings to Be Set with a Single Button Personal Shared P 1...

Page 1409: ...o Myself P 1400 Screen Personalization Changing the Display Language for Each User Switch Language Keyboard The language of the screen can be changed to the liking of each login user For example the machine can display the screen in English for a certain user and then switch the display language to French when another user logs in The keyboard layout of the touch panel display can also be changed ...

Page 1410: ...racter Key Repetition Settings This setting enables you to adjust the time until entry of the same character is repeated For example if you press and hold the a key for a certain period of time the letter a begins to be entered repeatedly This can be prevented for people who want to work slowly by adjusting the response speed of the touch panel display Customizing the Screen Display Appearance and...

Page 1411: ...n and the Scan and Send Basic Features screen For example if a user frequently uses the N on 1 mode in Options of the Copy function a shortcut to the N on 1 mode can be displayed on the Copy Basic Features screen so that you can recall the N on 1 mode with one press of a button instead of going all the way down to the Options screen Customizing the Basic Features Screen P 196 Recalling Past Settin...

Page 1412: ...al customers in your personal address list and destinations shared within a group in a user group address list Registering Destinations in the Address Book P 223 Enabling Multiple Settings to Be Set with a Single Button Personal Shared Personal buttons and Shared buttons can be used to eliminate the need to set the same combination of settings separately For example a user can set the 2 Sided and ...

Page 1413: ...ersonal Space of the Advanced Box can be used to store important documents for management Separate folders for each user can be created in the machine and managed with the password used for personal authentication management Files in these folders can then be selected for printing Saving Documents in the Advanced Box P 575 Directly Storing Scanned Data on a Server Personal Folder The data scanned ...

Page 1414: ...ents to their own e mail address For example when sending a document to the e mail address of a customer as a PDF file a user can press Send to Myself displayed on the Scan and Send Basic Features screen etc to also send the PDF file to their own e mail address Scan Basic Features Screen P 497 Appendix 1400 ...

Page 1415: ... wait time before starting operations Entering Sleep Mode P 216 Use Motion Sensor P 1050 Specifying Quick Startup Settings for Main Power reduces the time required for the machine to start up after turning the main power ON enabling smoother operations Quick Startup Settings for Main Power P 1047 Preventing Missed Pages When Scanning Originals Multiple Sheet Feed Detection Specifying Detect Feeder...

Page 1416: ... Quality of Printing and Finishing Sending Clearer Faxes You can achieve more satisfying print results by using corrective functions such as gradation adjustment and density correction Adjusting Print and Finish Quality P 1198 Reproduction can be enhanced on the receiving end by setting a corresponding gamma value when sending faxes YCbCr TX Gamma Value P 1097 Appendix 1402 ...

Page 1417: ...ch panel display to inform users This function is useful for sharing information in the office Configuring the Visual Message Function P 857 Connecting to the Wireless LAN Linking with Mobile Devices A wireless LAN is built into the machine enabling you to connect a computer or mobile device to the machine as well as install it in a separate location Connecting to a Wireless LAN P 28 You can direc...

Page 1418: ... policy describes company wide rules regarding information security With this machine multiple settings related to a security policy can be set together Applying a Security Policy to the Machine P 664 Sharing Settings between Multiple Machines Personalized settings and Address Books can be synchronized and shared between multiple machines Settings specified on a single machine are reflected in all...

Page 1419: ...ine and the User s Guide refer to the main wired LAN in a dual network as the main line The sub wireless LAN or another wired LAN in a dual network is referred to as the sub line Flow of Settings Required for a Dual Network P 1405 Cautions When Using the Sub Line P 1406 Flow of Settings Required for a Dual Network In a dual network the main line and sub line have separate settings This section des...

Page 1420: ...onnecting to another network via a router Specify the required settings according to your environment Step 6 Configuring System Data Communication P 69 Set this when performing specific system data communication in environments where DNS name resolution or network connections via a proxy cannot be used Specify the required settings according to your environment Cautions When Using the Sub Line The...

Page 1421: ...C address filter Browsing using the SMB protocol The following functions and services cannot be used due to the above limitations Building a printing accounting system that performs server connections via a MEAP application Building an authentication system for an Active Directory server File sending using DNS name resolution or NetBIOS name resolution from the SMB or WebDAV protocol 1 Automatic d...

Page 1422: ... folder Information related to sending is automatically added to the file name enabling you to effectively manage faxes Saving a Copy of a Sent Document P 429 Digitizing and Managing Communication Management Reports Preventing Forgotten Originals after Scanning In addition to printing logs for sending and receiving communication management reports you can also save them as CSV files and manage the...

Page 1423: ...ming Maintenance Procedures on the Touch Panel Display Videos You can confirm procedures for replenishing consumables and cleaning by viewing videos on the touch panel display Maintenance P 1074 Appendix 1409 ...

Page 1424: ...he Sleep Mode to Save Power During Standby The machine saves power by switching to the Sleep mode or Energy Saver mode when not in use Users can also save power by only starting up the functions they require when the machine recovers from the Sleep mode Entering Sleep Mode P 216 Timer Energy Settings P 1047 Appendix 1410 ...

Page 1425: ... System Functions and Items 4XR3 0U5 Home P 1412 Copy P 1413 Fax P 1415 Scan and Send P 1417 Scan and Store P 1419 Access Stored Files P 1426 Fax I Fax Inbox P 1435 Print P 1437 Visual Message P 857 Appendix 1411 ...

Page 1426: ...and Store P 572 Access Stored Files P 572 Fax I Fax Inbox P 433 Print P 479 Tutorial P 155 Dest Fwd Settings P 218 Hold P 472 Scanner P 561 Web Access Settings Regist Shortcut P 207 Personal Settings P 209 Status Monitor P 142 Scan for Mobile P 638 Mobile Portal P 630 Visual Message P 857 uniFLOW Online Setup P 900 Personal Shared P 199 Appendix 1412 ...

Page 1427: ...ect Color P 250 1 1 P 248 Copy Ratio P 250 Select Paper P 250 Copy Sample P 285 Check Settings P 259 Previous Settings P 358 Favorite Settings P 193 Options Shortcuts P 196 1 to 5 Interrupt P 288 Options P 249 Options Book 2 Pages P 278 2 Sided P 250 Finishing Collate Group P 290 Appendix 1413 ...

Page 1428: ...ance P 270 Adjust OneTouch Color P 273 Page Numbering P 295 Copy Set Numbering P 295 Sharpness P 266 Erase Frame P 267 Watermark P 295 Print Date P 295 Shift P 313 Gutter P 305 Print Check P 286 Nega Posi P 269 Repeat Images P 315 Merge Job Blocks P 327 Job Done Notice P 333 Mirror Image P 312 Area Designation P 337 Print on Tab P 319 Store in Mail Box P 331 Superimpose Image P 324 Copy ID Card P ...

Page 1429: ...us Settings P 424 Favorite Settings P 193 Resolution P 393 Scan Size P 393 Options Shortcuts P 196 1 to 4 Address Book P 389 On Hook P 415 Direct Send P 413 Register One Touch P 389 Options P 387 Options Original Type P 393 2 Sided Original P 393 Book 2 Pages P 393 Different Size Originals P 420 Density P 393 Sharpness P 393 Copy Ratio P 393 Erase Frame P 393 Appendix 1415 ...

Page 1430: ...ild P 422 Sender Name TTI P 403 Select Line P 403 Direct Send P 413 Delayed Send P 427 Preview P 410 Finished Stamp P 412 Job Done Notice P 417 TX Report P 402 Detect Feeder Multi Sheet Fd P 403 Appendix 1416 ...

Page 1431: ...nal Folder P 500 Send to Myself P 500 Specify Destinations P 500 Details P 500 Delete Dest P 500 Cc Bcc P 500 Previous Settings P 555 Favorite Settings P 193 Select Color P 506 Resolution P 506 Scan Size P 506 File Format P 506 Options Shortcuts P 196 1 to 2 Options P 498 Options Original Type P 520 2 Sided Original P 506 Book 2 Pages P 528 Different Size Originals P 526 Density P 521 Appendix 141...

Page 1432: ...layed Send P 541 Preview P 538 Finished Stamp P 540 Job Done Notice P 543 File Name P 557 Subject Message P 559 Reply to P 559 E Mail Priority P 560 TX Report P 515 Orig Content Orientation P 515 Skip Blank Originals P 536 Detect Feeder Multi Sheet Fd P 515 Appendix 1418 ...

Page 1433: ...een P 1422 Options P 1424 Some of the modes described here are referring to the modes of the Copy or Scan and Send function Storage Selection Screen Mail Box P 592 Advanced Box P 575 Network P 587 Memory Media P 608 Advanced Box Advanced Box Details P 579 Edit Personal Space P 583 Appendix 1419 ...

Page 1434: ... Check Media Information P 610 File Selection Screen Mail Box List P 597 Thumbnail P 597 Up P 598 Update P 598 Select All Max 100 Files P 597 Clear Selection P 597 Print List P 597 Details P 597 Display Image P 597 Edit File P 597 Scan P 592 Appendix 1420 ...

Page 1435: ...ils P 580 Display Image P 580 Edit File P 580 Scan P 575 Network Up P 580 Update P 580 Folder Operations P 580 Clear Selection P 580 Details P 580 Display Image P 580 Edit File P 580 Scan P 587 Memory Media Up P 611 Update P 611 Folder Operations P 611 Clear Selection P 611 Appendix 1421 ...

Page 1436: ...ity P 250 2 Sided Original P 506 Favorite Settings P 615 Restore Default Settings P 615 File Name P 616 Options P 616 Advanced Box Select Color P 506 Resolution P 506 1 1 P 615 Copy Ratio P 506 Scan Size P 506 File Format P 506 Original Type P 520 Density P 521 2 Sided Original P 506 Favorite Settings P 615 Restore Default Settings P 615 File Name P 616 Appendix 1422 ...

Page 1437: ...riginal P 506 Favorite Settings P 615 Restore Default Settings P 615 File Name P 616 Options P 616 Memory Media Select Color P 506 Resolution P 506 1 1 P 615 Copy Ratio P 506 Scan Size P 506 File Format P 506 Original Type P 520 Density P 521 2 Sided Original P 506 Favorite Settings P 615 Restore Default Settings P 615 File Name P 616 Options P 616 Appendix 1423 ...

Page 1438: ...P 269 Sharpness P 266 Area Designation P 337 Skip Blank Originals P 346 Detect Feeder Multi Sheet Feed P 515 Advanced Box Book 2 Pages P 528 Erase Frame P 523 Different Size Originals P 526 Job Build P 532 Sharpness P 522 Orig Content Orientation P 515 Skip Blank Originals P 536 Detect Feeder Multi Sheet Feed P 515 Preview P 538 Appendix 1424 ...

Page 1439: ...ntation P 515 Skip Blank Originals P 536 Detect Feeder Multi Sheet Feed P 515 Preview P 538 Memory Media Book 2 Pages P 528 Erase Frame P 523 Different Size Originals P 526 Job Build P 532 Sharpness P 522 Orig Content Orientation P 515 Skip Blank Originals P 536 Detect Feeder Multi Sheet Feed P 515 Preview P 538 Appendix 1425 ...

Page 1440: ...1429 Print Screen P 1430 Print Settings Screen P 1430 Options P 1432 Some of the modes described here are referring to the mode of the Copy function Storage Selection Screen Mail Box P 596 Advanced Box P 579 Network P 588 Memory Media P 610 Advanced Box Advanced Box Details P 579 Edit Personal Space P 583 Appendix 1426 ...

Page 1441: ... Media Information P 610 File Selection Screen Mail Box List P 597 Thumbnail P 597 Up P 598 Update P 598 Select All Max 100 Files P 597 Clear Selection P 597 Print List P 597 Details P 597 Display Image P 597 Edit File P 597 Send P 603 Print P 601 Appendix 1427 ...

Page 1442: ...ls P 580 Display Image P 580 Edit File P 580 Print P 584 Network Up P 580 Update P 580 Folder Operations P 580 Clear Selection P 580 Details P 580 Display Image P 580 Edit File P 580 Print P 589 Memory Media Up P 611 Update P 611 Folder Operations P 611 Clear Selection P 611 Appendix 1428 ...

Page 1443: ...der P 500 Send to Myself P 500 Specify Destinations P 500 Details P 500 Delete Dest P 500 Cc Bcc P 500 File Format P 506 Delete File After Sending P 603 Options P 498 Options Mail Box Delayed Send P 541 Job Done Notice P 543 File Name P 557 Sender Name TTI P 403 Select Line P 403 Subject Message P 559 Reply to P 559 E Mail Priority P 560 Appendix 1429 ...

Page 1444: ...il Box Select Color P 618 Select Paper P 618 Print Sample P 618 Finishing Collate Group P 290 Finishing Staple P 292 Finishing Other Finishing Functions P 294 2 Sided Printing P 620 Options P 619 Restore Settings P 619 Favorite Settings P 619 Merge Files and Print P 619 Delete File After Printing P 619 Restore Default Settings P 619 Store Settings P 619 Appendix 1430 ...

Page 1445: ...ies P 584 Options P 623 Favorite Settings P 622 Print Range P 622 Restore Default Settings P 622 Network Select Color P 622 Select Paper P 622 Finishing Collate Group P 290 Finishing Staple P 292 Finishing Other Finishing Functions P 294 2 Sided Printing P 623 Change No of Copies P 589 Options P 623 Favorite Settings P 622 Print Range P 622 Restore Default Settings P 622 Appendix 1431 ...

Page 1446: ...orite Settings P 622 Print Range P 622 Restore Default Settings P 622 Options Mail Box Add Cover P 307 Insert Sheets P 317 Job Separator P 620 Booklet P 299 Shift P 313 Secure Watermark P 349 Document Scan Lock P 352 Superimpose Image P 324 Gutter P 305 Page Numbering P 295 Copy Set Numbering P 295 Watermark P 295 Print Date P 295 Color Balance P 270 Adjust One Touch Color P 273 Print on Tab P 319...

Page 1447: ...c P 624 Skip Blank Pages P 624 Enlarge Reduce P 624 Image Orientation P 624 Print Position P 624 Network Resolution P 623 Halftones P 623 Match Paper Size P 623 Enlarge Print Area P 624 N on 1 P 624 Booklet P 299 Print Comments P 624 Password to Open Doc P 624 Skip Blank Pages P 624 Enlarge Reduce P 624 Image Orientation P 624 Print Position P 624 Appendix 1433 ...

Page 1448: ...tones P 623 Match Paper Size P 623 Enlarge Print Area P 624 N on 1 P 624 Booklet P 299 Print Comments P 624 Password to Open Doc P 624 Skip Blank Pages P 624 Enlarge Reduce P 624 Image Orientation P 624 Print Position P 624 Appendix 1434 ...

Page 1449: ... Memory RX Inbox P 433 Divided Data RX Inbox P 434 Memory RX Inbox Select All Max 32 Files P 434 Clear Selection P 434 Details P 434 Display Image P 434 Delete P 434 I Fax Memory Lock P 433 Fax Memory Lock P 433 Send P 434 Print P 433 Divided Data RX Inbox Divided Data List P 434 Appendix 1435 ...

Page 1450: ...Delete P 434 Print When Deleted P 434 Confidential Fax Inbox Details P 436 Display Image P 436 Delete P 436 Print P 436 Appendix 1436 ...

Page 1451: ...ared Group P 479 Jobs to Be Printed P 480 Jobs Printed P 480 Scheduled Print P 480 Select All Max 100 jobs P 481 Clear Selection P 481 Print Settings P 480 Display Image P 480 Delete Job P 480 Cancel Printing P 480 Appendix 1437 ...

Page 1452: ...Service from the Remote UI In order to install a MEAP application you are required to log in as an administrator Logging into the Machine P 160 SMS will always use encrypted TLS communications regardless of the setting of Use TLS in MEAP Settings Therefore if the default key for SSL is not set in advance you cannot log in to SMS Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS P 739 Multiple users cann...

Page 1453: ...Managing MEAP Applications P 1443 Managing MEAP Application Licenses P 1448 Appendix 1439 ...

Page 1454: ...equired For more information see the manual provided with each MEAP application Depending on the MEAP application it may require a specific condition for installation For more information see the user s manual for the MEAP application to be used The maximum number of MEAP applications that can be installed on this machine is 19 Acquiring the License File The following information is required for a...

Page 1455: ...application Installing the Application 1 Log in to the Remote UI Starting the Remote UI P 784 2 Click Service Management Service on the portal page 3 Click Install MEAP Application 4 Click Browse specify the application file and the license file and click OK Appendix 1441 ...

Page 1456: ...wnloaded from the following URL http canon com fau downloads You can upgrade the MEAP application version in the same procedure as the installation Stop the MEAP application on the SMS screen before installing Managing MEAP Applications P 1443 The maximum amount of hard disk that applications can use is approximately 4 GB If the machine is performing its shutdown process while an application is be...

Page 1457: ...plications by using the SMS from the Remote UI While you are operating on the SMS screen do not use the Back button on your Web browser the SMS screen may not operate properly 1 Log in to the Remote UI Starting the Remote UI P 784 2 Click Service Management Service on the portal page 3 Configure the settings on the SMS screen Appendix 1443 ...

Page 1458: ...e this setting especially when you use the DepartmentID Authentication login service You must enter between 8 and 32 alphanumeric characters for the password MEAP Application Setting Information Management Displays or deletes information related to MEAP application settings If there is setting information that is shared between the applications Shared Setting Information of Applications is display...

Page 1459: ...r the license file has expired or all counters set for the MEAP application exceed the maximum value Unnecessary You can use the MEAP application even if you do not have a license file If Over Limit or Invalid appears If the validity of the license file expires or a counter exceeds the maximum value the MEAP application cannot be used By adding a license you can extend the validity or increase the...

Page 1460: ...P application you may need to configure authentication information If the login application is changed reconfirm the authentication information in Set MEAP Authentication It may be necessary to re enter the authentication information 1 Click MEAP Application Management click an application to set the authentication information 2 Click Authentication Information Settings 3 Enter the user name and p...

Page 1461: ...s If you uninstall a MEAP application you may be required to restart the machine Follow the on screen instructions to restart the machine If the Export Package of this application will be unavailable message is displayed the MEAP application you are uninstalling is linked with other applications If this MEAP application is uninstalled other applications may not be able to be used 4 When you finish...

Page 1462: ...ntinue to use the MEAP application by adding a license file In addition if you want to delete a MEAP application you are required to delete the license file in advance 1 Log in to the Remote UI Starting the Remote UI P 784 2 Click Service Management Service on the portal page 3 Click MEAP Application Management and click the application to manage the license 4 Click License Management and perform ...

Page 1463: ...e 1 Click Disable Yes 2 Click Download and specify the location to save the license file The disabled license file and the license file saved on your computer can be installed on the same machine again Deleting the license file Before deleting the license file you are required to disable the license file in advance 1 Click Disable Yes 2 Click Delete Yes Once you have deleted the disabled license f...

Page 1464: ...rtmentID Authentication is started If you click Service Management Service on the portal page of the Remote UI the login screen to the SMS is displayed For security purposes the machine is configured not to permit login with the default password dedicated for the SMS Press Management Settings Security Settings Authentication Password Settings Password Settings temporally set Allow Use of Default P...

Page 1465: ...enticated with a Department ID and PIN None Off Set System Manager Users other than the System Manager Not Set All users None Changing the System Manager ID and PIN 1 Press Log In 2 Enter System Manager ID and System Manager PIN and press Log In Immediately after the DepartmentID Authentication has started both the System Manager ID and PIN are set as 7654321 You cannot register a Department ID or...

Page 1466: ...t register a Department ID or PIN consisting only of 0s such as 00 or 0000000 Even if you enter fewer than seven digits zeros are added to the start of the number and a seven digit number is set However the zeros at the start of the number can be omitted when logging in For example even if you enter 2 02 or 002 the PIN is set as 0000002 However you can log in by entering 2 02 or 002 If you do not ...

Page 1467: ... Manager ID System Manager PIN and then click Log In Administrator General users do not need to enter the Department ID and PIN Click Log In General User Implementing Function Restrictions and User Management Configure the settings as necessary Checking page totals Management Settings User Management Department ID Management Page Totals Check the page total Setting the maximum number of pages for ...

Page 1468: ...te Yes OK OK Blocking Printer Jobs and Remote Scan Jobs When Department ID is Unknown Management Settings User Management Department ID Management Set Allow Printer Jobs with Unknown IDs or Allow Remote Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs to Off OK Not authenticate black and white copy print jobs when using Department ID Management Management Settings User Management Department ID Management Set Allow Blac...

Page 1469: ...System Control Panel Hardware and Sound Devices and Printers Windows Server 2008 Start select Control Panel double click Printers Windows Server 2016 Right click select Control Panel Hardware Devices and Printers Displaying Shared Printers in the Print Server 1 Open Windows Explorer Windows 7 Server 2008 Start select All Programs or Programs Accessories Windows Explorer Windows Server 2012 Right c...

Page 1470: ...er is displayed n Checking the LPR RAW Printer Port 1 Open the printer folder Displaying the Printer Folder P 1455 2 Right click your printer icon of the machine and click Printer properties or Properties Appendix 1456 ...

Page 1471: ...e of the screen Tap or click Devices Print The driver that you use Print Windows 10 Tap or click Print on the application The driver that you use Print If you print using this method only a limited number of print settings are available If the message The printer requires your attention Go to the desktop to take care of it is displayed go to the desktop and follow the instructions in the displayed...

Page 1472: ...oduct improvement or future release Functional Specifications Fax Function P 1459 Send Functions P 1460 Printer Functions P 1463 Storage Space Functions P 1466 Management Functions P 1468 Environment To Use the Machine System Environment P 1475 Network Environment P 1477 Restrictions When Connecting to imagePASS P 1479 System Options P 1481 Appendix 1458 ...

Page 1473: ...B5 B5R A5R 11 x 17 LGL LTR LTRR STMTR 8K and 16K No of Memory RX Jobs Up to 320 jobs Transmission Times JBIG Approximately 2 6 seconds When sending A4 Canon original paper Normal 8 pels x 3 85 line mm ECM JBIG 1 When using an IP telephone service facsimile communication may not be performed normally via an IP telephone line It is recommended to use facsimile communication via a general telephone P...

Page 1474: ...b Format to PDF A Trace Smooth Encrypt XPS Compact OCR Text Searchable PDF XPS Device Signature User Signature Office Open XML PowerPoint Word 1 Single Page only Pull Scan Max Original Scanning Size Depends on copy specifications Color mode Color Black and White Auto Switch Color Black and White Grayscale Resolution for Scan 75 dpi x 75 dpi to 600 dpi x 600 dpi in 1 dpi increments Compatible OS Wi...

Page 1475: ...erver 2016 Lotus Domino R9 0 Sendmail 8 14 4 Receiving Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 SP3 Microsoft Exchange Server 2010 Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 Microsoft Exchange Server 2016 Lotus Domino R9 0 Qpopper 4 0 19 1 Supports SMTP authentication and encrypted communication TLS during SMTP send receive 2 Supports APOP POP before SMTP and encrypted communication TLS during POP RX 3 Available depend...

Page 1476: ... that can be handled is 64 However the actual number of send jobs that the machine can handle may be less than 120 depending on the following conditions When multiple documents are being sent at the same time When large documents are being sent When a large amount of memory is being used for the Mail Box and Fax I Fax Inbox Appendix 1462 ...

Page 1477: ...nt Fonts None Interface USB2 0High Speed 1000Base T 100Base TX 10Base T IEEE 802 3 compliant PCL Printer Function Type Internal Print Size Depends on copy specifications Print Speed Depends on copy specifications Data Processing Resolution 600 dpi x 600 dpi 1200 dpi x 1200 dpi Page Description Language PDL PCL5 PCL6 Protocol Supported TCP IP LPD Port9100 IPP IPPS FTP WSD Compatible OS Windows 7 8 ...

Page 1478: ...ws 7 8 1 10 Server 2008 Server 2008 R2 Server 2012 Server 2012 R2 Server 2016 Server 2019 Mac OS X 10 9 and later PPD Windows 7 8 1 10 Mac OS X 10 3 9 and later Resident Fonts 136 Roman Interface USB2 0High Speed 1000Base T 100Base TX 10Base T IEEE 802 3 compliant Functions That Can Be Used with Each Page Description Language and File Format Functions that can be used with each page description la...

Page 1479: ...t to Auto Color Black White or Two Colors in the print settings when the job is forcibly retained in the machine 2 You cannot change the paper source if different sizes of paper are specified in the print job 3 Indicates items that can be selected only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached to the machine 4 Settings can only be changed for jobs from the Canon PS3 printer driver exclud...

Page 1480: ...0 boxes File Format for Storing Proprietary format Resolution for Storing Copy Black and White Color 600 dpi x 600 dpi Scan and Store Black and White Color 600 dpi x 600 dpi Scan and Send Black and White Color 100 dpi x 100 dpi 150 dpi x 150 dpi 200 dpi x 100 dpi 200 dpi x 200 dpi 200 dpi x 400 dpi 300 dpi x 300 dpi 400 dpi x 400 dpi 600 dpi x 600 dpi Printer Driver Black and White Color 600 dpi x...

Page 1481: ... 1 Includes documents stored in the Fax I Fax Inbox and Hold Queue However these numbers may vary depending on the remaining storage capacity Appendix 1467 ...

Page 1482: ...tion supported by the current version of User Authentication are as follows Encryption method 128 bit AES Advanced Encryption Standard 256 bit AES Advanced Encryption Standard DES Data Encryption Standard RC4 The available encryption methods may vary depending on the Active Directory settings Of the available encryption methods the one with the highest cipher strength is automatically selected Whe...

Page 1483: ...s that can be used for communication using the sub line and are registered by default are indicated below Exception addresses 0 0 0 1 to 255 255 255 255 Exception port numbers 53 67 68 80 161 443 515 631 3702 5353 5357 5358 8000 8080 8443 9013 9100 10443 20010 47545 Inbound filter only Registration of Certificates User Signature Keys Certificates CA Certificates S MIME Certificates The algorithms ...

Page 1484: ... Note however that CRL cannot be registered in the following cases The data size of the CRL exceeds 1 MB An unsupported signature algorithm is being used The number of revoked certificates registered in one CRL file exceeds 1 000 Definition of Weak Encryption When Prohibit Use of Weak Encryption is set to On the use of the following algorithms are prohibited Hash MD4 MD5 SHA 1 HMAC HMAC MD5 Common...

Page 1485: ...of files to the Advanced Box Network Advanced Box of other machines and Memory Media Mail Box Operation Log 8197 This log contains information related to the operations performed on data in the Mail Box the Memory RX Inbox and the Confidential Fax Inbox Mail Box Authentication Log 8199 This log contains information related to the authentication status of the Mail Box the Memory RX Inbox and the Co...

Page 1486: ...Authentication Print Log 8207 This log contains information and the operation history related to the forced hold print jobs Setting Synchronization Log 8208 This log contains information related to the synchronization of machine settings Synchronizing Settings for Multiple Canon Multifunction Printers P 864 Log for Audit Log Management 3001 This log contains information related to the starting and...

Page 1487: ...ersonal Address List 25 Group Address List 4 000 1 10 groups 2 x 400 destinations 3 1 Total 20 000 for all groups 2 Max number of groups per user a total of 50 groups can be registered in a device 3 Max number of destinations per group Images That Can Be Imported for Login Screen Background File Size 1 024 KB File Extension jpg jpeg or png Image Size 800 pixels x 486 pixels or smaller Visual Messa...

Page 1488: ...ML over 799 pixels x 509 pixels can be used by scrolling through them SCEP Server Support Only the Network Device Enrollment Service NDES of Windows Server 2008 R2 2012 R2 2016 is supported Appendix 1474 ...

Page 1489: ...r 2010 Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 Microsoft Exchange Server 2016 Lotus Domino R9 0 Qpopper 4 0 19 File servers available as destinations for file transmission FTP Windows 7 Server 2008 SP2 Server 2008 R2 SP1 Internet Information Services 7 5 Windows 8 Server 2012 Internet Information Services 8 0 Windows 8 1 Server 2012 R2 Internet Information Services 8 5 Windows 10 Server 2016 Internet Infor...

Page 1490: ...er 2012 Internet Information Services 8 0 Windows Server 2016 Internet Information Services 10 0 Windows Server 2019 Client computers allowed for accessing the Advanced Box Windows 7 Windows 8 1 Windows 10 Types of LDAP servers Windows Server 2008 SP2 with Active Directory Windows Server 2012 with Active Directory Windows Server 2012 R2 with Active Directory Windows Server 2016 with Active Directo...

Page 1491: ... sub line see Cautions When Using the Sub Line P 1406 Wireless LAN Specifications Standard IEEE 802 11b IEEE 802 11g IEEE 802 11n Transmission Scheme IEEE 802 11b Modulation system DS SS IEEE 802 11g Modulation system OFDM method IEEE 802 11n Modulation system OFDM method Frequency Range 2 412 to 2 472 GHz Maximum Radio Frequency Power Transmitte 18 21 dBm Security encryption method Infrastructure...

Page 1492: ...ailable for Direct Connection Type Port Number Protocol TCP 515 LPD 9100 RAW 80 8000 8080 HTTP 80 631 IPP 443 10443 IPPS 443 8443 HTTPS 9013 CPCA unique Canon protocol 5357 5358 WSD UDP 161 SNMP 5353 mDNS 67 68 DHCPv4 3702 WSD 47545 CPCA unique Canon protocol Appendix 1478 ...

Page 1493: ...ion Settings Common Print Settings is set to On the IP address is not printed When Using the Advanced Box SMB cannot be used to make the Advanced Box available to the outside Use WebDAV instead When specifying the URI TX settings in the detailed settings of the Advanced Box it is necessary to specify the port number when TLS is disabled 18080 when TLS is enabled 18443 in the path to the target fol...

Page 1494: ...s Book P 223 When Using the Remote UI Before starting the Remote UI configure the Network Settings items in Fiery on the control panel To start the Remote UI start the Web browser and enter the URL below The Remote UI starts when you click Launch Remote UI on the WebTools screen that is displayed http IP address of imagePASS When Using the Print Function imagePASS cannot be used together with the ...

Page 1495: ...This option enables you to print barcodes For more details see Bar Code Printing via the online manual site PCL International Font Set This option enables you to add the following fonts for a PCL printer As a result you can output using multiple languages in a SAP Unicode environment Andale and WorldType Collection J Japanese Version Andale and WorldType Collection K Korean Version Andale and Worl...

Page 1496: ...he online manual site Universal Send Advanced Feature Set The Universal Send Advanced Feature Set is useful when using the Send function on the machine It enables you to send documents in the following formats Trace Smooth PDF The Trace Smooth mode enables you to convert the text and line drawings of a scanned image to scalable outline data The outline data Trace can be extracted and used in Adobe...

Page 1497: ...cing the hard disk installed in the machine with the 2 5inch 1TB HDD you can expand the memory capacity of the machine to 1 TB Once you replace the hard disk with the 2 5inch 1TB HDD the additional 2 5inch 1TB HDD is required to back up the data by using the HDD Mirroring Kit Using as a Simple File Server P 574 HDD Mirroring Kit The HDD Mirroring Kit enables you to back up the data on the hard dis...

Page 1498: ...G TIFF PDF Trace Smooth PDF Limited Color PDF Compact PDF OCR Text Searchable PDF Encrypt PDF Device Signature PDF User Signature PDF Format to PDF A XPS Compact XPS OCR Text Searchable XPS Device Signature XPS User Signature OOXML Word OOXML PowerPoint The following file formats can be used with the Access Stored Files function JPEG TIFF PDF XPS To print files in other formats move the files to y...

Page 1499: ...ications of the main unit and optional equipment of this product Note that the specifications are subject to change without notice for product improvement or future release Machine Specifications Main Unit P 1486 Feeder P 1489 Available Paper P 1490 Specifications of Optional Equipment Cassette Feeding Unit AM P 1500 High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit A P 1501 Paper Deck Unit F P 1502 Inner Finis...

Page 1500: ...31 8 mm 1 Types of Original Sheet book and three dimensional objects up to 2 kg Automatically Detectable Sizes of Original A3 A4 B4 B5 A4R A5 B5R B6 A5R 11 x 17 LTR LGL LTRR STMT STMTR Copy Size Paper Sizes Max 320 0 mm x 457 2 mm 2 Min 98 0 mm x 139 7 mm 2 Margin Top 4 0 mm Left and Right 2 5 mm Bottom 2 5 mm Paper Weight Paper Drawer 52 g m2 to 256 g m2 Multi Purpose Tray 52 g m2 to 300 g m2 Pap...

Page 1501: ...eet minute Plain A4 100 imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5560i III Full Color 60 Black and White 60 imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5550i III Full Color 50 Black and White 50 imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5540i III Full Color 40 Black and White 40 imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5535i III Full Color 35 Black and White 35 Magnification Regular Paper Size Same Ratio 1 1 0 5 Enlargement 115 122 141 200 400 Reduction 86 81 70 61 50 25 Zoom 25 ...

Page 1502: ...ts 80 g m2 1 When using the Fax Scan and Send or Scan and Store function you can scan the originals up to 301 mm x 424 mm A3 or 283 4 mm x 435 8 mm 11x17 2 Including multi purpose tray 3 If Quick Startup Settings for Main Power is set to On it takes 4 seconds until the key operation on the touch panel display is available after turning on the main power of the machine Depending on the situations t...

Page 1503: ...5 B5 and A5R Original Tray Capacity Approximately 150 sheets 80 g m2 height 16 5 mm or less Original Scanning Speed A4 1 sided Scanning Scanning 300 dpi x 300 dpi 4 Full Color 80 pages minute Black and White 80 pages minute Copying 600 dpi x 600 dpi Full Color 60 pages minute Black and White 80 pages minute 2 sided Scanning Scanning 300 dpi x 300 dpi 4 Full Color 160 pages minute Black and White 1...

Page 1504: ...arding Paper P 1498 Storing Paper Printed With the Machine P 1499 Supported Paper Sizes Paper Sizes Paper Source Standard Paper Source Optional Paper Drawer 1 Paper Drawer 2 Multi Purpose Tray Cassette Feeding Unit AM High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit A Paper Deck Unit F A4 A4R A3 A5 A5R A6R B4 B5 B5R 305x457 mm 320x450 mm SRA3 16K 1 You can use custom size settings ranging from 98 mm x 148 mm t...

Page 1505: ...F 16KR 8K LTR LTRR LGL 11x17 STMT STMT Ｒ EXEC FOOLSCAP FOLIO OFICIO LEGAL India FOOLSCAP Australia F4A LETTER Government LETTERR Government LEGAL Government OFICIO Mexico OFICIO Ecuador OFICIO Argentina 1 You can use custom size settings ranging from 98 mm x 148 mm to 297 mm x 215 9 mm 2 You can use custom size settings ranging from 98 mm x 182 mm to 304 8 mm x 457 2 mm Appendix 1491 ...

Page 1506: ... 320 0 mm x 457 2 mm Custom Size 98 0 mm x 139 7 mm to 320 0 mm x 457 2 mm 1 2 2 No 10 COM10 ISO C5 DL Monarch Nagagata 3 Yougatanaga 3 Kakugata 2 1 You can use custom size settings ranging from 98 mm x 148 mm to 297 mm x 215 9 mm 2 You can use custom size settings ranging from 98 mm x 182 mm to 304 8 mm x 457 2 mm Paper sizes supported by this machine The following table shows most of the sizes o...

Page 1507: ...Appendix 1493 ...

Page 1508: ...AL Government 203 2 mm x 330 2 mm OFICIO Mexico 216 0 mm x 341 0 mm OFICIO Ecuador 220 0 mm x 320 0 mm OFICIO Argentina 220 0 mm x 340 0 mm LETTER Argentina 220 0 mm x 280 0 mm OFICIO Brazil 216 0 mm x 355 0 mm Vertical side and Horizontal side of paper In the User s Guide regardless of the paper orientation the side of paper perpendicular to the front of the machine is referred to as the vertical...

Page 1509: ...4 A5 B5 LTR STMT size paper placed in landscape orientation respectively Supported Paper Types Chlorine free paper can be used with this machine Paper Type Paper Weight Paper Source Standard Paper Source Optional Paper Drawer 1 Paper Drawer 2 Multi Purpose Tray Cassette Feeding Unit AM High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit A Paper Deck Unit F Thin 2 52 to 59 g m2 Thin 1 60 to 63 g m2 Plain 1 64 to 7...

Page 1510: ...m2 Recycled 1 1 64 to 75 g m2 Recycled 2 1 76 to 90 g m2 Recycled 3 1 91 to 105 g m2 Pre punched 64 to 81 g m2 Transparency 2 121 to 220 g m2 Labels 118 to 185 g m2 Tab 1 2 91 to 105 g m2 Tab 2 2 106 to 128 g m2 Tab 3 2 129 to 150 g m2 Tab 4 2 151 to 220 g m2 Color 64 to 81 g m2 Letterhead 106 to 163 g m2 Bond 3 82 to 99 g m2 Washi JPN paper 4 93 to 93 g m2 Tracing 4 5 64 to 81 g m2 1 Sided Coated...

Page 1511: ... paper that meets the following requirements Paper size 305 mm x 457 mm A3 B4 A4 A4R B5 B5R A5R OFICIO OFICIO Ecuador OFICIO Brazil OFICIO Mexico OFICIO Argentina LETTER Argentina LETTERR Argentina LETTER Government LETTERR Government LEGAL Government FOOLSCAP Australia FOOLSCAP FOLIO F4A LEGAL India and Custom Size 139 7 mm x 182 mm to 304 8 mm x 457 2 mm Paper type Thin 1 to Thin 2 Plain 1 to Pl...

Page 1512: ...aper Thin straw paper Paper printed by a thermal transfer printer The reverse side of paper which has been printed by a thermal transfer printer Highly textured paper Glossy paper When using paper Only use paper that has fully acclimatized to the environment in which this machine is installed Using paper that has been stored under different temperature or humidity may cause paper jams or result in...

Page 1513: ...her with items made from PVC polyvinyl chloride such as clear folders The toner may melt causing paper to become stuck to PVC based material Store paper so that it does not become folded or wrinkled Doing so may cause the toner to come off If you intend to store paper for long periods two or more years preserve them in a binder etc Long term storage may cause paper to discolor which in turn may ca...

Page 1514: ...nit AM 4XR3 0WC Paper Size Weight Type Available Paper P 1490 Paper Drawers Capacity 550 sheets x 2 80 g m2 640 sheets x 2 64 g m2 Dimensions W x D x H Weight 620 mm x 700 mm x 251 mm Approximately 22 5 kg Appendix 1500 ...

Page 1515: ...e Feeding Unit A 4XR3 0WE Paper Size Weight Type Available Paper P 1490 Paper Drawers Capacity 2 450 sheets 80 g m2 2 850 sheets 64 g m2 Dimensions W x D x H Weight 620 mm x 700 mm x 251 mm Approximately 30 kg Appendix 1501 ...

Page 1516: ... Type Available Paper P 1490 Paper Drawers Capacity 2 700 sheets 80 g m2 3 000 sheets 64 g m2 Dimensions W x D x H Weight 400 mm x 630 mm x 440 mm Approximately 31 kg Installation Space Including the Main Unit W x D 969 mm x 742 mm Appendix 1502 ...

Page 1517: ...m x 457 mm 320 mm x 450 mm SRA3 A3 B4 A4R B5R 11 x 17 LGL LTRR 8K and 16KR 250 sheets or 1 26 mm in height A6R 30 sheets 64 g m2 to 300 g m2 Collate Offset and Group Offset mode A4 B5 LTR EXEC and 16K 500 sheets or 52 mm in height A3 B4 A4R B5R 11 x 17 LGL LTRR 8K and 16KR 250 sheets or height 26 mm Staple Corner Double mode A4 B5 LTR EXEC and 16K 30 sets or height 52 mm A3 B4 A4R 11 x 17 LGL LTRR...

Page 1518: ...B4 A4 B5 11 x 17 LTR EXEC 8K and 16K Paper Weight 52 g m2 to 300 g m2 Punch Hole Two Four Holes or Two Three Holes Dimensions W x D x H Weight 466 mm x 525 mm x 225 mm Approximately 8 6 kg Installation Space Including the Main Unit W x D 1 066 mm x 742 mm when the auxiliary tray is extended 1 You cannot use Thin paper 52 g m2 to 59 g m2 for two sided copying printing and tab paper 2 For 81 4 g m2 ...

Page 1519: ...A5 A5R LTR STMT STMTR EXEC and 16K 3 000 sheets or height 423 mm 3 305 mm x 457 mm 320 mm x 450 mm SRA3 A3 B4 A4R B5R 11 x 17 LGL LTRR 8K and 16KR 1 500 sheets or height 216 mm A6R 250 sheets 52 g m2 to 105 g m2 or 50 sheets 106 g m2 to 300 g m2 No Collating Collate Group mode with different paper sizes Combination of B5 A4 and LTR 3 000 sheets or 423 mm in height Combinations including A6R 250 sh...

Page 1520: ... 8K 16K and 16KR Three Holes A3 B4 A4 B5 11 x 17 LTR EXEC 8K and 16K When the 4 Hole Puncher Unit A is attached Four Holes A3 B4 A4 A4R B5 B5R A5 11 x 17 LGL LTR LTRR EXEC 8K 16K and 16KR Paper Weight 52 g m2 to 300 g m2 Punch Hole Four Holes Two Four Holes or Two Three Holes Dimensions W x D x H Weight 537 mm 637 mm 5 x 623 mm x 1 095 mm 1 142 mm 5 Approximately 31 kg Installation Space Including...

Page 1521: ... A5R LTR STMT STMTR EXEC and 16K 3 000 sheets or height 423 mm 3 305 mm x 457 mm 320 mm x 450 mm SRA3 A3 B4 A4R B5R 11 x 17 LGL LTRR 8K and 16KR 1 500 sheets or height 216 mm A6R 250 sheets 52 g m2 to 105 g m2 or 50 sheets 106 g m2 to 300 g m2 No Collating Collate Group mode with different paper sizes Combination of B5 A4 and LTR 3 000 sheets or 423 mm in height Combinations including A6R 250 shee...

Page 1522: ...ttached Two Holes A3 B4 A4 A4R B5 B5R A5 11 x 17 LGL LTR LTRR EXEC 8K 16K and 16KR Three Holes A3 B4 A4 B5 11 x 17 LTR EXEC 8K and 16K When the 4 Hole Puncher Unit A is attached Four Holes A3 B4 A4 A4R B5 B5R A5 11 x 17 LGL LTR LTRR EXEC 8K 16K and 16KR Paper Weight 52 g m2 to 300 g m2 Punch Hole Four Holes Two Four Holes or Two Three Holes Saddle Stitch Fold Max Saddle Stitching Capacity 5 20 she...

Page 1523: ...ries in other cases 3 Thin 52 g m2 to 59 g m2 1 500 sheets or 216 mm in height 4 When the standard staple cartridge is attached The maximum stapling capacity may vary depending on the paper type and weight 5 including 1 cover sheet up to 256 g m2 6 When the auxiliary tray is extended Appendix 1509 ...

Page 1524: ...ight 52 g m2 to 300 g m2 Paper Type Paper available for the Main Unit Supported Paper Types P 1495 Capacity Lower Tray Tray A 250 sheets 80 g m2 1 Upper Tray Tray B 100 sheets 80 g m2 1 Dimensions W x D x H Weight 427 mm x 407 mm x 76 mm Approximately 0 6 kg 1 When A4 or smaller size paper is used Appendix 1510 ...

Page 1525: ...Weight 52 g m2 to 220 g m2 Capacity 100 sheets 80 g m2 1 Dimensions W x D x H Weight 258 mm x 373 mm x 97 mm Approximately 0 5 kg Installation Space Including the Main Unit W x D 1 067 mm x 742 mm when the auxiliary tray is extended 1 When A4 or smaller size paper is used Appendix 1511 ...

Page 1526: ...d Readout Method Magnetic readout Magnetic Card Reading Direction Face up Store Replay Replay Dimensions W x D x H 88 mm x 96 mm x 40 mm excluding the attachment kit and cable Weight Approximately 200 g including the attachment kit and cable Appendix 1512 ...

Page 1527: ...and stapling or install an additional output tray Staple Finisher Y Booklet Finisher Y Buffer Pass Unit L 2 4 Hole Puncher Unit A 2 3 Hole Puncher Unit A 4 Hole Puncher Unit A P 1531 Inner Finisher H Inner 2 4 Hole Puncher B Inner 2 3 Hole Puncher B P 1544 Copy Tray J P 1556 Inner 2way Tray J P 1557 For the optional equipment enabling you to use functions such as folding and stapling see Optional ...

Page 1528: ...ace your hands on the output tray of the finisher The tray may move upward and your hands may get caught The trays of the finisher move during copying or printing Do not place anything under the trays as doing so may damage the trays Do not place anything other than output paper in the trays of the finisher as doing so may damage the trays Do not set remove the hard disk holder when the machine is...

Page 1529: ... Some of the settings may not be displayed depending on the configuration of optional equipment installed on the machine Appendix 1515 ...

Page 1530: ...Unit AM Load the type of paper that you frequently use You can load paper that cannot be loaded in the paper drawer 1 such as A3 and custom size paper Cassette Feeding Unit AM P 1522 2 4 Hole Puncher Unit A 2 3 Hole Puncher Unit A 4 Hole Puncher Unit A If you install the 2 4 Hole Puncher Unit A 2 3 Hole Puncher Unit A or 4 Hole Puncher Unit A in the Staple Finisher Y or Booklet Finisher Y you can ...

Page 1531: ... the stapler or bind without the stapler Inner Finisher H Inner 2 4 Hole Puncher B Inner 2 3 Hole Puncher B P 1544 Inner 2 4 Hole Puncher B Inner 2 3 Hole Puncher B If you install the Inner 2 4 Hole Puncher B or Inner 2 3 Hole Puncher B in the Inner Finisher H you can punch holes in your printouts Inner Finisher H Inner 2 4 Hole Puncher B Inner 2 3 Hole Puncher B P 1544 Appendix 1517 ...

Page 1532: ...l large capacity paper source Paper Deck Unit F P 1527 High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit A If you install the High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit A to the machine you have an additional large capacity cassette High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit A P 1523 Utility Tray B This option provides space for placing originals Inner 2way Tray J This option enables paper to be output to two locations Inner...

Page 1533: ...ach the Tab Feeding Attachment Kit F to load tab paper into the paper drawer of the machine This option can only be attached to the Paper Drawer 2 and holds only A4 tab paper For information on the combination of options that can be installed on the machine contact your local authorized Canon dealer Some of the settings may not be displayed depending on the configuration of optional equipment inst...

Page 1534: ...that can be loaded differ according to the type of paper drawer FL Cassette BA Available Locations Paper Drawer 1 Available paper size The largest standard size that can be loaded is A4 FL Cassette AZ Available Locations Paper Drawer 2 3 or 4 Available paper size The largest standard size that can be loaded is A3 Appendix 1520 ...

Page 1535: ... When loading paper of a different size into a paper drawer adjust the guides Basic Paper Loading Method P 117 For information on available paper sizes see Available Paper P 1490 Appendix 1521 ...

Page 1536: ... different sized paper in the optional paper drawers enables reduced work for switching paper Paper drawer Load Paper Basic Paper Loading Method P 117 Lower right cover Open this cover when clearing a paper jam inside the machine Paper Jams in a Paper Source P 1348 Appendix 1522 ...

Page 1537: ...jam inside the machine Paper Jams in a Paper Source P 1348 Loading Paper into the High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit A If paper runs out and printing is stopped when you are printing with the staple setting do not remove the output sheets that are waiting to be stapled Printing and stapling resume after you clear the paper jam Only A4 paper can be loaded in the High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit...

Page 1538: ...stack well and tap it on a flat surface to align the edges 3 Load the paper 1 Load the paper stack with the print side face up and against the right side wall of the paper drawer 2 Move the paper guide to the left edge Appendix 1524 ...

Page 1539: ...ceed the load limit line when loading paper Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit line Loading too much paper can cause paper jams If you use paper with a logo mark pay attention to the orientation when loading it in the paper source Loading Preprinted Paper P 132 4 Gently insert the paper drawer into the machine Appendix 1525 ...

Page 1540: ...ity Cassette Feeding Unit A that has been previously copied onto as this may result in a malfunction or damage to the machine Always use the multi purpose tray to feed paper when you want to print onto the back of a sheet of paper 2nd side of 2 Sided copy You will not be able to make copies or print if the paper drawer is not completely pushed into the paper deck unit If problems occur when printi...

Page 1541: ... to open the paper deck In this case press to reactivate the machine and then press the open button on the Paper Deck Unit F Loading Paper into the Paper Deck Unit F If paper runs out and printing is stopped when you are printing with the staple setting do not remove the output sheets that are waiting to be stapled Printing and stapling resume after you clear the paper jam The paper size of the Pa...

Page 1542: ...2 Open the paper deck The inside lifter automatically descends to the paper loading position 2 Prepare the paper to load Fan the sheets several times and align the edges to facilitate feeding 3 Load the paper stack into the paper deck Appendix 1528 ...

Page 1543: ...items other than paper in the paper loading part of the paper deck This may cause a malfunction When A4 size paper is fixed as the loadable paper size do not load other sizes of paper such as A5 etc Loading the incorrect paper size may cause damage to the product You will not be able to make copies or print if you load paper that exceeds the loading limit mark or if the paper deck is not completel...

Page 1544: ...on pay attention to the orientation of the original to be placed Orientation of the original when copying P 132 Set Speed Priority for Copying from Feeder to Off in advance Speed Priority for Copying from Feeder P 1092 Appendix 1530 ...

Page 1545: ...ur fingers This function is useful for saving staples and also binding printouts briefly For information on the paper sizes that can be used for Staple Free see Staple Finisher Y P 1505 and Booklet Finisher Y P 1507 For information on the functions or paper that cannot be used with Staple Free see Restrictions Regarding the Combination of Functions P 362 The following are unavailable depending on ...

Page 1546: ...r Pass Unit L Open to remove jammed paper Front cover upper Open to remove jammed paper clear a staple jam in the stapler unit and saddle stitcher unit or replace the staple cartridge If the 2 4 Hole Puncher Unit A 2 3 Hole Puncher Unit A or 4 Hole Puncher Unit A is installed open to discard punch waste Slit Insert paper to manually staple the paper You can specify the time period for the paper to...

Page 1547: ...waste tray 2 4 Hole Puncher Unit A 2 3 Hole Puncher Unit A 4 Hole Puncher Unit A Pull out to discard punch waste Emptying the Punch Waste Optional P 1186 Selecting the Staple Position To finish with the stapler you need to select the staple position paying attention to the orientation of original document For the procedure to finish with the stapler see Finishing with the Stapler P 292 Stapling at...

Page 1548: ...ght When Placing A3 B4 size Originals Feeder Platen glass select Top Left Stapling at the top left of paper in portrait orientation When Placing A4 B5 A5 size Originals Feeder Platen glass select Top Left When Placing A3 B4 size Originals Feeder Platen glass Appendix 1534 ...

Page 1549: ...n When Placing A4 B5 A5 size Originals Feeder Platen glass select Bottom Right When Placing A3 B4 size Originals Feeder Platen glass select Top Right Stapling at the top left of paper in landscape orientation When Placing A4 B5 A5 size Originals Feeder Platen glass Appendix 1535 ...

Page 1550: ...ons in a Margin Area of the Paper Double Refer to the following figures to select the staple position Stapling in the top margin area of paper in portrait orientation When Placing A3 B4 size Originals Feeder Platen glass select Left Stapling in the left margin area of paper in portrait orientation Appendix 1536 ...

Page 1551: ...Stapling in the right margin area of paper in portrait orientation When Placing A4 B5 A5 size Originals Feeder Platen glass select Right Stapling at the left margin area of paper in landscape orientation When Placing A3 B4 size Originals Feeder Platen glass Appendix 1537 ...

Page 1552: ...t Binding the Paper by Crimping without Using Staples Corner Refer to the following figures to select the crimp position when crimping the paper without using staples Stapling at the top right of paper in portrait orientation When Placing A4 B5 A5 size Originals Feeder Platen glass select Top Right Appendix 1538 ...

Page 1553: ...pling at the top left of paper in portrait orientation When Placing A4 B5 A5 size Originals Feeder Platen glass select Top Left When Placing A3 B4 size Originals Feeder Platen glass select Bottom Left Stapling at the top right of paper in landscape orientation Appendix 1539 ...

Page 1554: ...ght When Placing A3 B4 size Originals Feeder Platen glass select Top Right Stapling at the top left of paper in landscape orientation When Placing A4 B5 A5 size Originals Feeder Platen glass select Top Right When Placing A3 B4 size Originals Feeder Platen glass Appendix 1540 ...

Page 1555: ...the staple button starts to blink and automatic stapling is performed You can set the time in seconds to elapse before stapling is executed Time Until Stapling Starts in Stapler Mode P 1073 You can perform stapling without waiting for the specified stapling start time to come While holding the paper bundle with one of your hands use the other hand to press the staple button 2 Pull out the paper bu...

Page 1556: ... are made at the desired positions Making punch holes in the left margin area of paper in portrait orientation When Placing A4 B5 A5 size Originals Feeder Platen glass Making punch holes in the top margin area of paper in portrait orientation Feeder Platen glass Making punch holes in the left margin area of paper in landscape orientation Feeder Platen glass Appendix 1542 ...

Page 1557: ...ct Offset in combination with the collate or group function each printout group is shifted Once an output tray has reached its stacking limit subsequent prints are automatically delivered to the next available tray If all of the available trays have reached their stacking limits printing stops Remove all of the output paper from the trays to resume printing Staplers When you are using the Staple m...

Page 1558: ...mped part with your fingers This function is useful for saving staples and also binding printouts briefly For information on the paper sizes that can be used for Staple Free see Inner Finisher H P 1503 For information on the functions or paper that cannot be used with Staple Free see Restrictions Regarding the Combination of Functions P 362 The following are unavailable depending on the staple pos...

Page 1559: ...er to be stapled after inserting the paper Punch waste tray Inner 2 4 Hole Puncher B Inner 2 3 Hole Puncher B Pull out to discard punch waste Emptying the Punch Waste Optional P 1186 Front cover Open to remove jammed paper clear a staple jam in the stapler unit or replace the staple cartridge Selecting the Staple Position To finish with the stapler you need to select the staple position paying att...

Page 1560: ... Platen glass select Top Right When Placing A3 B4 size Originals Feeder Platen glass select Top Left Stapling at the top left of paper in portrait orientation When Placing A4 B5 A5 size Originals Feeder Platen glass select Top Left Appendix 1546 ...

Page 1561: ...ight of paper in landscape orientation When Placing A4 B5 A5 size Originals Feeder Platen glass select Bottom Right When Placing A3 B4 size Originals Feeder Platen glass select Top Right Stapling at the top left of paper in landscape orientation When Placing A4 B5 A5 size Originals Appendix 1547 ...

Page 1562: ...wo Locations in a Margin Area of the Paper Double Refer to the following figures to select the staple position Stapling in the top margin area of paper in portrait orientation When Placing A3 B4 size Originals Feeder Platen glass select Left Stapling in the left margin area of paper in portrait orientation Appendix 1548 ...

Page 1563: ...Stapling in the right margin area of paper in portrait orientation When Placing A4 B5 A5 size Originals Feeder Platen glass select Right Stapling at the left margin area of paper in landscape orientation When Placing A3 B4 size Originals Feeder Platen glass Appendix 1549 ...

Page 1564: ...t Binding the Paper by Crimping without Using Staples Corner Refer to the following figures to select the crimp position when crimping the paper without using staples Stapling at the top right of paper in portrait orientation When Placing A4 B5 A5 size Originals Feeder Platen glass select Top Right Appendix 1550 ...

Page 1565: ...pling at the top left of paper in portrait orientation When Placing A4 B5 A5 size Originals Feeder Platen glass select Top Left When Placing A3 B4 size Originals Feeder Platen glass select Bottom Left Stapling at the top right of paper in landscape orientation Appendix 1551 ...

Page 1566: ...ght When Placing A3 B4 size Originals Feeder Platen glass select Top Right Stapling at the top left of paper in landscape orientation When Placing A4 B5 A5 size Originals Feeder Platen glass select Top Right When Placing A3 B4 size Originals Feeder Platen glass Appendix 1552 ...

Page 1567: ...button starts to blink and automatic stapling is performed You can set the time in seconds to elapse before stapling is executed Time Until Stapling Starts in Stapler Mode P 1073 You can perform stapling without waiting for the specified stapling start time to come While holding the paper bundle with one of your hands use the other hand to press the staple button 2 Pull out the paper bundle Wait f...

Page 1568: ... are made at the desired positions Making punch holes in the left margin area of paper in portrait orientation When Placing A4 B5 A5 size Originals Feeder Platen glass Making punch holes in the top margin area of paper in portrait orientation Feeder Platen glass Making punch holes in the left margin area of paper in landscape orientation Feeder Platen glass Appendix 1554 ...

Page 1569: ...ing on the paper type In this case change the paper type or reduce the number of sheets to bind Collate and group If you select Offset in combination with the collate or group function each printout group is shifted Staplers When you are using the Staple mode do not remove the stack of paper from the output tray during the job Remove the stack of paper when the job has been completed If the Load s...

Page 1570: ...page are grouped together into sets Rotate 90 Degrees Each printout group is rotated alternately in different directions You can use the Rotate 90 Degrees function only if both the Inner 2way Tray J and the Copy Tray J are attached to the machine Output Tray The prints are output to this tray Auxiliary tray Pull out the auxiliary tray if you are printing on large size paper Appendix 1556 ...

Page 1571: ...ated alternately in different directions TIPS You can install both the Inner 2way Tray J and Copy Tray J to add an extra output tray This is convenient for using a different output tray for each function including the Copy Print and Fax functions Inner Tray Paper is output to the output tray Output Paper Tray Guide Tilt up the output paper tray guide to catch the printouts Main Unit s Right Cover ...

Page 1572: ...r install the Platen Cover Type W The cover enables originals placed on the platen glass to be held in place For more information contact your local authorized Canon dealer Platen Cover Type W Place the original on the platen glass and close the cover Appendix 1558 ...

Page 1573: ... the Department ID Management Settings P 715 For the maximum registerable number of Department IDs see Management Functions P 1468 Card slot Insert a control card Control card Control cards used with the Copy Card Reader Inserting a card 1 Confirm that the screen to insert a control card is displayed 2 Confirm the direction of the control card and insert it into the card slot 3 Confirm that the Ho...

Page 1574: ...he login service including when performing Server Authentication with the Server Authentication Local Device Authentication user authentication system you cannot use the Copy Card Reader Managing Users P 675 If the Home screen does not appear when the control card is inserted check if the control card is inserted in the correct direction and that the control card is not damaged or prohibited from ...

Page 1575: ...ADF Access Handle A 4XR3 0X8 This option helps you to close the feeder ADF access handle Hook the edge of the handle to the tip of the feeder to gently close it Appendix 1561 ...

Page 1576: ...e for any damages resulting from the hard disk drive being stolen If you use the option together with the HDD Mirroring Kit you can store data onto two hard disks System Options P 1481 If the E602 0001 message appears on the touch panel display when the machine starts a hard disk may not be set in the hard disk holder Turn OFF the machine and check that the main power indicator on the control pane...

Page 1577: ...he recess handle of the right cover 2 Open the front cover of the Removable HDD Kit If the front cover is locked unlock the front cover beforehand 3 Hold the handle on the hard disk holder and being careful of the orientation insert the holder 4 Close the front cover Appendix 1563 ...

Page 1578: ...ectricity and then open the right cover of the machine You can touch the discharging plate by inserting the tip of your hand through the recess handle of the right cover 2 Open the front cover of the Removable HDD Kit If the front cover is locked unlock the front cover beforehand 3 Hold the handle on the hard disk holder and remove the holder Appendix 1564 ...

Page 1579: ...k holder with the circuit board of the HDD on the bottom Do not store the hard disk holder in the upright position as doing so may damage the holder 4 Close the front cover Lock the front cover if necessary Appendix 1565 ...

Page 1580: ...5 Close the right cover of the machine Appendix 1566 ...

Page 1581: ...ole Punching Function P 1568 Using the Sorting Functions Function Staple Finisher Y Booklet Finisher Y Inner Finisher H Copy Tray J Inner 2way Tray J Collate 1 Group 1 Offset Rotate 90 Degrees 1 2 1 This is a standard function of the main unit 2 Can be used only when Inner 2way Tray J is installed Using the Stapling Function Function Staple Finisher Y Booklet Finisher Y Inner Finisher H Copy Tray ...

Page 1582: ...ole Punching Function Function Staple Finisher Y Booklet Finisher Y Inner Finisher H Copy Tray J Inner 2way Tray J Hole Punch 1 1 2 1 Can be used only when 2 4 Hole Puncher Unit A 2 3 Hole Puncher Unit A or 4 Hole Puncher Unit A is installed 2 Can be used only when Inner 2 4 Hole Puncher B or Inner 2 3 Hole Puncher B is installed Appendix 1568 ...

Page 1583: ...ide P 1570 Setting the Machine PS PCL UFR II Printer This manual viewable using a Web browser describes how to use the PS PCL UFR II printer It can be viewed from the online manual Web site ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM This manual viewable using a Web browser describes how to use ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM It can be viewed from the online manual Web site Web Access This manual viewable using a Web brows...

Page 1584: ...ay of the User s Guide You can change the character size used in the User s Guide and switch the screen layout to one that is appropriate to the device on which the User s Guide is displayed If you do not have access to Adobe Reader to view the manuals in PDF format try other programs such as PDF Preview developed by Vivid Document Imaging Technologies How to find the topic you are looking for Sea...

Page 1585: ...tarts Click to display all items underneath chapters Click to return to the original list Click to switch between the table of contents and the search display When the table of contents is displayed each click on switches between hiding and showing the display When the search display is shown each click on switches between hiding and showing the display Appendix 1571 ...

Page 1586: ...ck to view important information you should know when using the machine Topic Page Contains information about how to configure and use the machine Navigation See what chapter topic you are currently viewing Click to go to the corresponding page To return to the previous page click Back on your Web browser When you click the icon the current page may go dark and a pop up window may appear To return...

Page 1587: ...ox to perform a search by keyword and find the page you are looking for Enter keyword s here Enter a keyword or keywords and click to display the search results You can search for pages containing all the keywords by separating the keywords by a space blank Also you can only search for pages containing an exact phrase by enclosing the keywords in double quotation marks Appendix 1573 ...

Page 1588: ...ch results of the pages that contain the specified keywords From the results locate the page you are looking for and click the topic title of the page The keywords appear in bold in the pages displayed as search results Appendix 1574 ...

Page 1589: ...s carefully to operate the machine correctly and avoid damage to the machine or property Indicates a clarification of an operation or contains additional explanations for a procedure TIPS Indicates useful functions or tips for using the machine Keys and buttons Keys on the control panel buttons displayed on the touch panel display and buttons on the computer screen are indicated as follows Type Ex...

Page 1590: ...llustrations Illustrations used in the User s Guide are from imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5560i III with the following options installed unless otherwise specifically noted Cassette Feeding Unit AM Appendix 1576 ...

Page 1591: ...you may not a scrape build databases or otherwise create permanent copies of such content or keep cached copies longer than permitted by the cache header b copy translate modify create a derivative work of sell lease lend convey distribute publicly display or sublicense to any third party c misrepresent the source or ownership and d remove obscure or alter any copyright trademark or other propriet...

Page 1592: ...of the License See Page Adobe PostScript 3 6 Adobe PDF Scan Library 13 HttpClient2 0 Alpha1 Release 16 Bootstrap 18 Crypto API 19 dump restore 20 expat 21 flipsnap 22 fontconfig 23 freetype2 24 HarfBuzz 29 iw 30 JAVA SE 31 jQuery 32 jquery ex table filter 34 jquery json 35 tablesorter 36 jQueryUI 37 JSEncrypt 38 libcurl 41 libdrm 44 libjingle 59 libjpeg 60 libjpeg turbo 61 libpcap 65 libpng 66 lib...

Page 1593: ...t SNMP 83 OPEN CV 91 OpenSSL 141 OSGi Release 5 146 pango part of OpenTypeCode 152 pixman 153 Protocol Buffers 155 servlet jar 156 SQLite 160 Wi Fi Test Suite 161 wpa_supplicant 2 6 162 X Window System 164 xkeyboard config 255 Xrandr 261 ...

Page 1594: ...ase refer to Table of Software and respective License terms below for more detail and corresponding license conditions Table of Software Names of Software Terms and Conditions of the License See page compat wireless 262 Device Driver for Marvell Yukon Device Driver for Realtek RTL8111EP Device Driver for REALTEK RTL8153 fusermount libol Linux lvm2 syslog ng WLAN USB Driver ALSA Library 270 atk cai...

Page 1595: ... 5 iproute 284 Squid 295 gst plugins base 341 webkit 352 ...

Page 1596: ...sclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 The end user documentation included with the redistribution if any must include the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation ht...

Page 1597: ...ributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes software developed by the University of California Berkeley and its ...

Page 1598: ...this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be ...

Page 1599: ...m asn tech xml sablotron index jsp The Original Code may be downloaded via the Internet from https sourceforge net projects sablotron ______________________________________________________________________________________ This product includes software developed by the University of California Berkeley and its contributors Portions Copyright c 1982 1986 1987 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 The R...

Page 1600: ...all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation The author or Addison Welsey Longman make no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty ______________________________________________________________________________________ Portions developed by the Unive...

Page 1601: ...nsees to retain and reproduce JIM s following copyright notice within each copy of the licensed programs in any form in whole or in part 1981 1990 JMI Consultants Inc All rights reserved ______________________________________________________________________________________ This product includes software developed by the University of California Berkeley and its contributors Portions Copyright c 19...

Page 1602: ..._________________________________ The Loki Library Portions Copyright c 2001 by Andrei Alexandrescu This code accompanies the book Alexandrescu Andrei Modern C Design Generic Programming and Design Patterns Applied Copyright c 2001 Addison Wesley Permission to use copy modify distribute and sell this software for any purpose is hereby granted without fee provided that the above copyright notice ap...

Page 1603: ...udes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation http www apache org Alternately this acknowledgment may appear in the software itself if and wherever such third party acknowledgments normally appear 4 The names Xerces and Apache Software Foundation must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please con...

Page 1604: ...eloper of the Original Code is Ginger Alliance Ltd Portions created by Ginger Alliance are Copyright C 2000 Ginger Alliance Ltd All Rights Reserved Pursuant to sections 3 2 and 3 6 of the License the Modifications created by Adobe Systems Incorporated are available as Source Code The Modifications may be downloaded via the Internet from http partners adobe com asn tech xml sablotron index jsp The ...

Page 1605: ...ice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation The author or Addison Wesley Longman make no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty ______________________________________________________________________________________ Updated Informati...

Page 1606: ...materials provided with the distribution 3 The end user documentation included with the redistribution if any must include the following acknowledgement This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation http www apache org Alternately this acknowledgement may appear in the software itself if and wherever such third party acknowledgements normally appear 4 The names The Jak...

Page 1607: ...AMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This software consists of voluntary contr...

Page 1608: ... furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE A...

Page 1609: ...o whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT I...

Page 1610: ...n and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERC...

Page 1611: ...R IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Copyright c 1998 1999 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction includi...

Page 1612: ...urnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUT...

Page 1613: ...f the software without specific written prior permission Keith Packard makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty KEITH PACKARD DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL KEITH PACKARD BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL IN...

Page 1614: ...fects thus the FreeType font engine the test programs documentation and makefiles at the very least This license was inspired by the BSD Artistic and IJG Independent JPEG Group licenses which all encourage inclusion and use of free software in commercial and freeware products alike As a consequence its main points are that o We don t promise that this software works However we will be interested i...

Page 1615: ...software are copyright year The FreeType Project www freetype org All rights reserved Please replace year with the value from the FreeType version you actually use Legal Terms 0 Definitions Throughout this license the terms package FreeType Project and FreeType archive refer to the set of files originally distributed by the authors David Turner Robert Wilhelm and Werner Lemberg as the FreeType Pro...

Page 1616: ...OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE OF THE FREETYPE PROJECT 2 Redistribution This license grants a worldwide royalty free perpetual and irrevocable right and license to use execute perform compile display copy create derivative works of distribute and sub...

Page 1617: ...rs nor you shall use the name of the other for commercial advertising or promotional purposes without specific prior written permission We suggest but do not require that you use one or more of the following phrases to refer to this software in your documentation or advertising materials FreeType Project FreeType Engine FreeType library or FreeType Distribution As you have not signed this license ...

Page 1618: ...he library and distribution If you are looking for support start in this list if you haven t found anything to help you in the documentation o freetype devel nongnu org Discusses bugs as well as engine internals design issues specific licenses porting etc Our home page can be found at http www freetype org end of FTL TXT ...

Page 1619: ...aphs appear in all copies of this software IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE TO ANY PARTY FOR DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE AND ITS DOCUMENTATION EVEN IF THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO T...

Page 1620: ...permission notice appear in all copies THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND THE AUTHOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL DIRECT INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT...

Page 1621: ...rks and c assist Oracle in protecting those rights including assigning to Oracle any right acquired by You in any Java Mark c Source Code JAVA SE may contain source code that unless expressly licensed for other purposes is provided solely for reference purpose pursuant to the terms applicable to JAVA SE d Third Party Code The additional copyright notices and license terms applicable to portions of...

Page 1622: ...PYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Copyright C 2005 2014 jQuery Foundation Inc https jquery org license Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated docume...

Page 1623: ...HT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE ...

Page 1624: ...ed to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS O...

Page 1625: ...hed to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS ...

Page 1626: ... to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR ...

Page 1627: ...oftware is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT S...

Page 1628: ...05 Tom Wu All Rights Reserved Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished ...

Page 1629: ...rge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED...

Page 1630: ...HER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE The MIT License MIT Copyright c 2011 TJ Holowaychuk tj vision media ca Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of...

Page 1631: ...e of the Institute nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EV...

Page 1632: ...ed provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER...

Page 1633: ...LITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE X CONSORTIUM BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNEC TION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Except as contained in this notice the name of the X Consortium shall not be used in advertising or othe...

Page 1634: ...ES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL VA LINUX SYSTEMS AND OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Copyright c 2007 Dave Airlie airlied linux ie Copyright c 2007 Jako...

Page 1635: ...s the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice including the next paragraph shall be included in all co...

Page 1636: ...T NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER S BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Copyright C 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 20...

Page 1637: ...THERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Copyright 1999 2000 Precision Insight Inc Cedar Park Texas Copyright 2000 VA Linux Systems Inc Sunnyvale California All rights reserved Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the ...

Page 1638: ...ftware THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL VA LINUX SYSTEMS AND OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WIT...

Page 1639: ...f charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sub license and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright...

Page 1640: ...NT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Copyright 1998 2003 VIA Technologies Inc All Rights Reserved Copyright 2001 2003 S3 Graphics Inc All Rights Reserved Permission is hereby grante...

Page 1641: ...are is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice including the next paragraph shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON ...

Page 1642: ... 2006 Tungsten Graphics Inc Bismarck ND USA All Rights Reserved Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sub license and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons...

Page 1643: ...S OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL WITTAWAT YAMWONG OR ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Copyright 2007 2008 2010 Nouveau Project Permission is hereby g...

Page 1644: ...hed to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice including the next paragraph shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT ...

Page 1645: ...he Software Copyright 2008 Nicolai Haehnle Copyright 2008 Jérôme Glisse All Rights Reserved Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sub license and or sell copies of the So...

Page 1646: ...MITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AUTHORS AND OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE The above copyright notice and t...

Page 1647: ... Jesse Barnes jesse barnes intel com Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is fur...

Page 1648: ... subject to the following conditions THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AUTHORS AND OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERW...

Page 1649: ... or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUE...

Page 1650: ... 60 libjpeg this software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group ...

Page 1651: ... BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SU...

Page 1652: ...S OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Copyright C 2009 2014 2015 2016 D R Commander All Rights Reserved Redistribution and use in source and bina...

Page 1653: ...following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither the name of the libjpeg turbo Project nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior writt...

Page 1654: ...NTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION H...

Page 1655: ...is software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXE...

Page 1656: ...rranty that our efforts or the library will fulfill any of your particular purposes or needs This library is provided with all faults and the entire risk of satisfactory quality performance accuracy and effort is with the user libpng versions 0 97 January 1998 through 1 0 6 March 20 2000 are Copyright c 1998 1999 2000 Glenn Randers Pehrson Distributed according to the same disclaimer and license a...

Page 1657: ...ranties of merchantability and of fitness for any purpose The Contributing Authors and Group 42 Inc assume no liability for direct indirect incidental special exemplary or consequential damages which may result from the use of the PNG Reference Library even if advised of the possibility of such damage Permission is hereby granted to use copy modify and distribute this source code or portions hereo...

Page 1658: ...nc specifically permit without fee and encourage the use of this source code as a component to supporting the PNG file format in commercial products If you use this source code in a product acknowledgment is not required but would be appreciated ...

Page 1659: ...relating to the software without the specific prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS IMPLIED OR OTHERWISE INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE IN NO EVENT SHALL SAM LEFFLER OR SILICON GRAPHICS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INCIDENTAL INDIRECT OR CONS...

Page 1660: ...on notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FIT NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE DANIEL VEILLARD BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT ...

Page 1661: ...TIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Copyright c 2000 Compaq Computer Corporation Inc Copyright c 2002 Hewlett Packard Company Inc Copyright c 2006 Intel Corporation Copyright c 2008 Red Hat Inc Permission to ...

Page 1662: ...n all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name of the copyright holders not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission The copyright holders make no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is...

Page 1663: ... 73 MD4 RSA Data Security Inc MD4 Message Digest Algorithm ...

Page 1664: ...o endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FO...

Page 1665: ...DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Copyright C 2009 VMware Inc All Rights Reserved Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without re...

Page 1666: ...antial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL PRECISION INSIGHT AND OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM ...

Page 1667: ...iles the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portio...

Page 1668: ...ON OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Copyright 2006 2013 Intel Corporation Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to us...

Page 1669: ... SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Copyright 2...

Page 1670: ...ARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS ...

Page 1671: ...WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL RED HAT INCORPORATED BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSE...

Page 1672: ...d to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ...

Page 1673: ...and that the name of CMU and The Regents of the University of California not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written permission CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL CMU OR THE REGENTS OF...

Page 1674: ...IMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY ...

Page 1675: ...CUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Part 4 Sun Microsystems Inc copyright notice BSD Copyright 2003 Sun Microsystems...

Page 1676: ...DIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF...

Page 1677: ...Y WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Part 6 Cisco BUPTNIC copyright notice BSD Copyright c 2004 Cisco Inc and Information Network Center of Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are me...

Page 1678: ...ary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provide...

Page 1679: ...ials provided with the distribution 3 Neither the name of Apple Inc Apple nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY APPLE AND ITS CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNE...

Page 1680: ...r promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIR...

Page 1681: ...ding but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed In no event shall the Intel Corporation or contributors be liable for any direct indirect incidental special exemplary or consequential damages including but not limited to procurement of substitute goods or services loss of use data or profits or business interruption however caus...

Page 1682: ...usiness interruption however caused and on any theory of liability whether in contract strict liability or tort including negligence or otherwise arising in any way out of the use of this software even if advised of the possibility of such damage Copyright C 2000 2008 Intel Corporation all rights reserved Copyright C 2009 Willow Garage Inc all rights reserved Copyright C 2013 OpenCV Foundation all...

Page 1683: ...llowing conditions are met Redistribution s of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistribution s in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution The name of the copyright holders may not be us...

Page 1684: ...by the copyright holders and contributors as is and any express or implied warranties including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed In no event shall the Intel Corporation or contributors be liable for any direct indirect incidental special exemplary or consequential damages including but not limited to procurement of sub...

Page 1685: ...any direct indirect incidental special exemplary or consequential damages including but not limited to procurement of substitute goods or services loss of use data or profits or business interruption however caused and on any theory of liability whether in contract strict liability or tort including negligence or otherwise arising in any way out of the use of this software even if advised of the p...

Page 1686: ...yright C 2009 Willow Garage Inc all rights reserved Copyright C 2013 OpenCV Foundation all rights reserved Copyright C 2015 Itseez Inc all rights reserved Third party copyrights are property of their respective owners Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistribution s of source code must retai...

Page 1687: ...f conditions and the following disclaimer Redistribution s in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution The name of the copyright holders may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission This s...

Page 1688: ...this software without specific prior written permission This software is provided by the copyright holders and contributors as is and any express or implied warranties including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed In no event shall the Intel Corporation or contributors be liable for any direct indirect incidental special ...

Page 1689: ...ent shall the Intel Corporation or contributors be liable for any direct indirect incidental special exemplary or consequential damages including but not limited to procurement of substitute goods or services loss of use data or profits or business interruption however caused and on any theory of liability whether in contract strict liability or tort including negligence or otherwise arising in an...

Page 1690: ...advised of the possibility of such damage Copyright C 2010 2013 2014 Advanced Micro Devices Inc all rights reserved Third party copyrights are property of their respective owners Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistribution s of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list ...

Page 1691: ...following conditions are met Redistribution s of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistribution s in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution The name of the copyright holders may not be ...

Page 1692: ...tion The name of the copyright holders may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission This software is provided by the copyright holders and contributors as is and any express or implied warranties including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed In no even...

Page 1693: ...o event shall the Intel Corporation or contributors be liable for any direct indirect incidental special exemplary or consequential damages including but not limited to procurement of substitute goods or services loss of use data or profits or business interruption however caused and on any theory of liability whether in contract strict liability or tort including negligence or otherwise arising i...

Page 1694: ...software even if advised of the possibility of such damage Copyright C 2013 NVIDIA Corporation all rights reserved Copyright C 2014 Itseez Inc all rights reserved Third party copyrights are property of their respective owners Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistribution s of source code mu...

Page 1695: ...d with the distribution The name of the copyright holders may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission This software is provided by the copyright holders and contributors as is and any express or implied warranties including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are di...

Page 1696: ...or contributors be liable for any direct indirect incidental special exemplary or consequential damages including but not limited to procurement of substitute goods or services loss of use data or profits or business interruption however caused and on any theory of liability whether in contract strict liability or tort including negligence or otherwise arising in any way out of the use of this sof...

Page 1697: ...dvised of the possibility of such damage Copyright C 2010 2012 Institute Of Software Chinese Academy Of Science all rights reserved Copyright C 2010 2012 Advanced Micro Devices Inc all rights reserved Third party copyrights are property of their respective owners Authors Niko Li newlife20080214 gmail com Zero Lin zero lin amd com Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without mo...

Page 1698: ...ce code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistribution s in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution The name of the copyright holders may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this...

Page 1699: ...ritten permission This software is provided by the copyright holders and contributors as is and any express or implied warranties including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed In no event shall the Intel Corporation or contributors be liable for any direct indirect incidental special exemplary or consequential damages inc...

Page 1700: ...l exemplary or consequential damages including but not limited to procurement of substitute goods or services loss of use data or profits or business interruption however caused and on any theory of liability whether in contract strict liability or tort including negligence or otherwise arising in any way out of the use of this software even if advised of the possibility of such damage Copyright C...

Page 1701: ...Third party copyrights are property of their respective owners Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistribution s of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistribution s in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice...

Page 1702: ...ollowing disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution The name of the copyright holders may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission This software is provided by the copyright holders and contributors as is and any express or implied warranties including but not limited to the implied wa...

Page 1703: ...chantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed In no event shall the Intel Corporation or contributors be liable for any direct indirect incidental special exemplary or consequential damages including but not limited to procurement of substitute goods or services loss of use data or profits or business interruption however caused and on any theory of liability whether in contract...

Page 1704: ...3 Advanced Micro Devices Inc all rights reserved Copyright C 2014 Intel Corporation all rights reserved Third party copyrights are property of their respective owners Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistribution s of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of condition...

Page 1705: ...d the following disclaimer Redistribution s in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution The name of the copyright holders may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission This software is prov...

Page 1706: ...rranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed In no event shall the Intel Corporation or contributors be liable for any direct indirect incidental special exemplary or consequential damages including but not limited to procurement of substitute goods or services loss of use data or profits or business interruption however caused and on any theory of liability whet...

Page 1707: ...ing negligence or otherwise arising in any way out of the use of this software even if advised of the possibility of such damage Copyright C 2010 2012 Institute Of Software Chinese Academy Of Science all rights reserved Copyright C 2010 2012 Advanced Micro Devices Inc all rights reserved Third party copyrights are property of their respective owners Authors Zhang Ying zhangying913 gmail com Redist...

Page 1708: ...on s of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistribution s in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution The name of the copyright holders may not be used to endorse or promote products deriv...

Page 1709: ...ed by the copyright holders and contributors as is and any express or implied warranties including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed In no event shall the Intel Corporation or contributors be liable for any direct indirect incidental special exemplary or consequential damages including but not limited to procurement of ...

Page 1710: ...mited to procurement of substitute goods or services loss of use data or profits or business interruption however caused and on any theory of liability whether in contract strict liability or tort including negligence or otherwise arising in any way out of the use of this software even if advised of the possibility of such damage Copyright C 2000 2015 Intel Corporation all rights reserved Copyrigh...

Page 1711: ...ence all rights reserved Copyright C 2010 2012 Advanced Micro Devices Inc all rights reserved Third party copyrights are property of their respective owners Authors Niko Li newlife20080214 gmail com Rock Li Rock li amd com Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistribution s of source code must ...

Page 1712: ...t notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution The name of the copyright holders may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission This software is provided by the copyright holders and contributors as is and any express or implied warranties i...

Page 1713: ...are disclaimed In no event shall the Intel Corporation or contributors be liable for any direct indirect incidental special exemplary or consequential damages including but not limited to procurement of substitute goods or services loss of use data or profits or business interruption however caused and on any theory of liability whether in contract strict liability or tort including negligence or ...

Page 1714: ...008 Intel Corporation all rights reserved Copyright C 2009 2011 Willow Garage Inc all rights reserved Third party copyrights are property of their respective owners Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistribution s of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions ...

Page 1715: ...the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution The name of the copyright holders may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission This software is provided by the copyright holders and contributors as is and any express or implied warranties including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantabi...

Page 1716: ...implied warranties including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed In no event shall the Intel Corporation or contributors be liable for any direct indirect incidental special exemplary or consequential damages including but not limited to procurement of substitute goods or services loss of use data or profits or business i...

Page 1717: ...ut not limited to procurement of substitute goods or services loss of use data or profits or business uinterruption however caused and on any theory of liability whether in contract strict liability or tort including negligence or otherwise arising in any way out of the use of this software even if advised of the possibility of such damage Copyright C 2014 2015 Itseez Inc all rights reserved Third...

Page 1718: ...umentation files the Materials to deal in the Materials without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Materials and to permit persons to whom the Materials are furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or s...

Page 1719: ...equential damages including but not limited to procurement of substitute goods or services loss of use data or profits or business interruption however caused and on any theory of liability whether in contract strict liability or tort including negligence or otherwise arising in any way out of the use of this software even if advised of the possibility of such damage Copyright C 2013 NVIDIA Corpor...

Page 1720: ...wners Authors Dachuan Zhao dachuan multicorewareinc com Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistribution s of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistribution s in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this l...

Page 1721: ...isclaimer Redistribution s in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution The name of the copyright holders may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission This software is provided by the copyr...

Page 1722: ... without specific prior written permission This software is provided by the copyright holders and contributors as is and any express or implied warranties including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed In no event shall the Intel Corporation or contributors be liable for any direct indirect incidental special exemplary or ...

Page 1723: ...aimed In no event shall the Intel Corporation or contributors be liable for any direct indirect incidental special exemplary or consequential damages including but not limited to procurement of substitute goods or services loss of use data or profits or business interruption however caused and on any theory of liability whether in contract strict liability or tort including negligence or otherwise...

Page 1724: ...all rights reserved Copyright C 2010 2012 Advanced Micro Devices Inc all rights reserved Third party copyrights are property of their respective owners Authors Jin Ma jin multicorewareinc com Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistribution s of source code must retain the above copyright noti...

Page 1725: ...tions and the following disclaimer Redistribution s in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution The name of the copyright holders may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission This software...

Page 1726: ...tability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed In no event shall the Intel Corporation or contributors be liable for any direct indirect incidental special exemplary or consequential damages including but not limited to procurement of substitute goods or services loss of use data or profits or business interruption however caused and on any theory of liability whether in contract str...

Page 1727: ...ny theory of liability whether in contract strict liability or tort including negligence or otherwise arising in any way out of the use of this software even if advised of the possibility of such damage Copyright C 2008 Google all rights reserved Third party copyrights are property of their respective owners Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitt...

Page 1728: ... of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither the name of the organization nor the names of its contributors may be used to endor...

Page 1729: ...IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Copyright C 1997 2002 Makoto Matsumoto and Takuji Nishimura All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistri...

Page 1730: ... or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes software developed by the University of California Berkeley and its contributors 4 Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this...

Page 1731: ...rials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org 4 The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contac...

Page 1732: ...SE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Original SSLeay License Copyright C 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com All rights reserved This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com T...

Page 1733: ...cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The word cryptographic can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related 4 If you include any Windows specific code or a derivative thereof from the apps directory application code you must include an acknowledgement This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com THIS SOFTW...

Page 1734: ...ith the distribution THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMI...

Page 1735: ...F USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Copyright c 2014 Google Inc Permission to use copy modify and or distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee i...

Page 1736: ...ower direct or indirect to cause the direction or management of such entity whether by contract or otherwise or ii ownership of fifty percent 50 or more of the outstanding shares or iii beneficial ownership of such entity You or Your shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License Source form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications including b...

Page 1737: ...ed means any form of electronic verbal or written communication sent to the Licensor or its representatives including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists source code control systems and issue tracking systems that are managed by or on behalf of the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or othe...

Page 1738: ...bute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium with or without modifications and in Source or Object form provided that You meet the following conditions a You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License and b You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files and c You must retain in the Sour...

Page 1739: ...wise any Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License without any additional terms or conditions Notwithstanding the above nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such Contributions 6 Trademarks This License does...

Page 1740: ...u may choose to offer and charge a fee for acceptance of support warranty indemnity or other liability obligations and or rights consistent with this License However in accepting such obligations You may act only on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility not on behalf of any other Contributor and only if You agree to indemnify defend and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability in...

Page 1741: ...y obtain a copy of the License at http www apache org licenses LICENSE 2 0 Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing software distributed under the License is distributed on an AS IS BASIS WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND either express or implied See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License ...

Page 1742: ...ce and the following two paragraphs appear in all copies of this software IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE TO ANY PARTY FOR DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE AND ITS DOCUMENTATION EVEN IF THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTIES...

Page 1743: ...yright 2008 Rodrigo Kumpera Copyright 2008 André Tupinambá Copyright 2008 Mozilla Corporation Copyright 2008 Frederic Plourde Copyright 2009 Sun Microsystems Inc Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy mo...

Page 1744: ... COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE ...

Page 1745: ...OPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GO...

Page 1746: ...ll mean the work of authorship whether in Source or Object form made available under the License as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work an example is provided in the Appendix below Derivative Works shall mean any work whether in Source or Object form that is based on or derived from the Work and for which the editorial revisions annotations elaborations or o...

Page 1747: ...ons and in Source or Object form provided that You meet the following conditions You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License and You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files and You must retain in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute all copyright patent trademark and attribution...

Page 1748: ...egligent acts or agreed to in writing shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages including any direct indirect special incidental or consequential damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the Work including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill work stoppage computer failure or malfunction or any and all other commercial d...

Page 1749: ...y obtain a copy of the License at http www apache org licenses LICENSE 2 0 Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing software distributed under the License is distributed on an AS IS BASIS WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND either express or implied See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License ...

Page 1750: ...entation in SQLite those parts of the SQLite library that you actually bundle and ship with a larger application Some scripts used as part of the build process for example the configure scripts generated by autoconf might fall under other open source licenses Nothing from these build scripts ever reaches the final deliverable SQLite library however and so the licenses associated with those scripts...

Page 1751: ... THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND THE AUTHOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL DIRECT INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION A...

Page 1752: ... hostapd README for more details Source code files were moved around in v0 6 x releases and compared to earlier releases the programs are now built by first going to a subdirectory wpa_supplicant or hostapd and creating build configuration config and running make there for Linux BSD cygwin builds License This software may be distributed used and modified under the terms of BSD license Redistributi...

Page 1753: ...ONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS O...

Page 1754: ...CT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Except as contained in this notice the name of The Open Group shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from The Open Group Copyright c 1991 2002 2004 2009 Oracle and or its affili...

Page 1755: ...e without specific written prior permission Keith Packard makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty KEITH PACKARD DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL KEITH PACKARD BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CON...

Page 1756: ...sh distribute and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so provided that the above copyright notice s and this permission notice appear in all copies of the Soft ware and that both the above copyright notice s and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IM...

Page 1757: ...H REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL NETWORK COMPUTING DEVICES OR DIGITAL BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMAN...

Page 1758: ...AGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Except as contained in this notice the name of The XFree86 Project Inc shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from The XFre...

Page 1759: ...ghts Reserved Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name of Hewlett Packard not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to dist...

Page 1760: ...ON GRAPHICS DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE IN NO EVENT SHALL SILICON GRAPHICS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT ...

Page 1761: ...d associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation on the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sub license and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice including the next pa...

Page 1762: ... its affiliates All rights reserved Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furn...

Page 1763: ...ANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE X CONSORTIUM BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Except as contained in this notice the name of the X Consortium shall not be used in advertising or...

Page 1764: ...THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FREE SOFTWARE FOUNDATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE O...

Page 1765: ...o representation about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is and with all faults TEKTRONIX DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES APPLICABLE TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE IN NO EVENT SHALL TEKTRONIX BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS O...

Page 1766: ...py modify distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name of FUJITSU LIMITED not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without ...

Page 1767: ...OR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Except as contained in this notice the name of David E Wexelblat shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization fro...

Page 1768: ...hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies Chris Lee makes no representations about the suitability for any purpose of the information in this document It is provided as is without express or implied warranty Copyright 1993 by Digital Equipment Corporation Maynard Massachusetts Copyright 1994 by FUJITSU LIMITED Copyright 1994 by Sony Cor...

Page 1769: ...entation and that the name of Open Software Foundation not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission Open Software Foundation makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty OPEN SOFTWARE FOUNDATION DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REG...

Page 1770: ...IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Copyright 1991 1992 1993 1994 by FUJITSU LIMITED Copyright 1993 by Digital Equipment Corporation Permission to use copy modify distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permi...

Page 1771: ...g to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission FUJITSU LIMITED Fujitsu Open Systems Solutions Inc and Sony Corporation make no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty FUJITSU LIMITED FUJITSU OPEN SYSTEMS SOLUTIONS INC AND SONY CORPORATION DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS ...

Page 1772: ...ON ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Copyright 1991 by the Open Software Foundation Copyright 1993 by the TOSHIBA Corp Permission to use copy modify distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this...

Page 1773: ...SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Copyright 1991 by the Open Software Foundation Copyright 1993 1994 by the Sony Corporation Permission to use copy modify distribute and sell th...

Page 1774: ...ce appear in supporting documentation and that the name of FUJITSU LIMITED and Fujitsu Open Systems Solutions Inc not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission FUJITSU LIMITED and Fujitsu Open Systems Solutions Inc makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is witho...

Page 1775: ...F CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Copyright 1986 1998 The Open Group Copyright c 2000 The XFree86 Project Inc Permission to use copy modify distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and th...

Page 1776: ...oftware NTT and Open Software Foundation not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission OMRON NTT Software NTT and Open Software Foundation make no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty OMRON NTT SOFTWARE NTT AND OPEN SOFTWARE FOUND...

Page 1777: ...ARE Copyright 1991 1992 by Fuji Xerox Co Ltd Copyright 1992 1993 1994 by FUJITSU LIMITED Permission to use copy modify distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name o...

Page 1778: ...ED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE X CONSORTIUM BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE c Copyright 1996 by Sebastien Marineau and H...

Page 1779: ...t 1991 by the Open Software Foundation Copyright 1993 by the TOSHIBA Corp Copyright 1993 1994 by Sony Corporation Copyright 1993 1994 by the FUJITSU LIMITED Permission to use copy modify distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this perm...

Page 1780: ...ibution of the software without specific written prior permission Bruno Haible makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty Bruno Haible DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL Bruno Haible BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPEC...

Page 1781: ...is software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name of TOSHIBA not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission TO...

Page 1782: ...by OMRON Corporation NTT Software Corporation and Nippon Telegraph and Telephone Corporation Permission to use copy modify distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the na...

Page 1783: ...copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN ...

Page 1784: ...OF THIS SOFTWARE Copyright 1991 1993 by Digital Equipment Corporation Maynard Massachusetts and Olivetti Research Limited Cambridge England All Rights Reserved Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this pe...

Page 1785: ...E LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Copyright c 1989 X Consortium Inc and Digital Equipment Corporation Copyright c 1992 X Consortium Inc and Intergraph Corporation Copyright c 1993 X Consortium Inc and Silicon Graphics Inc Copyright c...

Page 1786: ...ONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Copyright c 1997 by Mark Leisher Copyright c 1998 2003 by Juliusz Chroboczek Copyright c 1998 Go Watanabe All rights reserved Copyright c 1998 Kazushi Jam Marukawa All rights reserved Copyright c 1998 Takuya SHIOZAKI All rights reserved Copyright c 1998 X TrueType Server Pr...

Page 1787: ...ion SuSE makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty SuSE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL SuSE BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF...

Page 1788: ... LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Copyright c 1998 1999 Shunsuke Akiyama akiyama jp FreeBSD org All rights reserved Copyright c 1998 1999 X TrueType Serve...

Page 1789: ...th that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name of the copyright holders not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission The copyright holders make no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or impl...

Page 1790: ...aining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission...

Page 1791: ...ABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR S OR COPYRIGHT HOLDER S BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Copyright C 2001 2006 Bart Massey Jamey Sharp and Josh Triplett All Rights Reserved ...

Page 1792: ...son obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this per...

Page 1793: ...e no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty THE AUTHORS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF...

Page 1794: ...ng without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF...

Page 1795: ...SHALL THOMAS ROELL OR DAVID DAWES BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Copyright 1992 by Rich Murphey Rich Rice edu Copyright 1993 by David Dawes dawes xfree86 or...

Page 1796: ...ertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission Orest Zborowski and David Dawes make no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty OREST ZBOROWSKI AND DAVID DAWES DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER...

Page 1797: ...SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Copyright 1990 91 by Thomas Roell Dinkelscherben Germany Copyright 1993 by David Dawes dawes xfree86 org Copyright 2002 by SuSE Linux AG Author...

Page 1798: ...bution of the software without specific written prior permission Kazutaka YOKOTA makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty KAZUTAKA YOKOTA DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL KAZUTAKA YOKOTA BE LIABLE FOR ...

Page 1799: ...l copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name J Kean Johnston not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission J Kean Johnston makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express o...

Page 1800: ...ACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Copyright c 2005 Jesse Barnes jbarnes virtuousgeek org Copyright 2002 David Dawes Copyright 1998 1999 Precision Insight Inc Cedar Park Texas All Rights Reserved Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentat...

Page 1801: ... all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ...

Page 1802: ... to use copy modify merge publish distribute sub license and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice including the next paragraph shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF A...

Page 1803: ...R ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Copyright 2000 2001 Juliusz Chroboczek Copyright 1998 Egbert Eich Copyright 2006 2007 Intel Corporation Copyright 2006 Nokia Corporation Copyright 2006 2008 Peter Hutterer Copyright 2006 Adam Jackson Copyright ...

Page 1804: ...ation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial...

Page 1805: ...HER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Except as contained in this notice the name of The Open Group shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from The Open Group Copyright c ...

Page 1806: ...right notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name of SuSE not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission SuSE makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without exp...

Page 1807: ...E USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Copyright 1987 by Digital Equipment Corporation Maynard Massachusetts Copyright 1994 Quarterdeck Office Systems All Rights Reserved Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice a...

Page 1808: ...Equipment Corporation may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without the prior written permission of Digital Equipment Corporation 3 This software is provided AS IS and any express or implied warranties including but not limited to any implied warranties of merchantability fitness for a particular purpose or non infringement are disclaimed In no event shall DIGITAL b...

Page 1809: ...R OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Copyright 2006 Red Hat Inc C Copyright 1998 1999 Precision Insight Inc Cedar Park Texas All Rights Reserved Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation fi...

Page 1810: ...t persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON IN...

Page 1811: ...INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL PRECISION INSIGHT AND OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE C Copyright IBM Corporat...

Page 1812: ...ibute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIE...

Page 1813: ...F USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Copyright c 2000 by Conectiva S A http www conectiva com Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without res...

Page 1814: ... in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution o Neither the name of NVIDIA nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPL...

Page 1815: ...CIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Copyright 1998 by Concurrent Computer Corporation Permission to use copy modify distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any pu...

Page 1816: ...bility of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty NOKIA DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL NOKIA BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CO...

Page 1817: ... ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE STRICT LIABILITY OR ANY OTHER ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE ADOBE WILL NOT PROVIDE ANY TRAINING OR OTHER SUPPORT FOR THE SOFTWARE Adobe PostScript and Display PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated which may be registered in certain jurisdictions Copyright 1989...

Page 1818: ...ATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Copyright 1998 2004 2006 Keith Packard Copyright 2000 2002 Keith Packard member of The XFree86 Project Inc Copyright c 2002 Apple Computer Inc Copyright c 2003 Torrey T Lyons All Rights Reserved Permiss...

Page 1819: ... holders not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission The authors and or copyright holders make no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty THE AUTHORS AND OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INC...

Page 1820: ...ght notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL HAROLD L HUNT II BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER I...

Page 1821: ...ght 1993 by David Wexelblat dwex goblin org Permission to use copy modify distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the names of Thomas Roell and David Wexelblat not be us...

Page 1822: ...CHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL THOMAS ROELL OR SGCS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Copyright 1998 by Alan Hourihane Wigan England Copyright 2000...

Page 1823: ...se and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTA...

Page 1824: ...ION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Copyright 2004 Egbert Eich Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify m...

Page 1825: ...re for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty DAVID WEXELBLAT DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL DAVID WEXELBLAT BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CON...

Page 1826: ...bove copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name of Frederic Lepied not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission Frederic Lepied makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose I...

Page 1827: ...CTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Copyright 2003 2004 Anders Carlsson Permission to use copy modify distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting doc...

Page 1828: ...VENT SHALL ERIC ANHOLT BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Copyright c 1998 Todd C Miller Todd Miller courtesan com Permission to use copy modify and distribute ...

Page 1829: ... IN NO EVENT SHALL PHILIP BLUNDELL BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Copyright c 1994 2003 by The XFree86 Project Inc Copyright 1997 by Metro Link Inc Copyrigh...

Page 1830: ...n Germany Copyright 1993 by David Wexelblat dwex goblin org Copyright 1999 by David Holland davidh iquest net Copyright 2000 Compaq Computer Corporation Copyright 2002 Hewlett Packard Company Copyright 2004 2005 2008 Red Hat Inc Copyright 2004 Nicholas Miell Copyright 2005 Trolltech AS Copyright 2006 Intel Corporation Copyright 2004 2007 Keith Packard Copyright 2008 George Sapountzis gsap7 yahoo g...

Page 1831: ...n notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name of Keith Packard not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission Keith Packard makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES...

Page 1832: ...HE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Except as contained in this notice the name of a copyrigh...

Page 1833: ...Apple Inc Copyright c 2007 Jeremy Huddleston All Rights Reserved Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons...

Page 1834: ... and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIM...

Page 1835: ...ed in this notice the name of the author shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from the author Copyright 2002 David Dawes Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without res...

Page 1836: ...ame of the authors not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission The authors makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty THE AUTHORS DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCH...

Page 1837: ...opy modify distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the names of the above listed copyright holder s not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of...

Page 1838: ...E FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Copyright 1990 1991 by Thomas Roell Dinkelscherben Germany Copyright 1992 by David Dawes dawes XFree86 org Copyright 1992 by Jim Tsil...

Page 1839: ...SE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Copyright C 2000 Jakub Jelinek jakub redhat com Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and...

Page 1840: ...EQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Copyright 2007 OpenedHand Ltd Permission to use copy modify distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee provi...

Page 1841: ...e above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 4 Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS ...

Page 1842: ...ARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Hewlett Packard shall not be liable for errors contained herein or direct indirect special incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this material Copyright 1993 1994 NCR Corporation Dayton Ohio USA All Rights Reserved Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software and it...

Page 1843: ...icense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCH...

Page 1844: ... specific written prior permission Keith Packard makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty KEITH PACKARD DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL KEITH PACKARD BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIA...

Page 1845: ...without express or implied warranty THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER S DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER S BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER ...

Page 1846: ...ify distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFT...

Page 1847: ...CHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Copyright c 1996 by Silicon Graphics Computer Systems Inc Permission to use copy ...

Page 1848: ...ge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED ...

Page 1849: ...R IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Except as contained in this notice the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization of the copyright holder Copyright C 1999 2000 by...

Page 1850: ... 260 This file is distributed without any expressed or implied warranty ...

Page 1851: ...ising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission The copyright holders make no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS...

Page 1852: ...l Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation s software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it The GNU Lesser General Public License covers some other Free Software Foundation software instead You can apply it to your programs too When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that yo...

Page 1853: ...SE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0 This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License The Program below refers to any such program or work and a work based on the Program means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright la...

Page 1854: ...m under these conditions and telling the user how to view a copy of this License Exception if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program and can be reasonably c...

Page 1855: ...ion of the executable However as a special exception the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed in either source or binary form with the major components compiler kernel and so on of the operating system on which the executable runs unless that component itself accompanies the executable If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access...

Page 1856: ...on is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices Many...

Page 1857: ...G THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAI...

Page 1858: ...f not write to the Free Software Foundation Inc 51 Franklin Street Fifth Floor Boston MA 02110 1301 USA Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail If the program is interactive make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode Gnomovision version 69 Copyright C year name of author Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY for details typ...

Page 1859: ...corporating your program into proprietary programs If your program is a subroutine library you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library If this is what you want to do use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License ...

Page 1860: ... document but changing it is not allowed This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License version 2 hence the version number 2 1 Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and cha...

Page 1861: ...responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it For example if you distribute copies of the library whether gratis or for a fee you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code If you link other code with the library you must provide complete object files to the recipients so that t...

Page 1862: ... original library The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library We call this license the Lesser General Public License because it does Less to protect the user s freedom than the ordinary General Public License It also ...

Page 1863: ...ed with the library in order to run GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0 This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License also called this License Each...

Page 1864: ...batim copies of the Library s complete source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library You may charge a fee for the physica...

Page 1865: ...pply to the modified work as a whole If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves then this License and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library the distri...

Page 1866: ...ect code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine readable source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place then offering equivalent a...

Page 1867: ...Otherwise if the work is a derivative of the Library you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6 Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6 whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself 6 As an exception to the Sections above you may also combine or link a work that uses the Library with the Library to produce a work containing...

Page 1868: ...d version of the library if the user installs one as long as the modified version is interface compatible with the version that the work was made with c Accompany the work with a written offer valid for at least three years to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a above for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution d If distribution of the work is made by...

Page 1869: ...of the Sections above b Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work 8 You may not copy modify sublicense link with or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense link with or distribu...

Page 1870: ...gations then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all For example if a patent license would not permit royalty free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library If any portion of this section is held invalid...

Page 1871: ...ess new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and any later version you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Library does not specify a license version number you may choos...

Page 1872: ... OTHER SOFTWARE EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries If you develop a new library and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public we recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and change You can do so by permitting redistribution under ...

Page 1873: ... Boston MA 02110 1301 USA Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail You should also get your employer if you work as a programmer or your school if any to sign a copyright disclaimer for the library if necessary Here is a sample alter the names Yoyodyne Inc hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library Frob a library for tweaking knobs written by James Random...

Page 1874: ...lic License instead You can apply it to your programs too When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software or use pieces of it in n...

Page 1875: ... we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors reputations Finally any free program is threatened constantly by software patents We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses in effect making the program proprietary To prevent this...

Page 1876: ...ly if its contents constitute a work based on the Program independent of having been made by running the Program Whether that is true depends on what the Program does 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program s source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warra...

Page 1877: ...work as a whole If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves then this License and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program the distribution of the whole m...

Page 1878: ...e program in object code or executable form with such an offer in accord with Subsection b above The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For an executable work complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation o...

Page 1879: ...ceives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License 7 If as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other...

Page 1880: ... of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded In such case this License incorporates the limitation as if written ...

Page 1881: ...ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION 12 IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WI...

Page 1882: ...nse as published by the Free Software Foundation either version 2 of the License or at your option any later version This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE See the GNU General Public License for more details You should have received a copy of the GNU General Pub...

Page 1883: ...m is a subroutine library you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library If this is what you want to do use the GNU Library General Public License instead of this License Copyright c 1982 1986 1993 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted ...

Page 1884: ...TS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS ...

Page 1885: ...License instead You can apply it to your programs too When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new f...

Page 1886: ...st be licensed for everyone s free use or not licensed at all The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0 This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Genera...

Page 1887: ...uch modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above provided that you also meet all of these conditions a You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change b You must cause any work that you distribute or publish that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof to be licensed as a ...

Page 1888: ...ther work not based on the Program with the Program or with a work based on the Program on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License 3 You may copy and distribute the Program or a work based on it under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following...

Page 1889: ...ring equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code 4 You may not copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program is void and will...

Page 1890: ...se would not permit royalty free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance the balance of the section is intended to apply a...

Page 1891: ...e the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Program does not specify a version number of this License you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation 10 If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different w...

Page 1892: ...H DAMAGES END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS Appendix How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you develop a new program and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms To do so attach the following notices to the program It is safest to attach them to the start o...

Page 1893: ...ow w and show c should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License Of course the commands you use may be called something other than show w and show c they could even be mouse clicks or menu items whatever suits your program You should also get your employer if you work as a programmer or your school if any to sign a copyright disclaimer for the program if necessary Here is a sample a...

Page 1894: ...ser General Public License applies to some specially designated software packages typically libraries of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it You can use it too but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case based on the explanations below When we speak of...

Page 1895: ...ry is modified by someone else and passed on the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version so that the original author s reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others Finally software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free pr...

Page 1896: ...e allowed to use the library A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non free libraries In this case there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only so we use the Lesser General Public License In other cases permission to use a particular library in non free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free softw...

Page 1897: ...to say a work containing the Library or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated straightforwardly into another language Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term modification Source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For a library complete source code means all the source code for all modules ...

Page 1898: ...cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change c You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License d If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility other than as an argum...

Page 1899: ...he Library In addition mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library or with a work based on the Library on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License 3 You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library To do this you must alter...

Page 1900: ...he Library and therefore falls outside the scope of this License However linking a work that uses the Library with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library because it contains portions of the Library rather than a work that uses the library The executable is therefore covered by this License Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables When a work that u...

Page 1901: ...r the Library among them as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License Also you must do one of these things a Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above and if the work is an executable linked with the Library with the ...

Page 1902: ...exception the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed in either source or binary form with the major components compiler kernel and so on of the operating system on which the executable runs unless that component itself accompanies the executable It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that d...

Page 1903: ...ribute the Library or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or distributing the Library or any work based on the Library you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so and all its terms and conditions for copying distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it 10 Each time you redistribute the Library or ...

Page 1904: ...lic license practices Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed...

Page 1905: ...erally NO WARRANTY 15 BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR...

Page 1906: ...ice is found one line to give the library s name and a brief idea of what it does Copyright C year name of author This library is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation either version 2 1 of the License or at your option any later version This library is distributed in the hope tha...

Page 1907: ...ions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 Neither the name of the University nor the names of its c...

Page 1908: ... purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that this copyright and permission notice appear on all copies and supporting documentation the name of Livingston Enterprises Inc not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the program without specific prior permission and notice be given in supporting documentation that copying and distribution is by permission of Liv...

Page 1909: ...any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name of CMU not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission CMU DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO ...

Page 1910: ...mu edu Author Jens S V ckler voeckler rvs uni hannover de c 1997 Lehrgebiet Rechnernetze und Verteilte Systeme Universit t Hannover Germany Permission to use copy modify distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee provided that i the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related document...

Page 1911: ...lte Systeme and the University of Hannover may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific prior written permission of Lehrgebiet Rechnernetze und Verteilte Systeme and the University of Hannover THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS IMPLIED OR OTHERWISE INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR F...

Page 1912: ... written permission of Lehrgebiet Rechnernetze und Verteilte Systeme and the University of Hannover THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS IMPLIED OR OTHERWISE INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE IN NO EVENT SHALL THE LEHRGEBIET RECHNERNETZE UND VERTEILTE SYSTEME OR THE UNIVERSITY OF HANNOVER BE LIABLE FO...

Page 1913: ...ising or publicity relating to the software without the specific prior written permission of Lehrgebiet Rechnernetze und Verteilte Systeme and the University of Hannover THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS IMPLIED OR OTHERWISE INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE IN NO EVENT SHALL THE LEHRGEBIET RECHNER...

Page 1914: ...written permission of Lehrgebiet Rechnernetze und Verteilte Systeme and the University of Hannover THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS IMPLIED OR OTHERWISE INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE IN NO EVENT SHALL THE LEHRGEBIET RECHNERNETZE UND VERTEILTE SYSTEME OR THE UNIVERSITY OF HANNOVER BE LIABLE FOR...

Page 1915: ...VIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS IMPLIED OR OTHERWISE INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE IN NO EVENT SHALL THE LEHRGEBIET RECHNERNETZE UND VERTEILTE SYSTEME OR THE UNIVERSITY OF HANNOVER BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INCIDENTAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF...

Page 1916: ...LITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE IN NO EVENT SHALL THE LEHRGEBIET RECHNERNETZE UND VERTEILTE SYSTEME OR THE UNIVERSITY OF HANNOVER BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INCIDENTAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER OR NOT ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF DAMAGE AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNE...

Page 1917: ...DVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Copyright 2004 The Aerospace Corporation All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form ...

Page 1918: ...tioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes software developed by Bill Paul 4 Neither the name of the author nor the names of any co contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY Bill Paul AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR...

Page 1919: ...D WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE PROJECT OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN...

Page 1920: ...ITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Copyright c 1987 1993 1994 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with...

Page 1921: ...following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written perm...

Page 1922: ...EGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LO...

Page 1923: ...CT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Copyright 1988 1989 by Carnegie Mellon University All Rights Reserved Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software and its documentation for an...

Page 1924: ...ENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Copyright 1989 by Carnegie Mellon University All Rights Reserved Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and with...

Page 1925: ...tze und Verteilte Systeme and the University of Hannover THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS IMPLIED OR OTHERWISE INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE IN NO EVENT SHALL THE LEHRGEBIET RECHNERNETZE UND VERTEILTE SYSTEME OR THE UNIVERSITY OF HANNOVER BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INCIDENTAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQ...

Page 1926: ...1998 R M van Selm selm cistron nl with modifications Copyright C 2004 Henrik Nordstrom hno squid cache org Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that this copyright and permission notice appear on all copies and supporting documentation the name of Livingston Enterprises Inc not be used in advertising or publicity pert...

Page 1927: ...sity of Hannover THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS IMPLIED OR OTHERWISE INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE IN NO EVENT SHALL THE LEHRGEBIET RECHNERNETZE UND VERTEILTE SYSTEME OR THE UNIVERSITY OF HANNOVER BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INCIDENTAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR ANY DAMAG...

Page 1928: ...VENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT...

Page 1929: ... xc config util install sh with the following copyright and license Copyright C 1994 X Consortium Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of t...

Page 1930: ...is Software without prior written authorization from the X Consor tium FSF changes to this file are in the public domain Calling this script install sh is preferred over install sh to prevent make implicit rules from creating a file called install from it when there is no Makefile This script is compatible with the BSD install script but was written from scratch ...

Page 1931: ...s of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs and that you are informed that you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights These restr...

Page 1932: ... need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library so that it becomes a de facto standard To achieve this non free programs must be allowed to use the library A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non free libraries In this case there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only so we use the Lesser General Public License ...

Page 1933: ...nty and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it thus forming a work based on the Library and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 a...

Page 1934: ...brary or a portion or derivative of it under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine readable source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange If distribution of object code is made by offering acce...

Page 1935: ...r source code so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions b Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library A suitable m...

Page 1936: ...tributing the Library or any work based on the Library you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so and all its terms and conditions for copying distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it 10 Each time you redistribute the Library or any work based on the Library the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute link with or modify...

Page 1937: ...cense version number you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation 14 If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these write to the author to ask for permission For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make excepti...

Page 1938: ...ou can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation either version 2 1 of the License or at your option any later version This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE See the GNU...

Page 1939: ...A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLU...

Page 1940: ...edistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the d...

Page 1941: ... the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY ...

Page 1942: ...out specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQU...

Page 1943: ...ENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Note The implementations of Inter...

Page 1944: ... without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the di...

Page 1945: ...BUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL APPLE OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR P...

Page 1946: ...TRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Copyright C 1999 2000 Harri Porten porten kde org Copyright C 2003 2007 2008 2012 Apple Inc All Rights Reserved This library is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License a...

Page 1947: ...LL UNIVERSITY OF SZEGED OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OU...

Page 1948: ... source code And you must show them these terms so they know their rights We protect your rights with two steps 1 copyright the software and 2 offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the software Also for each author s protection and ours we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software If the softwa...

Page 1949: ...portion of it thus forming a work based on the Program and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above provided that you also meet all of these conditions a You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change b You must cause any work that you distribute or publish that in whole or in part ...

Page 1950: ...than your cost of physically performing source distribution a complete machine readable copy of the corresponding source code to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange or c Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial d...

Page 1951: ...n not limited to patent issues conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program a...

Page 1952: ...ncorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different write to the author to ask for permission For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make exceptions for this Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software ...

Page 1953: ... it does Copyright C year name of author This program is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation either version 2 of the License or at your option any later version This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of ...

Page 1954: ...ted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License version 2 hence the version number 2 1 Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Public Licens...

Page 1955: ...Most GNU software including some libraries is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License This license the GNU Lesser General Public License applies to certain designated libraries and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non free programs When a program is linked with a library ...

Page 1956: ...ons and or translated straightforwardly into another language Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term modification Source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For a library complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files plus the scripts used to contro...

Page 1957: ... extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it Thus it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library In addition mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with...

Page 1958: ...may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6 Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6 whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself 6 As an exception to the Sections above you may also combine or link a work that uses the Library with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library and distribute that work under t...

Page 1959: ...rary and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted and provided that you do these two things a Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library uncombined with any other library facilities This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above b Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Li...

Page 1960: ...hat is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License 12 If the distribution and or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries so that distribution is permitted only in or among...

Page 1961: ...vely under the terms of the ordinary General Public License To apply these terms attach the following notices to the library It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty and each file should have at least the copyright line and a pointer to where the full notice is found one line to give the library s name and an idea of what it ...

Page 1962: ... has attached the notice described in Exhibit B to the Covered Software or b that the Covered Software was made available under the terms of version 1 1 or earlier of the License but not also under the terms of a Secondary License 1 6 Executable Form means any form of the work other than Source Code Form 1 7 Larger Work means a work that combines Covered Software with other material in a separate ...

Page 1963: ...tent or trademark Licensable by such Contributor to use reproduce make available modify display perform distribute and otherwise exploit its Contributions either on an unmodified basis with Modifications or as part of a Larger Work and b under Patent Claims of such Contributor to make use sell offer for sale have made import and otherwise transfer either its Contributions or its Contributor Versio...

Page 1964: ... Form then a such Covered Software must also be made available in Source Code Form as described in Section 3 1 and You must inform recipients of the Executable Form how they can obtain a copy of such Source Code Form by reasonable means in a timely manner at a charge no more than the cost of distribution to the recipient and b You may distribute such Executable Form under the terms of this License...

Page 1965: ...ense from a particular Contributor are reinstated a provisionally unless and until such Contributor explicitly and finally terminates Your grants and b on an ongoing basis if such Contributor fails to notify You of the non compliance by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after You have come back into compliance Moreover Your grants from a particular Contributor are reinstated on an ongoing bas...

Page 1966: ...ing cross claims or counter claims 9 Miscellaneous This License represents the complete agreement concerning the subject matter hereof If any provision of this License is held to be unenforceable such provision shall be reformed only to the extent necessary to make it enforceable Any law or regulation which provides that the language of a contract shall be construed against the drafter shall not b...

Page 1967: ...must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY APPLE AND ITS CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLU...

Page 1968: ...TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Copyright C 2003 2006 2007 2008 2010 Apple Inc All rights reserved Copyrig...

Page 1969: ...edistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY APPLE INC AND ITS CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY E...

Page 1970: ... COMPUTER INC OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE U...

Page 1971: ... that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither the name of Google Inc nor th...

Page 1972: ...als provided with the distribution 3 Neither the name of Apple Computer Inc Apple nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY APPLE AND ITS CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY A...

Page 1973: ...VICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Copyright c 2012 Motorola Mobility Inc All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with o...

Page 1974: ... and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY APPLE INC AND ITS CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANT...

Page 1975: ...ES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Copyright C 2010 Alex Milowski alex milowski ...

Page 1976: ...istributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 Neither the name of Apple Computer Inc Apple nor the names of its contribut...

Page 1977: ...erived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY APPLE AND ITS CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL APPLE OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR...

Page 1978: ...PTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE CSS Media Query Copyright C 2006 Kimmo Kinnunen kimmo t kinnunen nokia com Copyright C 2010 Nokia Corporation and or its subsidiary ies Redistribution and use in source...

Page 1979: ...n the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIM...

Page 1980: ...ED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY W...

Page 1981: ...OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Copyright C 2006 2008 2010 Apple Inc All rights reserved Copyright C 2008 2009 Torch Mobile Inc All rights reserved http www torchmobile com Copyright C 2009 2010 Google Inc All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted...

Page 1982: ...ts contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER...

Page 1983: ...MPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Copyright C 2011...

Page 1984: ...ts reserved Copyright C 2007 Justin Haygood jhaygood reaktix com Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright no...

Page 1985: ...LUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUS...

Page 1986: ... Copyright C 2012 Igalia S L Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the...

Page 1987: ...S OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL APPLE OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUP...

Page 1988: ... USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Copyright C 2006 Samuel Weinig sam weinig gmail com Copyright C 2004 2005 2006 Apple Computer Inc All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notic...

Page 1989: ... provided with the distribution THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY UNIVERSITY OF SZEGED AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL UNIVERSITY OF SZEGED OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDIN...

Page 1990: ...INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Copyright C 2012 Patrick Gansterer paroga paroga com Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice ...

Page 1991: ...r materials provided with the distribution THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CO...

Page 1992: ...E FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF...

Page 1993: ... 2005 Eric Seidel eric webkit org Copyright C 2010 Zoltan Herczeg zherczeg webkit org Copyright C 2011 University of Szeged Copyright C 2011 Renata Hodovan reni webkit org Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of con...

Page 1994: ...eproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY APPLE COMPUTER INC AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL APP...

Page 1995: ...FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY O...

Page 1996: ...2013 Intel Corporation All rights reserved Copyright C 2007 2008 2012 Apple Inc All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form mu...

Page 1997: ...r in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT ...

Page 1998: ...HER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Copyright 2008 The Android Open Source Project Copyright C 2012 Research In Motion Limited All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the fo...

Page 1999: ...binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY APPLE INC AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT ...

Page 2000: ...OT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Copyright C 2010 University of Szeged Copyright C 2010 Renata H...

Page 2001: ...er Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither the name of Google Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PR...

Page 2002: ...R ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE...

Page 2003: ...ght C 2008 Apple Inc All rights reserved Copyright C 2008 Cameron Zwarich cwzwarich uwaterloo ca Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must ...

Page 2004: ... must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 Neither the name of Apple Computer Inc Apple nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY APPLE A...

Page 2005: ...ple Computer Inc Apple nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY APPLE AND ITS CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EV...

Page 2006: ...ibrary General Public License for more details You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public License along with this library see the file COPYING LIB If not write to the Free Software Foundation Inc 51 Franklin Street Fifth Floor Boston MA 02110 1301 USA Copyright C 2012 Motorola Mobility Inc All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without ...

Page 2007: ...ion are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution THIS SO...

Page 2008: ... binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 Neither the name of the copyright holders nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED B...

Page 2009: ...SE Copyright 2003 2005 Colin Percival All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted providing that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice t...

Page 2010: ...iewer 1 0 which may be included with JDK 8 begin of LICENSE Copyright 1999 by CoolServlets com Any errors or suggested improvements to this class can be reported as instructed on CoolServlets com We hope you enjoy this program your comments will encourage further development This software is distributed under the terms of the BSD License Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or wi...

Page 2011: ...OSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWI...

Page 2012: ...ution THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE CRYPTIX FOUNDATION LIMITED AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE CRYPTIX FOUNDATION LIMITED OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAG...

Page 2013: ... or their employers not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission The authors and their employers disclaim all warranties with regard to this software including all implied warranties of merchantability and fitness In no event shall the authors or their employers be liable for any special indirect or consequential damag...

Page 2014: ...ion or portions thereof including modifications 1 The full text of this NOTICE in a location viewable to users of the redistributed or derivative work 2 Any pre existing intellectual property disclaimers notices or terms and conditions If none exist the W3C Software Short Notice should be included hypertext is preferred text is permitted within the body of any redistributed or derivative code 3 No...

Page 2015: ... that this license can be used with materials other than those owned by the W3C reflects that ERCIM is now a host of the W3C includes references to this specific dated version of the license and removes the ambiguous grant of use Otherwise this version is the same as the previous version and is written so as to preserve the Free Software Foundation s assessment of GPL compatibility and OSI s certi...

Page 2016: ...prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAG...

Page 2017: ...ectory reserved for native libraries begin of LICENSE GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2 1 February 1999 Copyright C 1991 1999 Free Software Foundation Inc 51 Franklin Street Fifth Floor Boston MA 02110 1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL It also c...

Page 2018: ... These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it For example if you distribute copies of the library whether gratis or for a fee you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code If you link other code with the library you must provide complete...

Page 2019: ...introduced by others ...

Page 2020: ...ed work a derivative of the original library The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library We call this license the Lesser General Public License because it does Less to protect the user s freedom than the ordinary Gene...

Page 2021: ...perating system Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users freedom it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow Pay close attention to the difference between a w...

Page 2022: ...hat is to say a work containing the Library or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated straightforwardly into another language Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term modification Source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For a library complete source code means all the source code for all m...

Page 2023: ...ublish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee ...

Page 2024: ...t an application does not supply such function or table the facility still operates and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful For example a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well defined independent of the application Therefore Subsection 2d requires that any application supplied function or table used by this function must be optional ...

Page 2025: ...sed on the Library on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License 3 You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library To do this you must alter all the notices that refer to this License so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License version 2...

Page 2026: ...ame place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code 5 A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it is called a work that uses the Library Such a work in isolation is not a derivative work of the L...

Page 2027: ...r less in length then the use of the object file is unrestricted regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6 Otherwise if the work is a derivative of the Library you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6 Any executables containing that work also fall und...

Page 2028: ...e Library including whatever changes were used in the work which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above and if the work is an executable linked with the Library with the complete machine readable work that uses the Library as object code and or source code so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library It is unders...

Page 2029: ...that uses the Library must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it However as a special exception the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed in either source or binary form with the major components compiler kernel and so on of the operating system on which the executable runs unless that component itself accom...

Page 2030: ...pressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense link with or distribute the Library is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance 9 You are not required to accept this L...

Page 2031: ... these terms and conditions You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License ...

Page 2032: ...section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices Many people have made generous contr...

Page 2033: ...ion but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and any later version you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Library does not specify a ...

Page 2034: ... PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE LIBRARY P...

Page 2035: ... DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS ...

Page 2036: ...hor This library is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation either version 2 1 of the License or at your option any later version This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS F...

Page 2037: ... Geneva Tel 41 22 849 6000 Fax 41 22 849 6001 Web http www ecma international org This document and possible translations of it may be copied and furnished to others and derivative works that comment on or otherwise explain it or assist in its implementation may be prepared copied published and distributed in whole or in part without restriction of any kind provided that the above copyright notice...

Page 2038: ...rd party rights rights from parties other than Ecma International including patent rights and no licenses under such third party rights are granted under this license even if the third party concerned is a member of Ecma International SEE THE ECMA CODE OF CONDUCT IN PATENT MATTERS AVAILABLE AT http www ecma international org memento codeofconduct htm FOR INFORMATION REGARDING THE LICENSING OF PATE...

Page 2039: ...ESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE end of LICENSE This notice is provided with respect to Dynalink library which is included with the Nashorn technology begin of LICENSE Copyright c 2009 2013 ...

Page 2040: ...L DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE end of LICENSE This notice is provided...

Page 2041: ...OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE end of LICENSE This notice is provided with respect to FontConfig 2 5 which may be included with JRE 8 JDK 8 and OpenJDK 8 source distributions on Linux and Solaris begin of LICENSE Copyright c 2001 2003 Keith Packard Permission to use copy modify distribute and sell this software and its ...

Page 2042: ... FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE end of LICENSE This notice is provided with respect to IAIK PKCS 11 Wrapper which may be included with JRE 8 JDK 8 and OpenJDK 8 begin of LICENSE IAIK PKCS 11 Wrapper License Copyright c 2002 Graz University of Technolog...

Page 2043: ...used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission 5 Products derived from this software may not be called IAIK PKCS Wrapper nor may IAIK appear in their name without prior written permission of Graz University of Technology THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER...

Page 2044: ...luding without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so provided that the above copyright notice s and this permission notice appear in all copies of the Software and that both the above copyright notice s and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation THE SOF...

Page 2045: ...may be included with JRE 8 JDK 8 and OpenJDK 8 begin of LICENSE This software is copyright C 1991 1998 Thomas G Lane All Rights Reserved except as specified below Permission is hereby granted to use copy modify and distribute this software or portions thereof for any purpose without fee subject to these conditions 1 If any part of the source code for this software is distributed then this README f...

Page 2046: ...ded that all warranty or liability claims are assumed by the product vendor end of LICENSE This notice is provided with respect to Joni v1 1 9 which may be included with JRE 8 JDK 8 and OpenJDK 8 begin of LICENSE Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction inc...

Page 2047: ...th JRE 8 JDK 8 and OpenJDK 8 begin of LICENSE Copyright c 2004 2009 Paul R Holser Jr Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software a...

Page 2048: ... of LICENSE Copyright c 2002 JSON org Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is fu...

Page 2049: ...HE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE end of LICENSE This notice is provided with respect to Kerberos functionality which which may be included with JRE 8 JDK 8 and OpenJDK 8 begin of LICENSE C Copyright IBM Corp 1999 All Rights Reserved Copyright 1997 The Open Group Research Institute All rights reserved end of LICENSE This notice is provided with respect to Kerberos functionality from FundsXp...

Page 2050: ...ed in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission FundsXpress makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF ME...

Page 2051: ...ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE MATERIALS OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE MATERIALS e...

Page 2052: ...osmin Truta libpng versions 1 0 7 July 1 2000 through 1 2 5 October 3 2002 are Copyright c 2000 2002 Glenn Randers Pehrson and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng 1 0 6 with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors Simon Pierre Cadieux Eric S Raymond Gilles Vollant and with the following additions to the disclaimer There is no warranty ...

Page 2053: ... Contributing Authors John Bowler Kevin Bracey Sam Bushell Magnus Holmgren Greg Roelofs Tom Tanner libpng versions 0 5 May 1995 through 0 88 January 1996 are Copyright c 1995 1996 Guy Eric Schalnat Group 42 Inc For the purposes of this copyright and license Contributing Authors is defined as the following set of individuals Andreas Dilger Dave Martindale Guy Eric Schalnat Paul Schmidt Tim Wegner T...

Page 2054: ...e removed or altered from any source or altered source distribution The Contributing Authors and Group 42 Inc specifically permit without fee and encourage the use of this source code as a component to supporting the PNG file format in commercial products If you use this source code in a product acknowledgment is not required but would be appreciated A png_get_copyright function is available for c...

Page 2055: ...ll copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNE...

Page 2056: ... of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A ...

Page 2057: ...d associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all ...

Page 2058: ...icensed under Mozilla Public License MPL version 2 0 The NSS libraries are supplied in executable form built from unmodified NSS source code labeled with the NSS_3 13 1_RTM release tag The NSS source code is available in the OpenJDK source code repository at jdk test sun security pkcs11 nss src The NSS libraries are available in the OpenJDK source code repository at jdk test sun security pkcs11 ns...

Page 2059: ... portions thereof 1 5 Incompatible With Secondary Licenses means a that the initial Contributor has attached the notice described in Exhibit B to the Covered Software or b that the Covered Software was made available under the terms of version 1 1 or earlier of the License but not also under the terms of a Secondary License 1 6 Executable Form means any form of the work other than Source Code Form...

Page 2060: ...he License by the making using selling offering for sale having made import or transfer of either its Contributions or its Contributor Version 1 12 Secondary License means either the GNU General Public License Version 2 0 the GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2 1 the GNU Affero General Public License Version 3 0 or any later versions of those licenses 1 13 Source Code Form means the form o...

Page 2061: ...ations or as part of a Larger Work and b under Patent Claims of such Contributor to make use sell offer for sale have made import and otherwise transfer either its Contributions or its Contributor Version 2 2 Effective Date The licenses granted in Section 2 1 with respect to any Contribution become effective for each Contribution on the date the Contributor first distributes such Contribution 2 3 ...

Page 2062: ...y with the notice requirements in Section 3 4 2 4 Subsequent Licenses No Contributor makes additional grants as a result of Your choice to distribute the Covered Software under a subsequent version of this License see Section 10 2 or under the terms of a Secondary License if permitted under the terms of Section 3 3 2 5 Representation Each Contributor represents that the Contributor believes its Co...

Page 2063: ...ble Form then a such Covered Software must also be made available in Source Code Form as described in Section 3 1 and You must inform recipients of the Executable Form how they can obtain a copy of such Source Code Form by reasonable means in a timely manner at a charge no more than the cost of distribution to the recipient and b You may distribute such Executable Form under the terms of this Lice...

Page 2064: ...ation of Additional Terms You may choose to offer and to charge a fee for warranty support indemnity or liability obligations to one or more recipients of Covered Software However You may do so only on Your own behalf and not on behalf of any Contributor You must make it absolutely clear that any such warranty support indemnity or liability obligation is offered by You alone and You hereby agree t...

Page 2065: ...r You have come back into compliance Moreover Your grants from a particular Contributor are reinstated on an ongoing basis if such Contributor notifies You of the non compliance by some reasonable means this is the first time You have received notice of non compliance with this License from such Contributor and You become compliant prior to 30 days after Your receipt of the notice 5 2 If You initi...

Page 2066: ...d under this License except under this disclaimer 7 Limitation of Liability Under no circumstances and under no legal theory whether tort including negligence contract or otherwise shall any Contributor or anyone who distributes Covered Software as permitted above be liable to You for any direct indirect special incidental or consequential damages of any character including without limitation dama...

Page 2067: ...e represents the complete agreement concerning the subject matter hereof If any provision of this License is held to be unenforceable such provision shall be reformed only to the extent necessary to make it enforceable Any law or regulation which provides that the language of a contract shall be construed against the drafter shall not be used to construe this License against a Contributor 10 Versi...

Page 2068: ...ncompatible With Secondary Licenses If You choose to distribute Source Code Form that is Incompatible With Secondary Licenses under the terms of this version of the License the notice described in Exhibit B of this License must be attached Exhibit A Source Code Form License Notice This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public License v 2 0 If a copy of the MPL was not distrib...

Page 2069: ...re met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this so...

Page 2070: ...Y WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE end of LICENSE This notice is provided with respect to PorterStemmer v4 which may be included with JRE 8 JDK 8 and OpenJDK 8 begin of LICENSE See http tartarus org martin PorterStemmer The software is completely free f...

Page 2071: ...ion including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT ...

Page 2072: ...claimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 The end user documentation included with the redistribution if any must include the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by Daisuke Okajima and Kohsuke Kawagu...

Page 2073: ...E APACHE SOFTWARE FOUNDATION OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN A...

Page 2074: ...any other party who may modify and or redistribute SAX be liable to you for damages including any general special incidental or consequential damages arising out of the use or inability to use SAX including but not limited to loss of data or data being rendered inaccurate or losses sustained by you or third parties or a failure of the SAX to operate with any other programs even if such holder or o...

Page 2075: ... Linux ARM begin of LICENSE Use of any of this software is governed by the terms of the license below SoftFloat was written by me John R Hauser This work was made possible in part by the International Computer Science Institute located at Suite 600 1947 Center Street Berkeley California 94704 Funding was partially provided by the National Science Foundation under grant MIP 9311980 The original ver...

Page 2076: ...l documentation requirements stated in the source code are satisfied end of LICENSE This notice is provided with respect to Sparkle 1 5 which may be included with JRE 8 on Mac OS X begin of LICENSE Copyright c 2012 Sparkle org and Andy Matuschak Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the...

Page 2077: ...CTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE end of LICENSE Portions licensed from Taligent Inc This notice is provided with respect to Thai Dictionary which may be included with JRE 8 JDK 8 and OpenJDK 8 begin of LICENSE Copyright C 1982 The Royal Institute Thai Royal Government Copyright C 1998 National El...

Page 2078: ...rtions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CON...

Page 2079: ...specifications of rights and restrictions pertaining to the use of the particular set of data files known as the Unicode Character Database can be found in Exhibit 1 5 Each version of the Unicode Standard has further specifications of rights and restrictions of use For the book editions Unicode 5 0 and earlier these are found on the back of the title page The online code charts carry specific rest...

Page 2080: ...d to the information herein these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication and or website Unicode may make improvements and or changes in the product s and or program s described in this publication and or website at any time 2 If this file has been purchased on magnetic or optical media from Unicode Inc the sole and exclusive remedy for any claim will be exchange of the def...

Page 2081: ...mark Policy are incorporated herein by reference and you agree to abide by the provisions of the Trademark Policy which may be changed from time to time in the sole discretion of Unicode Inc 3 All third party trademarks referenced herein are the property of their respective owners Miscellaneous 1 Jurisdiction and Venue This server is operated from a location in the State of California United State...

Page 2082: ...agreement between the parties EXHIBIT 1 UNICODE INC LICENSE AGREEMENT DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE Unicode Data Files include all data files under the directories http www unicode org Public http www unicode org reports and http www unicode org cldr data Unicode Data Files do not include PDF online code charts under the directory http www unicode org Public Software includes any source code published i...

Page 2083: ...o so provided that a the above copyright notice s and this permission notice appear with all copies of the Data Files or Software b both the above copyright notice s and this permission notice appear in associated documentation and c there is clear notice in each modified Data File or in the Software as well as in the documentation associated with the Data File s or Software that the data or softw...

Page 2084: ... Unicode logo are trademarks of Unicode Inc in the United States and other countries All third party trademarks referenced herein are the property of their respective owners end of LICENSE This notice is provided with respect to UPX v3 01 which may be included with JRE 8 on Windows begin of LICENSE Use of any of this software is governed by the terms of the license below ooooo ooo ooooooooo oooooo...

Page 2085: ... each UPX compressed program is part of UPX and UCL and contains code that is under our copyright The terms of the GNU General Public License still apply as compressing a program is a special form of linking with our stub As a special exception we grant the free usage of UPX for all executables including commercial programs See below for details and restrictions COPYRIGHT UPX and UCL are copyright...

Page 2086: ...am see the file COPYING SPECIAL EXCEPTION FOR COMPRESSED EXECUTABLES The stub which is imbedded in each UPX compressed program is part of UPX and UCL and contains code that is under our copyright The terms of the GNU General Public License still apply as compressing a program is a special form of linking with our stub Hereby Markus F X J Oberhumer and Laszlo Molnar grant you special permission to ...

Page 2087: ...ut not limited to removing our copyright string or making your program non decompressible will immediately revoke your right to use and distribute a UPX compressed program UPX is not a software protection tool by requiring that you use the unmodified UPX version for your proprietary programs we make sure that any user can decompress your program This protects both you and your users as nobody can ...

Page 2088: ...charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicence and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions 1 Redistributions of s...

Page 2089: ...ote the sale use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from The XFree86 Project Inc THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE XFREE86 PROJECT INC OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT I...

Page 2090: ...seful to many users No software incorporating the XFree86 1 1 license has been incorporated This document is based on the compilation from XFree86 2 XFree86 License XFree86 code without an explicit copyright is covered by the following copyright license Copyright C 1994 2003 The XFree86 Project Inc All Rights Reserved Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of th...

Page 2091: ...INGS IN THE SOFTWARE Except as contained in this notice the name of the XFree86 Project shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from the XFree86 Project 3 Other Licenses Portions of code are covered by the following licenses copyrights See individual files for the copyright dates 3 1 X MIT Copyrigh...

Page 2092: ...CTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Except as contained in this notice the name of the X Consortium shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from the X Consortium X Window System is a trademark of X Consortium Inc 3 1 2 The Open Group Copyright date The Open Group Pe...

Page 2093: ...thorization from The Open Group 3 2 Berkeley based copyrights o 3 2 1 General Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above...

Page 2094: ...California All rights reserved This software was developed by the Computer Systems Engineering group at Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory under DARPA contract BG 91 66 and contributed to Berkeley All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes software developed by the University of California Lawrence Berkeley Labor...

Page 2095: ...LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF...

Page 2096: ...s contributors 4 Neither the name of The NetBSD Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION INC AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITN...

Page 2097: ...tions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 he name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNE...

Page 2098: ...y form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHAL...

Page 2099: ...ENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE 3 2 7 Thomas Winischhofer Copyright C 2001 2004 Thomas Winischhofer Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided ...

Page 2100: ...WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE 3 3 NVIDIA Corp Copyright c 1996 NVIDIA Corp All rights reserved NOTICE TO USER The source code is copyrighted under U S and international laws NVIDIA Corp of Sunnyvale California owns the copyright and as design patents...

Page 2101: ...HER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOURCE CODE 3 4 GLX Public License GLX PUBLIC LICENSE Version 1 0 2 11 99 License Subject to any third party claims Silicon Graphics Inc SGI hereby grants permission to Recipient defined below under Recipient s copyrights in the Original Software defined below to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublice...

Page 2102: ...ntrol with Recipient For purposes of this definition control of an entity means a the power direct or indirect to direct or manage such entity or b ownership of fifty percent 50 or more of the outstanding shares or beneficial ownership of such entity 2 Redistribution of Source Code Subject to These Terms Redistributions of Subject Software in source code form must retain the notice set forth in Ex...

Page 2103: ...this License are offered by Recipient alone not by SGI Recipient hereby agrees to indemnify SGI for any liability incurred by SGI as a result of any such terms Recipient offers 4 Termination This License and the rights granted hereunder will terminate automatically if Recipient fails to comply with terms herein and fails to cure such breach within 30 days of the breach Any sublicense to the Subjec...

Page 2104: ...se distribution import or sale of Subject Software including particular functionality or code incorporated in Subject Software infringes the third party s intellectual property rights Recipient must place in a well identified web page bearing the title LEGAL a description of each such claim and a description of the party making each such claim in sufficient detail that a user of the Subject Softwa...

Page 2105: ...ES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY WHETHER TORT INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY CONTRACT OR OTHERWISE SHALL SGI OR ANY SGI LICENSOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL WORK STOPPAGE LOSS OF DATA COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION OR ANY AND ALL OTHER COMMERCIAL DA...

Page 2106: ...f If any provision of this License is held to be unenforceable such provision shall be reformed so as to achieve as nearly as possible the same economic effect as the original provision and the remainder of this License will remain in effect This License shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the United States and the State of California as applied to agreements entered ...

Page 2107: ...source code released February 1999 The developer of the Original Software is Silicon Graphics Inc Those portions of the Subject Software created by Silicon Graphics Inc are Copyright c 1991 9 Silicon Graphics Inc All Rights Reserved 3 5 CID Font Code Public License CID FONT CODE PUBLIC LICENSE Version 1 0 3 31 99 License Subject to any applicable third party claims Silicon Graphics Inc SGI hereby ...

Page 2108: ...t includes any entity that controls is controlled by or is under common control with Recipient For purposes of this definition control of an entity means i the power direct or indirect to direct or manage such entity or ii ownership of fifty percent 50 or more of the outstanding shares or beneficial ownership of such entity e Required Notice means the notice set forth in Exhibit A to this License ...

Page 2109: ...panying Technology or the use of other license terms 3 Termination This License and the rights granted hereunder will terminate automatically if Recipient fails to comply with terms herein and fails to cure such breach within 30 days of the breach Any sublicense to the Subject Software that is properly granted shall survive any termination of this License absent termination by the terms of such su...

Page 2110: ...ription of each such claim and a description of the party making each such claim in sufficient detail that a user of the Subject Software will know whom to contact regarding the claim Also upon gaining such knowledge of any such claim Recipient must conspicuously include the URL for such web page in the Required Notice and in the text of any related documentation license agreement or collateral in...

Page 2111: ...ION OR LIMITATION OF CERTAIN DAMAGES SO THIS EXCLUSION AND LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO RECIPIENT TO THE EXTENT SO DISALLOWED 10 Indemnity Recipient shall be solely responsible for damages arising directly or indirectly out of its utilization of rights under this License Recipient will defend indemnify and hold SGI and its successors and assigns harmless from and against any loss liability damages ...

Page 2112: ...he courts of the State of California with venue lying exclusively in Santa Clara County California with the losing party responsible for costs including without limitation court costs and reasonable attorneys fees and expenses The application of the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods is expressly excluded Any law or regulation that provides that the language...

Page 2113: ... and full redistribution so long as they are not sold by themselves They can be be bundled redistributed and sold with any software The fonts are distributed under the following copyright Copyright c 2003 by Bitstream Inc All Rights Reserved Bitstream Vera is a trademark of Bitstream Inc Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of the fonts accompanying this licen...

Page 2114: ...ICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF COPYRIGHT PATENT TRADEMARK OR OTHER RIGHT IN NO EVENT SHALL BITSTREAM OR THE GNOME FOUNDATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE FONT SOFTWARE OR FROM OTHER DEALINGS IN...

Page 2115: ...ftware may not be modified altered or added to and in particular the designs of glyphs or characters in the Fonts may not be modified nor may additional glyphs or characters be added to the Fonts This License becomes null and void when the Fonts or Font Software have been modified THE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY W...

Page 2116: ...ght C 1995 2005 Jean loup Gailly and Mark Adler This software is provided as is without any express or implied warranty In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose including commercial applications and to alter it and redistribute it freely subject to the following restriction...

Page 2117: ...e Commons Math 2 2 Apache Derby 10 10 1 2 included with JDK 8 Apache Jakarta BCEL 5 2 Apache Jakarta Regexp 1 4 Apache Santuario XML Security for Java 1 5 4 Apache Xalan Java 2 7 1 Apache Xerces Java 2 10 0 Apache XML Resolver 1 1 Dynalink 0 5 begin of LICENSE Apache License Version 2 0 January 2004 http www apache org licenses TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE REPRODUCTION AND DISTRIBUTION 1 Definitio...

Page 2118: ...tware source code documentation source and configuration files Object form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form including but not limited to compiled object code generated documentation and conversions to other media types Work shall mean the work of authorship whether in Source or Object form made available under the License as indicated by ...

Page 2119: ...r Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work 2 Grant of Copyright License Subject to the terms and conditions of this License each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual worldwide non exclusive no charge royalty free irrevocable copyright license to reproduce prepare Derivative Works of publicly display publicly p...

Page 2120: ...hat You distribute all copyright patent trademark and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works and d If the Work includes a NOTICE text file as part of its distribution then any Derivative Works that You distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file exc...

Page 2121: ...parate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such Contributions 6 Trademarks This License does not grant permission to use the trade names trademarks service marks or product names of the Licensor except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file 7 Disclaimer of Warranty Unless required ...

Page 2122: ...or rights consistent with this License However in accepting such obligations You may act only on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility not on behalf of any other Contributor and only if You agree to indemnify defend and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by or claims asserted against such Contributor by reason of your accepting any such warranty or additional liabi...

Page 2123: ...e at http www apache org licenses LICENSE 2 0 Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing software distributed under the License is distributed on an AS IS BASIS WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND either express or implied See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License end of LICENSE ...

Page 2124: ... to remain under this license does not apply to any document created using the fonts or their derivatives DEFINITIONS Font Software refers to the set of files released by the Copyright Holder s under this license and clearly marked as such This may include source files build scripts and documentation Reserved Font Name refers to any names specified as such after the copyright statement s Original ...

Page 2125: ...rsion except to acknowledge the contribution s of the Copyright Holder s and the Author s or with their explicit written permission 5 The Font Software modified or unmodified in part or in whole must be distributed entirely under this license and must not be distributed under any other license The requirement for fonts to remain under this license does not apply to any document created using the F...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5535i III

DataCard CP60 Quick Install Manual preview
CP60
Brand: DataCard Pages: 8
Samsung SCX-3405FW Manual Del Usuario preview
SCX-3405FW
Brand: Samsung Pages: 347
Samsung SCX 6555N - MultiXpress Mono Multifunction Manual Del Usuario preview
SCX 6555N - MultiXpress Mono Multifunction
Brand: Samsung Pages: 180
Samsung SCX-4300 - SCX 4300 B/W Laser License Agreement preview
SCX-4300 - SCX 4300 B/W Laser
Brand: Samsung Pages: 18
Samsung SCX-4521FG - B/W Laser - All-in-One User Manual preview
SCX-4521FG - B/W Laser - All-in-One
Brand: Samsung Pages: 215
Samsung SCX 6320F - B/W Laser - All-in-One User Manual preview
SCX 6320F - B/W Laser - All-in-One
Brand: Samsung Pages: 332
Samsung SCX 4828FN - Laser Multi-Function Printer User Manual preview
SCX 4828FN - Laser Multi-Function Printer
Brand: Samsung Pages: 248
Samsung SCX 4725FN - B/W Laser - All-in-One User Manual preview
SCX 4725FN - B/W Laser - All-in-One
Brand: Samsung Pages: 253
Samsung ML 2851ND - B/W Laser Printer User Manual preview
ML 2851ND - B/W Laser Printer
Brand: Samsung Pages: 179
Samsung ML 2510 - B/W Laser Printer Manual Del Usuario preview
ML 2510 - B/W Laser Printer
Brand: Samsung Pages: 84
Samsung ML 1740 - B/W Laser Printer Manual Del Usuario preview
ML 1740 - B/W Laser Printer
Brand: Samsung Pages: 152
Samsung ML 1630 - B/W Laser Printer User Manual preview
ML 1630 - B/W Laser Printer
Brand: Samsung Pages: 142
Samsung ML 1630 - B/W Laser Printer Manual Del Usuario preview
ML 1630 - B/W Laser Printer
Brand: Samsung Pages: 82
Samsung SL-M2875FD Installation Manual preview
SL-M2875FD
Brand: Samsung Pages: 2
Samsung M337 User Manual preview
M337
Brand: Samsung Pages: 384
Samsung Lazett Combo SCX-4216F Service Manual preview
Lazett Combo SCX-4216F
Brand: Samsung Pages: 135
Samsung CLX-6260FD Manual Del Usuario preview
CLX-6260FD
Brand: Samsung Pages: 414
Samsung SCX 6555N - MultiXpress Mono Multifunction Administrator'S Manual preview
SCX 6555N - MultiXpress Mono Multifunction
Brand: Samsung Pages: 112

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands